PREFACE

1. It is with great pleasure that a new Indian Railway Telecommunication Manual is

being presented for the guidance of Signal and Telecom Department in particular and all
railwaymen in general. The last edition of Telecommunication Manual was brought out
in December 1971. Since then, Telecom Department has seen sea changes due to
revolutionary evolutions in telecommunication technologies leading to obsolence of
earlier systems. This has modernized both types of systems viz., connected with train
operations as well as Passenger Amenities and Information system.

2. Therefore, it becomes imperative to bring out a new Telecommunication Manual
encompassing all the technological changes relevant to the working of
Telecommunication Department of Indian Railways. Over a period of time, Optical Fibre
Communication has completely replaced the conventional landline communication
systems for long haul. Moreover, with the evolution of IP based data network, a
paradigm shift in the concept of telecom networks has taken place which caters to both
Voice as well as Data transmission. Wireless communication has seen complete
transformation from Microwave based systems to GSM-R/TETRA based systems.
Satellite Communication has completely broken the physical boundaries and has made it
possible to connect the remotest of places to the main network.

3. This manual provides detailed guidelines for setting up and maintaining the
telecommunication systems covering various applications and fields. With the
proliferation of telecommunication technology across the country by various
organizations, the role of regulatory bodies such as WPC and PTCC have increased
manifold and hence, chapters on procedures for dealing with these organizations have
also been incorporated. However, it has not been the intention nor it is possible to
provide for every technical aspect required for planning, installation and maintenance of
various telecom equipments. The Chief Signal & Telecom Engineers of the Railways
and RDSO are authorized to supplement additional guidelines required for day-to-day
working.

4. The preparation of Telecommunication Manual has been a great effort with the
contribution of officers from Zonal Railways & IRISET. The entire script has been
checked and updated by RDSO and approved by Railway Board. Without the collective
effort of various organizations of Indian Railways, this enormous task would not have
been completed and hence their contribution is acknowledged with gratitude.

5. In keeping with the demand of e-working, this Manual is being brought out in
electronic as well as printed form. It is sincerely hoped that the Manual would serve the
purpose for which it has been created.

(A.K. Kapoor)
New Delhi. Additional Member/Telecom
October, 2007 Railway Board
PDF processed with CutePDF evaluation edition www.CutePDF.com

CHAPTER I

ORGANISATION OF THE SIGNAL AND TELECOMMUNICATION
DEPARTMENT

SECTION A- GENERAL

1.1 ORGANISATION IN THE HEADQUARTER OFFICE

(a) The Chief Signal & Telecommunication Engineer- The Chief Signal &
Telecommunication Engineer is the administrative and professional head of the Signal &
Telecommunication Department and is directly responsible to the General Manager for its
efficient and economical working.


b) The Chief Communication Engineer - The Chief Communication Engineer assists the
Chief Signal & Telecommunication Engineer in the administrative and professional work for
all communication matters.

c) The Chief Signal Engineer- The Chief Signal Engineer assists the Chief Signal &
Telecommunication Engineer in the administrative and professional work for all signalling
matters.

d) The Chief Planning Engineer (Signal & Telecommunication)- The Chief Planning Engineer
(S&T) assists the Chief Signal & Telecommunication Engineer in planning and execution of
works.

e) The Deputy Chief Signal & Telecommunication Engineer- The Deputy Chief Signal &
Telecommunication Engineer assists the Chief Signal & Telecommunication Engineer, Chief
Signal Engineer and Chief Communication Engineer in the administrative and professional
work.

f) Senior Scale Officers- Senior Scale Officers designated as Senior Signal &
Telecommunication Engineers are employed in the Headquarters Office of each Railway and
work directly under the administrative control of the Chief Signal & Telecommunication
Engineer or the Engineer-in-Chief (S&T) or the Deputy Chief Signal & Telecommunication
Engineer.

g) Assistant Signal & Telecommunication Engineers- They shall be responsible to the Senior
Scale Officer/Officers or to the Deputy Chief Signals & Telecommunication Engineer.


1.2 ORGANISATION ON A DIVISION

(a) A Signal & Telecommunication Engineer in Junior Administrative Scale, Senior Scale or
Junior Scale, is incharge of all the signal and telecommunication equipment on the division
and works under the administrative control of the Divisional Railway Manager. If there is
more than one JA Grade officer, one shall be exclusively incharge of telecom assets and other
for signalling assets.


(b) The Signal & Telecommunication Engineer incharge of a division is also responsible to
the Chief Signal & Telecommunication Engineer for the efficient maintenance and control
installation of all the signal and telecommunication equipment on the division.

(c) The strength of the Gazetted officer shall be determined by DISTUs (Divisional
Integrated Signal and Telecom Units) and ZISTUs (Zonal Integrated Signal and Telecom
Units) in the HQ.


1.2.1 TELECOMMUNICATION:

(a) The telecommunication work on each division shall be divided into Sr. Section
Engineer/Section Engineer/Junior Engineer.

(b) On a division, each SSE/SE/JE shall be responsible to the Divisional Signal &
Telecommunication Engineer/Sr. Divisional Signal & Telecom Engineer through the
Assistant Signal & Telecommunication Engineer, for efficient maintenance and correct
installation of all telecommunication equipments under his charge.



1.2.2 DUTIES OF Sr. SECTION ENGINEER/SE/JE:

The essential duties of SSE/SE/JE are:-

(a) Inspection and efficient maintenance of telegraph and telephone equipment such as keys,
sounders, relays, junction boards, teleprinters, magneto, central battery and auto exchanges,
telephone repeaters and other telecommunication installations at large stations including
wireless installations. Indicators, Public address System, Interactive Voice Response
System, Optical Fibre System, Message Switching System, Computer Communication, Train
Radio Communication.

(b) Execution of all works involving alterations to the existing installations, and installations
of new equipment, its adjustment and connections.

(c) Carrying out periodical tests on line wires independently as well as jointly with the
officials of the Posts & Telegraphs department.


1.2.3 STAFF UNDER SSE/SE :

(a) Each SSE/SE shall be assisted by one or more JE, where necessary, and Technicians shall
be provided under him for maintenance. The strength of JE and Technicians shall be fixed in
accordance with the density of work and other local conditions.

(b) Each JE must be provided with a gang for attending to works that may be considered
normally beyond the scope of the Technicians.


(c) Each JE may be provided with office clerks depending on the quantum of office work.
An office khalasi may be provided, where necessary.

(d) Where railways underground telecommunication cables including Optical Fibre exist (as
in electrified areas), a cable break-down transport such as a pick up van shall be provided. An
emergency gang with full complement of cable jointing materials, tools and testing
equipments should be available with the break-down vehicle.


SECTION B

STRENGTH, CHARGES, DESIGNATIONS AND CODE INITIALS FOR VARIOUS
TYPE OF STAFF, INSTALLATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

1.3 Strength and charges of SSE/SE, JE, Technicians , section gangs and the strength of
the office staff shall be fixed by the Chief Signal & Telecommunication Engineer, with due
consideration to the nature of installation density of work, size of installation and general
importance of work.


DESIGNATION AND CODE INITIALS

DESIGNATION CODE INITIAL

(a) OFFICERS

(i) Chief Signal & Telecommunication Engineer CSTE

(ii) Chief Communication Engineer CCE

(iii) Chief Signal Engineer CSE

(iv) Chief Planning Engineer(S&T) CPE(S&T)

(v) Dy. Chief Signal & Telecommunication Engineer Dy. CSTE

(vi) Signal & Telecommunication Engineer(Senior SSTE(Tele)
Scale) in the Headquarters Office
(Telecommunication)

(vii) Assistant Signal & Telecommunication Engineer ASTE(Tele)
(Telecommunication).


(b) Sr. SECTION ENGINEER

(i) Senior Section Engineer in HQ Office (Telecommunication) SSE(Tele) HQ
(ii) Senior Section Engineer(Telecommunication) SSE(Tele)
(iii) Section Engineer SE
(iv) Jr. Engineer JE


(c) TECHNICIANS

(i)Telecommunication Technicians TC
(ii) Wireless Technicians WT
(iii) Cable Jointer CJT
(iv) Lineman LM
(v) Motor Mechanic MMC
(vi) Aerial Rigger (Mast Rigger) AR


(d) INSTALLATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Telecommunications T
Works /Construction W
Maintenance M
Stores S
Headquarters Correspondence work HQ
Auto Exchanges (AX)

Trunk Exchanges & Manual Exchanges (TX)
Line Plant (LP)
Telegraphy (TY)

Traffic Train Control ( TC)
Sound Distribution System (PA)
Electric Clocks (E/C)
Emergency Mobile Communication System (MOBILE)
Yard Communication System (YARD)
High Frequency Radio Communication System (HF)

Line of Sight Systems( UHF/VHF/Microwave) (MW)
Power Plant System (PP)
Carrier Communication (CC)

Cable (CABLE)
Optical Fibre (OFC)
Repeater Station Cable (RSQ)
Cable Hut (CHQ)
Computers (COMP)

(e) USE OF CODE INITIALS

(i) Senior Section Engineer of Maintenance (Telecommunication) SSE(Tele/M)

(ii) Section Engineer Incharge of SE(YARD)
Yard Communication System.

(iii) Section Engineer of Sound SE (PA & Clocks)
Distribution System and Electric Clocks.


(iv) Section Engineer for maintenance of Microwave SE(MW)



CHAPTER II

ROLE OF PTCC AND PTCC CLEARANCES

2.1 Power and Telecommunication Co-ordination Committee (PTCC) is a central
standing committee for co-ordination of Power and Telecommunication system. The
committee was formed by the Government of India in the year 1949. The role of the
committee is to deal with route approval for all new power lines (As per the
proforma given in the PTCC Manual 1995 edition, page 36). The clearance of this
committee is required before energization of new power lines of 11KV and above,
which is given after obtaining clearances from the Railway/Telecom having lines in
the area.

2.2 Various committees connected with Power and Telecommunication Co-ordination:
i) Central Standing Committee: This consists of two representatives from DOT and
two from Central Electricity Authority (CEA). This was set up by the high level
committee to look into estimates, which have resulted in delay in settling re-
engineering cases.

ii) High Level Committee: This is a committee at the level of secretaries or
Chairman/Members of the Board from Power and Telecommunication sectors. The
committee is assisted by officers from the two sides. Cases where no consensus
could be arrived at the level of the central PTCC are referred to this committee.
Officers from the Railways are invited when there are issues involving them.

iii) Central PTCC: This consists of members from the CEA, DOT, Railways and the
Army. The composition of the committee as formulated in 1982 is given in
Annexure A. The meetings of the committee are to be held once in three months
generally.

iv) State Level PTCC: This is similar to the central PTCC with representatives from
the station/region. The composition of the committee as formulated in 1985 is given
in Annexure B. The committee is to meet once in a month generally but not later
than once in 3 months.

2.3 i) Central PTCC deals with cases of energization of power lines of 220KV and
above.

ii) Cases of energization of power lines up to 132KV DC are processed at the state
level. However, for cases of 33KV DC and above up to 132 KV DC, final PTCC
clearance is to be given by DET(PTCC).

For cases of above 11KV up to 33KV S/C clearance is given by State Level PTCC.

For power lines of 11KV, clearance is given by DET of the Telecom Department.

2.4 Copies of route map of the proposed electrical lines are to be submitted to the
GM(S&T) of the concerned railways in 4 copies. The route map should depict all
topographical details including railway lines, rivers, canals and important roads
and other land marks like towns, villages with names etc., on either side of the

proposed power line. Topographical maps of the Survey of India are used for this
purpose. The distances over which the details are to be marked, are as under:
Power lines of 66KV and above = 8Kms on either side.
Power lines of above 11KV and up to 33 KV = 5 Kms on either side.
Power line of 11 KV = 3 Kms on either side.

2.5 On receipt of the route maps, Railways shall check whether the proposed power line
falls within the jurisdiction of the zonal railway. If it does not fall within the zonal
railways jurisdiction, the proposal shall be returned back to the PTCC without any
delay and the railway to which it should be sent shall also be advised. The railway
concerned on receipt the proposal shall mark their telecom lines on the maps and
submit two copies to the PTCC. The details in full of all the circuits working on the
telecom alignments giving the discontinuity points and route length should be
furnished.

2.6 Induced voltage calculations are calculated by the following:
i) Up to 11KV lines = local DET of the telecom department.
ii) Above 11KV and up to 33 KV lines by SDE/PTCC.
iii) Above 33 KV DC and above by DET/PTCC.

2.7 Safe limit for induction due to LF induction due to short circuit fault is 430V and is
generally the ruling factor. In specific cases, longitudinal induced voltages under
normal conditions are to be examined. In case, where the induced voltages due to short
circuit fault on the telecom circuits, exceeds prescribed safe limit of 430V, it is
necessary to consider various protection measures, so that the equipment installed
and the personal working on these circuits are not subjected to the influence of
hazardous potentials.

One of the measures, commonly adopted for protection is the use of three electrode
Gas Discharge (GD) tube. Two electrodes of the tube are connected to the wires of
a telephone pair and the third electrode to the earth, through a earth cap. Under
normal conditions, the telecom line is kept insulated. The gap breaks down
and the telecom line is virtually earthed, when induced voltage exceeds the pre-
determined value (250V). Through the discharge path the earth connection to the tube
should be of very low resistance, so that the voltage across the tube is restricted to
safer values.

2.8 Protective measures against induced voltages in excess of the safe limits on different
types of block instruments in use in Indian Railways is given in Appendix XVII
Chapter I of PTCC manual edition 1995. The limits for the block instruments
presently in use on IR are given below:

a)Neales Token instrument and Neales tablet instruments with the characteristics
similar to Neales token in respect of 3-position relay and lock magnet and Neales D
type.
i) For induced voltage not exceeding 430V no special precaution is necessary.
ii) For induced voltages exceeding 430V metallic return and appropriate Gas
Discharge tubes are to be provided.
b)SGE Double Line Block Instrument: As at a above.


c) Diado Single Line Tokenless Block Instruments:
Without modification this instrument can safely stand induction up to
74V 50 cycles AC induced voltages. For induced voltages up to 650V
AC the following modification is to be made:
3-position polarized relay of the type used in Neales token or SG
double line block instrument is to be interposed in the line circuit and
the existing line relay (N.R.Relay) fed from local battery through the
contacts of polarized relay. Also the line condensers C1 & C2 each of
the microfarad capacity with a voltage rating of 160V are to be
replaced by condensers of equal capacitance but with a voltage rating
of 1000V. Standard gas dischargers will also have to be provided for
the lines.
d) Podanur make Single Line Tokenless Block Instrument (Push Button
Type)
This instrument is only suitable for use in non AC electrified sections.
This instrument is safe for use of block circuits subjected to maximum
induction 650Vr.m.s. 50 cycles AC from neighboring power line
provided the existing DC blocking condenser in the telephone circuits
is replaced by a one rated for 1000V DC for non AC section only (non
AC electrified).

e) Maximum acceptable limit of induced voltage due to power parallelism
is up to 2000V on railway block and communication circuits subject to
the specific limitations mentioned above.

The cases of induced voltages above these limits should be treated as
re-engineering cases and each such case should be treated separately in
consultation with the Railway Board.

2.9 Railway control and other overhead circuits to be invariably provided with GD tubes
on par with the protective arrangements required for protection of block circuits.

2.10 Interference to signaling circuits shall be checked up with reference to the A.C.
immunity of the signaling equipment viz., track circuit relays, line relays, point
machines etc. Interference voltages to signaling circuits are not provided by PTCC and
will have to be done by the Railways in specific cases where interference is suspected.

2.11. After calculation of induced voltages, divisions shall be advised of the protective
measures to be taken and final clearances for energization of power lines shall be
given only after provision of protective measures is completed wherever necessary.

2.12 Divisions shall ensure that protective measures are maintained properly. During
inspections, the availability of the protective measures at the stations shall be checked.

2.13. The expenditure for provision of the protective measures shall be deposited by the
agency which carries out erection of the new power lines.

2.14. Code of practice for the protection of telecommunication lines at crossings with
overhead power lines other than electric traction circuits is contained in chapter VI of
the PTCC manual and is to be followed in all cases of new power lines crossing the
overhead alignments in use on Railways, either on lease from BSNL or Railways own.

Guarding arrangements shall be provided for crossings of up to 36KV and the detailed
drawings for separations to be followed as per the code of practice shall be followed.

The minimum clearances between the extra high voltage lines (above 36
KV) and telecommunication wires as per the above code of practice
shall be:

For lines of voltage above:
36 KV up to and including 72.5 KV = 2440 mm(80)

For lines of voltages above 72.5 KV up to
and including 145 KV = 2740 mm(90)

For lines of voltage above 145 KV up to
and including 245 KV = 3050 mm(100)

For lines of voltage above 245 KV = 3050 mm (100)
Plus 305mm (1foot) for every
additional 33 KVor part thereof.

2.15. Method for carrying out low frequency induction test if required, and code of practice
for protection from earth potential rise (EPR) are described in the PTCC manual. It
should be ensured that the EPR at locations of telephone exchanges, cable joints,
terminals, pillars, cabinets etc., is within safe limits. The EPR counters which
define hazard zone for telephone plants are given below:

S.No. Type of Telecom Plant Type of Power System
High Reliability
Lines
Other Lines
1. Terminal apparatus, joints,
cabinets, pillars, manholes,
pits, poles
650 V 430 V
2. Telephone Exchanges 430 V 430 V
3. Cables:
a) Metal Sheathed
b) Plastic insulated and
plastic sheathed.

650 V
7 KV

430 V
7 KV


2.16. Just as clearances from the departments of Telecommunication and Ministry of
Railways are required in cases of new power lines, induction effects due to existing
power lines shall be evaluated before erection of new overhead alignments for
telecommunications. However, erection of new overhead alignments for
telecommunication is no longer followed by Department of telecommunication or by
the Ministry of Railways or Ministry of Defense.

2.17. PTCC Monitoring cell headed by CCE/DyCSTE(Tele) of the railway shall monitor the
timely disposal of pending and new cases. The cell shall maintain the concern data on
PC with the help of nominated official/supervisor.


2.18. Further details are available in PTCC Manual published by Power &
Telecommunication Co-ordination Committee. The information is available on
www.tnd.bsnl.co.in/ptcc/ptcc.htm.
2.19. Further information on this subject is available in ITU-T: Directives concerning the
protection of telecommunication lines against harmful effects from electric power and
electrified railway lines, ITU, Geneva, 1990.

Annexure - A

COMPOSITION OF THE COMMITTEE AT CENTRAL LEVEL:

i) Chief Engineer(LD&T),
Central Electricity Authority - To be chairman in
New Delhi alternate years

ii) Chief General Manager, T&D Circle - To be chairman in
Department of Telecom, Jabalpur alternate years

iii) Director(PTCC), - Secretary(PTCC)
Central Electricity Authority, New Delhi C.E.A

iv) Director/Telecom, Railway Board - Member

v) Director (GP), Telecom Directorate - Member

vi) Director (ML), Telecom Directorate - Member

vii) TEC, Department of Telecom - Member

viii) Chief General Managers of BSNL - Member
of respective circle

ix) DDG(T), Director/Signals - Member
Army Headquarters


Annexure - B

COMPOSITION OF THE COMMITTEE AT STATE LEVEL:

1) Deputy General Manager of Telecom
Circle/Superintending Engineer of - Chairman
Electricity Board (in alternate years)

2) Asst. Engineer (PTCC) of T&D Circle - Secretary

Communication Side:
3) AGM/Planning in-charge of PTCC - Member

4) DET(PTCC) of the Region - Member

5) DSTE of Zonal Railways - Member

6) Army representative of the area - Member
DCSO/Colonel Signals of respective
Commands

7) Officer dealing with PTCC matters
from Metro & all major telephone - Member
districts and MTNL, preferably of
DE rank

8) Any other representative from DOT
side as a special invitee as per require- - Member
ment of the meeting such as Area
Directors of big circles.

Power Side:
9) Zonal SE/EE in charge of O&M - Member

10) Representative of any other Power
organization in the state such as - Member
NTPC, NHPC etc.

State Government Representative:
11) Chief Electrical Inspector of the state - - Member
or his nominated representative






CHAPTER III

Role of WPC and SACFA Clearances


3.1. INTRODUCTION:

3.1.1 WIRELESS PLANNING & COORDINATION WING.

The WIRELESS PLANNING & COORDINATION (WPC) Wing of the Ministry of
Communications, created in 1952, is the national radio regulatory authority responsible for
frequency spectrum management, including licensing and caters for the needs of all wireless
users (government and private) in the country. It exercises the statutory functions of the
Central Government and issues licenses to establish, maintain and operate wireless stations.
WPC is divided into major sections like Licensing and Receival (LR), New Technology
Group (NTG) and Standing Advisory Committee on Radio Frequency Allocation (SACFA).
SACFA makes the recommendations on major frequency allocation issues, formulation of the
frequency allocation plan, making recommendations on the various issues related to
International Telecom Union (ITU), to sort out problems referred to the committee by various
wireless users, Siting clearance of all wireless installations in the country etc.

3.1.2 The Standing Advisory Committee on Radio Frequency Allocations (SACFA) is a
high level committee chaired by Secretary (DOT)/Chairman, Telecom Commission. Heads
of major wireless users/administrative ministries of the Govt. of India, Member
(Technology), Telecom Commission, and Wireless Adviser to the Govt. of India, Joint
Secretary, DoT are its members. WPC wing of the Ministry of Communications provides
secretarial help to the committee. Joint Wireless Adviser, WPC wing is the member-secretary
of the Committee.



Names and Addresses of SACFA Members


Name &
Designation
Deptt.

Address for communications E-Mail/Fax/Tele.
Engineer-in-Chief

All India Radio Room No.141, Akashvani
Bhavan Parliament Street,
New Delhi - 110 001.

[email protected]
2341459/23421058
23421062
Engineer-in-Chief

Doordarshan

Room No.502, Doordarshan
Bhavan, Copernics Marg,
New Delhi - 110 001.

[email protected]
23387380/23388113
Director

JCES Cabinet Secretariat, Military Wing,
Room No.34, Plot No.108,
Church road, New Delhi.

[email protected]
23013942/23014703

Addl. Director
General(T.T)

Army Hqrs. Room No.634, A-Wing ,Sena
Bhavan, New Delhi - 110011.
[email protected]
23373333/23373658

Director (Signals)

Naval Hqrs. Room No.33, Sena Bhavan, C-
Wing, New Delhi 110011
[email protected]
23792806/23012109
Principal
Director(Sigs)

Air Hqrs. Room No.514, Vayu Bhavan, New
Delhi 110011
[email protected]
23011051/23010231
23017514
23016517

Sr. DDG(TX)

BSNL 601, Statesman House, B-Wing,
Barakhamba Road,
New Delhi - 110 001.

sramaganapathy@bsn
l.in
23372151/23372200
Director

DCPW Room No.300, Block No. 09, CGO
Complex, Lodhi Road,
New Delhi 110003.

[email protected]
24361561/24361114
Executive
Director
(Telecom)

Ministry of
Railways
Room No. 152 , Railway Board,
Rail Bhavan, New Delhi - 110 001.
[email protected]
23304198/23383138

General Manager
(ATM)

AAI Room No. 128, Rajiv Gandhi
Bhavan, Safdarjung Airport,
New Delhi - 110003.

[email protected]
24611078/24652648
Director
(Electronics)
Light house and
light ships,
Ministry of
Transport

A-13, Deep Bhaan, Sector 24,
NOIDA, (UP), Pin: 201301
[email protected]
95120 - 2524093


Director General IMD Room No.606, Mausam Bhavan,
Lodhi Road, New Delhi-110003.

[email protected]
24699216/24624486

Director DOS Room No.304, Antariksh Bhavan,
ISRO Hqrs. Frequency
Management, New Bel Road,
Bangalore 560094.

[email protected]
23412141/23415301
Chief Engineer
(E&T)
ONGC 12
th
Floor, Scope Minar
Laxmi Nagar,
Vikas Marg,
New Delhi - 110092.

[email protected]
23316413/24362701
Sr. Director Deptt. of
Information
Technology
Room No.4003, Electronics
Niketan, 6, CGO Complex,
Lodhi Road,
New Delhi. 110003.


24363095/24363133
DDG NIC Room No.227, NIC Building, CGO [email protected]

Complex, Block-A,
Lodhi Road, New Delhi-110003.

24361475/24361635
Director (WM) Wireless
Monitoring
Organisation
(DOT)
Room No. 321 , Wireless
Monitoring Organization,
E-Wing, Pushpa Bhavan,
New Delhi 110062.

[email protected]
26097762/26098618
Off. Director CMO, Ministry
of Defence
Room No. 105, M- Block, CMO,
Ministry of Defence
New Delhi.

23011535/23011439
DDG(R), TEC DoT TEC, Khursheed Lal Bhavan, New
Delhi-110 001.
23329333


Joint Wireless
Adviser
Secretary,
SACFA

WPC WING 607, Sanchar Bhavan,
New Delhi - 110 001.
[email protected]
23372179/23372183


3.1.3 The main functions of the committee are to make recommendations on:-

Major frequency allocation issues,
Formulation of National Frequency Allocation Plan,
Making recommendations on various issues related to International
Telecommunications Union (ITU),
Asia Pacific Telecommunity (APT),
To sort out the problems referred to the committee by various wireless users,
siting clearance of all wireless installations in the country, etc.

3.1.4 SACFA clearances are issued after getting 'no objection' from various SACFA
members who have to carry out detailed technical evaluation including field surveys, etc. At
times they have to obtain evaluations from their field units. The technical evaluation is done
primarily for-

a) Aviation hazards.

b) Obstruction to line of site of existing/planned networks

c) Interference (Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI)/Electro Magnetic Compatibility
(EMC)) to existing and proposed networks.

3.1.5. SACFA Monitoring cell headed by CCE/Dy.CSTE(Tele) of the railway shall monitor
the timely disposal of pending and new cases. The cell shall maintain the concern data
on PC with the help of nominated official/supervisor. Since WPC is switching over
the SACFA clearance procedures such as filing of applications, issue of IDs, etc., on
line, these staff should be trained to work on line. The clearance for SACFA is on the

software system namely Automated Spectrum Management System provided by WPC
for speedy handling.

3.2. CATEGORIES OF SITES FOR WIRELESS STATIONS:

3.2.1 Mast Height Category:

3.2.1.1 Sites for HF/VHF/UHF:

Those fixed wireless stations whose mast/tower height do not exceed 30
meters above ground level and are operating in certain frequency bands with limited
output power as given below are covered under this category:

(a) All HF stations with power output of 125 watts or less.

(b) (i) All VHF stations below 174 MHz with power output of 50 watts or
less except broadcast stations.

(ii) All VHF stations in the frequency range 174-230 MHz with output
power up to 25 watts except broadcast stations.

(c) Broadcasting stations in the band 30 - 230 MHz with an output power output
up to 100 watts.

(d) All VHF/ UHF stations with a power output of 10 watts or less.

Siting Applications of the above wireless stations are to be forwarded to the
members of SACFA listed in Annexure-I in the application form (WPC S-1).

3.2.1.2 Sites for V-SAT/ Micro-Earth Stations (C-, Extended C and KU bands) with
power output up to 5 watts:

(A) Antenna size- up to 4.0 Meters:

In case the total height of antenna including support structure is 30mteres
or less from the ground level, the siting application need to be processed under
Mast Height Category and Siting applications need to be circulated to
members of SACFA as per Annexure -IV using the proforma (WPC S-4).

(B) Antenna size- More than 4.0 Meters:

If the antenna height is more than 4 metres but less than 20 metres
AGL and the distance from airport reference point is less than 7 kms,
clearance need to be obtained from Army Hqs., Air Hqs., Naval Hqs., JCES
and AAI under Mast Height Category. If the distance of the site is more than
7 km from airport reference point and antenna height is less than 20 metres 'no
objection' is to be obtained from AAI only. The siting applications of the
above stations may be forwarded to SACFA members as per list at Annexure-
IV in application form (WPC S-4).





3.2.2 Exemption from Mast Height Clearance:

3.2.2.1 Sites for HF/VHF/UHF:

Those mast height cases which satisfy the following conditions are
exempted from mast height clearance:-
(i) Antenna mast should be installed on the rooftop of the building.

(ii) The height of mast including antenna to be installed on the rooftop
should not be more than 3 meters.
(iii) The site should be at least 3 KM away from the nearest airport.

3.2.2.2 Sites for V-SAT, Micro-Earth Stations ( C, EXTENDED C & KU
bands with power output upto 5 watts:

(A) Antenna size- 1.8/ 2.4 Meters:

If the antenna is to be installed on the rooftop of an existing building
with mast height not exceeding 3 metres from rooftop and which is at least 3
kms away from the nearest airport 'no objection' from
Department/Organization may not be necessary. These cases will be
processed under Mast Height Exemption Category. The site details are to
be furnished to Secretary SACFA in the Mast Height (VSAT) application
proforma (WPC S-4).

(B) Antenna size- More than 2.4 Meters and up to 3.8 meters:

If the antenna diameter of VSAT is more than 2.4metres and upto3.8metres
and antenna height up to 4 metres above ground level beyond the distance of 7 km
from airport reference point (ARP) 'no objection' from any of the Departments may
not be necessary. These cases will be processed under Mast Height Exemption
(VSAT).

3.2.2.3 The procedure for fast-track clearances of applications for mast height
exemption is given in Annexure IX

3.3 Full Siting Category:

The following fixed stations are covered under the full siting category:

3.3.1 (a) All HF stations with power output more than 125 watts.

(b) (i) All VHF stations below 174 MHz with power output more than
50 watts.
(ii) All VHF stations in the frequency range 174-230 MHz with
power output more than 25 watts.


(c) Broadcasting stations in the frequency band 30-230 MHz with power
output more than 100 watts.

(d) All UHF stations with power output more than 10 watts

3.3.2 Station in microwave, line of sight, radio-relay systems.

3.3.3 All radar stations, Satellite Communication System (including Earth stations),
radio navigation and radio location system.

3.3.4 All VSATs / micro-earth stations with transmitter power more than 5 watts

3.3.5 Receiving stations in services like Space Research, Radio astronomy and other
sensitive receiving systems operating above 1 Ghz.

3.3.6 Any other change in existing parameters other than reduction in power and
mast height of the approved parameters.

The siting applications for the above stations are to apply to members as
per list at Annexure-II in application form (WPC S-2).

3.4 Additional Antenna Category:

3.4.1 Sites for HF, VHF, UHF and Microwave:

All those antennae which are to be installed on the existing mast,
already cleared under full siting category, fall under this category. The
application is to be circulated to all SACFA members as per Annexure -III in
the application form (WPC S-3) but the site is cleared by SACFA Sectt after
ensuring receipt of applications by all members of SACFA except cases
falling under DIZ area for which clearance from JCES is necessary.
Wherever tower space is being leased to private operators, either by
railways directly or through RCIL, the application shall be processed by the
operator quoting the full siting clearance approval obtained by the railways.

3.4.2 Sites for Earth Station:

The Earth Station dishes within 50 mts. from an already cleared site
may be treated under this category provided the height of proposed
installation, including, building height does not exceed the height of already
cleared site/mast.

3.5 The procedure for fast-track clearances of applications under additional
antenna category is given in Annexure-X.


4. GUIDELINES FOR FILLING UP SITING APPLICATIONS:

4.1. Application forms for all categories of siting may be obtained from SACFA
secretariat and necessary information may be furnished keeping in view the following:-


(i) Six digit coordinates of the site are necessary. These six figure coordinates may be
taken with the help of GPS system or any other method for accuracy.

(ii) The height of the site above mean sea level (AMSL) should be obtained from Survey
of India or any other agency except in the case of additional antenna category for
which a copy of the earlier SACFA clearance and AAIs clearance for that site is
mandatory.

(iii) Name of the nearest airport and its distance from the site should be mentioned in the
application for categories of siting. This information is also supplied by survey of
India on demand.

(iv) If the site is within 5 kms from the airport then the site map should be authenticated
by either the nearest airport authority or any other government organization such as
municipal corporation/local town planning committee, etc distance of the site from
airport may also be authenticated.

(v) (a) The map should be of scale of 1 cm = 1 km or nearest and should cover an
area of 12 kms radius around the site.

(b) The following should be marked clearly on the map:

(i) scale of the map
(ii) location of the site
(iii) name and geo-coordinates of the site

(c) Map should contain at least two parallel lines of latitude and longitude.

(vi) Geo-coordinates of the site on the map should be authenticated by the applicant
himself.

4.2 Applications hard copy along with soft copy on a floppy of 3.5"be submitted for
examination, verification and issue of ID Nos. to SACFA secretariat. Software is
available from SACFA Secretariate.

4.3 Not more than 5 applications should be submitted in one bunch.

4.4 Separate application forms are to be filled for different frequency band and different
site.

4.5 After issue of ID Nos., siting application is to be circulated as per list applicable to
each category of siting clearance. A forwarding letter issued by SACFA is also to be
attached with the siting application.

4.6 The applications for additional antenna category need to be circulated to all members
of SACFA but no NOC from any member is necessary for approval of site except
sites which fall in DIZ area for which NOC from JCES is necessary.


4.7 A copy of the agreement letter assigning the frequencies from WPC should be
attached with application.

4.8 A copy of DOTs license agreement may also be endorsed in case of value added
service.





5.0 CLEARANCE OF SACFA CASES FROM RAILWAYS


On receipt of the proposal for site clearance the following aspects have to be checked
from railways activity point of view:

5.1 FREQUENCY: The frequency of the proposal and the band at which it is proposed is
to be cross checked with the allotted frequencies and frequency bands of Railways and
clearance can be given if it is not interfering with Railway frequency.

In case if the proposal frequency and band are adjacent to the railway working
frequency a condition has to be imposed in the no objection certification that permission is
given provided the transmission wont interfere with the railway frequency.

5.2 SITE: The Longitude and Latitude of the proposed site has to be cross checked with
the existing Longitude and Latitude of the railway communication site. If the Longitude and
Latitude are very near to the railway site, the locations have to be physically checked on the
topography map for clearance of signal.

5.3 TOWER HEIGHT: When the proposal is near to Longitude and Latitude for the
railway site then the tower height proposed has to be cross checked for any interference in the
path of the railway communication.

5.4. TRANSMITTER POWER: The transmitter power of the proposal has to be cross
checked whenever the proposal is nearer to the railway site and a conditional certificate
should be given for avoiding spurious signal from the transmitter.

6. Further information on the role of WPC and SACFA and the procedures to be followed can
be obtained from www.wpc.dot.gov.in.




ANNEXURE-I

List of SACFA members to whom the application for Mast
Height (general)
Category needs to be circulated

Name & Designation Deptt.

Address for communications Number of
copies
To be sent
Addl. Director General
(TT))

Army Hqrs. Room No. 634, A-Wing ,Sena
Bhavan, New Delhi 110011.

02

Director (Signals)

Naval Hqrs. Room No.33, Sena Bhavan,
C- Wing, New Delhi 110011.

02
Principal
Director(Sigs)

Air Hqrs. Room No. 514, Vayu Bhavan, New
Delhi 110011.

02
General Manager
(ATM)

AAI Room No. 128, Rajiv Gandhi Bhavan,
Safdarjung Airport,
New Delhi 110003.

02
Joint Wireless Adviser
Secretary, SACFA
WPC Wing Room No 607,
Sanchar Bhavan,
New Delhi - 110 001.

02
Director

JCES Cabinet Secretariat, Military
Wing,Room No. 5, Plot No.108,
Church Road, New Delhi.

01
Director General IMD Room No. 606, Mausam Bhavan,
Lodhi Road, New Delhi-110003

01




ANNEXURE II

List of SACFA members to whom the siting application under full siting
category need to be circulated


Name &
Designation
Deptt.

Address for communications Number of
copies
To be sent

Engineer in Chief All India Radio Room No.141 Akashvani Bhavan
Parliament Street,
New Delhi - 110 001.

01

Engineer in Chief
Doordarshan

Room No.502 Mandi House
Copernics Marg,
New Delhi - 110 001.

01
Director JCES Cabinet Secretariat, Military
Wing,Room No. 34, Plot No.108,
Church road, New Delhi.

01
VSM, Addl.
Director
General (TT)

Army Hqrs. Room No.634, A-Wing ,Sena
Bhavan, New Delhi 110011.
04

Director (Signals)

Naval Hqrs. Room No. 33, Sena Bhavan, C-
Wing, New delhi 110011
01
Principal
Director(Sigs)

Air Hqrs. Room No.514, Vayu Bhavan, New
Delhi 110011.

01
Sr. DDG (TX) BSNL Room No.601, Statesman House,
Barakhamba Road,
New Delhi - 110 001.

02
Director

DCPW Room No.300, Block No. 09, CGO
Complex, Lodhi Road,
New Delhi 110003.

04
Executive Director
(Telecom)

Ministry of
Railways
Room No. 152, Railway Board,
Rail Bhavan, New Delhi - 110 001.
A list of sites
circulated to the
concerned Rly.
zones

General Manager
(ATM)

AAI

No.128, Rajiv Gandhi Bhavan,
Safdarjung Airport,
New Delhi - 110003.


01
Director
(Electronic)
Light house and
light ships,
A-13, Sector 24, NOIDA,
Gautam Buddha Nagar.
01


Name &
Designation
Deptt.

Address for communications Number of
copies
To be sent

Ministry of
Transport
UP - 201301.


Dy. General
Manager (TP)
VSNL Room No.400, 4th Floor,
Videsh Sanchar Bhavan,
M.G. Road, Fort,
Bombay-400001.
01
Director General IMD Room No.606, Mausam Bhavan,
Lodhi Road, New Delhi 110003

01

Director DOS Room No.304 , Antariksh Bhavan,
ISRO Hqrs., Frequency
Management, New Bel Road,
Bangalore 560094.

01
Chief Engineer
(E&T)
ONGC 12th Floor, Scope Minar, Laxmi
Nagar, Vikas Marg,
New Delhi 110092.

03
Sr. Director Deptt. of
Information
Technology
Room No.4003, Electronics
Niketan, 6, CGO Complex,
Lodhi Road,New Delhi 110003.

01
DDG NIC Room No.227, NIC Building, CGO
Complex, Block-A, Lodhi Road,
New Delhi 110003.
01
Director (WM) Wireless
Monitoring
Organisation
(DOT)
Room No 321, Wireless Monitoring
organization,
E-Wing, Pushpa Bhavan,
New Delhi 110062.

01
Joint Wireless
Adviser
Secretary, SACFA
WPC WING Room No 607,
Sanchar Bhavan,
New Delhi - 110 001.
02







ANNEXURE -III

List of SACFA members to whom the siting application for additional
antenna category needs to be circulated


Name & Designation Deptt.

Address for communications Number of
copies
To be sent
Engineer-in-Chief

All India Radio Room No.141, Akashvani
Bhavan
Parliament Street, New Delhi -
1101.
01


Engineer-in-Chief

Doordarshan

Room No. 502, Mandi House,
Copernics Marg, New Delhi 11.
01


Director

JCES Cabinet Secretariat, Military
Wing,Room No. 5, Plot No.108,
Church Road, New Delhi.

01
Addl. Director General
(TT))

Army Hqrs. Room No. 634, A-Wing ,Sena
Bhavan, New Delhi 110011.

01

Director (Signals)

Naval Hqrs. Room No.33, Sena Bhavan,
C- Wing, New Delhi 110011.

01
Principal Director(Sigs)

Air Hqrs. Room No. 514, Vayu Bhavan,
New Delhi 110011.

01
DDG(TX) BSNL Room No. 601, Sanchar Bhavan,
20, Ashoka Road,
New Delhi - 110 001.

02
Director

DCPW Room No.300, Block No. 09,
CGO Complex, Lodhi Road,
New Delhi 110003.

01
Executive Director
(Telecom)

Ministry of
Railways
Room No.152, Railway Board,
Rail Bhavan,
New Delhi - 110 001.

01
General Manager
(ATM)

AAI Room No. 128, Rajiv Gandhi
Bhavan, Safdarjung Airport,
New Delhi 110003.

01

Director (Electronics)

Light house and
light ships,
Ministry of
Transport

A-13, Sector 24, NOIDA,
Gautam Buddha Nagar, UP
201301.

01



Name & Designation Deptt.

Address for communications Number of
copies
To be sent

Director General IMD Room No. 606, Mausam Bhavan,
Lodhi Road, New Delhi-110003

01


Director
DOS Room No. 304 , Antariksh
Bhavan, ISRO Hqrs., Frequency
Management, New Bel Road,
Bangalore - 560094

01
Chief Engineer (E&T) ONGC 12th Floor, Scope Minar, Vikas
Marg, Laxmi Nagar,
New Delhi-110092.

01
Sr. Director Ministry of
Information
Technology
Room No4003, Electronics
Niketan, 6, CGO Complex,
Lodhi Road,
New Delhi 110003.

01
DDG NIC Room No.227, NIC Building,
CGO Complex, Block-A,
Lodhi Road,
New Delhi 110003.

01
Director (WM) Wireless
Monitoring
Organisation
(DOT)
Room No 321, Wireless
Monitoring organization, E-Wing,
Pushpa Bhavan,
New Delhi 110062.

01
Joint Wireless Adviser
Secretary, SACFA
WPC WING Room No 607,
Sanchar Bhavan,
New Delhi - 110 001.
02



Annexure-IV

List of SACFA members to whom the application for mast height clearance (V-Sat)
needs to be circulated

Name & Designation Deptt.

Address for communication Number of
copies
To be sent
Addl. Director General
(TT))

Army Hqrs. Room No. 634, A-Wing ,Sena
Bhavan, New Delhi 110011.

02

Director (Signals)

Naval Hqrs. Room No.33, Sena Bhavan,
C- Wing, New Delhi 110011.
02
Principal
Director(Sigs)

Air Hqrs. Room No. 514, Vayu Bhavan,
New Delhi 110011.

02
General Manager
(ATM)

AAI Room No. 128, Rajiv Gandhi
Bhavan, Safdarjung Airport,
New Delhi 110003.

02
Joint Wireless Adviser
Secretary, SACFA
WPC WING Room No 607,
Sanchar Bhavan,
New Delhi - 110 001.
02
Director

JCES Cabinet Secretariat, Military
Wing,Room No. 5, Plot
No.108,
Church Road, New Delhi.

01
Director General IMD Room No. 606, Mausam
Bhavan, Lodhi Road, New
Delhi-110003

01





ANNEXURE-V
WPC S-1


Application form for Mast Height (General)


1 ID number and date


2 Name of Applicant


3 Address of applicant


4 Transmitter power (in watts)


5 Frequency/Frequency band of operation


6 Antenna location


7 Lattitude/longitude (six digit)


8 Height of site above mean sea level


9 Height of antenna mast above ground (building
height to be included if it is to be installed on
the roof top)


10 Height of building


11 Name of the nearest Airport


12 Distance of the site from the nearest airport


13 Location map with boundary reference


14 Ministrys reference with date vide which
frequencies earmarked (A copy of agreement to
be attached)


15 Remarks





Signature of Applicant

ANNEXURE-VI

WPC S2
Application form for Full Siting Category



( Signature of Applicant )

1 Service
2 ID number and date
3 Name of Applicant
4 Address of Applicant
5 Transmitter power (in watt)
6 Frequency/Freq. band of operation
7 Antenna location
7 Latitude and longitude (six digit)
9 Height of site above mean sea level
10 Height of antenna mast above ground level
11 Height of building if antenna is to be
installed on the roof top

12 Type of antenna and its size
13 Azimuth of maximum radiation
14 Gain of Tx. Antenna (db)
15 Gain of Rx antenna (db)
16 Beam width (in degree)
17 Name of the nearest airport
18 Distance of the site from
the nearest airport

19 Receiver location
20 Nature of service
21 Circuit/hop length
22 Approx. area covered by antenna location
23 Service area
24 Location map
25 Ministry's reference and
date

26 DOT agreement number and date, if
required

27 Remarks

ANNEXURE-VII
WPC S-3

Application form for Additional Antenna Category

1 Service
2 ID number and date
3 Name of Applicant
4 Address of Applicant
5 Transmitter power (in watt)
6 Frequency/Freq.band of operation
7 Antenna location
8 latitude and longitude(six digit)
9 Height of site above mean sea level
10 Height of antenna mast above ground level
11 Height of building if antenna is to be installed on
the roof top

12 Type of antenna and its size
13 Azimuth of maximum radiation
14 Gain of Tx. Antenna (db)
15 Gain of Rx antenna (db)
16 Beam width (in degree)
17 Name of the nearest airport
18 Distance from the site
19 Receiver location
20 Nature of service
21 Circuit/hop length
22 Approx .area covered by antenna location
23 Service area
24 Location map
25 Ministry's reference and date
26 DOT agreement number and date
27 Earlier SACFAreference vide which site cleared
28 Remarks




( Signature of Applicant )



ANNEXURE-VIII
WPC S-4

Application form for Mast Height (VSAT)


1 ID number and date
2 Name of Applicant
3 Address of applicant
4 Transmitter power (in watts)
5 Frequency/Frequency band of operation
6 Antenna location
7 Latitude/longitude (six digit)
8 Height of site above mean sea level
9 Height of antenna mast above ground (building
height to be included if it is to be installed on the
roof top)

10 Height of building
11 Type of antenna and its size
12 Azimuth of maximum radiation
13 Gain of Tx antenna (db)
14 Gain of Rx antenna (db)
15 Name of the nearest Airport
16 Distance of the site from the nearest airport
17 Location map with boundary reference
18 Ministrys reference with date vide which
frequencies earmarked (A copy of agreement to
be attached)

19 D o T agreement number and date
20 Remarks




Signature of Applicant



ANNEXURE-IX
F.No. K-19012/Misc./2005-CFA
Government of India
Ministry of Communications & IT
Department of Telecommunication
WPC Wing

Sanchar Bhavan
New Delhi-110001
Dated: 27
th
July, 2005.


OFFICE MEMORANDUM


Sub: Simplified procedure for sites falling under Mast Height Exemption Category.


In case of sites for VSATs and other masts/antennae for various applications falling
under Mast Height Exemption Category, the following procedure comes into force with
immediate effect.

2. For the sites falling under Exemption from Mast Height Clearance, the applications
are to be filed online like other SACFA siting applications. Signed hard copies along with
the details of ID numbers and the required amount of Bank Draft be submitted to SACFA
Secretariat.

3. In addition, a consolidated list of such sites along with the details as per the prescribed
format (Annex-1) are to be submitted in duplicate.

4. An earnest money of Rs. 1000/- (Rupees One thousand only) per site in the form of
State Bank of India Demand Draft, drawn in favour of The Pay & Accounts Officer ( HQrs),
Department of Telecommunications, payable at New Delhi, is required to be submitted.

5. An undertaking as per Annex-2 shall also be submitted by the applicant.

This procedure supersedes all earlier OMs in this regard.




s/d

(D.SINGARAVELU)
Deputy Wireless Adviser
to the Government of India

Annex-1
.

Details of VSATs and other masts/antennae sites under SACFA Mast Height
Exemption Category





1. Name, address of the Organisation /VSAT Service Provider :
Tele & Fax No. :
E-mail address :

2. Name of the Hub Station for the network:
Reference of WPC Licence No./ :
Decision letter for the network :
(for masts/antennae of other applications this is not
applicable)




SA
CF
A

ID
Location
/address
of
VSAT/
mast
Locati
on
Longi
tude
Locati
on
Latitu
de
Freque
ncy
band of
operati
on
Size of
Antenna/
VSAT
AMSL
(meters)
Height of
Building
above
ground
(meters)
Name
of the
nearest
airport
Distance
of the
airport
from the
site
(KMs)







Annex-2


UNDERTAKING


Whereas M/s.__________________________________, a company incorporated under the
Companies Act, 1956, having its registered office situated at ______________________ is a
provider of VSAT Service.

AND for the purpose of VSAT Service, M/s. ______________________________ as aforesaid
applied for Licence / permission from Government of India on its own volition and has agreed to
abide by terms and conditions relating to the VSAT licence etc.

AND the M/s.________________________________ has installed VSAT stations some of
which fall under SACFA Exemption Category, full details and Particulars of which are given
above (in Annex-I appended hereto).

I, ________________________, Son/Daughter of Shri_________________, resident of
_________________________________ and Owner/Managing
Director/Director/Partner/Authorised Signatory; for and on behalf of the above said company do
hereby undertake that all the VSATs as detailed above (in Annex-I) have antenna size up to 2.4
meter diameter and use RF Power up to 5 watts.

I further undertake that all the terms and conditions framed regarding VSATs will be fully
observed, and in the event of any violation of such terms and conditions or furnishing of wrong
information above (in Annexure I) or otherwise, I and M/s.
_____________________________________shall indemnify jointly and severally the WPC
Wing, Department of Telecommunications (DOT) against all third party claims and shall accept
full responsibility and liability for the same, including any penalty or, dismantling of the VSAT
(at our cost) and / or cancellation of the wireless licence, as decided by the WPC Wing,
Department of Telecommunications.


Signed on _________day of __________________Two thousand Five by Shri
______________________ holder of General Power of Attorney executed pursuant to the Board
resolution dated _____________________.





Date: (Signature)
Place: (Name & Designation of the Authorised Signatory)
(Name & Address of the Service Provider Company)
In the present of Witnesses:

1.

2.

(Note: For masts/antennae for other applications, the Undertaking may be modified accordingly)


ANNEXURE-X
Fast track site clearances for additional antennae
K-16011/05/2002-CFA
Government of India
Ministry of Communications & Information Technology
Department of Telecommunications
Wireless Planning and Coordination Wing
223-B, Sardar Patel Bhavan,
Parliament Street, New Delhi 110001
Date: 03.07.2002
OFFICE-MEMORANDUM
Subject:Fast track site clearances for additional antennae
Kindly refer to agenda item no. 5 of Summary Record of 137th meeting of SACFA held
on 28.05.2002 where BSNL representative informed pendency of their cases for additional
antennae despite involvement of less number of SACFA members. After detailed discussion, it
was decided that no NOC (s) from SACFA members will be required for siting cases falling
under additional antenna category. However, siting applications are to be circulated to all
members of SACFA and their receipt is to be ensured. After ensuring receipt of such cases,
SACFA Sectt. will issue necessary clearances for sites falling under additional antenna category.
The following modified procedure for additional antennae cases will be followed in future-
Applicant will apply to SACFA Sectt in a prescribed proforma available with SACFA Sectt
for which softcopy may be obtained from SACFA Sectt for obtaining ID numbers.
Applicant will enclose a copy of earlier SACFA clearance, NOC received from AAI with
regard to site under consideration if site was cleared after 1995 and appropriate map indicating
the site.
Applicant will be issued ID numbers after scrutinizing applications for correctness.
When applicant informs SACFA about likely date of circulation of siting applications, he will
be issued circulation letter meant for all members of SACFA, which he will attach with
applications and circulate within a weeks time.
Applicant will obtain acknowledgement slip in token of receipt of his applications by SACFA
members.
Applicant has to submit a copy of frequency agreement letter issued by WPC at the time of
obtaining SACFA clearance.
Applicant will be issued SACFA clearance within a short time after confirming receipt of
applications through receipts
--SD---
( Deepa Aggarwal ),
Assistant Wireless Adviser
For, Secretary, SACFA

CHAPTER IV

COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR NEW STATIONS


4.1 Opening of new stations whether in an already existing line or as part of a new
section shall be governed by Rules for opening of a Railway.

4.2 Communication systems for new sections shall be planned on underground cable only.
Suitable system to meet the future communication requirement of the section shall
be planned. Adequate capacity shall be built in to meet the safety requirements of
block working, TAWD, BPAC, emergency requirements for accident communication
etc.

4.3 Communication arrangements at a new station shall be governed by:
a) Controlled / Uncontrolled section.
b) Electrified/Non-electrified section.
c) Importance in terms of the various departmental staff to be
Posted at the station.

4.4 The following communication arrangements shall be provided at new stations:

a) Control telephone in controlled sections.
b) Phone communication to all manned level crossing gates controlled
from the station.
c) 25W VHF sets with proper standby power supply.
d) Communication arrangements with sidings. Mode of communication shall
be decided by the Railway administration, depending on the
importance of the siding.
e) BSNL phone wherever feasible. In the absence of feasibility for land
line BSNL phone, wherever WLL phone is feasible, it shall be provided.
f) In new sections, telephone exchange shall be provided at important
stations where there is a sizeable establishment for railway working.
Wherever feasible, such exchanges shall be connected by
suitable means to the divisional exchange.
g) In all new sections, S&T controls shall be provided connecting
SE/JE (S&T)Offices and residences of Technicians (S&T) etc. This
shall however be subject to availability of channel in the main
communication system.
h) In all new sections, Engg. Control shall be provided connecting
SE/JE ( P.Way ) offices and residences. This shall however be
subject to availability of channel in the main communication
system.
i) In a new section, communication arrangements for block working to
suit the system of working to be followed shall be provided.
j) In electrified territory, TPC phone shall be provided.

4.5 Additional communication facilities be provided in new electrified sections, shall
be governed by the provisions in Chapter - IV of the 25KV AC traction manual.

4.6 All the communication equipments shall be provided with suitable power supply
arrangements and proper protective arrangements.


4.7 All the communication equipments and power supply units shall be properly earthed.

4.5 Besides telecommunication facilities, one or more of the following facilities are to be
provided depending on the importance of the station.
a) Platform clocks.
b) PA systems for announcements on the platforms.
c) Rly and BSNL Telephones for Train Enquiry Communication.
d) IVRS systems.
e) Train Indication Board as per Railway Boards guidelines.


CHAPTER V


TRAIN TRAFFIC CONTROL


5.1 GENERAL

5.1.1 RAILWAY CONTROL CIRCUITS: Railway Control Circuits are omnibus telephone
circuits which provide communication with each train working point, thus facilitating
efficient train operation. They should provide satisfactory and reliable communication
between the controller and the various way-side stations, important signal cabins, loco
sheds, yard offices etc.


5.1.2. TYPE OF CONTROL SYSTEM: According to traffic requirements and to cater to
the needs of Electric Traction area, a section may be provided with one or more
Railway Control Circuits as detailed below :

a) SECTION CONTROL / TRAIN CONTROL : This is provided for
communication between the Section/Train Controller in the control office and way-
side stations, junction station, block cabins, loco sheds and yards in a division for the
control of train movements and effective utilisation of section capacity.

b) DEPUTY CONTROL : This is provided for communication between the
Deputy Controller in the control office and important stations, junctions & terminal
stations, yard master's offices, loco sheds and important signal cabins in a division for
supervisory control of traffic operation in general.

c) STOCK / ADM. CONTROL: This is provided for communication between the
Stock/Adm. Controller in the control office and yard master's offices at junctions and
terminal stations in a division for getting information on the movements of rolling
stock.

d) LOCO POWER CONTROL : This is provided for communication between the
Loco Power Controller in the control office and the various loco sheds, important
stations and yards in a division for the optimum utilisation of the locomotives.

e) TRACTION LOCO CONTROL : Provided between traction loco controller
and loco sheds, important Station Master's Offices for optimum utilisation of electric
locomotives.

f) TRACTION POWER CONTROL : Provided between traction power
controller and SM's Office, FPs/SPs/SSPs for maintenance of OHE system.

g) S&T CONTROL : Provided between test room and way stations for
effective maintenance of S&T equipments.

h) EMERGENCY CONTROL: Provided from selected points along the track
route for establishing communication between train crew (in case of emergency),
traction and permanent way staff with traction power controller. The emergency
sockets are provided on rail posts at an interval of 1 Km (Max.) along the route.
They are also provided at FP/SP/SSPs isolators in yards and near bridges.


i) EMERGENCY WIRELESS CONTROL COMMUNICATION: The following
equipments can also be utilized for emergency wireless communication where
such system exists:-

i) Handsets for Mobile Train Radio Communication (MTRC) in sections.
ii) Walkie-Talkie sets in sections where VHF communication from train to
control office has been provided in lieu of any physical medium or
MTRC.

Any other form of emergency wireless communication shall have the specific approval
of the Railway Board

5.1.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR TRAFFIC TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEM :
5.1.4 Train Control systems shall fulfill the following requirements :-

a) Rotary keys or push buttons of non locking type shall be provided for selective
calling of any station by the controller.

b) Facilities should be provided for selectively calling one or a group of stations
or all stations.

c) Means shall be provided to automatically inform the controller whenever the
bell/buzzer at the station rings in response to the call initiated by him.

d) The signalling used for selective calling shall not hamper normal telephone
conversation on the line.

e) Feature of prolonged ringing of any way-station shall be provided.

f) Adjustment and maintenance of the equipments in the control office and way-
side stations should be easy.

g) The equipment should be rugged and capable of intensive use.

h) The equipment should work satisfactorily within allowable margins of line
characteristics without frequent critical adjustments.

j) The system should be capable of progressive expansion without any
replacement.

k) The system should be compatible with overhead alignment and underground
cables as applicable.

l) Provision of intercommunication facility between several controllers in the
same control office may be incorporated in the control key board/panel wherever
necessary.

m) Earth return circuits shall not be retained on AC traction and all Telecom
circuits shall work on metallic return.

n) Facility shall be provided in control office for transferring Emergency
Control(wherever exists) to Section Control circuit.

o) No overhead telecom alignment shall be within 50 meters from the AC
electrified track except when running strictly at right angles.



5.1.4 INTERCOMMUNICATION BETWEEN LOCAL TELEPHONE AND CONTROL
CIRCUIT

a) It is also desirable to make provision of an approved type to interconnect the
local telephone exchange with important control circuits to enable important officials
served by the local telephone exchange to gain access to such control circuits with or
without the assistance of an operator.

b) Such a provision shall not affect the performance of the control circuits from
the point of view of signalling or speech.

c) Whenever interconnection is made through an operator, the manual board shall
be provided with necessary supervisory facilities so that the telephone connected to
the exchange is disconnected from the control circuit as soon as the conversation is
over.

d) It should be ensured that only important officials have access to control circuits
in this manner.

5.1.5 TYPES: Traffic Control Equipments shall be of the following or any other
approved type.

(a) STC KEY SENDING SYSTEM: In this system the coded impulses are
generated by means of a rotary selector key (4001-A, 4002-A & 4002-B) mounted in a
key case being turned at a time to call any particular station. The impulses are
received at the way stations by polarized relays or selectors (4301-A) adjusted to close
the contact for the local ringing circuit for a particular code.

(b) PUSH BUTTON SENDING SYSTEM : The Push Button Sending System
consists of a push button panel and an impulsing unit in the control office. The panel
is equipped with 16 push buttons, and any particular station being called by operating
2 buttons corresponding to the first two digits of the code. For prolonged ringing, the
long ring key is operated. All stations can be signalled simultaneously by pressing a
general call key.

(c) DUAL TONE MULTIFREQUENCY SYSTEM: In this system two
frequencies are being transmitted simultaneously as per the standard DTMF
Frequencies plan given in Annexure-II with 2 digit code to call either one station at a
time or a nominated group at a time or all at the same time.

The first two types are now obsolete and hence will not be described further.
Moreover as per policy of Board all overhead alignment system of BSNL as well as
Railways should be replaced in phased manner by 2008. However in extreme
circumstances where it is required the same should be followed as detailed in old
Telecom Manual (1971 edition).

5.1.6 INTERCOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT: All controllers in a control office
shall be provided with an intercommunication system of approved type with facilities
for each controller to call any other controller, including Deputy Controller, Chief
Controller and the Telecommunication Maintainer/Inspector on duty.

5.1.7 JUNCTION EQUIPMENT: When control circuits originate in electrified section
and extend to a non-electrified section or vice versa 4 wire/2 wire OR 2 wire/4 wire
Speech Conversion and Junction equipment as per specification IRS: TC-46 shall be
provided at the junction.



5.2 SPECIAL PROVISION FOR CONTROL COMMUNICATION WITH
UNDERGROUND CABLES AT REPEATER STATION: Repeater Station
equipments are housed in Structural Frames and Transformer Bay.

5.2.1 STRUCTURAL FRAME: Structural frame houses

i) Miscellaneous panel
ii) V.F. Amplifier panel
iii) Ringing impulse amplifier panel

Structural frame for equipment bay is a frame work composed of M.S.. angles of size
40 x 40 x 6 mm and 25 x 25 x 3 mm as per the drawing No. TC-15145. Top most rack
of the frame is meant for housing miscellaneous panel the requirement of which is one
per repeater station. The other racks are of equal sizes and are to be distributed to
house amplifier panels and ringing impulse amplifier panels. The required numbers of
amplifier panels and ringing impulse amplifier panels is to be decided on the
requirement of circuits required for the section.

The size of the structural frame for the equipment bay shall be 615 mm x 250 mm x
1630 mm.

It is to be installed on the channel foundation on the floor of the repeater station
building. The details of channel foundation are indicated in the drawing No.
RDSO/TC-35027 to 35029.

5.2.2 Miscellaneous panel: Miscellaneous panel is provided on the top most rack of the
structural frame. It houses U-link panel and fuse panel. It conforms to the drawing
No. RDSO/TC-33180.

(i) U-link panel : In the front of the cabinet 5 nos. of U-link panels are provided.
Each U-link panel has 32 inlets/outlets. Tag strip provided on the top of the U-link
panel is to be connected to the secondary of the isolation transformer in the
Transformer bay and the tag strip provided at the bottom is to be connected to the tag
block of the amplifier panel or terminal strip of the ringing impulse amplifier panel as
the case may be. For isolating, testing and monitoring the U-link provided on the
miscellaneous panel is to be used.

(ii) Fuse panel : Fuse panel has the maximum capacity of holding 4 numbers of
10 lines alarm type of fuse. To have an access of the fuse panel rear cover of the
miscellaneous panel is to be opened. One fuse block 10 lines is required for each
amplifier panel having nine cards. Fuse to be used shall be of 0.5A capacity. One
fuse block -10 lines is required for 5 ringing pulse amplifier panel. Fuse used shall be
of 1A capacity.

(iii) Cable entry : Two cable entry holes with suitable grommet are provided at
the left and right of the rear cover.

(iv) Size : The overall dimensions of the panel shall be 575 mm x 253 mm x 228
mm.

(v) Accessories : The electronic hooter/buzzer shall be supplied as an accessory
which is to be mounted on the maintainers table. This hooter shall be connected in
such a way to sound whenever any one of the fuses blows out.

5.2.3 Amplifier Panel : The amplifier panel houses the printed circuit cards of V.F.
buffer amplifier. It conforms to drawing No. TC-15150. The amplifier panel/panels
are to be mounted on the rack/racks just beneath the miscellaneous panel in structural
frame works of the equipment bay.


One leak amplifier card serves for two circuits so leak amplifier card shall be placed in
between two VF amplifier cards for which the leak amplifier is meant.

VF Repeater Amplifier : The 4W VF Repeater amplifier is intended to make
good of the losses incurred due to cable attenuation, insertion loss of sectionalizing
transformer installed in cable huts. The repeater are spaced at an interval of about 50
KM.

a) The repeater provides a gain of 24 2 db in the voice frequency range. The
gain adjusted in steps of one db.

b) The nominal input and output impedance of the amplifier is 1120 ohm.

c) Equalizers are provided for the correction of frequency response characteristics
of the cable.

d) The frequency response shall be flat within 0.1 db in the frequency range 300
Hz to 3.4 KHz.

e) The return loss of the repeater against 1120 ohm is not less than 25 dB in the
frequency range of 300 Hz to 3.4 KHz.

f) The output return loss against 1120 ohm with amplifier set for maximum gain
is not less than 20 db over the frequency range 300 Hz to 3.4 KHz.

Leak Amplifiers : Two pairs of conductors are required for each control circuit,
one for speaking and another for listening in order to overcome the difficulty likely
to be experienced in balancing an omnibus circuit like control circuit. With a four
wire circuit conversation between way stations is not possible. However with the
provision of a small amplifier (Leak amplifier) at the first repeater station speech at
low level is passed from the receive pair to the transmitting pair, thereby enabling the
way stations to know whether the line is engaged or not. In addition, a certain amount
of speech passes from the receive pair to transmitting pair through the loudspeaker and
microphone making communication between way stations possible.

In all four wire control circuits excepting remote control, the leak amplifier shall be
provided at the Main (First) repeater station.

a) The leak amplifier is provided with an overall loss of 20 0.5 db (fixed)

b) Nominal input impedance of the amplifier is 50K.

c) The variable 50 K pads of 1, 2, 4, 8 db induces the necessary leak into the
circuit.

d) 1120 ohm pads of the value 1, 2, 4, 8 db is also provided. It is required only at
the main repeater station. Control room equipments is installed in the vicinity
of the main repeater station. The level of the incoming speech of the trans pair
will be high. The necessary pads are also inserted to introduce required
attention.


e) The frequency response shall be flat within 0.2 db in the frequency range of
300 Hz to 3.4 KHz.

f) The normal current drain for each leak amplifier shall be 1.6 mA + 0.1 mA.

5.2.4 Ringing Impulse Amplifier (RIA) Panel : This panel is provided for amplifying the
ringing impulses at the intermediates repeater stations. This houses the printed cards
and the allied components of ringing impulse amplifiers. The arrangement of the
panel is as per Drg. No. TCA 15135. Each panel consists of two identical sets of
amplifier units conforming to Drg. No. TC-15093.

Ringing Impulse Amplifier: In order to overcome the drop in signalling
voltage due to line resistance, the AC 50 Hz signals interrupted at 3-1/2 cycles per
second, are amplified at each repeater station with the aid of ringing impulse amplifier.
Each RIA panel consists of two identical amplifier circuits to Drg. No. TC-15093.

Operational Features : An output signal of 50V, 50 Hz can be obtained for
varying input signal between 7V & 42V by suitably strapping of the flying load to the
tags a or b or c & by adjusting the trimmer.

5.2.5 Transformer Bay : Transformer Bay houses

i) V.F. transformers ( 1120 : 1120)
ii) Signalling transformers.

(a) To restrict the induced voltage due to the catenary within the limits specified
by CCITT, telecommunication circuits are to be isolated by means of V.F.
Transformers. In addition signaling transformers are required for deriving phantom
circuits. These transformers provide impedance matching and isolation between
balanced and unbalanced circuits at the repeater station.

(b) Transformer Bay is a cabinet which houses the transformers and are installed
in cable huts and repeater stations. It conforms to the drawing No. TCA 15202. It is a
cabinet made of mild steel sheet and of size 525 mm x 272 mm x 1630 mm with two
cable entry holes having suitable rubber grommet provided at the top. To have an
access of the equipment, front door provided with suitable locking arrangement is to
be opened. In back, it is provided with covers which are three in numbers and are
screwed to the body. The distribution of the components in the transformer bay from
top to bottom are as follows (1) Lightning arrestor base plate (2) Link panels (3)
Transformer panel (4) Lightning arrestor base plate. An earthing strip is also provided
which runs vertically to solder all connections that are to be connected to earth.

(c) The transformer bay can accommodate 6 transformers in one row. The
different transformers shall be fixed as detailed below :

VF transformers (1120 : 1120) shall be fixed at positions 1,3,4 & 6.
Signalling transformers (1:2) shall be fixed at positions 2 & 5.

(d) Five link panels are required to be provided in the transformer bay. The first
2-1/2 panels from top are required to be connected to the incoming cable and the rest
to the outgoing cable.



5.3 DUAL TONE MULTI FREQUENCY CALLING SYSTEM.


5.3.1 (a) This system for train traffic control equipment with voice frequency signaling
using Dual Tone Multi Frequency(DTMF) signals for 4 Wire and 2 Wire operation is
known as DTMF Calling System.

(b) The control office equipment is normally designed for 4 Wire operation which
can be converted into 2 Wire operation by provision of hybrid attachment. The way
station equipment shall be different for 4 Wire and 2 Wire working.

5.3.2 CONTROLLERS EQUIPMENT : The control office equipment consists of
operating console with DTMF code generator and voice communication equipment.

(i) The operating console with code generator has following facilities :

a) Standard DTMF Key Pad for calling 99 stations with two push
button operation.

b) Station group code button A, B, C, D.

c) Push button for general call for calling stations simultaneously.

d) Push button LR for extending long ring at way stations.

e) Special push button 'RT' - for repeating last transmitted station
code.'RS' - to reset the system 'RC' - for row/column frequency check. 'DL' -
for cancellation of code.

(f) Visual indications for System O.K., Display of station code and
power ON indication.

(ii) The communication equipment consists of loudspeaker/microphone with
amplifiers and hand micro telephone and controllers headset.

5.3.3 WAY STATION EQUIPMENT: The way station equipment shall consist of
DTMF decoder which can be assigned any DTMF station code/group code selectable
with DIP switches, voice communication equipment and 2-Wire/4-Wire desk type
control telephone.


5.4 POWER SUPPLIES :


5.4.1 For selective calling system employing DTMF signalling, the following should be
provided :

(a) At control office 12V DC supply (with a ripple factor of 2 mV) shall be
provided from secondary batteries of 12V/80AH with associated charger.

(b) At Wayside Station 12V DC supply (with a ripple factor of 2 mV) which can
vary between +20% to -10% of the nominal value for way station equipment shall be
provided from secondary batteries of 12V/40AH with associated charger.

5.4.2 All secondary batteries should be housed exclusively in a separate room with
provision of exhaust fans.

5.4.3 Standby diesel generators, wherever, provided, should be sufficiently rated to enable
them to take the load of lights and fans during failures of AC mains supply.


5.4.4 All batteries should be adequately insulated from earth.

5.5 EARTHING: All earth connections shall be of approved type as detailed below :-

(i) All earth connections shall be approved type obtained by burying a pipe or
rail of adequate size in the ground.
(ii) The resistance of an earth shall not be more than 10 ohms.
(iii) 4 mm diameter galvanised iron wire adequately supported or secured and
free from bends and spirals should be used.
(iv) The earth wire should be soldered to the wire connected to the earth
terminal on the test panel.. Similarly, it should be securely connected to the earth
electrode.
(v) The ground surrounding the earth electrode should be kept moist by
periodically pouring saline water.
(vi) Where more than one earth has to be installed, they should be separated by a
distance of not less than 2300 mm from each other.
(vii) Where a number of telegraph instruments are provided in the same
telegraph office, separate earth leads shall be provided for each instrument.
(viii) An earth wire should be run from one end to the other, beneath the tables, so
that the earth connection for each instrument is as short as possible. For this purpose,
earth wire of 3 SWG copper should be used.
(ix) Separate earths shall be provided for the return circuits and lightening
discharges. The earth provided on the test panel for testing the circuits shall also be
separate.

5.6 At junctions where two or more control circuits are required to be interconnected
frequently, automatic interconnection, preferably of an approved type should be
provided in lieu of normally operated jack boxes/boards.

5.7 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION

5.7.1 LAYOUT OF CONTROL OFFICE :

a) Control offices and the attached test rooms shall be air-conditioned.

b) The layout of the control office shall, as far as possible, conform to the layout
shown in Annexure III. They should be located, as far as possible, in the ground floor.

c) Control offices, especially the controller's booths, shall be acoustically treated to
eliminate disturbing noises, echoes, etc., to enable use of microphones and
loudspeakers. The reverberation constant of the booth shall not be more than 0.4
seconds.

d) i) The minimum floor area of the controller's booth shall be 12 sq. metres.

ii) The booths shall be provided with diffused lighting by artificial
illumination, avoiding pockets of shadows. The artificial illumination shall
provide an illumination of not less than 110 metre candles on the controller's
table.

iii) The booth shall be colour treated to avoid fatigue to the eyes and shall
be aesthetically pleasing.

iv) The floor shall be covered with linoleum.

v) The doors and sides of booths facing the Chief/Deputy Controller shall
be provided with glass panels on the upper half.


vi) Doors of booths shall be single-leaf, teak-wood flush fitting, self-
closing type.

e) Controller's tables and chairs shall be designed to give maximum facility for
efficient discharge of their duties.

f) A false ceiling shall be provided preferably of an acoustic material such as
'Cellotex', perfotile sheets, etc., to provide good acoustic and thermal insulation. The
ceiling height shall not be less than 3.25m.

g) All equipments except those required for operation by the controllers,
especially equipments producing noise during operation, shall be located in a different
room outside the control office.

h) Batteries, especially secondary cells, shall be located in a separate room
outside the control office.

i) The test room shall be located as close to the control office as possible to enable
the test room staff to attend to any fault promptly.

j) The test room shall have enough floor area to accommodate the test panel and
maintenance spares required for the various equipments. It shall also accommodate
tables and chair for the maintenance staff to carry out overhauling, repairs and
maintenance.

k) While planning a control office, space required for future additions and
alterations should be kept in view.

l) Adequate space should also be earmarked for stationery and filing cases.


5.7.2 INSIDE WIRING IN CONTROL OFFICE:

a) Wire runs to the controller's table shall be terminated on a terminal strip of
approved type, fixed at a suitable place in the rear. The terminal strip shall be
protected by a suitable cover.

b) Wiring for the controller's telephone set, telephone sockets and the selector key
case/push button panel/operating console shall be underneath the table top in a
concealed manner.

c) The selector key case/push button panel/operating console shall be installed on
the left-hand side.

d) Separate conduits or runways shall be provided for communication and high
voltage electric wires.

e) Before constructing a building for a control office, distributing systems for
communication wires shall be included in the building specifications.

f) Facilities for provision of communication wire should be made during
construction of the building to enable concealment of cables and wires, thereby
improving the general appearance of the control office.

g) Mechanical protection should, as far as possible, be provided for cables and
wires to achieve trouble-free service.


h) Terminal and junction boxes should be located suitable to enable maximum
flexibility while carrying out additions or alterations.

i) All incoming line wires underground cables shall be terminated in the test
room before extending them to control office.

j) Where direct termination in the test room is not possible, they should be
terminated on a termination box of approved type and extended to the test
room in a duct or a conduit through the wall.

k) It should be ensured that the entrance cable is not susceptible to damage due to
proximity of water pipes, steam pipes, engine exhausts, electric light or power circuits,
elevator shafts, storage dumps or inflammable materials, etc.

l) The entry should be planned so that it is not objectionable from the stand point
of appearance.

m) All line wires/communication cables entering the building from outside and all
inside wiring shall be terminated in the test room with facilities for cross-connection
and distribution.

n) Test rooms shall be free from overhead piping and the walls should be fire-
proof.

o) Provision of outlets for soldering iron and portable lights shall be made in test
rooms.

p) The area surrounding the test room shall be dry and clear and shall be
constructed so that there is no possibility of the basement getting flooded.

q) Where loudspeakers and microphones are provided for the controller, the
loudspeaker shall be provided with the volume control easily accessible to the
controller. The microphone shall be fitted on an adjustable bracket on arm.

r) Foot switches shall be fixed sufficiently above the floor to prevent water
getting into them.

s) On control circuits, lighting protectors shall be of gas discharge type and they
shall be connected on an earth of approved type.

t) Test panel of an approved type shall be provided in the test room for incoming
wires and inside wires for localising faults.

u) In the case of circuits for which outside line wires/underground cables are
maintained by the P&T Department, the outside wires shall be terminated on a panel
to serve as a demarcating point.

v) Terminals on the panels shall be properly labeled.

w) All apparatus cases and ringing rectifiers for high voltage DC signalling shall
be mounted on a rack of approved type with a minimum clearance of 0.5m all round
and from the floor level.

x) Cable racks, if any, shall be made of longitudinal strips iron or angle iron with
horizontal cross pieces of light material. The size of the material shall be decided on
the basis of the ultimate weight that the rack is expected to carry.


y) Cable racks shall be located so as to be accessible and laid out for the shortest
practicable runs between the various units.


5.7.3 WAY STATIONS :

a) In 2-Wire Overhead Alignment territory all way stations served by STC
Keying System or Push Button System control circuit should be provided with a test
panel of approved type.

b) In 2-Wire Overhead Alignment territory served by STC Keying System or
Push Button System for way stations served by Deputy Control Circuit in addition to
section control circuit, patching facilities should be provided by means of a patching
panel of approved type.

c) In 2-Wire Overhead Alignment territory served by STC Keying System or
Push Button System at wayside stations which are served by control circuits,
operating instructions for operation of test panels for testing and patching where
provided shall be laid down and exhibited for the guidance of the operating staff.

d) Inside wiring in way stations should be carried out in accordance with relevant
instructions under Para 5.7.2.

e) All earths should be of approved type as detailed in Para 5.5.

f) In 2-Wire Overhead Alignment territory for selective calling systems
employing 3.5 Hz DC signalling, three dry cells should be provided as power supply
for each control telephone with selector. Alternatively, six lead acid cells of 40 AH
capacity shall be provided with a battery charger incorporating a smoothing filter. For
push button sending systems, eight dry cells of heavy duty type should be provided at
each way station for the selector equipment. The required voltage for the telephone
may be obtained by choosing a suitable tap from the dry cells provided for the selector
equipment or arranged separately through 3 dry cells.

g) In 2-Wire Overhead Alignment territory served by STC Keying System or
Push Button System at way stations provided with more than one control telephone
with selective calling arrangements, the bells/buzzers should be adjusted to give a
distinct sound to enable identifications of the circuit on which the station staff are
required to attend.


5.8 INSTRUCTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE :


5.8.1 DUAL TONE MULTI FREQUENCY CALLING SYSTEM

CONTROL OFFICE EQUIPMENT

a) For equipments with DTMF signalling proper functioning of the following
keys shall be checked.

i) Group codes A, B, C and D

ii) Long ring LR

iii) General call

iv) Special purpose keys


Reset - RS

Delete - DL

Repeat - RT

b) All visual indications provided on equipment shall be checked.

c) Monthly Maintenance: The following shall be checked:

i) Proper functioning of all station codes including special codes shall be
checked.

ii) Current Drain (max) on 12V DC side shall be as under:

Quiescent : 150 mA
Working : 500 mA
iii) Current consumption of transmitter of Controller's head set and HMT
shall be between 100 and 150mA.

iv) DTMF signalling code level shall be between 0 dBm to - 7dBm across
a load of 600 ohms.

v) Row/column DTMF frequency shall be checked by pressing the 'RC'
button and shall be within the specified limits.

d) Quarterly Maintenance:

(i) Insulation resistance at room temperature of the office wiring when
measured with a 500V megger shall be more than 10 megohms between
conductor to conductor and more than 20 mega ohms between conductor and
Earth.


WAY STATION EQUIPMENT

e) Weekly Maintenance: The following shall be covered :

i) Proper decoding of the set code of the equipment and actuation of
buzzer/ loudspeaker Ring back and LED on the control telephone.

ii) LED indication on telephone shall clear after hand set is lifted of the
cradle.

iii) Correct fitting of fuses and their rating.

iv) Cleaning and proper termination of wires on the terminals on the
rosette and CT box.

v) Telephone cord is in good condition and connected properly.

vi) Specific gravity of battery shall be 1210 and battery voltage shall be 12
volts - 10%, + 20%.

vii) Cleaning of battery terminals and vent plugs.

f) Monthly Maintenance : The following shall be covered :


insertion loss shall not exceed the following values

i) 0.1 db with the handset 'on' cradle switch.

ii) 0.3 db with the handset 'off' cradle switch.

iii) 1.0 db with the press to talk switch pressed.

iv) Current drain (Max) on 12V dc side shall be as under:

Quiescent Actuated

20mA 100mA

v) Conversation between the controller and way station shall be checked
for satisfactory audibility and clarity.

g) Quarterly Maintenance : The following shall be covered :

i) The transmitter inset in telephone should be in good condition and
fitted properly inside. The resistance of inset shall be checked to be between
150 and 200 Ohms.

ii) The receive inset in telephone shall be fitted properly and resistance
shall be 150 ohms to 200 Ohms.

iii) Insulation resistance at ambient temperature of inside wiring shall be
more than 20 megohms between conductor to earth and more than 10
megohms between conductor to conductor when tested with a 500V megger.


5.9 TESTING OF CONTROL CIRCUITS

5.91 TEST PANEL: A test panel of approved type should be installed in all control
offices for the use of the maintenance staff to facilitate the following :

a) Disconnection of control office equipment to enable independent testing of
control circuits with either the way station equipments or the control office
equipments.

b) Patching facilities for substitution by radio patch, of deputy control or spare
lines to restore communication on interrupted circuits.

c) Monitoring of all circuits without interruption to the normal working of
circuits.

d) Provision for a universal calling device to call any station on any circuit.

e) Provision for calling attention of the maintenance staff by the controllers.

f) Provision of a line test set to provide for the following tests :

i) Voltage measurements of test, local and line signalling batteries.

ii) Measurement of line resistance.

iii) Measurement of leakage to earth


iv) Location of earth faults.

v) Measurement of foreign voltage on line.

vi) Impulse ratio check during signalling.

vii) Line leakage measurements.

viii) Telephone communication with line under test.


5.9.2 TEST OSCILLATOR.: A standard line test oscillator with a dB meter should be
provided to carry out measurement of line transmission loss and equipment insertion
loss.

5.9.3 MEGGER: A 100/500 volt megger should be provided to carry out insulation tests
on internal wiring and external lines.

5.9.4 PERIODIC TESTS:

a) All control circuits should be periodically tested by the inspector incharge to
check the condition of inside wiring in control offices and way-stations, external line
and cables, and control office and wayside station equipment.

b) Inside wiring should be tested for insulation once in three months with a 500V
megger. This should include cross insulation between conductors and leakage to
earth. The cross insulation should be above 10 megohms and the insulation to earth
should not be less than 20 megohms.

c) Circuits transmission loss should be measured at intervals not exceeding three
months.

d) Line loop resistance should also be measured once in three months. The loop
resistance and disparity between each limb shall not exceed 5% of normal calculated
value.

e) Equipment insertion losses due to magneto bells, bridging coils and manual
exchange boards should not exceed the maximum permissible losses.

f) Insertion loss of control telephones should be measured once in three months
to ensure that the maximum permissible losses are not exceeded from the limits given
in IRS specifications.

g) In the case of lines maintained by the P&T deptt. the above tests should be
carried out jointly with their representatives.

h) Result of such tests should be entered in a register maintained separately at
each sectional inspector's headquarters and in the office of DSTE/Sr.DSTE.

i) Any defects noticed during such tests should be rectified on the spot and the
circuit retested before proceeding with further tests.

j) All loss measurements should be carried out by means of a test set provided
with an audio oscillator giving a variable output from -10 dB to +10 dB with
reference to 1 milliwatt across 600 ohms, between 300 and 3000 Hz. The dB meter
should have a sensitivity of -30 dB with reference to 1 milliwatt across 600 ohms.


k) All tests should preferably be carried out for the smallest subsections.

5.9.5 Testing at VF Repeater :

a) The insulation of the windings of transformers with respect to earth shall be
checked using the bottom tag of each link and the earth strip (under discharger
connected condition) and the value so measured shall not be less than 10,000
Megohms, when tested with a 500V insulation tester.

b) A tone of 1 KHz at 0 dbm shall be fed to the primary of the transformer of side
circuit 1 at the respective terminal of the link. The level shall be measured at the
secondary at the respective link terminal. The loss shall be les than 0.6 db. The
secondary of side circuit 2 shall have no influence of the tone.

c) The limbs of size circuit 1 & the side circuit 2 shall be shorted individually and
to this the tone of 1 KHz shall be fed. The tone shall be available between 5 & 6 of
the phantom transformer. This tone shall have no influence at terminals 5 & 8 of the
both 1120:1120 transformer connected to the side circuits.

d) These tests shall be repeated for all the quad connections.


5.10 CONTROL INTERRUPTIONS

5.10.1 PROCEDURE

a) As soon as interruption such as complete ringing failure, very low speech, hum,
noise or heavy induction on a control circuit for more than 10 minutes, the controller
on duty shall proceed to localise the shortest faulty section with the help of the way
station operating staff and other section controllers.

b) Technical staff in the control office and way-station may be called upon to assist
in the localisation whenever any technical difficulty arise.

c) As soon as the faulty section is localised, the matter should be brought to the
notice of the Telecommunication maintainer on duty, who will confirm the faulty
section.

d) This should be followed up by the issue of a 'XI' message by the controller,
addressed to the concerned lineman, EST, SDOT,DET or the P&T sub-division
concerned as also to the inspector incharge of the control office. Inspector incharge
of the section under which the interruption has taken place, and the ASTE/DSTE
giving details of time of interruption, name of circuit, interrupted section and the
nature of interruption/fault. Where the cable/overhead alignment is owned by the
railway, similar action shall be taken, intimation of faults in this case should be given
only to the concerned railway officials.

e) Besides a message, the lineman should also be ordered to patrol the interruption
section through a telephonic advice to the station master of the headquarters station of
the lineman.

f) Lineman at headquarters on either side of the interrupted section should be
advised as possible to enable patrolling from both directions.


g) In the event of any delay in the patrolling of the interrupted section for any reason,
the fact should be brought to the notice of the EST/SDOT/DET by the
Maintainer/Inspector incharge of the control office.

h) After confirming the faulty section, the maintainer should proceed to arrange for
substitution of the Deputy Control/Spare line to restore the interrupted circuit with the
assistance of the controller.

i) Restoration of the circuit after substitution can be taken as a confirmation that the
office equipments connected to the interrupted circuit are not defective.

j) If a substitution is not possible for any reason or the circuit is not restored even
after substitution, the section maintainer/inspector should be called upon to check the
office equipments in the interrupted section and promptly rectify the defects, if any.

k) On rectification of the fault, the controller shall issue XR/XT message to all
concerned giving details of the time of interruption, name of circuit, interrupted
section and the time of removal of fault.

l) In the event of the lineman reporting 'no fault found' after patrolling, in spite of the
interruption persisting as observed by the controller of the telecommunication
maintainer in the control office, the interrupted section should be jointly tested by the
Telecommunication Inspector incharge of the said section with the concerned EST of
the P&T Department.

m) A similar joint test should also be undertaken in the case of repeated interruptions
in the same section.

5.10.2 CHART OF JURISDICTION OF BSNL/MTNL AND RAILWAY OFFICIALS.

A chart showing the jurisdiction of concerned P&T and railway officials shall be
provided in the control office for guidance of the controller.

5.10.3 QUARTERLY MEETINGS.

Wherever Overhead Alignment is maintained by BSNL/MTNL, quarterly meeting
may be held at CSTE/Dy.CSTE level with GM/DGM concerned to discuss and
reconcile the line interruption reports, failure records and initiate suitable action in
respect of minimising the number and duration of interruptions.



5.11 INSPECTION RECORDS AND REPORTS


5.11.1 RECORD AND REPORTS BY INSPECTORS : The inspector incharge of the
control office shall :

a) Keep a record of all interruptions on control line as well as failure of way station
and control office equipments.

b) Prepare a monthly line interruption and failure report and submit it to the
Divisional Signal & Telecommunication Engineer in duplicate.

5.11.2 RECORD AND REPORTS BY DSTE/Sr.DSTE.

The Sr. Divisional Signal & Telecommunication Engineer shall


a) Discuss the monthly line interruption report in a joint meeting with the
Divisional Engineer (Telegraphs)so that suitable action in respect of minimising the
duration and the number of interruptions is taken promptly.

b) Forward one copy of the report to the Chief Signal & Telecommunication
Engineer for his information after scrutiny of the line interruption and failure reports.

c) Maintain record of control interruptions, preferably graphically, showing

i) The total number of interruptions and their duration, and

ii) The efficiency of line operation.

The efficiency is calculated as under :

A-B
Efficiency = ------------ x 100
A
Where A = Total working hours in a month
B = Total working hours lost on account of line interruptions.





ANNEXURE I



CALCULATION OF APPROXIMATE LENGTH AND NUMBER OF STATIONS ON A
CONTROL CIRCUIT

Considering the restriction of 20 dB as the permissible loss on control circuits, the length of
the circuit for satisfactory speech can be estimated after allowing for the insertion loss of
telephone and the wiring at the stations. In a hypothetical case where one station is talking to
the controller and two others listening in, the permissible line loss will be 15.6 dB (allowing
for 3 dB insertion loss of telephone in speaking condition and 0.2 dB while listening and 1 dB
for wiring at stations. This loss is obtained on a 400 km circuit with 57 kg/km copper wire.

However, for determining the number of stations that can be connected in the circuit
signalling voltage is an important factor and from the graph attached it can be seen that for
400 km line (2200 ohm loop resistance) with 240 V Signalling voltage, about 60 selectors (or
telephones) can be connected and with 200 V, it can be 40 selectors.

Similar calculations can be made for other requirements of Signalling voltage.





ANNEXURE II





RS DL RT RC

1 2 3 A 697 LOW
4 5 6 B 770 GROUP
7 8 9 C 852 FREQUENCY
G 0 LR D 941 (Hz)
1209 1336 1447 1633

HIGH GROUP FREQUENCY (Hz)


Note : 1. The frequency tolerance is 1.5%
2. ABCD For Group Calling
3. LR For Long Ring
4. G For General Call
5. RS Reset
6. DL Cancel
7. RT Last Code Repeat
8. RC Row/Column Frequency



STANDARD DTMF FREQUENCY



















































3

M
e
t
e
r
s

Deputy
Controller-I
5 x 4 M
Deputy Controller-II
5 x 4 M
C
h
i
e
f

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

Test
&
Maintainer
Room
5 x 4 M
4 Meters
ANNEXURE III

Typical layout of a control office
Note: Power plant room shall be located outside
Controller
room
Controller
room
Controller
room
Controller
room


ANNEXURE - IV



LIMITS OF LOSSES ON TELEPHONE LINES

1. Subscribers line
Type of exchange Transmission standard Maximum permissible
Exchange Voltage loop resistance of subs-
cribers line in Ohms.

Magneto 00 375

CB Manual 40 V 375

AUTO 24 V 325

AUTO 40 V 450

AUTO 48 or 50 V 600


The maximum loop resistance of 375 Ohms for Magneto and semi-CB Exchanges is
permissible with local batteries of not less than 2 V with a maximum internal
resistance of 6 Ohms. For subscriber line with loop resistance of 375 to 450 ohms,
local battery should have 3 cells of not less than 3 V with internal resistance not
exceeding 3 ohms.

2. Junction Lines Maximum Loop Resistance

(a) Junction lines connecting two local exchanges 350 Ohms
Of any type.
(b) Junction lines from Trunk Exchange to local 350 Ohms
exchange of any type.

(c) Junction lines plus subscriber line from local 300 Ohms
in (b) if latter is connected to a second local
exchange.
NOTE:-- It will be observed that the standard for 1 and 2 are stated in terms of
permissible maximum loop resistance instead of being given as limits of
transmission loss in decibels. This is to allow for losses which occur due the
conditions of operation of subscribers instruments and line loss only.

9. Trunk lines
Maximum permissible transmission loss is 8.7 dB at 800 Hz including
repeating coils main lines ( connecting main trunk centres )
Maximum permissible loss at 800 Hz for secondary lines ( connecting small
exchanges or RAXs to trunk centres ) is 10 dB.
4. Non-exchange connections ( applicable in railway control circuits) 25 dB.

5. The overall transmission loss from one subscriber to another in any part of a
telephone system shall not exceed 32 dB.
When trunks and junctions form part of a telephone system, they shall be so
arranged that the built-up circuit over which conversation is to take place
shall not exceed 28 dB. An allowance of one decibel must be made for each
magneto exchange included in the built up circuit and 1.5 decibel for each
CB exchange.
Circuits shall be designed so that equivalent length of the circuit in terms of
loss does not exceed :
Subscriber loop to exchange of all types 4.5 dB.
Trunks between two trunk exchanges 12.0 dB.
Junction between two exchanges 4.5 dB.


6. Table of transmission equivalents of instruments and exchange
(a) Apparatus connected in shunt across telephone circuits :
dB.
Bell magneto 1,000 ohms .. 0.461
Bell magneto 1,000 ohms in series with 2 F condenser .. 0.461
Coil bridging 600 ohms. .. 0.922
Coil bridging 1,000 ohms .. 0.461
Coil bridging 600 +600ohms .. 0.461
Coil retardation 1,000 ohms .. 0.461
Indicators ( tubular type ) 100 ohms. .. 0.461
Coil repeating 4006 A .. 0.692
Coil repeating VTR Gd. .. 0.300
Coil repeating AT 4128 2 .. 0.326
(b) Trunk exchange cord circuit * .. 0.462 to 0.922
( c) Magneto Exchange cord circuit* 0. 462 to 0.922
(d) Junction line cord circuits* 0.22

* These assume that the operator is not listening in on the line. With ordinary cord circuits
and the operators key thrown to speak, the loss will increase from 0.922dB to 4.61dB, unless
provision is made for a high efficiency monitoring circuit on the trunk exchange cord circuits,
in which case the operators can listen in without causing large loss which occurs when the
speak key is thrown.

CHAPTER - VI

Video Surveillance System

6.1. Introduction:

6.1.1 Video Surveillance System is an important security requirement to be provided at
waiting hall, railway yards, workshops, reservation counter, parking area, main
entrance/ exit, platforms, foot over bridges etc. of railway station and others
railway establishments to capture images of commuters & public and to carry out
analysis.

6.1.2 Video Surveillance System mainly consist of indoor & outdoor fixed cameras,
indoor & outdoor P/T/Z dome cameras, Indoor and Outdoor IP Cameras,
Single/multi channel Video Encoders, video management hardware & software,
Recording servers, switches, color monitor etc. for surveillance of different
locations of Railway stations and other establishments from centralized location.

6.2. System Description:

6.2.1 Video Surveillance System shall be preferably end to end IP based with either IP
cameras or single/multi channel encoders placed along with analog camera as
per site requirement.

6.2.2 The recording of the video shall be on an open architecture, non embedded
based recorder server from reputed manufacturers like IBM/HP/Dell.

6.2.3 The system shall be able to work on both wired as well as wireless network. The
wireless network is envisaged for extreme areas like, yards, foot over bridges
and any other area in the station where cabling is difficult to install and maintain.

6.2.4 The entire system shall be based on non proprietary open architecture where the
Video Management software can work and integrate with any make of standard
cameras, and IT hardware.

6.2.5 Video Surveillance System to be provided at stations and other railways
installations shall consist of Fixed cameras / Fixed dome camera, PTZ Dome
cameras, Single/multi channel Encoders, Recording Servers and PCs to view on
TFT/LCD monitors and associated Ethernet cable, fiber cable, video cable,
power cable, twisted pair cable etc.

6.2.6 It shall be possible to integrate the surveillance system using the existing LAN /
WAN infrastructure on optical / microwave backbone network of Railways.

6.2.7 In IP based video surveillance system, the cameras shall be provided at different
locations so that the output is available as ethernet and connected to the
backbone to the control room.

6.2.8 Each camera shall have a video at 4CIF/2CIF and 25 frames and a dual stream
capability such that the viewing and recording at different resolutions and frames
per second are possible.

6.2.9 The storage shall be on a recording server which will be a standard IBM/HP/Dell/
make PC server. The recording shall be preferably stored for atleast 7 days at
4CIF/2CIF, 25 frames per second.

6.2.10 In small stations, the viewing and recording shall take place in different or same
PC server as required by purchaser.

6.2.11 Possible applications of analytics software over the IP based video surveillance
system, for required number of cameras for specific stations, as defined by
purchaser shall include generating various type of alarms on the basis of size of
object and direction of movement. etc.

6.3. General Requirements:

6.3.1 Original Equipment Manufacturer of Video Surveillance System shall have base
and service support in all major cities of India or through authorized partners.

6.3.2 Manufactured products shall have quality system compliance and shall be UL
and EN and FCC certified.

6.3.3 The Video Management software should be able to integrate any make of
standard cameras. It should be preferable that all IP cameras, Encoders
connected to Analog cameras and Video management software should be from
the same manufacturer as all these equipments communicate directly with each
other.

6.3.4 All the encoders, IP cameras shall be freely accessible and programmable from
the control room.

6.3.5 It shall be possible to view any camera from the Divisional, Zonal Headquarters
and from the Railway Board at the time of emergency or when ever desired.

6.3.6 Every control room of surveillance system shall be capable of getting connected
to the optical or other communication backbone of Railways and shall be
preferably air conditioned to ensure proper reliability of video surveillance sysem.

6.3.7 The power supply available at the stations shall be 230 V / 50 Hz AC +/- 10%.
All modules of the surveillance system should work using this power supply only
with requisite converters, if required.

6.3.8 All the cameras and other modules of Video Surveillance System shall be
modular in construction. In case of upgardation of such modules in future, it shall
be possible to upgrade them without replacing the entire modules.

6.3.9 All equipments in the control room shall be mounted in 19 rack and shall be kept
in AC environment.

6.3.10 Field equipments should have minimum operating temperature of 50
0
C & shall
be IP 66 complaint.

6.4. Technical Requirements:

6.4.1 IP based Video surveillance System for all type of stations should mainly consist
of the following:

i. High resolution Fixed box type color camera with vari focal lens along
with housing and mount.
ii. High resolution Fixed Dome type color camera with lens and housing.
iii. P/T/Z dome color camera (day / night) with 26X Zoom lens.
iv. Single/multi Channel Video encoder in case IP camera is not used
with each port capable of 25 frames and 4 CIF/ 2CIF resolution. This
item will not be required if cameras are IP.
v. Wireless Transmitter/Receiver Unit for yards etc.
vi. 20 LCD/TFT Monitor or viewing.
vii. Digital keyboard for PTZ functionality.
viii. PC Work Station Client Station for viewing on LCD monitor.
ix. Server Hardware.
x. Network Attached Storage (NAS) / RAID Storage Device.
xi. RG 11 armoured video cable.
xii. Armoured 3 core 1.5 sq. mm power cable.
xii. Armoured twisted pair shielded cable.
xiii Optical fiber cable.
xv. Access Switches.
xvi. Aggregation Switches.
xvii. UPS.
xviii. UTP Cat-6 cable for Network etc.
ix. Software inclusive of server software and client software for end-to-
end IP based Video surveillance system.


6.4.2 Fixed box type cameras shall normally be provided in Parking area,
Entrance/Exit, Main Entrance/Exit, platforms, yards or any other locations
decided by purchaser, whereas fixed dome type cameras shall be provided In the
waiting halls, ticket counters, reservation counters, offices etc.

6.4.3 High speed P/T/Z dome cameras shall normally be provided in platforms, foot
over bridges etc. and for general perimeter surveillance.

6.4.4 Wireless system shall normally be used for far away locations, where cabling is
difficult to be installed & maintain like yards, extreme corners of stations etc.

6.4.5 Video Surveillance System consisting of various items as mentioned in Para
6.4.1 shall be as per RDSO specification and schematic shown in diagram 1.

6.5. Maintenance:

6.5.1 Staff are to be trained for maintenance of video surveillance system by system
manufacturer and system integrator during installation & commissioning of
system.

6.5.2 Annual Maintenance Contract should be given to system integrator for proper
upkeep of system.

6.5.3 Necessary action is to be taken to ensure uptime better than 99.5% in
consultation with manufacturer of video surveillance system & system integrator.

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 1 OF End to End IP BASED VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
Server Hardware
Client Workstation
c
c
c
RAID 5 Storage Boxes
Ethernet switched network
consisting of access and
aggregation switches
Fiber Channel Connectivity
Gig Ethernet connectivity
10/100 Base T connectivity
IP PTZ or Analog PTZ
with encoder
IP Fixed Box Camera or
analog camera with
encoder
IP PTZ or Analog PTZ
with encoder
IP Fixed Box Camera or
analog camera with
encoder
IP Fixed Dome Camera or
analog camera with
encoder
Client Workstation
Wireless
Wireless for large distance and hard to wire areas
Wireless
NAS/


CHAPTER VII

LINE PLANT SYSTEMS - OVERHEAD & UNDERGROUND
CABLE

7.1 LINE PLANT SYSTEM - OVERHEAD

7.1.1 SYSTEM
7.1.1.1 TYPE OF LINES

Railway departmental telecommunication lines are usually erected / laid either as
overhead or underground between railway office in railway colonies, large
workshops, station yards and in the block sections along side the track.

7.1.1.2 SPARE CAPACITY

All telegraphic and telephone lines shall, as far as possible, be erected in a manner
that due provisions are kept for any future extensions or extra connection which can
be catered for without considerable alteration to the existing circuits or
reconstruction of the entire alignment.

7.1.1.3 POWER - TELECOMMUNICATION CO- ORDINATION

a) While fixing the route of alignment and position of posts, special attention shall be
paid to the provisions of Indian Electricity Act 1910. Electric Supply Act 1948.
Indian Electricity Rules 1926 (revised) and Indian Telegraph Act (XIII) 1885, as
amended from time to time where overhead (LT-HT) power lines and
telecommunication lines exist.

b) In case of power lines belonging to a private or public utility undertaking other than
the railways and its infringement on the proposed line is apprehended, the matter
may be referred to the Standing Committee on Power Telecommunication Co-
ordination for arbitration.

c) Where licensees have power lines already erected and it becomes necessary to put
up telecommunication lines in close proximity to or across these power lines, 10
days notice in writing of the proposed erection shall be given to the licensee, as well
as to the Electrical Inspector (the Electrical Inspector in case of railway power lines
is the Chief Electrical Engineer of the Railway). The licensees will be required to
arrange for the guards with in reasonable time, the cost of all works pertaining to
guarding, additions, alterations to the existing lines to avoid interference physical or
inductive shall be borne by the owner of the line, which is erected later as provided
in the Indian Electricity Act.

7.1.1.4 NORMS FOR PROVIDING BOOSTER TRANSFORMERS AND RETURN
CONDUCTORS (BT/RC) IN ELECTRIFIED AREAS.
(a) The longitudinal induced voltage on DOT line due to Railway electrification shall
not exceed 60 Volts under normal working conditions and 430 volts under faulty

conditions.

(b) The limit of 5 Volts shall be applicable only for transverse induced voltage on DOT
lines.
(c) The rail screening factor shall be 0.28 where all four (4) rails are conducting on a
double track section. In all other cases this factor may be taken as 0.44.
(d) Above protection shall be provided by Railways for installation of DoT circuits
prior to 17.5.94 while for future installations, DOT itself shall take necessary
measures for protection.
(e) In case of urban/suburban areas where DoT local exchange circuits are provided
more intensively but BT/RC have not been provided as per guidelines mentioned
above, a limited provision of BT/RC at normal spacing (2.66 Kms.) may be
provided in the station areas with the approval of CPM/DRM/Project Incharge.

7.1.2
SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS

7.1.2.1 PROTECTION FROM POWER LINE INTERFERENCE

All telecommunication lines shall be protected from physical interference from
power circuits and other extraneous circuits where they exist in close proximity of
the telecommunication lines or they are crossing the same. The portions likely to be
interfered with by the power lines shall be protected by provision of guards between
the two systems to prevent contact between the two lines, should any conductor
break.

As far as communication circuits are concerned generally underground cables in
busy areas are used when overhead alignments are not feasible. Cables are also used
for road, track and other crossings. These cables may carry control and other
communication circuits.

7.1.2.2 CROSSING OF TELECOMMUNICATION AND POWER LINES

Except in the case of electric traction circuits, the telecommunication lines shall
cross below the power lines where these are generally of the heavier gauge than the
telecommunication wires and possibility of breakage is less. This is also due to the
fact that the telecommunication lines require more frequent attention for
maintenance and are subject to frequent reconstruction. For crossing the
telecommunication lines above the power lines, specific approval of each case shall
be obtained from the competent authority who may be Electrical Engineer of
Railways.

7.1.2.3 CLEARANCES IN WORKSHOP AND STATION AREAS

Consistent with the economic and engineering considerations, the headway should
be kept as high as possible in loco sheds, workshops and other portions of the station
yards where cranes are permitted to move with their gibs up crossing should as far as
possible be avoided. Where crossing cannot be avoided, cables should be used for
such crossings.



7.1.2.4 LIMIT OF CROSS - ARMS IN A SINGLE POST

An alignment consisting of single posts shall not carry more than (a) 8 nos. of 2/4 -
way cross - arms, or (b) 6 nos of 6 - way cross - arms, or (c) 5 nos of 8 - way cross
arms. For heavy alignments up to 8 nos. of 8 - way cross arms may be used on
coupled posts of approved design.

7.1.3 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION OF OVERHEAD LINES

As per policy of Board all overhead alignment system of BSNL as well as Railways
should be replaced in phased manner by 2008with OFC/Quad cable systems.
Therefore detailed guidelines about erection and installation of overhead lines have
been excluded from this edition of Telecom Manual. However in extreme
circumstances where it is required the same should be followed as detailed in old
Telecom Manual (1971 edition).


7.1.4 MAINTENANCE SHEDULE FOR OVERHEAD ALIGNMENT

7.1.4.1 MAINTENANCE
a) The inspector shall give due consideration to preventive maintenance during their
routine maintenance rounds and shall impress upon the linemen, maintainers and
other staff the importance of preventive maintenance.

b) While attending breakdowns or doing restoration work, minor repairs and
replacements shall be simultaneously attended to in the vicinity of the breakdown to
prevent future interruptions.

c) The general standard of maintenance of telecommunication lines shall be such that
the line losses are kept within the limits prescribed in the Annexure A
d) The line staff shall continuously watch the line plant in order to strengthen
vulnerable spots and thus prevent failures.
e) All repairs and replacement shall be carried out in accordance with the practices
mentioned earlier and specified material shall only be used except in case of
emergencies.
f) Repairs or replacements shall be done in such a manner that interruption to other
circuits on the alignments are avoided or at least kept to the minimum.

g) Where lines of departments other than railways exist close to departmental
alignments, necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid any entanglement of wires
with the other alignments while repairs or replacements are in progress.

h) Line diagram and pole diagrams in the form of map for all main alignment and
branches shall be maintained up-to-date in the office of the DSTE / ASTE and the
telecommunication supervisors.

i) All linemen maintainers and JEs shall also be supplied with up to date line diagrams
for the respective beats and sections.

7.1.4.2 OVER HEAD LINES


7.1.4.2.1 INSPECTION

a) Detailed inspection of all the component parts of an alignment are absolutely
essential for maintaining satisfactory communication service.

b) The inspection shall be carried out at all levels right from the foot patrol khalasi to
the telecommunication supervisor incharge, at prescribed intervals.

c) Those alignments or circuits which are subject to frequent and long duration
interruption, as may be evident from the periodical interruption reports, shall be
inspected by the DSTE/ ASTE as and when required.

d) During the course of inspection of a line, each pole, guy, tie bar, cross-arm U bolt,
insulator with stalk, jumpers and wire joints shall be inspected to determine whether
they have adequate strength and are otherwise fit to remain in service. The life of a
rail post or other components may be greatly shortened by careless inspection.

e) The lines maintained by the P&T will be inspected by the maintainers of that
department. However, officers and inspectors should observe the general conditions
of the alignments while travelling in the train or trolley and whenever any defect is
noticed, these should be intimated to the concerned officials.
7.1.4.2.2 INSPECTION OF POLES

a) Each pole shall be visually examined from all sides from the ground to the top for
evidence of corrosion, cracks and other defects which may seriously affect the
strength of the post.

b) Each pole shall be inspected below the ground line at suitable intervals to ensure
that the buried parts are not corroded.

7.1.4.2.3 CROSS ARMS

a) While inspecting cross-arms, it shall be carefully observed that these are not
corroded and are in perfect alignments securely fixed to the rail post.

b) It shall also be checked that the nuts on the U bolts are not loose and the bolts are
not twisted.

7.1.4.2.4 INSULATORS WITH STALK

a) Broken or damaged insulators and twisted or bent stalks should immediately be
replaced.

b) The insulators should always be kept clean.

7.1.4.2.5 JUMPERS AND WIRE JOINTS

a) Wire joints shall be carefully inspected for looseness and inadequate or dry
soldering.


b) Jumpers shall be checked for their slackness and for proper clearance from the
conductors.

7.1.4.2.6 GUYS AND STAYS

a) While inspecting the guys, their tightness shall be checked.

b) Guy anchors shall be inspected for any corrosion or other deterioration in their
condition affecting their strength.

c) Stay wire shall be examined to check that there are no broken strands.

d) Threaded portion of nuts of the straining screws shall be inspected to see that they
are not damaged.

7.1.4.2.7 OTHER ITEMS FOR INSPECTION

In addition to the above, the following require particular attention of
linemen/Inspectors during the course of inspection:

a) Headway at railway and road crossing

b) Termination arrangements

c) Posts getting out of alignment due to sinking or being bent over.

d) Power line crossing guards

e) Insulators off brackets.

f) Bird nests on insulators

g) Too much sag in conductors

h) Inadequate separation between wires

i) Cloth pieces, kite strings, tree branches, creepers, vegetation, etc., on wire.

7.1.4.2.8 FREQUENCY OF INSPECTION

a) The roster of the linemen/maintainers should preferably be prepared in such a
manner to enable him to attend to the remotest part of the alignment in his beat at
least once a week. This frequency may be relaxed to once a fortnight in the case of
less important circuits.

b) The JE/SE incharge of a section should preferably inspect all the main and branch
alignment in his section at least once a month.

c) The SSE shall carry out the inspection of all sections under him at least once in 3

months.

7.1.4.2.9 INSPECTION REPORTS

All SSE/SE shall prepare exhaustive inspection reports giving due consideration to
all the details mentioned above and shall submit the same to their superiors
indicating the remedial action proposed to be taken against each item. An Inspection
report register should be maintained in DSTE /ASTE's office and a periodical
review of the compliance of the proposed remedial actions must be made at suitable
intervals.

7.1.4.2.10 TROLLIES

Where departmental alignments are situated in big railway yards or along the track
in the section, push trollies or motor trollies may be used for inspection and material
trollies, for carrying materials to site, subject to trolley rules in force.

7.1.4.2.11 LINE FAILURES, OVERHEAD LINES

7.1.4.2.11.
1
PRECAUTIONS

Necessary action has to be taken to avoid failures as stated below:

a) Bird nests form constant source of nuisance and extra care should be taken in the
crow nesting season.

b) Branches over-hanging or leaning towards the alignment should be removed.

c) Flaws, kinks, etc., in wires usually results from careless handling of the wires. These
should be removed as and when noticed. Wire having too many joints in the same
span should be replaced.

d) In the event of the fire occurring in the close proximity of a line of copper
conductor, a piece should be removed from the exposed section and tested to see
whether it has been annealed. If so, all wires shall be replaced to prevent failures.

e) Wires in railway yard tend to rust and corrode as they are exposed to smoke. These
spots require frequent inspection and replacement.

7.1.4.2.11.
2
FAULT LOCATION

a) When a fault occurs on the line and the communication service is completely
suspended or rendered unsatisfactory immediate steps to restore the communication
shall be taken. To clear fault and to restore the communication, it is very essential to
know the type and probable location of the fault. Following are the type of faults
that generally occur on a telecommunication system.

i) Partial earth and total earth on one or both the conductors of a circuit.

ii Dead short between two conductors of the same circuit or between conductors of

) different circuits.

iii
)
Intermittent contact faults.

iv
)
Foreign contact fault.

b) Once it is ascertained that it is a line fault, the test room maintainer will alert the
lineman in the vicinity of the faulty section describing the nature of the fault and the
probable location by telephone, if possible and by telegram.

c) The lineman shall immediately proceed by the quickest available route and mode of
conveyance to the location given and cover the line between points indicated.

d) They should take with them their complete tool kit and reasonable quantity of spare
parts and stores consistent with the nature of fault and the strength of available staff.

e) If the source of trouble is not discovered by inspecting from running train, the
lineman shall foot patrol the section examining all suspicious spots more closely
keeping in touch with the test room and giving necessary tests.

f) The controller in case of fault on control lines, and maintainer - in- charge of the test
room shall give all necessary assistance to the line staff and co-operate in localising
the fault and giving the necessary test. Whenever feasible, the controller will also
arrange out-of -course stoppage of the first available train for lineman to proceed to
the location of the fault.

g) Once the fault has been located and extent of damage ascertained, the lineman will
take necessary remedial action, keeping the test room fully informed.

h) He should also place the demand for spare parts and material required.

i) The maintainer in the test room, controller and the line staff at site shall fully co-
operate in conducting the necessary interim tests to restore communication within
the shortest possible period.

j) The lineman shall make all repairs and replacements in a prescribed manner using
only specified materials as far as practicable.

7.1.4.2.12 LINEMAN PATROLLING

The lineman before leaving his headquarters station shall advise the test room about
his destination, where he may be contacted if required.

7.1.4.2.13 GENERAL BREAK-DOWN

In case of a general break down due to storm or heavy rains, maintainer in the
section shall immediately endeavour to ascertain the nature and location of damage
and then intimate the test room immediately. After having notified the SSE/SE/JE
incharge, maintainer shall proceed to the site of break-down taking the section
lineman for assistance.


7.1.4.2.14 SPARE STORES
a) In addition to tools, requisite quantities of spare stores shall be stocked with each
lineman who is required to move out when called upon by the maintainer in the test
room.
b) The actual quantities of different spare stores to be stocked with the JE/SE and
lineman shall be determined from the quarterly and annual consumption of various
spares in a particular section or alignment.
c) The recommended quantities of spare stores to be stocked with the lineman have
been given in Annexure B
d) To enable the lineman to attend to routine faults and make minor repairs to restore
communication quickly, the tools and plants detailed in Annexure-C may be
supplied to them in quantities as considered necessary.
e) In addition to the tools supplied to the line staff, adequate stocks of tools and
equipment shall be maintained at the headquarters by the JE/SEs, for the use of their
gangs to enable them to readily tackle major break-downs or heavy replacements.
The recommended quantities of various tools to be stocked with the JE/SE have
been detailed in Annexure-D

7.1.4.3 LINE INTERRUPTION REPORTS - OVERHEAD LINES

7.1.4.3.1 PROCEDURE

a) The efficiency of the maintenance of lines and the necessity for special attention
being paid to any particular section which may be subjected to long interruption is to
some extent determined by the line interruption reports of the concerned section.

b) These reports shall be prepared monthly by all the maintainers for their respective
beats and submitted to their JE/SE incharge who will reconcile them with the test
room log register.

c) After reconciliation, the Inspector shall compile a consolidated interruption report
circuit wise in the same form as the control room log book and submit to the
DSTE/ASTE.

d) These interruption reports form a valuable record in summarising the maintenance
work carried out during a particular period and the resulting efficiency of circuit
maintained during the period. The reports shall be suitably interpolated in the shape
of efficiency graphs for each circuit affording a visual indication of the efficiency of
various circuits during the previous month. The monthly graphs from which
inference can be taken to plan the renewal and strengthening programme for weak
and vulnerable alignments in the division. However, if the monthly interruption
reports of a particular section indicate persistent long duration failures, a detailed
cause analysis may be implemented by the DSTE or /ASTE and if considered
necessary, he may enhance the frequency of inspection at various level and also the
frequency of submission of reports from monthly to fortnightly.

e) The respect of circuits maintained by the P&T, the reconciliation of the reports shall
be done monthly with the respective Engineering Supervisor by the
Telecommunication Supervisor and with the respective Divisional Engineer

Telegraphs by the DSTE /ASTE. The circuit efficiency figures will be calculated on
the basis of circuit hour lost due to interruptions for each circuit and graphs for
efficiency shall be maintained in the office of the DSTE/ASTE and
Telecommunication Supervisor. The efficiency of the circuits will further be
discussed in a quarterly meeting between the Post Master General / Director
Telegraphs of the P&T Circle and the CSTE/Dy. CSTE of the Railway.



7.2

LINE PLANT (UNDERGROUND CABLE)

7.2.1
7.2.1.1
SYSTEM
UNDERGROUND CABLES

As far as communication circuits are concerned generally underground cables in
busy areas are used when overhead alignments are not feasible. Cables are also used
for road, track and other crossings. These cables may carry control and other
communication circuits.

7.2.2 SPECIFICATION & PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS

7.2.2.1 TYPES OF CABLES

The following types of underground cables are generally used for various
telecommunication circuits as indicated.

a) Cable Quad 0.9 mm conductor dia as per IRS specification. These are 4/6 quad
polythene insulated jelly filled cable and used for control circuits and block
interfaces.

b) Multi pair PIJF cable as per IRS specification. These are generally used for branch
cables branching off from the main cable or for outdoor subscriber or extension
circuit.

c)



Cable Switch Board/Tip of sizes 0.5 mm / 0.6 mm conductor dia as per IRS/TEC
specification. These are generally used for indoor applications such as distribution to
various telephone subscribers in a same building, MDF to exchange wiring etc.

d) Earlier a type of cable containing paper as well as polythene insulated copper quads
were used in RE area. This is now obsolete but old installations are still in use. Such
cable system will be described in separate chapter.

7.2.2.2 SIZES OF CABLES

The different sizes of cables to be used for various telecommunication circuits are
detailed in the following table:

a) OUTDOOR UNDER GROUND

i) Sizes of conductor Circuit


0.5 mm cond Dia PIJF or 1.83 kg/km (6.5
lb/mile)
Subscriber's connection up to 5
kms.

0.63 mm cond. Dia. PIJF or 2.81 kg/km (10
lb/mile)
Subscriber's connections not
exceeding 10 km.

0.9 mm cond. Dia. PIJF or 5.65 kg/km (20
lb/mile)
Tie lines, control circuits and long
distance trunk circuits.

ii
)
INDOOR


0.5 mm ATC Switch Board / Tip 1.76 kg/km Local subscriber's connection in a
building, exchange to MDF wiring
etc.

0.6 mm ATC Switch Board / Tip 2.52 kg/km Trunk connections etc.
b) The size of the telephone exchange cables, shall be specified in a manner indicating
the number of pairs, dia of conductor, armoured or unarmoured as illustrated below:

50 pair, 0.63 mm cond. dia armoured polythene insulated polythene sheathed jelly
filled telephone cable as per IRS : TC-41/1990.
7.2.2.3 TESTING CABLE BEFORE LAYING

a) Before the cable is laid, it shall be tested for insulation and continuity of the cores.

b) Bedding and armouring shall also be inspected to see that there has been no damage
during transit or in storage.

7.2.2.4 vi
)
LAYING OUT THE CABLE

a) For laying out cables, the cable drums shall be mounted on cable-wheels.

b) The drum on the wheel shall be brought to one end of the trench and the end of the
cable freed and put into the trench.

c) The cable-wheels shall then be drawn along the road or track.

d) A party of labours shall follow the drum and guide the cable from the road into the
trench carefully so that the cable is not damaged or bent unduly.

e) In case where the wheels are not available, the drum shall be mounted on an axle at
one end of the trench and cable paid out and carried by labourers.

f) In no case, shall the drum be rolled off on to the road for laying the cable and the
cable dragged on the ground for laying purposes.

7.2.2.5 v) GENERAL

a) While excavating earth for trenches or making other pits necessary for installation of

cable junction boxes in between the tracks or in close vicinity of the track the
Permanent Way Inspector or his representative shall be present.

b) Trenches running parallel to the track shall be filled up and rammed properly before
sunset on each working day whenever required. Special care, in this regard shall be
taken during the monsoon season and in alluvial soil.

c) Whenever a road-crossing or rail-crossing is encountered in busy areas where
expansion is definitely anticipated and also digging of trenches will cause serious
interruption to traffic, it will be advisable to lay one or more spare length of cables
of sufficient length for future jointing so that re-opening the trenches will not be
necessary.

d) Where earthen-ware pipes or trenches are used, additional trenches may be kept
ready for future expansion.

7.2.2.6 CABLE TERMINATION

a) Cables can be terminated in any of the following methods:

i) Cable - heading.

ii
)
Pot - heading.

iii
)
FRP DP Box.

iv
)
Direct termination.

v) Krone type DP Box or similar
b) Cable heading shall be used for long distance circuits, viz., telegraph and telephone
trunk circuits and is also preferred for adoption in case of composite cables.

c) For local telephone cables and other short distance circuits which are likely to be
affected by moisture, pot-heading with approved type cable termination boxes shall
be used.

d) PIJF cable of various sizes shall be terminated through FRP DP Box.

e) Cable which are not affected by moisture may be terminated directly.

7.2.2.7 JOINTING OF PIJF CABLE

i) PIJF cable armoured/unarmoured are jointed with thermo shrinking technique.

ii
)
The jointing material is readily available in the form of a jointing kit. For different
sizes of cable (No. of pairs and cond. dia.) the kits are different e.g. TSF-1, TSF-2
etc. For quad cable the kit is also different (reinforced type).

iii
)
For details of jointing kit and jointing procedure RDSO's code of practice for PIJF
using thermo shrinking technique may be adopted.


iv
)
The screen and armour of copper cables to be jointed shall be made through with
suitable wires. This is essential to get the specified reduction factor in association
with its earthing at stations. This should be done first to avoid any electric shock due
to induction.

v) The copper cable screen and armour shall be earthed with a low value earth (<1) at
stations to achieve the specified screening factor.

vi
)
In case of armoured optic fibre cable jointing (splicing) the armour shall neither be
made through (continuous) nor it shall be earthed.

7.2.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
7.2.3.1 PLANNING
a) While planning for cabling on a route, the number of conductors and sizes required
depending upon the type of circuits required should be first determined.

b) It will be generally desirable to leave 10% or more conductors spare for all cables
carrying 5 or more pairs of conductors for future expansions.

c) Only after deciding the size and the number of conductors in the different type of
cables to be used on a route, the actual route for taking the cables should be decided
upon.

d) This should be done by walking along the track and deciding upon the best location
for the cable route.

e) The desired route should be shown clearly on a route plan showing the actual
alignment of track giving offsets from permanent way or permanent structures. The
diagram should indicate the various road and track crossings, crossing with power
cable, water and sewage mains and other points of importance. It is preferable to
chart the route on a route plan on which the existing routes of power cables etc., are
shown.

f) After the route has been decided upon, the convenient points for distribution should
be chosen.

g) The local distribution may be done either by aerial wires or smaller size cables.

h) The cable shall be laid at least 2 m away from the nearest track, and at the same
time, it shall be ensured that it is separated by the least 1 m from the nearest power
cable.

i) Cable markers shall be provided all along the road at minimum interval of 180 m.
These should also be provided to indicate important points like water and sewage
mains, power cable, crossings, angles, etc.

j) Paper or polythene insulated polythene sheathed jelly filled telephone cables may be
used for communication circuits.


k) These may be laid underground in trenches. The cable shall be at least 0.6 m below
the surface of the ground. The trench shall be sufficiently wide to accommodate
troughs wherever used.

l) In telephone cables, electro-static and electro-magnetic induction between different
pairs of conductors shall be minimised by a lead or aluminium sheath and by the
provision of twisted pairs.

m
)
In case of paper core unit twin cables, the pairs shall be twisted together.


n) In 'Quad' type of cables, conductors diagonally opposite shall form one circuit.

7.2.3.2 METHODS OF LAYING CABLE

7.2.3.2.1 TYPES

Cables shall be laid using one of the following methods, viz., laying direct in the
trench, drawing through ducts and laying solid. The choice of the method depends
upon the type of the cable to be laid, the nature of the cable route, initial outlay, and
future expansions, and economy in maintenance charges.

7.2.3.2.2 DIRECT - IN - THE - TRENCH METHOD

a) For direct laying, the bottom surface of the trench is made free of corrosive elements
and the cable is laid on the bedding of the soft earth of the trench.

b) Where the bottom surface is rough, a 12.5 cm layer of sand shall be used as bedding.

7.2.3.2.3 DRAWING THE CABLES THROUGH DUCTS
a) RCC or earthen-ware ducts are used for laying the cable.

b) The ducts may have suitable covers.

c) Whenever the cable is laid in the duct,, there shall be sufficient holes at the bottom
of the duct for draining away of any water that may collect.

d) When using ducts for taking cables, these are kept close to the surface of the ground
so that the cover can be removed easily without digging earth.

e) Even though the initial cost of this type of cabling is quite high, it has one important
advantage that additional cables can be laid easily by just opening the cover of the
duct and laying the additional cable. This avoids digging of the ground and re-
opening the trenches for adding extra cables.

f) The one disadvantage in this method is that duct alignments have to be as straight as
possible for facilitating laying operations. This may not be feasible in some areas.

7.2.3.2.4 LAYING SOLID

a) For laying solid, a trough is made in an excavated trench and the cable is laid in the

trough.

b) Molten bituminous compound or asphalt or similar materials of approved type is
poured in to fill the trough completely.

c) It is then lined with bricks on the top after the compound is set.

d) Care is taken to hold the cable in the trough on wooden pieces, so that the cable is
entirely surrounded by the molten material.

e) This type of laying is very expensive but can be justified only in cases where the soil
is chemically detrimental due to electrolytic corrosion, or in other similar
conditions.

7.2.4 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
7.2.4.1 TESTING CABLES
7.2.4.1.1 TESTING

a) Cables shall be tested after each joint is made to facilitate tracing of a fault during
the course of jointing.

b) On discovery of a fault, the last joint must be opened out and defect rectified.

c) The wires in the cable must be tested for the following:

i) Continuity
ii
)
Absence of crossed pair
iii
)
Absence of contacts
iv
)
Insulation resistance.
7.2.4.1.2 PROCEDURE

a) To facilitate testing, every wire at the starting end shall be twisted with its
mate to form a loop in each pair, each twist being insulated from other pairs by
means of paper sleeves.

b) The end shall be dried and enclosed in a lead cap which shall be soldered or
wiped to the lead sheathing of the cable.

c) The tests shall be conducted from the other end of the cable.

d) The exposed wires at the other end shall be duty protected with paraffin wax
coating to avoid moisture entering the cable when the lead sheath is removed.

e) The layers of the cable shall be separated with cotton thread or twine to keep
the wires in their proper places, so that the position of faulty wire or pair may
be easily ascertained.

f) After the test is over, the end shall be cut, sealed and terminated, if necessary.


g) In case it is desired to maintain the end for further tests, it may be suitably
protected.

7.2.4.1.3 TESTING FOR CONTINUITY, ABSENCE OF CROSSED PAIR AND
ABSENCE OF CONTACTS

a) The following procedure may be adopted:

i) The testing end, a GPO detector No.2 and a battery comprising of three dry
cells are used for the tests.

ii) All conductors should be bunched together and then earthed through the lead-
sheathing of the cable with a soft bare copper wire and connected to the
positive end of the testing battery.

iii) Negative of the battery should be connected to the negative of the detector.

iv) Now any of the wires from the bunch may be separated and when touched
with a lead connected to the 5V positive terminal of the detector, if should
give a deflection indicating continuity.

v) Disconnect the mate of the wire under test from the bunch and this deflection
should disappear proving the absence of crosses and contacts.

vi) If any of the wire shows the cross of contact, they should be earthed again to
trace wires with which they are crossed or are in contact.

vii) Each pair of conductors should be tested in the above manner before jointing
the next length.

b) Where the test proves that wires have been cross jointed, the joints shall be
opened and the fault rectified to avoid crosstalk. Recrossing in the next
jointing does not clear the fault.

7.2.4.1.4 TESTING FOR INSULATION

a) The insulation test shall be taken on half of the pairs of the cable bunched
together, the other half being earthed to the lead sheathing. The second half
shall than be tested in a similar manner with the first half earthed.

b) The test shall be carried out with a megger before connecting it to the terminal
equipments.

7.2.4.1.5 TESTING AFTER LAYING

a) Cable shall be tested immediately after the laying, jointing and terminations
are complete. All wires in the cables shall be tested for the following:

i) Continuity


ii) Absence of crossed conductor

iii) Absence of contacts

iv) Insulation resistance

v) Absence of contacts between wires forming a pair (short circuit)

7.2.4.1.6 PROCEDURE

a) The first three tests in Para 7.2.4.1.5 (a) shall be carried out as prescribed in
Para 7.2.4.1.3.

b) Test (iv) and (v) of Para 7.2.4.1.5 (a) shall be taken at the same time in the
manner as prescribed below:

i) The distant end of the cable shall be prepared for tests in the same manner as
prescribed in Para 7.2.4.1.3.

ii) At the testing end, two separate bunches of conductors shall be made, each
bunch comprising of one wire from each pair.

iii) These wires should be segregated on the basis of colour code of the paper or
cotton tape for the purpose of forming separate bunches.

iv) One bunch is then earthed and the other is tested with a megger in the manner
prescribed in Para 7.2.4.1.4.

v) Where the cable consists of a large number of conductors, more than two
bunches may be formed to obtain readable deflection on the megger.

v) Each bunch shall be tested in turn while the remaining wires shall remain
earthed.

c) The method in Para (b) above gives insulation resistance per km applying the
following formula:
Megohms/km =
No. of wires tested X Deflection (Megs) X Length in metres
1000

The insulation resistance per Km shall not be less than 625 megohms at 16
degree C. Insulation at 16 degree C may be found out by the formula:

Insulation at 16 degree C= Insulation at T degree C X 1.04(T-16)X9/5


d) If a contact between the wires forming a pair exists, it will be shown by the
megger registering a dead earth. In this case, each pair shall be tested
individually until the faulty pair is found.


7.2.4.1.7 ROUTINE TESTS

a) Underground cables shall be tested once every year with a megger for
insulation only and the results of tests shall be submitted to DSTE/ASTE.

b) Apart from the testing to be performed during laying and after laying the
cables, routine tests shall also be conducted on the cables to ensure that the
cable is in good condition. This will provide data to decide as to when a cable
has served its life and to replace the same in time, to avoid complete
breakdown.

c) All spare pairs in a cable shall be tested periodically once a year to ensure that
they are in good condition. This will help in using the same pairs whenever a
working pair has been faulty and the circuit carried by it has to be transferred
to one of the spare pairs.

7.2.4.2 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION - CABLES

7.2.4.2.1 MAINTENANCE

a) Underground cable installations when laid strictly in accordance with the
recommended practice will hardly need any maintenance throughout their
anticipated span of life. As far as the buried portion of the cable is concerned,
no repairs are generally possible except in cases where moisture or water has
entered the cable and is detected before it has damaged the insulation.

b) All cable termination devices, pillar boxes, cable heads and glands shall be
kept clean and dry.

c) These parts shall be frequently inspected and any tendency for moisture or
water leak shall be immediately attended to.

d) Where humidity is high, particular care shall be taken regarding the condition
of the cable heads, pillar boxes etc., and those may be dried by charcoal fire or
anhydrous gas as and when required taking necessary precautions against fire
hazards.

e) All cables shall be tested periodically to enable timely action being taken and
prevent breakdowns.

f) No digging operations by other departments shall be carried out close to the
cable route without prior notice to the Telecommunication Inspector who will
take necessary precautions to protect the cable from damage.

7.2.4.3 CABLE FAULTS

7.2.4.3.1 TYPE

i) Low insulation in one limb or both


ii) Open/break in one limb or both

iii) Short/Earth

iv) Multiple faults

v) Faults with foreign potential

7.2.4.3.2 LOCALISATION OF FAULTS

Various type of cable fault locators available generally works on the following
principle:
- Potential distribution method
- Pulse reflection (ECHO) method

The detailed guide lines for locating cable faults issued by RDSO may be
adopted.

7.2.4.3.3 RECTIFICATION OF FAULTS
After localisation of faults, the defective portion of cable may be replaced by
healthy piece of cable with proper joints as laid down in 7.2.2.8 and 7.2.2.10.



ANNEXURE A
Para 7.1.4.1(c)
LIMITS OF LOSSES ON TELEPHONE LINES

1. Subscribers lines

Type of exchange Transmission
standards exchange
voltage

Maximum permissible
loop resistance of
subscriber's line in ohms

Magneto 00 375
CB Manual 40 V 375
Auto 24 V 325
Auto 40 V 450
Auto 48 V or 50 V 600

The maximum loop resistance of 375 ohms for Magneto and semi-CB exchange is
permissible with local batteries of not less than 2V with a maximum internal
resistance of 6 ohms. For subscriber's line with loop resistance of 375 to 450 ohms
local battery should have 3 cells of not less than 3V with internal resistance not
exceeding 3 ohms.

2. Junction lines

Maximum loop resistance

a) Junction lines connecting two local exchange of
any type
350 ohms

b) Junction lines from trunk exchange to local
exchange of any type

350 ohms
c) Junction line plus subscriber line from local
exchange in (b) if the latter is connected to a
second local exchange.


300 ohms

NOTE:

It will be observed that the standard for 1 and 2 are stated in terms of permissible
maximum loop resistance instead of being given as limits of transmission loss in
decibels. This is to allow for losses which occur due to the conditions of operation of
subscriber's instruments and not line loss only.

3 Trunk lines

Maximum permissible transmission loss is 8.7 dB at 800 Hz including repeating coils
main lines (connecting main trunk centres).

Maximum permissible loss at 800 Hz for secondary lines (connecting small

exchanges of RAX to trunk centres) is 10 dB

4 Non-exchange connection (applicable in railway control circuits) ---- 25 dB.

5 The overall transmission loss from one subscriber to another in any part of a
telephone system shall not exceed 32 dB.

When trunk and junctions from part of a telephone system, they shall be so arranged
that the built-up circuit over which conversation is to take place shall not exceed 28
dB. An allowance of one decibel must be made for each magneto exchange included
in the built-up circuit and 1.5 decibel for each CB exchange.

Circuit shall be designed so that equivalent length of the circuits in terms of loss dues
not exceed:

Subscriber loop to exchange of all types 4.5 dB

Trunk between two trunk exchanges 12.00 dB

Junctions between two exchanges 4.5 dB

6. Table of transmission equivalents of instruments and exchange

a) Apparatus connected in shunt across telephone
circuit:


dB
Bell magneto 1,000 ohms 0.461
Bell magneto 1,000 ohms in service with 2 mF
condenser
0.461
Coil bridging 600 ohms 0.922
Coil bridging 1,000 ohms 0.461
Coil bridging 600+600 ohms 0.461
Coil retardation 1,000 ohms 0.461
Indicators (tubular type ) 100 ohms 0.461
Coil repeating 4006 A 0.692
Coil repeating VTR Gd. 0.300
Coil repeating AT 4128-2 0.326
a) Trunk exchange cord circuit 0.462 to 0.922
c) Magneto exchange cord circuit 0.462 to 0.922
d) Junction line cord circuits 0.22

These assume that the operator is not listening in on the line. With ordinary cord
circuits and the operator's key thrown to speak the loss will increase from 0.922 dB to
4.61 dB, unless provision is made for a high efficiency monitoring circuit on the
trunk exchange cord circuits, in which case the operators can listen in without
causing in large losses which occurs when the 'speak' key is thrown.




ANNEXURE B
Para 7.1.4.2.14(d)
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT FOR LINEMAN/MAINTAINER
1. Axe-load handle 4 Nos.
2. Pick axe 2 Nos.
3. Sickle 4 Nos.
4. Crow bar 6 Nos.
5. Pan mortar 6 Nos.
6. Shovels 6 Nos.
7. Rope manila 30m, 2.5 cm 1 No.
8. Rope manila for block tackles 15m, 1.25 cm 2 Nos.
9. Tackles block large 2 sets.
10. Ladders 6m 1 Each
11. Line grips 2 Sets
12. Carrying hooks 1 m 4 Nos.
13. Soldering iron large 2 Nos.
14. Soldering iron small 2 Nos.
15. Blow torch 1 No.
16. Chisel cold 2 cm 2 Nos.
17. Chisel cold 2.5 cm 2 Nos.
18. Hammer 2.5 kg 2 Nos.
19. Shears pruning 2 Nos.
20. Hand saw 1 No.
21. Wrenches double ended of sizes 1.25 cm to 3 cm 2 Sets.
22. Crescent adjustable wrench 20 cm 2 Sets.
23. Adjustable wrench 30 cm 2 Sets.
24. B J tool 1 Set.
25. Pliers diagonal 15 cm x 20 cm 2 Nos.
26. Pliers side cutting 15 cm 1 No.
27. Pliers long nose 20 cm 1 No.
28. Pliers insulated 30 cm 2 Nos.
29. Ratchets and tongs of sizes 2 Nos.
30. Tape measuring 15/50 m 2 Nos.
31. Gloves 2 Pairs
32. Goggles 2 Nos.
33. Brushes of sizes-paint 2 Sets.
34. Lantern 2 Nos.
35. Straps safety 2 Nos.
36 Straps 2 Nos.
37. Tools boxes 1 No.
38. Bag tools 2 Nos.
39. Portable phones 2 Nos.
40. Detector GPO 1 No.
41. Dynamometer 1 No.
42. Hand compression tool for ACSR 1 No.
43. Sleeve twister for ACSR wires 2 Nos.
44. PIJF jointing kit. 2 Nos.






ANNEXURE C
Para 7.1.4.2.14(e)
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT FOR JE/SEs

1. Rope manila 60m, 5 cm 3 Nos.
2. Rope manila 15m, 2.5 cm 6 Nos.
3. Wrench small 1m, 1.25 cm 2 Nos.
4. Wrench small 1m, 1.25 cm 2 Nos.
5. Forge portable 1 No.
6. Forge large 1 No.
7. Brace ratchet medium 1 No.
8. Hammer 1 Kg 2 Nos.
9. Chain saw 1 No.
10. Knife clasp 20 cm 2 No.
11. Files flat 30 cm 2 No.
12. Files round 30 cm 2 Nos.
13. File half round 30 cm 2 No.
14. File triangular 30 cm 1 No.
15. Tape steel 30 cm 1 No.
16. Steel square 1.No.
17. Plumb 1 No.
18. Spirit level 2 Nos.
19. Trowel 2 Nos.
20. Banner flanges 2 Nos.
21. Tent small 1 No.
22. Dynamometer 1 No.



ANNEXURE D
Para 7.1.4.2.14(c)
SPARE STORES WITH LINEMAN/MAINTAINER

Stock of the following spare parts and quantities shown against each of them is
recommended to be retained with each of the lineman/maintainer:

1. Line wires 1 Km length of each gauge of
wire used in circuits.

2. Binding wires Wire sufficient for 12 bindings

3 Wire tapes 6 nos. of each gauge in use

4. Insulators 50 nos. each size

5. Stalks 6 nos.

6. Solder 1 Kg

7. Sleeves for joints 6 of each size

8. PIJF cable jointing materials 6 of each size.


CHAPTER VIII

LINE PLANT SYSTEM COMMUNICATION THROUGH RE
CABLE

8.1 SYSTEM

8.1.1 Armoured, screened underground cables are used for control communication in
electrified areas to limit induction effect.

8.2 SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS:

8.2.1 (a) Types of cables with construction as below are used in RE area

(0 + m + n)

0 = no. of carrier frequency quads (1.2 mm dia copper conductor paper insulated)
m = no. of Voice frequency quads Paper insulated 0.9 mm conductor dia
n = no. of Voice frequency quads Polythene insulated 0.9mm conductor dia .

(b) Main telecom quad cable aluminium sheathed to specification IRS: TC-14.
(c) Derivation quad cable lead sheathed to specification IRS:TC-27.
(d) Now these specifications are obsolete and presently steel armoured aluminium
screened 4/6 quad cable to spec IRS: TC 30 and steel armoured PIJF cable to spec
IRS: TC 41 are used. However since such old installations are still in use, such cable
system is dealt in this chapter.

8.2.2 Paper insulated quads are used for speech circuits like Section Control, Remote
Control, etc., and polythene quads are used for Block Circuits, fault identification and test
speaker local.

8.2.3 The cable route survey shall be carried out as per RDSO Technical Instructions
No.STS/RE/C-TI-1.

8.2.4 System design of Telecom. Circuits in 25KV AC Electrified areas shall be as
per RDSO Technical Instructions No.STS/RE/C-45 which lays down the procedure
for location of cable huts and repeater stations to limit the longitudinal induced
voltage to safe values.

8.2.4.1 The cable huts are provided at every station for :

(i) Isolation
(ii) Tapping/deriving circuits
(iii) Testing of circuits.

8.2.4.2 (a) VF Repeaters are provided at every 50 to 55 km. along the cable route to
compensate the attenuation in the cable.


(a) Notice Board prohibiting the entry of unauthorised persons in the repeater station shall
be displayed at a prominent place of the repeater premise


8.2.5. INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION OF CABLES.

8.2.5.1 The pairs of paper insulated VF quads are loaded with 88 mH coils spaced
at 1.83 km. (+/- 50 mtrs.) which results in:

Characteristic Impedance : 1120 ohms at 800 Hz.

Attenuation : 0.25 db/km at 800 Hz.

8.2.6 CABLE JOINTING

All joints in main cable shall be underground and properly sealed to prevent
moisture ingress.

8.2.6.1. TYPES

8.2.6.1.1 Straight Through Joints

These are used for jointing of two consecutive lengths of cables. Poling at these
joints may be done to reduce earth capacitance unbalances.

Refer to RDSO Instructions No. STS/RE/C-33 for conventional joints and
STT/RE/C/CJ-1 for heat shrinkable joints.

8.2.6.1.2 Transformer Joints :

The circuits on the main cable are derived/tapped through tapping transformers
and extended on derivation cable to the utilisation points. Depending on the
requirement 5T or 10T or 20T joints are used.

T denotes Transformer.
(Refer RDSOs Instruction No.STS/RE/C-36)

8.2.6.1.3 Loading Coil Joints:

These are used for connecting the loading coils of 88 mH in the cable.
(Refer RDSO Instruction No.STS/RE/C-35).

8.2.6.1.4 Condenser Joints:

These are provided in the middle of loading section for adding condensers to
reduce capacitance unbalances in the cable.


Balancing of the VF quad of the Main Telecom cable is carried out as per
RDSO /Technical Instruction No.STS/RE/C-30 to minimize cross-talk and noise
caused by capacitance unbalances.

Max. Capacitance unbalance shall be 40 pF for full loading section and 20 pF
for half loading section.

Poling at these joints may be done to reduce earth capacitance unbalance.

Refer RDSO Technical Instructions for conventional joints.
No.STS/RE/C-31 & 34

No.STT/RE/C/CJ-1 for heat shrinkable joints.

8.2.6.1.5 Building out Net work joints:- These are provided to make the cable length
between two repeater stations an exact multiple of loading section length.
(Refer RDSO Technical Instructions No.STS/RE/C-37).

8.2.7 Main Cable Termination:

At repeater stations/cable huts the main cable shall be terminated on a terminating
Joint with switchboard cable of approved type.
(Refer RDSO Technical Instructions No.STS/RE/C-9)

8.2.8 Earthing:

It is provided on metallic screen/armour of cables and equipments in VF repeater
Stations/cable huts to afford safety to personnel against shock and protect equipment
against surges & high voltages and to limit the induced voltages to safe value.

8.2.8.1 Limits of Earth Resistances for :

i) Surge arrestors/lightning dischargers Not more than 10 ohms
of Telecom. equipment.

ii) Screen/Armour of Aluminium sheathed Not more than 1 ohm.
Telecom. Cable.

iii) Equipment earth in VF repeater stations, Not more than 5 ohms.
Cable huts and way stations.

(Refer RDSO Instructions S&T/Earth)



8.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENT

8.3.1. INSTRUCTIONS FOR LAYING OF CABLES.


8.3.1.1 The cable will be generally buried underground in a trench of 0.3 metre width
and depth of 0.8 metres.(As per drawing no.RDSO/TC:35007) If more than one cable
is to be laid in the same trench the width can be increased up to 0.5 metre.

8.3.1.2 In exceptional cases, such as in yards and when the depth of the cable trench is
limited to 0.5 m. Due to local conditions a minimum distance of one metre shall be
maintained between the cable and the OHE mast supporting the catenary or any other
structure likely to come in contact with the high tension conductors. When the
observance of this rule creates difficulty, the cable shall be laid in concrete pipes and
in that case the distance to be maintained as specified above can be brought down to
0.5m.

8.3.1.3 When the depth of the cable trench exceeds 0.5 m. near the OHE masts, it shall
be ensured that the nearest edge of the cable trench is at least 3m away from the OHE
mast.

8.3.1.4 Position of cable joints shall be marked on the nearest OHE mast by painting
of an approved legend.

8.3.1.5 Laying of cables in the vicinity of traction sub-stations, OHE switching
stations and their associated earthing system shall be governed by the following
principles:

(i) In the vicinity of traction sub-stations, the cable shall be laid at least one metre away
from any metallic body of the sub-stations, which is fixed in the ground, and at least
one metre away from the sub-station earthing. The cables shall, further, be laid in
concrete pipes or enclosed brick channels for a length of 300 m. on either side of the
sub-station. As far as possible, the cable should be laid on the side of the track
opposite the sub-station side.

(ii) In the vicinity of the OHE switching stations (feeding posts, sectioning and sub-
stationing posts), the cable shall be laid at least one metre away from any metallic
body of the station which is fixed in the ground and at least 5 m. Away from station
earthing. The distance of 5 m. from station earthing can be reduced to one metre,
provided the cables are laid in concrete piles

(iii) Where an independent earth is provided for an OHE structure, the cables shall be laid
at least one metre away from such earthing.

8.3.1.6 Outside station limits, the cable shall generally be laid at a standard distance
from 10m. from the centre of the nearest track.

8.3.1.7 When signalling and telecommunication cables are laid in the same trench, a
distance of about 100 mm. is to be maintained between them by placing bricks
between them, at intervals of two metres.

8.3.1.8 HT and LT power cables and telecommunication cables shall not be laid in the
same trench.


8.3.1.9 The cable laid parallel to the track shall normally be buried at the depth of 0.8
m. While those laid across the track must be one metre below the rail flanges.

8.3.1.10 The trench for the telecommunication cable shall be kept as far away as possible
from the trench for the power cables.

8.3.1.11 When cables are to be laid along the girder bridges, over the culverts, through the
bed of culverts, over the rocky terrain and the like, they shall be laid as per the
approved methods for each such location.

8.3.1.12 While laying, the cables shall not be subjected to sharp bends. The bending
radius for the cable shall in no case be less than 20 times the diameter of the cable in
case of lead sheathed armoured cables and 40 times the diameter of the cable in case
of aluminium sheathed armoured cables.


8.4 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
8.4.1 INSTRUCTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE.
Following instructions shall be followed:

8.4.1.1 All cable termination devices, cable heads shall be kept clean and dry.

8.4.1.2 All cables shall be tested as per following section of this chapter.

8.4.1.3 Notice shall be given to the SE/JE(Telecom) prior to digging along the cable
route .

8.4.1.4 (a) Earths shall be watered regularly.
(b) Earths and earth connections shall be examined once in a month.
(c) Earth resistance shall be measured every year and entered in a register.

8.4.1.5 Maintenance staff of repeater stations and test room shall regularly monitor the
performance of circuits every day.

8.4.1.6 Each Emergency socket shall be inspected once in 10 days by the maintainer for its
performance and good shape and the markings on OHE masts shall be well painted. No two
consecutive sockets along the route shall remain faulty.


8.4.1.7 Protective works for cables track crossings, culverts, bridges shall be inspected
once in a month and particular attention is to be given after the monsoon.

8.4.2 TESTING OF CABLES

8.4.2.1 Following parameters shall be tested:

i) Attenuation as measured at 800 Hz. by Transmission Measuring set

Loaded Cable (RE) 0.25 dB/Km.


Unloaded cable (RE) 0.8 dB/Km.

Section/ Quad Pair Attenuation dB

I

II

ii) Insulation Resistance shall be measured at ambient temperature with a 500V DC
megger and shall be better than 10,000 mega ohm/km.

Section/Quad

Pair I Conductor 1 Conductor 2 Conductor 1 & 2
to Earth to earth

Pair II

iii) Max. Average Loop Resistance of conductor pair measured with a multimeter
shall be 56 ohms/km at 20 degrees C. Nominal loop resistance shall be 55.2
ohms per km.

iv) Cross Talk level between two VF pairs of a quad shall be measured with cross
talk measuring set as per IRS:TC:45 and limits are as under:

Near End Cross Talk : Better than 61 dB.
Far End Cross Talk : Better than 65 dB.

v) Psophometric Noise

The Psophometric noise shall be measured by psophometer and it shall not
exceed 2 mV.


8.4.2.2 Schedule of measurements:

All measurements shall be carried out from Repeater to Repeater.

1. Checking Attenuation Monthly
2. Checking Cross Talk Level Quarterly
3. Checking Noise Level Quarterly
4. Loop Resistance Test Monthly
5. Insulation Resistance Test Yearly

8.4.2.3 Repeater Station Measurements:

8.4.2.3.1 Following parameters shall be measured

(i) Gain of Amplifiers


Repeater Amplifier (VFR) 24 db.

Repeater Amplifier with leak (VFL) 20 db

(ii) Cross talk level of VFR shall be better than 80 db.

(iii) Frequency response in 300-3400 Hz. range shall be within
+/- 0.75 db for VFL.

(iv) Phantom voltage of SRR (wherever provided)

Incoming : Not less than 10 volts.
Outgoing : 50 +/- 2 volts.

(v) Buffer Amplifier

Gain : 24 db.
Shunting loss: shall be better than 1.5 db in frequency range
300 Hz. to 3.4 KHz.

8.4.2.3.2 Tools and Equipment for underground cables:
(i) Multimeter - 1
(ii) T.M.S. Kit - 2 Sets
(iii) Cross talk measurement Set - 1 (-70 dB range shall be available)
(iv) Capacitance unbalance measuring Set - 1
(v) Earth tester - 1
(vi) Million Megohm meter (100 Volts) - 1
(vii) Hydrometer - 1 in each repeater and test room
(viii) Emergency control telephone - 1 with each Inspector
(ix) Frequency counter for DTMF Signalling - 1 in Headquarters
(x) Cable fault locator (Digital) - One in repeater
(xi) Pick axe - 2 Nos.
(xii) Crow Bars - 2 Nos.
(xiii) Shovels - 2 Nos.
(xiv) PSOPHOMETER - 1 No.

8.4.2.3.3 Schedule of measurements

(a) Gain of Amplifiers Monthly
(b) Phantom voltage Monthly
(c) Frequency response Quarterly
(d) Shunting loss Quarterly


8.4.3. LOCATION OF FAULTS

8.4.3.1. TYPES

Cable faults may be divided into two groups


(i) Faults in end or termination portion
(ii) Faults in buried portion.

8.4.3.1.1 (a) When the fault is suspected at end, affected conductors should be
disconnected, and retested for continuity and insulation.

(b) The terminals and leading wires should be separately tested to ensure
that fault is not in the terminal or leading wires.

When cable is terminated with Switch Board cable, the end should be
cut off and re-made, in case low insulation is detected.

8.4.3.1.2 BURIED CABLE

(a) The faulty section is traced out first.

VARLEY Loop Test using a bridge megger is used for fault localisation
By using a pair of polyethylene quad terminated in each cable hut/repeater
station for fault checking purpose.

(b) The surface of the earth near the point of localisation shall be inspected to
see whether the damage has been caused by excavation or subsidence.

(c) Ground should then be opened and cable exposed for careful examination.

(d) The faulty section of main cable is temporarily restored by using a switch
Board cable of required length.

8.4.4. TESTING AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS.

8.4.4.1 Measuring Instrument for Maintenance of cable

i) Transmission Measuring Set : One per Repeater Station
(IRS-TC-43)
ii) Psophometer : One per Division
(STS/RE/C/SPN/MI-73)
iii) Cross Talk Measuring Set : One per Repeater Station
(IRS-TC-45)
iv) Megger 500V DC : One per Repeater Station

v) Capacitance Unbalance Measuring
Set (IRS/TC:48) : One per Division
vi) Impedance Bridge : One per Division
(STS/RE/C/SPN/MI-73)
vii) Cable fault locator : One per Division

8.4.5. INSPECTION, RECORDS AND REPORTS.
(a) Monthly schedule shall be carried out by Telecom. Inspector.
(b) Quarterly and Yearly schedules of maintenance shall be carried out
Under the supervision of Telecom. Inspector Incharge.

(c) The records of tests and maintenance schedules shall be maintained in
Relevant proformae given at the end of the chapter.
(d) ASTE/DSTE/Sr.DSTE during their annual inspection shall check the
Records of test and maintenance schedules.
****






-------------------RAILWAY

ATTENUATION


SECTION__________________ STATION_________________
SUB SECTION_____________ MEASURED BY_____________
CABLE ROUTE DISTANCE_____________ DATE______________________
SIZE OFCABLE _____________

Name of Circuit Quad No. Pair Attenuation of Cable in dB







---------------------RAILWAY

INSULATION RESISTANCE

SECTION__________________ STATION_________________
SUB SECTION_____________ MEASURED BY_____________
CABLE ROUTE DISTANCE_____________ DATE______________________
SIZE OFCABLE _____________

Name of Circuits Quad No. Pair Insulation Resistance (M. Ohms)
L1 to E L2 to E L1 to L2




---------------------RAILWAY

CROSS TALK LEVEL

SECTION__________________ STATION_________________
SUB SECTION_____________ MEASURED BY_____________
CALE ROUTE DISTANCE_____________ DATE______________________
SIZE OFCABLE _____________

Name of Circuits Quad No. Pair Cross Talk Level in dB
With in same
quad
Between
Adjacent quads.








---------------------RAILWAY

NOISE LEVEL

SECTION__________________ STATION_________________
SUB SECTION_____________ MEASURED BY_____________
CABLE ROUTE DISTANCE_____________ DATE______________________
SIZE OFCABLE _____________

Name of Circuits Quad No. Pair Noise Level in mV








---------------------RAILWAY

LOOP RESISTANCE
SECTION__________________ STATION_________________
SUB SECTION_____________ MEASURED BY_____________
CABLE ROUTE DISTANCE_____________ DATE______________________
SIZE OFCABLE _____________

Name of Circuits Quad No. Pair Loop Resistance in ohms







CHAPTER IX


TELEPHONE EXCHANGE & TRUNK EXCHANGE



9.1 EXCHANGES :


9.1.1 All Telephone Exchanges shall be

* Automatic

* Electronic

* Digital

* Stored Programme Controlled (SPC)

* Pulse Code Modulation (PCM, Time Division
Multiplexing (TDM) technology.


9.1.2 The exchanges shall be Transit cum Local Exchanges providing connectivity between
:

* Subscriber to Subscriber

* Subscriber to trunk

* Trunk to Subscriber

* Trunk to trunk


9.1.3 Separate trunk Automatic Exchange shall be provided at Zonal Railway Headquarter
for Indian Railways Network. The transit functions at other places shall be integrated
in the Local-cum-Transit Exchange.

9.1.4 The manual trunk connections shall be provided through Operate consoles (Attendant
Consoles). The Operator Console shall be an integral part of the Exchange. Separate
manual trunk exchange are not required to be provided.

9.1.5 Attendant Consoles :

The attendant consoles which replaces the Trunk Boards shall be an integrated part of
the exchange. This shall assist the trunk operator to provide Trunk connections.

Facility shall exist to monitor the calls. Busy indication of the trunk shall be available.
Head phones shall be provided with Attendant console.

9.1.6 Subscriber Telephone Set :

All telephones shall be push button type. The signalling may be decadic or DTMF
type. The telephones shall be of the following type :

- Ordinary
- Secretary and Executive type
- Digital
- Magneto
- 4 wire

9.1.7 The IR (Indian Railway) exchange network is a hierarchical architecture with 3 levels.

Highest level - Zonal Head Quarters (ZHQ) and Railway Board (RB)
Medium level - Divisional HQ (DHQ)
Lowest level - Important activity centres

9.1.8 The exchanges shall be interconnected using manual trunks through Trunk Operators
or through Subscriber Trunk Dialing (STD) channels. Where digital transmission
system is planned, the ZHQ to DHQ and DHQ to important location exchange shall be
connected through high speed 2 MB/s (30 channel) trunk groups.

9.1.9 All exchange shall be available on IR STD network subjected to availability of
channels. Each exchange shall have a distinct STD code. Alternate routing shall be
provided as far as possible.

9.1.10 Wherever possible interconnection to DOT exchange shall be provided through Direct
Inward Dialing (DID) and Direct Outward Dialing(DOD) facility. The traffic for such
trunk lines shall be taken as 0.8 Erlang/Trunk line and calculation of trunk lines shall
be done accordingly.



9.2 SPECIFICATION & PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS


9.2.1 The digital exchanges shall be of the following basic capacity and shall be modularly
expandable.

128 port

256 ports

512 ports

1024 ports


2048 ports

4096 ports

9.2.2 The exchange shall have ports to connect subscribers with

Decadic phones
DTMF phones
Digital phones
Hot line
Long distance
lead line through any media of communication

- Trunk through all media of communication
(O/H, Cable, VHF, UHF, MW, OF)

- Attendant consoles

9.2.3 2 MB/s or higher speed trunk ports shall be planned in the exchange for high speed
connectivity between exchanges.

9.2.4 The capacity of the exchange shall be defined with the following details :-

- Wire Capacity

- Equipped Capacity with

. No. of subscriber ports- decadic/DTMF and digital phones.
. No. of long distance subscriber, trunk ports with various type of
signaling
. 2 MB or higher speed trunk port.
. Ports for attendant console

9.2.5 The Architecture of the Exchange shall be with the following protection arrangement.

a) Up to 128 ports
CPU and control cards -1 + 0 Configuration
Memory -1 + 0 Configurations
Power supply unit -1 + 1 hot Stand By (S/B)

b) Exchange with capacity higher than 128 ports

CPU and control card -1+1 hot Standby configuration & hot swappable
Memory -1+1 hot Standby configuration & hot swappable
Power supply card -1+1 hot Standby configuration & hot swappable

9.2.6 The exchange shall be fully non-blocking.

9.2.7 The minimum BHCA (Busy Hour Call Attempts) for exchange shall be as follows:-



Up to 128 port = 20,000
Above 128 up to 256 port = 50,000
Above 256 up to 512 port = 1,00,000
Above 512 up to 1024 port = 1,50,000

9.2.8 The exchange software shall be loaded on hard disc or flash RAM for operation as
well as a back up copy must be available.

9.2.9 The software must have self diagnostic feature and the failure must be available as
print out.

9.2.10 The basic requirements of the protective device provided on MDF shall be as
under :

i) The device shall not operate on speech or signaling currents.
ii) It shall not decrease the efficiency of speech or signaling circuit.
iii) The device shall promptly operate in cases of the specified voltages or
currents being reached.
iv) The device shall promptly isolate the equipment and prevent further
damage in cases of overload due to artificial or natural causes.
v) The current rating of the device shall be such that they do not produce
noticeable heat in the components of the main equipment.
vi) The device shall prevent transient discharges which would normally injure the
audio system of the listener.
vii) The device shall be as far as possible self restoring type.
viii) The prospective devices shall consist of fuse & lightning discharger. The fuse
shall be connected in series with each external line.
ix) The Integrated Protection Modules shall be provided in case of Krone type
connectors.
x) The rating of the fuse shall be as per the requirement of exchange equipment.
xi) The Protection arrangement shall be installed on IDF or MDF.
xii) The subscribers protective device assembly shall consist of a single compact
dust proof unit containing fuse and lightning arrester.

9.2.11 The Signalling used shall be :

i) User line signalling * Decadic dc loop/disconnect signalling

* DTMF signalling

* D-Channel protocol (ISDN)

ii) Inter Exchange * 4W E&M
Signalling * 4W digital (64 kbs)
* DC - loop/disconnect signalling
* R2 MFC (Indian version)
* CCITT Signalling system No.7
(Common Channel Signalling)
* Q-Sig for feature transparency



9.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS


9.3.1 The various components of the exchange system shall be

a) Exchange hardware
b) Exchange software
c) Man Machine Interaction Terminal PC with Printer
d) Test and measuring instruments
e) Power supply Arrangement consisting of Batteries, Charger, Changeover
panel and stand-by system.
f) Intermediate Distribution Frame
g) Main Distribution Frame
h) Protection arrangement
i) Attendant consoles
j) Cable (underground and switch board)
k) Subscriber telephone set
l) Maintenance tools
m) Documentation
n) Lightning protection and Earthing arrangement


9.3.2 The man machine language must be in English and user friendly. A VDU, keyboard
and a printer alongwith a PC must be available for interaction with the Exchange.

9.3.3 The exchange shall be worked with batteries on float. The capacity of the batteries
shall be to provide minimum 8 hours back up. One set of battery, two chargers and a
change over panel are to be provided for supplying power supply to exchange. The
capacity of power supply arrangement shall be 30% higher than the exchange load.
The charger shall be preferably SMPS (Switch Mode Power Supply) type.

9.3.4 The IDF (Intermediate Distribution Frame) shall have disconnecting type connectors
with facility for isolating exchange indoor and outdoor side. The cable terminals shall
be installed on a rack. Protection arrangement shall be available on IDF. All testing
for line side shall be done from IDF. The IDF may be accommodated in exchange
equipment room.

9.3.5 All outdoor cable shall be terminated on a rack forming the Main Distribution Frame
(MDF). This shall provide connectivity between outdoor cable and indoor switch
board cable. The Main Distribution Frame shall be installed in a separate room but not
in the exchange room. An earth is connected across the frame for its entire length and
preferably this shall be a copper strip clamped to the frame.

9.3.6 Cables:

The outdoor cables shall be jelly filled underground type. The indoor cables shall be
switch board cables. The outdoor cables shall be 20 pair, 50 pair and 100 pair
capacity. The indoor cable shall be 5 pair, 10 pair, 20 pair and 50 pair.


The outdoor cable shall have outdoor Termination Box/Location Box with terminals
for proper termination of the cable. The indoor cable shall be terminated on CT boxes
of appropriate size. The cables, cable Terminals in CT Boxes shall be planned with
30% spare capacity. All outdoor cable sheath shall be earthed while entering the
exchange at MDF.


9.3.7 Lightning protection and Earthing arrangement

The earthing arrangement shall be consisting of

- Earth pits minimum four with Earth electrodes connected in a ring

- Two earth wires connecting Earth Electrodes to Earth Distribution Frame

- Earth wires from each equipment to Earth Distribution Frame
(Exchange rack, IDF, MDF, Charger, Battery, Gen set, Power panel, Cables)

9.3.8 Civil Infrastructure:

The exchange room shall be dustproof, with false ceiling, mosaic flooring, windows
with double doors, underground duct or overhead trough for running of indoor cables.
Separate Operator Console room, Power supply room, Battery room, DG set room ad
MDF room shall be provided. Floor should be strictly level and high enough to avoid
flooding.

9.3.9 Electrical Supply :

230 V AC single phase shall be available. With power lines suitable for taking the
load, Alternate supply shall be provided either traction supply or DG set. The power
supply shall enter the room through MCB and changeover switch with proper earthing
arrangement.

9.3.10 The exchange equipment room shall be air conditioned. 22-25 degree C. shall be
maintained inside the room. 50% standby air conditioners shall be provided.
Lightning shall be adequate for maintenance.

9.3.11 All equipment shall be provided on racks. Mounting on the walls shall be avoided.
The equipment rack shall be minimum 1 meter away from the wall. The racks shall be
fixed on the floor with proper arrangement. Underground ducts shall be provided for
entry of UG cables. Duct/overhead troughs shall be provided to run the indoor cables.
In case of UG cable entry the duct shall be filled with sand and plastered on the top.

9.4 MAINTENANCE

9.4.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

A) Daily
i) Batteries voltage and charger output voltage.

ii) AC supply voltage and charger output voltage.
iii) Cleaning of equipment rooms with vacuum cleaner and wiping of the
floor for all rooms.
iv) Failure list of the subscribers.
v) Testing of all the trunks (STD,OTD and other) circuits.
vi) Working of Lights, Air conditioners.
vii) System status listing
viii) Failure history list
ix) Alarm checking
x) Room temperature recording
B) Weekly
i) Specific gravity, voltage and load test of the batteries, sulphation of
terminals.


C) Monthly :

i) Wiring and connecting terminals of power supply arrangement.
ii) The different modes of operation of FCBC, the internal checking and
cleaning of FCBC.
iii) Earthing connections of all equipment and earth electrodes.
iv) All cabinets of equipment, Man machine interaction, terminal printer,
attendant consoles to be cleaned.
v) Cable termination MDF and IDF to be cleaned and checked.
vi) Cable runs-inter rack, rack to IDF, MDF and Attendant consoles to be
checked.
vii) Transmission loss test of all trunk circuits
viii) Office Data Back up to be updated.
ix) Checking of GD tubes
x) Functional Testing of Attendant console
xi) Tone testing of MW circuits & realignments
xii) Traffic data listing & analysis

D) Quarterly :

i) Contact points of Attendant console to be cleaned with contact cleaner.
ii) Testing of All Service features from the Test Telephones.
iii) Cleaning of terminations in CT boxes, Location boxes.
iv) Adjustment of SMPS modules

E) Yearly :

i) Earth resistance value measurement
ii) Line loop resistance and insulation testing
iii) Checking of wiring of subscribers premises, CT boxes and location boxes.
iv) Testing of spare cards
v) Analysis of load distribution among operators console
vi) System programme backup



9.4.2 Inspection :

The following are the details to be checked during routine Inspection.


a) Subscribers office

i) CT boxes
ii) Wiring
iii) Lightning arrester
iv) Batteries/power supply arrangement

b) Cables/overhead alignment

i) Type of cable and length
ii) Cable route conditions with special attention at culverts, bridges, road
crossings, track crossing, building entry points.
iii) All registers pertaining to cable laying, testing

c) Exchange

i) MDF/IDF wiring, connectors, terminals, fuses, GD tubes.
ii) Earth connections, Earth readings.
ii) Power supply arrangement, battery registers, battery terminals, wiring,
charger and power panel.
iv) Internal cabling, cabinets, visual inspection of wiring.
v) Fault register

d) Periodical Inspection

i) All exchanges and other telephones installations shall be inspected and
tested, where necessary, by ASTE/DSTE/Sr.DSTE at least once a year.
Maintenance records and faults registers shall be checked for their
proper upkeep.

ii) Sr. Section Engineer Telecom should carry out detailed and effective
inspection and testing once in a quarter year and Junior Engineer(Tele)
once in a month.


9.4.3 Testing and Commissioning :

i) Cable/overhead line testing shall be conducted for each subscriber.
Insulation, loop resistance for cable/OH line is to be tested and
recorded.

ii) Provision of fuses, GD tubes are to be checked for all lines.


iii) The earth resistance for each earth electrode is to be measured. The
connectivity of earth wires to each equipment is to be checked.

iv) Hardware testing shall be conducted as per instructions of
manufacturer.

v) Software testing shall be done as per guidelines given by supplier.


9.4.4 Documentation :

The exchange shall have the following documentation :

a) Indoor Equipment

- Exchange layout plan
- Rack layout plan for each rack with connection details
- MDF and IDF termination plan
- Installation manual for equipment
- Software documentation
- Operation and maintenance manual
- Wiring diagram for power panel
- Manual for chargers

b) Outdoor Equipment :

- Telephone No. wise subscribers details
- Subscriber wise Telephone Directory
- Cable/Overhead layout plan
- Subscriber premises wiring plan typical.

9.4.5 The tools available in exchange shall consist of

- Screw drivers assorted
- Nose Plier
- Crimping tool
- Krone Extractor
- Cutter
- Soldering kit


9.4.6 The following test and measuring instruments shall be available in exchange for
testing and maintenance

* Line tester to test line conditions
* Megger for testing of insulation of line.
* Digital multimeter

********


CHAPTER X


QUAD CABLE BASED CONTROL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM


10.1 SYSTEM:
In electrified as well as non-electrified section of Indian Railways, on important
routes, OFC cable as well as six quad jelly filled cables are being laid but on non-
important routes only quad cables are being laid. Wherever OFC and quad cables are
being laid, control communication is provided on OFC with normal arrangements by
providing STM-1 and P.D.MUX equipment at every station. Block circuits,
emergency sockets and level crossings gate communication are provided on quad
cable. Wherever OFC cable is not being laid and only quad cable is being laid, control
as well as block communication are being provided on the quad cable itself.

10.2 SYSTEM OF WORKING OF CONTROL CIRCUITS:

10.2.1 CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM USING REPEATERS AND LOADING AND
BALANCING OF QUAD CABLE:

Earlier cable containing paper as well as polythene insulated copper quads were used.
Such type of cable is now obsolete but are still in use where old installation exists.
Such cable system is described in separate chapter. Now cable containing only
polythene insulated quads is used. Such system is described in this chapter.

10.2.2. Repeaters are provided at less than 50 Kms to maintain proper signal level for speech
and ringing at all the tapping points.

10.2.3. The repeater spacing should preferably be not less than 30 Kms to avoid by-passing
and adjustment of gain of the amplifier.

10.2.4. The length of one loading section will be 2 Kms. A typical diagram showing loading
joint, Condenser joint and normal joint (also called Straight through joint) and
Transformer joint (2T/3T VF Transformer Assembly) in a loading section shall be as
indicated below:


LEGEND
LJ1 & LJ2 : Loading Coil Joints
NJ1 & NJ2 : Normal/Straight Through joints
500 m 500 m 500 m 500 m
LJ
1

T
1

NJ
1
CJ
1
T
2
NJ
2
LJ
2


CJ1 : Condenser Joint
T1 & T2 : Transformer Joint

Note: To reduce number of joints, Transformer and Normal Joints should be combined
wherever feasible. If the cable length in a drum is 1.0 Km., Transformer and
Condenser joints can be combined with Normal joints to reduce the number of
joints.
10.2.5. Loading coil of 118 mH shall be provided at every 2 Km. spacing.

10.2.6. Balancing : Balancing is to be done to obtain minimum unbalance between both
limbs of any pair to earth and also between adjacent pairs.

10.2.7. Radio-patching : Whenever radio-patching is provided at the far end, the
amplifiers at the repeaters lying between the station at which radio-patch is
provided and the place of interruption to the cable will have to be reversed.
Provision for remotely reversing the direction of the amplifiers is necessary to
avoid manning of the stations.

10.2.8. Power supply requirement: The power supply unit of Repeater equipment shall
normally operate at 24V DC.

10.2.9. Battery back up with charger shall be provided separately for charging the battery.

10.2.10. The power supply shall be provided with short-circuit protection of self
restoring type.


10.3. AMPLIFIER EQUALISER SYSTEM:

10.3.1. Wherever Amplifier Equaliser systems are used, quad cable are not required to be
loaded. Every station shall be provided with Amplifier Equaliser equipment to
provide communication at that station and to equalize the losses in the VF band.

10.3.2. Balancing of various quads shall be carried out at every station by providing
suitable condensers, if required.

10.3.3. The equipment shall be provided with the facility for radio patching from
underground Quad cable media to radio communication system for normal control
working or working in case of failure without reversing the direction of
amplifiers.

10.3.4. The complete system shall comprise of the following assemblies and shall be
suitable for mounting on a 19 inch rack;

a) Cable termination, distribution and monitoring panel.
b) `U Link Panel.
c) Equaliser Amplifier and VF Transformer panel.
d) Decoder and other PCBs.

10.3.5. ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS:


a) Input impendence of VF Amplifier shall be 470 Ohm 10%.
b) The nominal gain of the amplifier shall be 20 dB 1 dB when measured
at a frequency of 1 KHz.
c) The frequency response of the amplifier shall be flat within 3 dB in
the frequency range of 300 Hz to 3.4 KHz.
d) The amplifier shall not be overloaded for an output of +4 dBm with
equalizers. The overload point is determined as that point when the
input level is gradually increased and observed the wave form in the
CRO, which must not clip up to an output of 4 dBm.
e) The signal at input may be at (-)20 dBm (minimum) and the output in
this case shall be 0 dBm with amplifier gain at maximum. The upper
limit of input signal is determined by overload point, so that the output
does not exceed +4 dBm, the overload point, without need arising for
adjusting the gain of amplifier.
f) Cross talk level of the equipment when measured after termination
shall be better than 60 dB, across the amplifiers meant for same quad
and adjacent quad. Frequency for the measurement for cross talk shall
be 1 KHz.
g) The Amplifier Equaliser shall have the variable slope beginning from 0
dB up to 12 dB at least in the frequency range of 300 Hz to 3.4 KHz.
h) Harmonic distortion at 1 KHz shall not exceed 3% when the gain of the
amplifier is set to its maximum and output is properly loaded.

10.3.6. POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT:

10.3.6.1. The power supply unit of Amplifier Equaliser equipment shall normally operate at
230V AC nominal with variation from 160 V to 270 V. It should also have
facility for Solar Power operation with arrangement of automatic change over
from 230V AC to Solar Supply and vice versa. The charge controller for use with
Solar Panel shall be provided as part of the power supply unit.

10.3.6.2. The power supply unit shall be fully duplicated including batteries with suitable
over voltage protection (above 270 V).

10.3.6.3. The power supply shall be provided with short-circuit protection of self restoring
type.

10.3.6.4. It shall be possible to by-pass automatically the way station equipment in case the
battery voltage drops to threshold voltage of the amplifier to be defined by the
manufacturer as per requirement of design.

10.3.6.5. A set of two low maintenance batteries of 12V each capable of operating the
equipment for 72 hours at least shall be kept in a separate housing made of
unbreakable material. The capacity of the each battery shall be minimum 40AH.

10.3.7. INTERCOM FACILITY:

10.3.7.1. In addition to Omnibus circuits to be provided at each station, 8-way intercom
shall be provided with facility for dialing any of the subscribers by the controller.


10.3.7.2. Separate Cards shall be provided for 8-way intercom in the way station
equipment. It shall be possible to extend these telephones up to loop resistance of
300 Ohms.

10.3.7.3. Intercom circuit shall be so designed that all the subscribers can talk to each other
without disturbing the controller.

10.3.7.4. It shall be possible to call any subscriber within the group using suitable access
codes.

10.3.7.5. The controller shall be able to call any of the subscribers using DTMF code and
whenever the controller calls it, it gets disconnected from other telephones. Even
when a subscribers telephone is off-hook, it shall be possible for controller to call
the subscriber and talk.

10.3.7.6. The subscriber shall also be in a position to call controller by dialing suitable
access code.

10.3.7.7. There shall be facility to bar any telephone from calling the controller.

10.3.7.8. Facility of conference among the subscribers shall be provided.


10.3.8 REMOTE MONITORING FACILITY:

10.3.8.1. Remote Monitoring facility shall be provided for remote monitoring and fault
localization from test room. Remote Monitoring facility for Sectional Control,
Deputy Control and S&T Control Circuits shall be separately provided.

10.3.8.2. It shall be possible to execute following functions using remote monitoring
facility;

i) Disconnect one side of Card of that Circuit at a particular station.
ii) Disconnect another side of Card of that Circuit at a particular station.
iii) Buffer 1 cut for Card of that Circuit at a particular station.
iv) Buffer 2 cut for card of that circuit at a particular station.
v) Battery change over.
vi) Connect Cards of that Circuit at a particular station.
vii) Monitor Power Supply Voltage.
viii) Monitor AC fuse, charging battery status.

These commands with relevant access codes shall be displayed on the equipment
in addition to being displayed at Control Desk in test room.

10.3.8.3.. On failure of AC fuse, remote Card automatically sends fuse fail signal to Test
Room Equipment along with its identity code.


10.3.8.4. Disabling and enabling of Command Codes through suitable authorization
Code/Password or Key shall be desirable to prevent any unauthorized initiation.


10.4. EARTHING:

10.4.1. All non current carrying metal parts shall be bonded together and earthed. An
earth terminal of suitable size shall be provided. It shall be suitably marked.


10.5. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FOR REPEATER AND AMPLIFIER-
EQUALISER SYSTEM

EQUIPMENT ITEM MAINTAINER SECTIONAL
ENGINEER
SR.SECTIONAL
ENGINEER
Repeater/
Amplifier-
Equaliser
Equipment
i) checking
Power Supply
voltage at the
input point.

ii) Checking of
various cards in
proper position.

iii) Checking
the functioning
of all the
circuits.

iv)
Section wise
and end to end
line up of all
circuits.
Weekly




-do-



-do-





----
Monthly
(Every
installation)


-do-



-do-





----
Quarterly (Every
installation)



-do-



-do-





-do-
Batteries i)
Cleaning &
tightening of all
connections

ii)
Measurement of
voltages and
gravity
Weekly





-do-
Monthly
(Every
installation)



-do-
Quarterly (Every
installation)




-do-



CHAPTER XI

RADIO COMMUNICATION (VHF)

11.1 RADIO COMMUNICATION

11.1.1 Communication by Radio means the transfer of intelligence from one point to
another through space using radiated electromagnetic energy (Radio Waves) ( in the FREQ
spectrum of from about 10khz to about 30,000 Khz.)

Radio Frequency Spectrum

Class Freq. Range Wave length

VLF

10-30 kHz 30,000-10,000 m
LF 30-300 kHz 10,000 - 1,000 m
MF 300-3000 kHz 1,000-100m
HF 3-30 MHz 100-10m
VHF 30-300 MHz 10-1m
UHF 300-3000MHz 100-10cm
MW 3 to 30 GHZ 10-1 cm



11.1.2 The objective of any communication is to pass information from one place to other.
Radio Communication consists of generation, propagation and reception of electromagnetic
waves. Modes used in Indian Railways are-

- H.F. Communication
- VHF Communication
- UHF Communication
- M/W Communication

11.1.3 VERY HIGH FREQUENCY (VHF) COMMUNICATION

The frequency band of VHF Communication is 30 to 300 MHz. The frequency
allotted by WPC (Wireless Planning and Coordination wing of ministry of communication) in
VHF for Indian Railways are in the band (a) 85.5 to 86.5 MHz (b) 146.2 to 167.95 MHz.
Communication in this range of frequencies is mainly due to line of sight, reflection and
scattering of waves.

11.1.4 Uses of VHF :

VHF Communication is used (now a days) for many applications as :-


- Traffic Control
- Police Duties.
- Mobile Communication
- Point to point communication
- Multy - Rural Radio ( MARR) Application
- Disaster management

Possible uses of VHF Communication on IR are
- Communication during Maintenance and Constructional Blocks
- Yard communication
- Communication in the train in between Guard & Driver
- Mobile Communication in between moving train/vehicle with fixed
location(Station) or another moving train/ vehicle.
- Emergency Communication:
- ART equipped with hand held and base station VHF sets.
- Duplex VHF Sets are utilised for
- extension of exchange number to distant place.
- control working.( Train Traffic Control )/Patching.
- Universal Emergency Communication for communication between
driver, guard, station master & Cabin.



11.2 SPECIFICATION & PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS

11.2.1 High Frequency Radio Communication:

i) . Frequency Range- 3 MHz to 30 MHz

- Spot Frequencies are used,
-Separate for transmission & Reception.
- Different pair of frequencies used for Day & Night communication.
- Grouping of Frequencies is done to economise the frequencies
-maxi. 5 stations are grouped in each group.


ii) Mode of Propagation:

The frequency band of HF Communication is 3 to 30 MHz. Waves in HF
range are propagated through ionosphere and are known as sky waves.


iii) Type of Antenna used:

- Dipole
- Folded dipole
- Rhombic
- Log Periodic
- T. Type
-Inverted L type

-Doublet

iv) Use:

- May be used as a supplement to the Land Line Communication, to meet increased
Traffic requirements..
- For Emergency Communication

11.2.2 LIMITATION OF HF COMMUNICATION

1. HF Communication is rather difficult for the range of 50 Kms to 250 Kms and
normally, the planning of fixed-to-fixed services is not done for such distances.

2. Variation in Levels

- The ionosphere characteristics vary diurnally, seasonally and yearly.

The communication during sunrise and sunset is always subjected to great
fluctuations in levels, due to changes in ionospheric layers.

3. Choice of Frequencies

- A reliable HF communication depends on the correct choice of frequencies and
proper type of aerials. A minimum of three frequencies per station is required for
round the clock operation.

- Based on the ionospheric information provided by the committee of Council of
Scientific and Industrial Research, as published by National Physical Laboratory
New Delhi, the working frequencies for the wireless links can be computed.

4. Reliability:

The reliability of an HF communication circuit depends on the working frequency
and the take off angle of the beam.

5. Optimum Working Frequency:

The optimum, working frequency is normally 85% of the maximum usable
frequency.


11.2.3 VHF PARAMETERS

1. Frequency Range

-30 MHz to 300 MHz

- Frequency Band allotted for Railways are 85.5 MHz to 86.5 MHz and
146 MHz to 174 MHz.
- One spot frequency is used for each channel


2. Mode of Propagation:
-Line of sight waves
-Reflection & scattering of waves

3. Type of operation: Simplex
Duplex

4. Channel capacity: - Single channel/Four channel/Sixteen channel
- Voice or Low speed Data or both.
[ Sets are equipped for more than one channel i.e. upto 16 channels or so.
Crystal controlled or synthesised version, out of them one channel can be
used at a time. ]

5. Type of Equipment:

i) Walkie -Talkie ( Hand Held) Set-
1W/2W to 5W switchable output power operated on in-built NI-CD/
NiMH / LiOin batteries.

ii) Mobile Sets
Mobile Sets can be carried in a case or bag or can be fitted in a vehicle
- Weight less than 3 Kg
- Output Range 25 Watt
- Operated on 12V car battery

iii) Base Station
Installed at desired location
- Operating on AC Mains or by 12V battery.
- External antenna with feeder cable connector mounted on a mast
(Roof top) needed.

6. Antennas used

- Whip Antenna
- Ground Plane (GP) Antenna
- Dipole
- Low Profile
- Yagi Antenna

7. Feeder cable:

- 50 Ohms Unbalanced Coaxial cable

8. Communication Range:

- Depends upon terrain.
- Average range
Walkie -Talkie (Hand Held set) - 1 to 2 km.
Mobile Set- Upto 15 km.

Base Station - upto 50 Kms. When antenna used are directional &
fixed at the height of 15 to 20 metres.

9. Licence:

- Mandatory

Licence is to be obtained through Railway Board from WPC , Ministry of
Communication.
- Such licence shall be applied on prescribed form

10. Frequencies allotment:

-Wireless planning and Coordination wing of Ministry of Communication
(WPC) allots different band of frequencies and sport frequencies in the band
for different department. According to National Frequency Allocation Plan.

-Major users are -
-30-108 MHz: Rlys., Defence, P&T, Door Darshan, AIR, Police

108-230 MHz : Same except AIR
230-622 MHz : Same except AIR

5000-8500 MHz: Defence, Rlys., P&T
7125-7425 MHz : is exclusive for Railways

- Use of un alloted frequency is prohibited.

11.2.4 LIMITATIONS OF VHF COMMUNICATION :

- Short distance coverage
- Blank Zones occur due to terrain, high rise buildings & other structures, so
area must be surveyed for blank zones from where communication is not
possible.
- Simplex mode of working
- Maintenance of rechargable batteries
- AC power supply is required for charging of batteries which may not be
available at the sight of use. Charging also needs about 4 to 6 hours. Thus the
set requires more than one battery set for continuous operation.
- Interference due to other user having adjacent frequencies .
- Effect of prevailing noise in the surrounding.


11.3 INSTALLATION OF VHF

- For point-to-point communication availability of line of sight is essential

- Antenna height must be decided at both location by measuring minimum field
strength needed for satisfactory communication. This can be measured by putting one trans-
receiver at one end and mounting antenna at a suitable height (of 15 to 20 metres) and

measuring the field strength by field strength meter at other location. VHF set of the same
power and frequency can also be installed to check the quality of communication. Antenna
height and orientation can be adjusted to get a maximum signal strength or voice.

- Antenna can be mounted on a tower/Mast of approved design or on a pipe on the
roof of a building. Feeder cable must be of 50 Ohm. impedance unbalanced of approved
design.

- Connectors used must be also of good quality and supplied by approved supplier.

- Power Supply System

- 230V AC mains operated power supply of rated voltage & current is
supplied by the supplier along with VHF set. A 12V/80-120 AH battery must
be connected on float to the set to prevent communication failure during
mains failure.

- Spark Suppressors must be installed in the Vehicle in case of mobile set is installed
in the vehicle and powered by its battery.



11.4 MAINTENANCE OF VHF

- VHF sets transmitting frequency and power are to be measured once in a
month.

- Spurious emission squelch operation current drain frequency stability,
frequency deviation, sensitivity of receiver & adjacent channel selectivity are to
be checked once in a year in the centralised repair centre.

- Power Supply System

Following measurements shall be taken

- Input and output voltage & currents weekly
- Specific gravity of each cell - weekly
- Care must be taken while using such sets when low battery indication is
appearing on the set, it must be charged as specified in the manual.

ANTENNA SYSTEM ALONG WITH FEEDER CABLE & CONNECTOR

- Antenna system Physical and visual inspection once in a week.VSWR, Power
handling capacity, frequency band of operation, directivity, radiation pattern must be
checked annually.


11.5 TEST METERS REQUIRED AT CENTRALISED REPAIR CENTRE

- Tools

- Test jigs & fixture
- Antistatic work station
- Temperature Control soldering/de-soldering station
- Digital Multi Meter
- Frequency Counter
- Power meter
- Oscilloscope
- Field strength meter
- Insulation Tester
- Programmable frequency scanner
- Communication Radio Test set.

11.6 INSPECTION

- VHF installation must be inspected every month by Section Engineer.
- Sr.DSTE/DSTE/ASTE once in a year

11.7 FAILURE REPORT

- VHF systems failure must be reported to controlling officer daily in the
morning.
- Monthly statement of a failure must be reported in the PCDO to Headquarter.
- The VHF sets must not be opened at site as far as possible. Faulty sets must be
sent to Repair Centre to prevent further damage at site by Electro Static
discharge.
- Spare sets must be kept at site or at suitable location to replace the faulty sets.


CHAPTER XII

MULTICHANNEL RADIO SYSTEM


12.1 MULTICHANNEL RADIO SYSTEM

12.1.1 TYPES OF SYSTEM

Following multichannel radio system are working on Indian Railways:

(a) UHF : 12,24,60,120 channel analog
10,30, 120 channel digital

(b) Microwave: 60,120,300, 960 channel analog
and 2 Mbit, 8 Mbit, (34+2) Mbit digital


12.1.2 APPLICATIONS

(a) UHF multichannel equipments are mainly used for smaller links of 5 to 6 hops.

(b) Analog microwave links from 50 to 60 channel capacities and digital radio of
(34+2) Mbits/sec are used for long distance communication for speech and data transmission
etc.

(c) 2Mbit/8Mbit digital radio equipments working on 18GHz bands are generally used for
station to station communication control working and for local area networks connecting
various exchanges in the same locality.

(d) Time Division Multi Access (TDMA) system shall generally be used point to
multipoint communications such as computer reservation system, major yards with multiple
points etc.


12.1.3 SYSTEM OF WORKING OF MULTICHANNEL ANALOG RADIO
EQUIPMENT

a) The multiplex signal is fed to modulate a carrier signal of appropriate frequency and
the frequency modulated signal is amplified and fed to the antenna wave guide system
through isolators to give the required output power and frequency as per the type of radio
equipment.

b) The input signal received from the antenna waveguide system passes through a
band pass filter and fed to the demodulator. The output of the demodulator is the base band
signal which is amplified by a base band amplifier to bring the amplitude of the base band to
appropriate level.


12.1.4 MULTICHANNEL DIGITAL RADIO EQUIPMENTS:



In digital radio system the carrier frequency is modulated by digital multiplex signal.
The digital multiplex signals may be 2/8/34/140 Mbits/sec.


In addition to the digital base band signal following additional channels are also
inserted in the system.

a) Analog/Digital Orderwire
b) Analog/Digital Express Orderwire
c) Analog/Digital Monitoring and Supervisory channels.
d) Way side Digital Drop Insert Channels.


i) EXPRESS ORDERWIRE;

These are omnibus order wire channels which are dropped at only few important
stations for maintenance.

ii) MONITORING & SUPERVISORY CHANNELS:

These channels are utilised for remote monitoring, Supervision and control of all the
stations connected in the line. Generally analog channels are used for this purpose.
Monitoring, supervision and control are done through appropriate modems.

iii) WAYSIDE DROP INSERT CHANNELS:

For higher capacity equipment like 34 Mbit or 140 Mbit, a low capacity stream (as 2
Mbit in case of 34 Mbit) may be used for drop insert at non important wayside stations
requiring only few channels.


12.1.5 BASE BAND SWITCHING

Receivers are generally configured as

(a) Monitored Hot Standby (MHSB)

In this configuration the RF signal is received simultaneously by both the receivers. In
manual mode, any one of the receivers can be selected. In automatic mode, the baseband
signal having better BER is selected automatically.

(b) SPACE DIVERSITY (SD)

In this configuration, RF signal from main and space diversity antenna are processed
separately by the two receivers and the base band signal having better BER is selected
automatically.

(c) HITLESS SWITCHING

During automatic changing over from one receiver to another significant data may be
lost from the incoming signal. Hitless switching is a system in which suitable buffer memory
and phasing arrangements are provided such that no data is lost during changeover.



12.2 SPECIFICATION & PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS

12.2.1 CHANNEL CAPACITY:

The channel capacity and associated modulation types for various systems are
given in following table.



TYPE CHANNEL MODULATION
CAPACITY

ANALOG 12/24/60/120/ FM
300/960

DIGITAL (i)10/30/120/480 QPSK

(ii) 10/30 TDMA


12.2.2 FREQUENCY PLAN

The Frequency plans for multi channel radio system shall be as per the following :

SYSTEM CHANNEL ARRANGEMENTS
TO CCIR-REC.

UHF 24 ANALOG NFAP PLAN
UHF 60 ANALOG NFAP PLAN
Microwave 60 CCIR - 385 - 2
Microwave 120 CCIR - 385 - 2
Microwave 300 CCIR - 385 - 2
Microwave 960 CCIR - 386 - 2
2 Mbit digital CCIR - 385 - 2
8 Mbit Digital CCIR - 386 - 2


12.2.3 UHF ANTENNA:

The UHF antenna shall be of following types:

(a) YAGI ANTENNA : These are directly fed antennas providing a gain of 8-12 dB
depending on the no of elements and frequency.

(b) CORNER REFLECTOR ANTENNA: These are used with dipole feeder,
providing a gain of 10-15 dB, depending upon the size and frequency.


(c) GRIDPARABOLIC ANTENNA: These antennae are used with dipole feeder and
grid parabolic reflector. The gain provided by these antennae are in the range of 12-25 dB
depending upon the size and frequency.


12.2.4 MICROWAVE ANTENNA

The microwave antenna may be of following types :

(a) STANDARD PERFORMANCE ANTENNA:(SP)

These are economical type of antenna suitable for low density routes.

(b) LOW VSWR ANTENNA:

These antenna are the same type of parabolic reflectors as a standard performance
antenna, but includes especially tuned low VSWR feeds to minimize echo distortion.


(c) HIGH PERFORMANCE ANTENNA (HP)

These antennae use tuned low VSWR feed and high directivity shields called shroud.
These are useful in congested areas for proper interference coordination.

(d)RADOMES

Radomes may be used to cover the antenna from dust, fog, rain or any other external
objects. The radomes may be flexible or rigid type. All high performance antenna shall be
provided with radomes.

12.2.5 SELECTION OF THE ANTENNA

The selection of the antenna shall be based on following factors:

a) Frequency Band
b) Gain
c) Half Power Bandwidth
d) Front to Back Ratio
e) VSWR
f) Cross Polarisation Discrimination
g) Size and Weight
h) Wind load
i) Maximum sustainable wind speed
and the beam deflection thereof
j) Economy



12.2.6 UHF FEEDER CABLE:

(a) Flexible coaxial copper cable, air or dielectric types of approved specification
shall be used as the feeder cable for UHF specifications. Either 7/8" or 11/8 dia cables are
generally recommended for UHF frequencies.

(b) Flexible coaxial jumper cable of about 1M length shall be used at either end of the
main feeder cable to connect the antenna and the radio equipment.

(c) The characteristics impedance of the feeder cable shall be same as that of the radio
and antenna.


12.2.7 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE FEEDER CABLE:

The selection of the feeder cable shall be passed on the following characteristics:

i) Impedance
ii) Frequency Band
iii) Attenuation
iv) Power rating
v) Size & Weight
vi) Flexibility
vii) Cost


12.2.8 WAVEGUIDE TYPES:

Following types shall be used:

(a) Rectangular
(b) Elliptical
(c) Circular

i) RECTANGULAR WAVEGUIDE

For relatively short runs, where the loss of the waveguide is not critical, rigid
rectangular waveguide may be used.

ii) ELLIPTICAL WAVEGUIDE

Flexible elliptical waveguide shall be of cost economically used as the microwave
feeder.

iii) CIRCULAR WAVEGUIDE

Circular waveguide shall be used where very low attenuation of feeder or
simultaneous transmission of two carrier at different polarisation are envisaged.

iv) FLEXIBLE TWISTABLE WAVEGUIDE

For special angles and twists in the waveguide run and also for connection to the
antenna and radio equipment, flexible twistable rectangular waveguide shall be used.


12.2.9 TOWER

i) TYPES

Only self supporting towers shall be used. Other types already in service shall
continue till replacement.

ii) SELECTION OF TOWER

The tower, for a given location, shall be selected on following consideration:

a) Antenna type
b) Antenna mounting capacity of the tower
c) Wind pressure zone
d) Antenna mounting restrictions if any
e) Likelihood of future expansion

iii) APPROVAL OF COMPETENT AUTHORITY

Tower designs approved by competent authority shall only be used. Related
instructions issued by Railway Board from time to time, shall be followed.

iv) USE OF FLOODLIGHT TOWER

For short haul UHF system, if the antenna height is within 20 M, floodlight tower of
approved design may be used. In each such case, approval of competent authority shall be
taken.

v) FOUNDATION OF THE TOWER

The foundation shall be designed for the forces and moments given in the tower
drawings to suit the bearing capacity of the soil at site



12.2.10 PRESSURIZATION EQUIPMENT

(a) Suitable pressurisation equipment shall be provided for all long haul microwave
stations.

(b)Dry air hand pump may be used for pressurisation if the feeder length is 10-15 M
or less.

(c) For larger feeder lengths and also for unmanned stations automatic dehydrators
shall be used.

(d) Maximum internal pressure of 0.4 KG/CM
2
shall be maintained in the feeder. The
pressure shall not be allowed to fall below 0.1 KG/CM
2
.

(e) The automatic dehydrators shall have adequate safety features to prevent over
pressurisation and suitable warning for low pressure indication.


12.2.11 PROTECTION OF MICROWAVE/UHF SYSTEM AGAINST DAMAGES
DUE TO LIGHTNING

(a) Suitable protective arrangement shall be provided to prevent the damage of the
equipments due to lightning and surges.

(b) The lightning risk index of each station shall be calculated and appropriate earthing
arrangement shall be provided as per chapter on Protection of telecom equipments against
lightning.

(c) The armour and screen of all the underground cable shall be earthed.



12.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

12.3.1 Multichannel radio relay system consists of the following sub-assemblies:

(a) Radio Equipment
(b) Antenna
(c) Feeder cable for VHF and waveguides for microwave system
(d) Multiplexing Equipment
(e) Power Plant
(f) Tower
(g) Pressurisation Equipment


12.3.2 REQUIREMENTS OF THE EQUIPMENT ROOMS

(i) The microwave/UHF equipment rooms shall be kept neat clean and free of dust.

(ii) Equipment rooms shall be provided with double panel doors and windows and shall be air
conditioned.

(iii) The doors shall be self closing type.

(iv) Windows shall be provided with wire mesh to prevent entry of snakes, lizards, leeches
etc.


(v) The ventilation and lighting shall be adequate.

(vi) The floor of the equipment room shall be strictly levelled and the floor level shall be
above the highest flood level of the location.

(vii) All inflammable items shall be kept away from the equipment rooms.

(viii) As a precautionary measure against fire, wooden furnitures, tables, racks, shall not be
used in the microwave/UHF equipment rooms.

(ix) Each microwave/UHF station shall have a display panel showing the microwave/UHF
network with details of the type of equipment, tower heights, type of antenna, hop length,
polarisation, frequency etc.

(x) All channel dropping repeater stations shall keep one set of patching cords with suitable
attenuator such that in case of extreme urgency it shall be possible to connect the radio
equipments in a repeater mode disconnecting the MUX equipment.

(xi) A PSTN telephone shall preferably be provided in the microwave/UHF equipment room,
to cater for urgent exchange of information in case of major breakdown of Rly.
communication link.

(xii) Each microwave/UHF repeater station shall keep following essential items:

a) First aid box
b) Fire extinguisher
c) Telephone Directory (Rly)
d) Telephone No. of nearest hospitals/Health centre or Doctors.
e) Torch with cells.
f) Tool Box.

(xiii) Adequate measuring equipments shall be available in the equipment room. Following
equipments shall positively be available in working condition at all stations.

1. Digital multimeter
2. Selective Level Meter
3. Audio Frequency Oscillator
4. Soldering Kits
5. One set of portable emergency light.
6. One set of patching cords ( as mentioned in para (x) above).


12.3.3 LAYOUT

(a) The equipment layout shall be such that adequate space is available for future
expansion.

(b) The equipment racks shall be erected 1 M away from the wall to provide easy
access from the rear side of the equipment.

(c) The indoor cable shall be drawn through wall mounted ladders or concealed cable
ducts. In case of ducts, provisions shall be available for easy access to the cable for repair,
maintenance or troubleshooting.

(d) The location of the tower shall be such that the feeder run is minimum.


(e) The battery room shall be adjacent to the equipment room to minimise voltage
drop in the cable. The cable shall be so chosen that voltage drop does not exceed 0.5 Volt
with full loading.

12.3.4 DIRECTION OF ANTENNA, FEEDER CABLE & WAVEGUIDE

(a) The antenna, feeder cable, waveguide shall be drawn to the top of the tower with
the help of hoisting line, pulley and winch system.

(b) The antenna alignment shall be done by adjusting both elevation and by means
of adjustment of hardware provided in the antenna mount.

(c) The antenna alignment is to be checked carefully to avoid alignment at side lobes.
The achieved signal strength shall be matched with the calculated figure.

(d) The antenna and radio equipment shall be erected prior to the erection of feeder
line.

(e) The connector shall be fitted to the antenna end of the waveguide/coaxial cable
protective cover shall be placed over the connector to prevent damage during hoisting.

(g) The waveguide/coaxial cable shall be unreeled from the line, using pulley and
winch system.

(h) The waveguide/coaxial cable shall be clamped with the vertical members of the
tower by waveguide hangers/cable clamps at intervals not exceeding 1 meter.

(i) The feeder run from tower base to the equipment room shall be supported by
horizontal ladder and shall be fastened to the horizontal member at intervals not exceeding 1
meter.

(j) The waveguide/coaxial cable feeder shall be earthed by providing good electrical
connection between the outer metallic surface of the feeder and the tower or support structure
by means of grounding/earthing strap.

(k) The feeder line through the wall/roof of the equipment room shall be drawn
with standard feed through bits.




12.4 MAINTENANCE

12.4.1 GENERAL MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS.

(a) The power supply switch of the equipment shall be turned OFF before replacement of
any module, subassembly or coaxial cable.

(b) The equipment shall not be switched ON with antenna port short circuited or open
circuited.

(c) Module extractor shall always be used for pulling out any module from the equipment
rack.

(d) All electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD) shall be handled with protective gloves.

(e) During measurement and testing, proper connectors , coaxial cable, sensors, adapter
etc shall be used.


(f) Adjustment of vital parameter such as power, frequency, modulation shall be done by
SE in charge or higher officials.

(g) To clean the face of the modules, dry clothes shall be used. Liquids like benzene or
toluene should never be used, because the coating and print of the module may be
damaged.

(h) Bay shell covers of the equipment shall always be kept closed to protect it from dust
and other foreign particles.

(i) Any defective fuse shall be replaced only with fuse of exactly same capacity and
rating.

(j) Measuring instruments shall be warmed up for at least 30 minutes and calibration
checked before actual use.

(k) The equipments shall be kept in AUTO mode of operation, unless otherwise
instructed.


12.4.2 MAINTENANCE OF ANALOG RADIO EQUIPMENTS

The preventive maintenance schedule of the multichannel analog radio equipments
may be different for different types of equipments. However, as a general guideline following
schedule is recommended:

(i) MEASUREMENT OF SUPPLY VOLTAGE WEEKLY
OF THE EQUIPMENT AND SUB UNITS

(ii) MONITORING OF THE EQUIPMENT WEEKLY
PARAMETERS WITH INBUILT METERS

(iii) TESTING THE PERFORMANCE OF VARIOUS WEEKLY
ALARMS AND INDICATIONS

(iv) MEASUREMENT OF TRANSMITTER MONTHLY
POWER OUTPUT

(v) MEASUREMENT OF TRANSMITTER MONTHLY
FREQUENCY

(vi) MEASUREMENT OF THE BASEBAND QUARTERLY
LEVEL

(vii) MEASUREMENT OF FREQUENCY HALF YEARLY
DEVIATION


(viii) MEASUREMENT OF IF AND CALIBRATION HALFYEARLY
OF AGC CHARACTERISTICS

(ix) MEASUREMENT OF BASEBAND FREQUENCY YEARLY
RESPONSE

(x) MEASUREMENT OF NOISE POWER RATIO YEARLY
(NPR) AND CHANNEL SIGNAL TO NOISE
RATIO (S/N)




12.4.3 MEASUREMENT OF FREQUENCY DEVIATION:

(a) In the test of checking frequency deviation , a tone of appropriate level and frequency is
injected in the base band input point of the modulator and output spectrum is checked for
carrier null with the help of spectrum analyser. Sample calculations for the determining
appropriate level and frequency of the test tone is given in the Annexure -A.

b) If carrier is not completely suppressed with above tone, the deviation is not as per
specification and adjustments of modulator to be done as per manufacturers instruction.


12.4.4 MEASUREMENT OF IF AND CALIBRATION OF AGC
CHARACTERISTICS


(i) Disconnect the coaxial cable from the branching equipment to the RF input (RF-IN) of
the receiver .

(ii) Connect RF signal generator and adjust the frequency to the receiver frequency.

(iii) Adjust the level of the signal generator to -40 dB.

(iv) Check the IF output level (IF OUT) by inbuilt meter or external level meter.

(v) Check the AGC bias voltage/current by in-built meter or external meter.

(vi) Reduce the RF signal generator output from -40 dBm to -80dBm in steps of 5 dB and
from -80dBm to the threshold level in steps of 2 dB.

(vii) For each setting of the RF signal generator measure and record the IF level and AGC
bias voltage/current.

(viii) Plot IF level and AGC voltage/current against input RF level to get the AGC
characteristics of the equipment.

(ix) For any deviation from the specified characteristics, adjustments shall be done as per
manufacturer's instructions.



12.4.5 MEASUREMENT OF NOISE POWER RATIO (NPR) AND CHANNEL
SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO (S/N)


i) The noise generator is calibrated before commencement of the tests.

ii) One high pass and one low pass filter of the noise generator is switched in to give the noise
bandwidth equal to base band width of the equipment under test.

iii) After switching off all band stop filters of the noise generator, the noise output is adjusted
to correct level. for example if base band input level of the equipment = - 25dbr and channel
capacity 120 then the noise generator level shall be adjusted to -25+7.3 = 17.7 dbm)(Details
in Annexure B)


iv) The output of the noise generator is then connected to the input of the noise receiver and
the proper band (say 60 KHz- 552KHz for 120 ch equipment) is selected in the receiver. The
needle of the noise receiver is brought to the reference mark indication by means of attenuator
provided inside the noise receiver and calibration is completed.

v) For measurement of the noise power ratio (NPR) of the link, all multiplexing equipments
are disconnected from the link and the equipments arranged in purely repeater mode.

vi) The output of the noise transmitter is connected to the base band input of the radio
equipment of the near end.

vii) The base band output of the near end radio equipment is connected to the input of the
noise receiver.

viii) A quite channel is simulated by switching on a band pass filter in the noise generator.

ix) The attenuator in the noise receiver is reduced to bring the needle of the noise receiving
to the same reference mark.

x) The difference in the attenuator position is equal to the NPR.

12.4.6 MAINTENANCE OF DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEMS

For efficient and trouble free operation of the digital radio relay systems, the
technical state of the equipment as well as the equipment characteristics shall be tested
periodically. Following schedule may be adopted as a general guideline.

i) MONITORING EQUIPMENT STATUS MONTHLY
FROM MONITORING POINTS WITH
INBUILT OR EXTERNAL METERS

ii) MEASUREMENT OF THE SUPPLY MONTHLY
VOLTAGES OF THE EQUIPMENT

iii) TESTING OF ALARMS AND INDICATIONS MONTHLY

iv) MEASUREMENT OF THE TRANSMITTER QUARTERLY
OUTPUT POWER

v) MEASUREMENT OF THE TRANSMITTER QUARTERLY
LOCAL OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY

vi) MEASUREMENT OF THE RECEIVER QUARTERLY
LOCAL OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY

vii) MEASUREMENT OF IF LEVEL AND QUARTERLY
FREQUENCY

viii) MEASUREMENT AND CALIBRATION YEARLY
OF AGC CHARACTERISTICS

ix) MEASUREMENT OF THRESHOLD FOR YEARLY
BER 10 E-3

x) MEASUREMENT OF THERESIDUAL YEARLY
JITTER OF A HOP

xi) MEASUREMENT OF THE RESIDUAL YEARLY

JITTER END TO END OF A LINK

xii) MEASUREMENT OF CHARACTERISTICS YEARLY
OF ANALOG AND DIGITAL SERVICE
CHANNELS


12.4.7 MEASUREMENT OF THRESHOLD FOR BER 10 E-3

(a) The received signal level at the RF input point of the receiver is measured by
spectrum analyser.

(b) A 60 dB variable attenuator is inserted in the receive path between the branching
network output and the RF input point of the receiver.

(c) The attenuator is initially set at 0 dB.

(d) Pseudo random signal of appropriate bit rate is fed in to the distant end of the hop.
A BER meter is connected at the Multiplexing output point of the receiver.

(e) The attenuator is gradually increased till the BER of 10 E-3 is reached. At his
position the attenuator value is noted.

(f) The threshold level is calculated by subtracting the attenuator value from the
received level measured under step (b) above.


12.4.8 MEASUREMENT OF THE RESIDUAL JITTER OF A HOP

(a) Pseudo random signal of appropriate bit rate is fed in the radio equipment at one
end of the hop.

(b) A BER meter is connected to the mux output point of the radio equipment at the
other end of the hop.

(c) Recommended low pass and high pass filters are selected in the BER meter and
the corresponding jitter levels are measured.

(d) The frequency band and the corresponding maximum limits of the residual jitter
are given in CCITT Rec.921.


12.4.9 MEASUREMENT OF THE RESIDUAL JITTER END TO END OF A LINK.

(a) All multiplexing equipment of the intermediate stations shall be disconnected and
the equipment shall be configured in the repeater mode.

(b) The residual jitter from end to end of the link shall be measured in the same
manner as described under para 12.4.8 above.

(c) The maximum limits of the residual jitter in a link is given in CCITT Rec.823.


12.4.10 MEASUREMENT OF CHARACTERISTICS OF ANALOG AND DIGITAL
SERVICE CHANNELS.

Following parameters of analog and digital service channels shall be measured
with suitable channel analyser.

(a) Channel output level
(b) Channel frequency response
(c) Channel distortion
(d) Idle channel noise
(e) Gain vs. frequency

The measured values shall be checked with respect to the specified limits of the
equipment parameters.

12.4.11 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

Following meters are recommended for maintenance of multichannel radio systems.

1. POWER METER (100 KHZ-22 GHZ) 1 FOR 10
WITH SENSORS, HP 4378 OR SIMILAR STATIONS

2. FREQUENCY COUNTER HP 5350B OR SIMILAR DO

3. SPECTRUM ANALYSER HP 8592 A OR SIMILAR 1 FOR EACH RAILWAY

4. FIXED ATTENUATOR 20 dB NARDA OR SIMILAR 2 FOR EACH RAILWAY

5. VARIABLE ATTENUATOR 0-60dB NARDA, PRD 1 FOR EACH RAILWAY
OR SIMILAR


6. MW SIGNAL GENERATOR, ANRITSU ME724 OR DO
SIMILAR

7. UHF SIGNAL GENERATOR 2 FOR EACH RAILWAY

8. SELECTIVE LEVEL METER APLAB 2037A OR SIMILAR 1 FOR EACH
CHANNEL DROPPING STATION


9. AUDIO OSCILLATOR APLAB 2002 OR SIMILAR DO

10.WHITE NOISE TEST SET MARCONI OA 2090 1 FOR EACH RAILWAY
OR SIMILAR (FOR ANALOG LINKS ONLY)

11. DIGITAL TRANSMISSION ANALYSER ONE FOR EACH DIV.
WITH JITTER GENERATOR, ANRITSU
ME 5208 & MH 370A OR SIMILAR
(FOR DIGITAL LINKS ONLY)

12. PCM CHANNEL ANALYZER/ AT EACH CHANNEL DROPPING
PCM TEST SET STATION


13. DIGITAL MULTIMETER 1 FOR EACH STATION


12.4.12 INSPECTION & REPORT

1. The SE in-charge shall visit the MW/UHF station periodically and shall ensure that the
measurements are taken periodically and proper records are maintained.

2(a) Weekly schedules shall be carried out by the Telecom Supervisor.


(b) Quarterly and yearly scheduled shall be carried out under the supervision of the
Telecom Supervisor in-charge.

(c) Critical tests such as (1) Frequency deviation (2) NPR measurement (3) Receive
calibration (4) Threshold measurement (5) Jitter measurement shall be done in
presence of ASTE/DSTE/Dy.CSTE.

(3) RECORDS

Each MW/UHF station shall keep following registers:

(a) Log book for on duty TCM/WTM
(b) Failure Register
(c) Fading Register
(d) Diesel Generator Register & fuel register
(e) Power Supply failure register & AC register
(f) Cable Register
(g) Maintenance and line up report of equipment and Earth.
(h) Technical Literature of all communication equipments such as Radio,
multiplexing, charger, stabiliser along with circuit diagram.
(i) Tower Register.
(j) Battery Register



ANNEXURE-A

MEASUREMENT OF FREQUENCY DEVIATION

A. PRINCIPLE OF MEASUREMENT:

The frequency deviation can be measured accurately by carrier null method. The
principle of the measurement is described below:

In frequency modulation system the term MODULATION INDEX is defined by the
ratio of the frequency deviation of the modulated signal to the frequency of the modulating
signal and designated as m(f). Thus, if the deviation of the modulated signal is F(d) for a
modulating signal of frequency f(m)m then
M(f) = F(d) / f(m).

If M(f) = 2.404, the carrier frequency will be totally suppressed and there will be no
carrier frequency component in the modulated spectrum.

EXAMPLE

BASEBAND INPUT LEVEL =25dBm/CHANNEL

FREQ. DEVIATION =100 KHZ RMS

Therefore peak deviation/channel
= 100 x 1.414 = 141.4;KHz

Let the freq. of test tone be 100 KHz.
Required mod. index for carrier null =2.404

Therefore deviation of the modulated signal

F(d)=2.404x 100= 240.4RMS

Since 141.4 KHz deviation is produced by test tone of -25 dBm, for deviation of
240.4 KHz the level required is:

- 25 + 20 log 240.4/141.4 = -25 + 4.5 = -20.5 dBm.

Therefore at the BB-IN of the modulator a tests tone of 100 KHz - 20.5 dBm is to be
inspected for complete carrier null.


ANNEXURE -B

PRINCIPLE OF NOISE LOADING TEST

a) FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES:

i) MEAN POWER IN CHANNELS:

In a multichannel system, overall power in the base band depends on the number of
channels as well as activity coefficient which is defined by the ratio of the number of active
channels to total no. of channels. If at any instant n no of channels are active and total no of
channels = N then the activity coefficient =n/N.

ii) CCITT:

CCITT has recommended that the mean power in a telephone channel shall be - 15 dBm
with respect to zero relative point, for a system having channel capacity > = 240.

iii) For N channel system total power of the baseband = - 15dBmo + 10 log N dB.

iv) for a system having channel capacity lying between 12 & 240 the baseband power is
given by:

-1 + 4 log N dBmo.

b) WHITE NOISE LOADING TECHNIQUE:

In a multichannel system considerable amount of noise is contributed by
channel loading and it is necessary to simulate the loading to check the equipment
performance.

During busy hour, large no of voice channels are transmitted over the same
radio channel and the modulating spectrum is thus uniform over the base band.

A white noise transmitter generates signal of uniform spectrum which can be
used to simulate the base band spectrum with appropriate low and high pass filters. The
characteristics of these filters and their nominal cut off frequencies are specified in the CCIR
recommendations.

The measurement technique consists of inserting a series of band stop filters
introduce 'quiet' channels or slots, at the system which becomes 'noisy' due to the thermal
noise and intermodulation distortion as they pass through the system. At the output of the
system a narrow band filter measures these noise and distortion in the ideally ' quite' slot
frequencies of the noise measuring channels.

c) NOISE POWER RATIO (NPR)

NPR is the ratio in dB of the noise level in a measuring channels with the band fully noise
loaded, to the level of the channel with all of the baseband noise loaded except the measuring
channel.

d) SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO (S/N)

NPR indicates the relative indication of the interference of other channels on the measuring
channel. Alternatively noise power in a channel may be expressed by the relative level with
respect to the signal power in the channel. The channel signal to noise ratio (S/N) is defined

as the ratio of the level of the standard test tone (0dBmo) to the noise in a 3100 Hz bandwidth
within test channel.

The NPR and S/N are related as:

NPR = SNR - BWR + NLR where
BWR = Bandwidth ratio = 10 log f/3.1
f = bandwidth of base band in KHZ
NLR = Noise Loading Ratio given in sub para (a) (ii)&(iii)

EXAMPLE

In 120 channel system having base band in 60 - 552 KHZ band,

BWR = 10 log [(552-60)/3.1]
= 20
NLR = -1 +4 log 120
= 7.3
Therefore SNR = NPR + BWR - NLR
= NPR + 14.7 dB.


CHAPTER XIII

Optic Fibre Communication System

SECTION I

PLANNING AND SYSTEM DESIGN


13.1.1. Optical Fibre communication system shall be provided for following
types of communication needs: -

(a) Control Communication with emergency communication
(b) Administrative voice and data communication.
(c) Both for control and long haul communication backbone for mobile train
radio communication.

13.1.2. Guidelines for use of Optical Fibre System on various routes.

(a) New Railway Projects Gauge Conversion/New lines/Doubling/Railway
Electrification.

On A, B, C, D & D Spl Routes, following Optical Fibre system
configuration should be used.

- 24 Fibres Optical Fibre Cable (as per RDSO Specification
IRS.TC.55/ or latest) with Six Quad cable (as per RDSO
specification IRS.TC30/2005 or latest).

- Short Haul Communication will be on STM-1 System and Primary
Digital Multiplexers (PDMUX). For back up a second pair of Fibre
shall be used.

b) On other routes, following Optical Fibre System configuration should be
used:

Composite Cables (8/24 Fibre + 6 Quad) as per RDSO specification
shall be used. Short Haul Communication will be on STM-1 System and
Primary Digital Multiplexers (PDMUX). For back up a second pair of
Fibre shall be used.

c) Replacement of existing overhead/RE quad cable for control
communication.

(i) Existing RE Telecom Cable, whenever it is due for replacement
on age cum condition basis, it should be replaced by Optical
Fibre System. The system configuration for various routes shall
be as indicated in Para 13.1.3 (a).

(ii) Existing Overhead alignment on A, B, C & D-special should be
replaced with Optical Fibre System. The system configuration
for various routes shall be as indicated in 13.1.3(a).

(iii) Existing overhead alignment on other routes should be
considered for replacement with Optical Fibre system as per
para 13.1.2 (b) above.

13.1.3. The objectives for the system design for the above types of
communication are as under :-

(a) Location of optic fibre stations and regenerators.
(b) Optical loss budget of each block section. While calculating the Optical
loss budget, following will be taken into consideration:

a. Equipment margin : 2 dB
b. Connector loss : 2 dB
c. Cable margin : 0.1 dB per Km.
d. System operational margin: 0.03 dB per Km.
e. Splice loss : 0.2 dB per Km.

(c) Requirement of system capacity to meet present and future channel
requirements.
(d) Availability of the system.
(e) Total expected jitter of the system.
(f) Design of power supply system for each station.
(g) Preparation of an estimate.

13.1.4. Capacity Of Fibre Optic System.

a) For Control Communication application, SDH System having capacity
of STM-1 shall be used. Generally, one E1 shall be used for various
control applications.
b) For Long Haul Communication, SDH System with capacity of STM-4 or
above shall be used.



**********

SECTION II

LOCATION OF OPTIC FIBRE EQUIPMENT ROOMS

13.2.1. GENERAL :

13.2.1.1. The system design and the planning covered under section I lists out
the requirements of optic fibre equipment locations along the route such
as station, level crossing, etc.

13.2.1.2. For fixing the exact location of the optic fibre equipment room at such
arrived locations, the following consideration need to be kept in view.

13.2.2. SURVEY OF EXISTING BUILDING :

13.2.2.1. In order to optimize the existing infrastructure facilities and to ensure
cost effective project execution, it is necessary to scan the building at
the station where optic fibre equipment room could be provided as per
system design. For the purpose, the following order of preference
should be followed :-

(a) Housing of the optic fibre equipment in existing microwave repeater
building.
(b) Housing of the optic fibre equipment in exchange building
(c) Housing of the optic fibre equipment in existing RE repeater station
building (in case Optic fibre project being executed on account of
replacement of main telecom cable).

13.2.2.2. However, the recourse to utilize any of the above mentioned alternative
should be made subject to the following :-

(a) Expenditure on addition/alternation necessary to make the room
suitable for housing the optic fibre equipment shall be much less than
cost of construction of new rooms at the appropriate site for Optic fibre
equipment.
(b) The total area is sufficient to accommodate the layout as per Section-III.
(c) The location of building is close to the cable route to avoid extra cable
length.
(d) Power supply is available and preferably standby power is also there.
(e) The site shall be higher than highest flood level of that place.
(f) It shall not involve many track crossings.

13.2.2.3. In case the existing building for wayside location is not available, a new
optic fibre equipment building for wayside location shall be decided with
the following considerations.

13.2.2.4. Site should be quite close to the station building:

(a) Staff quarters and other residential building/restaurants, tea stalls should
not be close by.

(b) Site should be level.

(c) Site in between track to be avoided.

(d) Preferably the site should be on the same side of the track as the route of
optic fibre cable.

(e) There is road access to site.

(f) Sufficient open space is available for

- Storage of the equipment
- Construction of tower for train radio communication.

(g) The copper cable required to join the drop insert location at the station
is Minimum and its laying is easy.

(h) for reasons of security of equipments, it should be as close to the ASMs
Office.

13.2.3. FOR CONTROL ROOM LOCATION

13.2.3.1 All the above requirements are to be met except that of the location shall
be a part of the control office complex.



**********

SECTION III

BUILDING LAYOUT

13.3.1 The wayside optic fibre room shall be as per drawing No.RDSO/TCDO/COP-
1.

13.3.2 The building for the main control station shall be as per Drawing
No.RDSO/TCDO/COP-2.

13.3.3 Following is to be ensured for the building:

13.3.3.1 The front door shall be sturdy to prevent the intrusion by antisocial
elements and sealing shall be such that it prevents ingress of dust also.

13.3.3.2 Cable pit shall have depth of 1.25 m. Two RCC pipes of 100mm dia each
will be provided separately for OFC and quad cable. The pipes shall be
laid up to 2m length away from cable pit outside with suitable slope in such
a way that smoother entry of cable inside the cable pit is obtained. One
end of RCC pipe will open at the bottom of the cable pit in one of the side
wall and other end will extend to 2m inside the trench with suitable slope.
The cable trench will be made deeper at the entry. End of RCC pipes
should be sealed with Plaster of Paris.

13.3.3.3 Preferably the wiring for electrical fittings, plug points, etc. should be
concealed type.

13.3.3.4 To avoid frequent distempering, Oil distemper which may last for 10 to 12
years to be provided.

13.3.3.5 Floor shall be provided with PVC tiles or any other suitable synthetic
covering in the equipment room.

13.3.3.6 In the battery room, the exhaust fan shall have a rain protection shed and
hole covered with wire mesh to avoid entry of birds, insects, etc.

13.3.3.7 Ventilation arrangements should be provided as shown in Drawing
No.RDSO/TCDO/COP-1 & 2.

13.3.3.8 Windows will be provided with suitable wire mesh and grill arrangement.

13.3.3.9 Earth pit of 300 x 300 mm should be provided near the cable pit in control
and repeater building.



*********



SECTION IV

LAYOUT OF EQUIPMENT


13.4.1 The layout of equipments in the optic fibre equipment room at wayside
stations and control office shall be as per Drawing Nos.RDSO/TCDO/COP-3
and RDSO/TCDO/COP-4 respectively.

13.4.2 The equipments shall be accommodated in standard size of the racks
marketed by Indian manufacturers, maximum size if the racks shall be as
under :-

Name of Rack Size

Width x Depth x Height

Slim Rack 120mm x 225mm x 2750mm
Euro 19 rack 600mm x 225mm x 2600mm


13.4.3 The wiring from battery to the location of equipment shall be inside PVC
channels suitable size and suitably supported all along length.



***********

SECTION V

PRELIMINARY SURVEY OF OPTIC FIBRE CABLE ROUTE


Preliminary survey shall be carried out for finalizing the drawing for the route of
optical fibre cable as a part of project planning and execution.

Following main items of work shall constitute the survey.

13.5.1 Selecting the route in general.

13.5.2 Deciding the number of drop and insert locations.

13.5.3 Deciding the size and assessing the length of cable required.

13.5.4 Working out the requirement of circuits which are to be provided in the
cable.

13.5.5 Working out the requirements of heavy tools and plants depending
upon the nature of the territory, availability of roads along the tracks,
etc.

13.5.6 Assessing the special problems of the section such as type of soil,
long cuttings, new embankments, water logged areas, types of major
bridges, major yards.

13.5.7 Collecting details of the existing telecommunication facilities and the
additional requirements due to electrification and preparing tentative
tapping diagrams.

13.5.8 Assessing the number of track crossings and other protective works
required to be done.

13.5.9 Avoiding as far as possible laying of cable too close to a newly laid
track.

13.5.10 Avoiding the toe of the embankment adjacent to the cultivated
Fields.

13.5.11 Avoiding burrow pits and areas prone to water logging.

13.5.12 Avoiding soil made up of cinders, coal ashes, etc.

13.5.13 Avoiding heavily fertilized soils containing acids, electrolytes and
decomposable organic materials promoting bacterial activity.

13.5.14 Avoiding proximity to chemical, paper and such other industries which
discharge chemically active affluent.

13.5.15 Avoiding large rock cuttings, thick jungles, routes of existing
cables and areas difficult to approach.

13.5.16 Deciding carefully the cable route approaches to cable huts to
avoid built up areas including those areas where building, etc.
are likely to come up in future.

13.5.17 Determining composition of the soil which may affect corrosion,
etc. on the cable and special protection required for cable.

13.5.18 Working out the requirement of the various circuits to be provided
in the cables along with the cable circuit chart and tapping
diagrams.

13.5.19 Working out requirement of transport vehicles like jeeps, lorries,
motor trolleys, etc. for the execution of the work.

13.5.20 Avoiding side of the alignment which is likely to be affected due
to addition/alteration of earth work/supply structures (such as
construction of double lane, shifting of alignment of the existing
track etc.)

13.5.21 Preparation of cable route plan and tapping diagrams.

The cable route plan should indicate the route with respect to the main line,
that is, whether the route along the DN main line or UP main line in case of
double line sections and whether it is on both side or right side of the main line
when facing a particular direction in case of single line section. A tentative
tapping diagram should be prepared for the section indicating the tappings of
various circuits.

13.5.22 Selection of the Cable Route.

Generally the terrain conditions on the two sides of the track vary to such an
extent as the cable route on one side of the track has a distinct advantage
over that on the other side. While operating on the principle, it should be
borne in mind that frequent track crossings are not desirable.

In addition to the above, the following also need consideration :-

13.5.22.1 Avoiding underground structures, signalling cables, power
cables, pipe lines, etc.

13.5.22.2 Avoiding the laying of cable on the side of the drains in built up
areas which is generally difficult.

13.5.22.3 Selecting the cable route as far as possible on the opposite side
where Railway signalling cables are already existing in station
yards, etc.

13.5.22.4 Taking the cable route preferably through the bed of small
culverts where water does not accumulate instead of taking it
over the culverts.

13.5.22.5 Avoiding termites/rodents infected areas.

13.5.22.6 Preference at the side of main line away from coastal side.

13.5.22.7 Location of traction sub-stations, feeding posts and other OHE
switching posts.




**********

SECTION VI

DETAILED SURVEY AND FINALISATION OF THE ROUTE PLAN OF
OPTIC FIBRE CABLE

Detailed Cable Route Survey :

13.6.1 Purpose :

The purpose of the detailed survey is to undertake closer study of various
existing telecommunication facilities to work out exact requirement of materials
required for different items of work to finalize all the drawings and site plans
required for the execution of work as also to examine the details collected
during preliminary survey and to offer necessary changes/modifications, if any.

13.6.2 Main items of work :

The following are the main items of work which should constitute the detailed
survey :

i) Closely examining the proposed cable route and prepared cable route
plans.
ii) Siting of cable hut buildings and preparation of site plans.
iii) Siting and preparation of site plans for buildings required for the
execution of the work, as offices at different stations, store godowns,
etc.
iv) Siting of areas for loading/unloading of cable drums and siding facilities
for the EMTs (Engineering Materials Trains) for the project.
v) Estimating of requirement of special cable lengths for long girder
bridges.
vi) Preparation of the material schedule required for different protective
works.
vii) Arranging isolated telephone circuits to be provided in the cable.
viii) Investigation on special problems, if any, of the section and finding out
proposed solution thereof.

13.6.3 Procedure :

For the preparation of the main cable route plan, 5 km charts should be
prepared which covers a length of 3 Km of the route. The horizontal scale is
10cm = 1km.

Based on the OHE location survey plan, the locations of ASMs office, cabins,
OHE switching posts, etc. should be marked on the charts. The name of the
location should be put in the LOC column and the chainage in the CH
column. At every 10cm the km post number should be written and its exact
equivalent chainage as per OHE survey plan entered in the CH column. The
equivalent chainage is required for working out the length of the cable
required. The name of the station should be shown against the location of the
Station Masters office.

Based on the OHE survey, the serial number and the length of culverts,
bridges and level crossing shall be marked on the Track Line of the cable
route plan. The survey party should be supplied with prints of 5 km charts
with the above details entered for enabling them to mark the route, and other
details after surveying.

The following are the guidelines for finalizing the route and preparation of the
cable route plan :-

i) Prepare the 5 km charts as explained above and collect the latest
copy of approved OHE survey plan to enter the relevant chainages and
details in the 5 km charts.

ii) Actual measurement by 30m steel tape or chain along the route is
necessary only in case of important locations to be termed as special
terrains for example, approach to long bridges, big yard, sharp
diversions in the cable route from its parallel course along the main
Railway tracks due to obstruction, cuttings, etc.

iii) Inspect and decide the portions of route falling in category of special
terrains stated in para (ii) above, i.e. where actual longitudinal
measurement is necessary.

iv) The remaining portions of the route, i.e. other than the portion decided
as special terrain as per para (ii) above are to be termed as straight
runs. Actual chaining along the route is not necessary for such
straight runs and these can be marked on the 5 km charts by taking
chainages from the OHE plan.

v) The cable route shall be started from control office. At that
measurement along the route should be done by means of a 30m steel
tape for a few drum lengths up to a convenient point along the main line
where from the distances along the route may be reckoned from the
OHE plan.

vi) Actual measurements of the separation distance from the centre line of
the reference track (a reference track shall always be the main line) is
essential in case of special terrains on straight runs this measurement
shall be made where necessary. In case of special terrains the
separation distance at some points on the route may also have to be
reckoned from some other permanent structures depending upon the
site conditions.

vii) The separation distance of the cable route from the nearest track on the
straight runs should be 10 metres. The deviation from this standard
separation of 10 m should be kept to the minimum and as soon as an
obstruction has been negotiated, the route shall again follow this
standard separation distance.

viii) As a rule, a minimum distance of 5.75m should be maintained between
the OHE masts and the cable. In yards, etc. where observance of this
rule may be difficult, a minimum distance of 3m shall be maintained. In
exceptional cases where the cable trench depth is less than 0.5m near
OHE masts, the above distance may be reduced to 1m.

ix) The route shall be decided by walking along the track on long stretches
of straight runs a push trolley moving slowly may be used. The trolley
shall be on the track closet to the proposed route.

x) Actual measurement shall be made for the protective works required for
the cable passing over the culverts under tracks, over long girder
bridges, arch bridges, level crossings, rocky areas, under the bed of
culverts and near OHE switching posts, etc.

xi) The survey party shall visit each location such as cabins, SMs offices,
loco sheds, pump houses, gate lodge, etc. and verify the details
collected during the preliminary survey of all the existing
telecommunication facilities to be provided due to RE such as tappings
on traction power control, traction loco control, remote control and
emergency control circuits. For emergency control circuits in addition to
the general tappings to be provided at every 1 to 1.2 km. The details of
tappings specifically required by the Electrical Engineering Department
for their switching posts such as sub-sectioning posts, sectioning posts,
traction sub-stations and isolated locations, etc. shall be collected well
in time. The exact location of the various tappings on the emergency
control shall then be worked out taking into consideration the tappings
to be essentially provided at specific locations for Electrical Engineering
Department so as to ensure that the distance between the consecutive
emergency socket posts does not exceed 1 to 1.2 km.

The position of each tapping shall thus be finalized and a final tapping
diagram prepared.


13.6.4 CABLE LENGTH :


13.6.4.1 Cable entry in cabin and other buildings shall be as per Drawing Number
RDSO/TCDO/COP-18.



13.6.4.2 The cable length shall be worked out on the following basis :

(a) Route length as per actual measurement plus contour allowance of
2.5%.
(b) Extra length for track crossing including 2.5 meters loop on each side.
(c) 10 meters extra length on approach/crossing of the bridges and
culverts on each side as per measurement in the detailed survey.
(d) 5 meters of cable to be kept on either side of major steel bridges and
2.5 meters of cable on short bridges.
(e) At every joint a loop of 10 meters on either side shall be kept.
(f) In cable huts a loop of 10 meters in the cable pit shall be kept.


13.6.4.3 Special lengths for long girder bridges.

For long girder bridges, special length of cable may be required. This is to
avoid the location of a joint on such bridges, on slopes leading to bridge
abutments and on top of deep cuttings, etc. These details regarding the
approaches to the bridges shall be worked out.


13.6.5 Materials required for protective works.


13.6.5.1 For building masonry platform, at culverts, level crossings and road
crossings etc. special protection for cable is required.


13.6.5.2 Actual measurement should be made for the length which special
protection is necessary and requirement of materials for the protection
should be worked out. The requirement of material based on the actual
measurement should be shown in cable route plan at the appropriate
place.


13.6.6 Isolated telephone circuits.

It is necessary that all telephone circuits such as isolated pump houses,
quarry sites, gate lodges are taken note of and provision made for transfer of
the overhead alignment into cables wherever considered necessary.



**********

SECTION VII

CABLE HANDLING TECHNIQUE FOR STOCKING & TRANSPORTATION OF
OPTIC FIBRE CABLE

13.7.1 GENERAL :

The following practices are to be followed to prevent damages or deterioration
of the cable during handling and storage.

13.7.2 The cable drums stored in open shall be kept on strong surface such as
released sleepers to prevent sinking.

The drums shall not be stacked on its flat side and also suitable stoppers shall
be placed properly for its stability.

13.7.3 The cable drums shall be stored in a manner allowing easy access for lifting
and moving and the drums shall be stored away from other construction
activities.

13.7.4 When rolling the cable drum either for unloading or transportation to cable
laying site, the drum shall always be ROTATED IN THE DIRECTION OF AN
ARROW WHICH IS MARKED ON THE SIDE BOARDS OF THE DRUMS
SOMETIMES ROLL THIS WAY ARROW IS INDICATED ON THE DRUM
FLANGE.

13.7.5 The drums shall not be rolled over objects that could cause damage to the
protective battens or the cable.

13.7.6 After transit, the drums shall be inspected for damage such as broken battens
and where possible, the outer layers of the cable should be inspected.

13.7.7 The cable drums shall always be kept upright with the cable ends securely tied
to prevent unwrapping. All battens or coverings shall be left in a place until
the cable is unrolled from the drums during installation.

13.7.8 UNLOADING OF CABLE DRUMS AT PLACE OF STORAGE OR AT CABLE
LAYOUT LOCATION :

13.7.9 UNLOADING OF CABLE DRUMS

(a) When unloading of a drum is carried out from a vehicle, the drums
SHALL NOT BE DROPPED ON THE GROUND directly to avoid
irreparable damages to he cable due to impact.

(b) Steps for unloading :

i) Unload the drums with fork lift truck with forks enough to take full
width of the drum so that the weight is born by both the flanges.
OR
ii) The cable drum may be lifted by a suitable crane. For this
purpose, a suitable size spindle shall be placed through a central
hole and double ended shall be attached to the spindle. The
spindle shall be equipped with a stopper of such a length that will
not cause damage.

13.7.10 LOADING OF CABLE DRUMS

Same precautions as for unloading are to be followed.

13.7.11 SEALING OF CABLE END

During all stages of storage/use, it is essential that the end of the cable
are effectively sealed by heat shrink end cap. Failure to effectively seal
may result in water entry in the cable and making it unfit for the use.


**********


SECTION VIII

LAYING OF DUCT IN TRENCHES AND CLOWING/PULLING
OF CABLES IN DUCT

13.8.1 WORK FLOW DIAGRAM :

The major steps for cable laying in trenches are shown below. Before
commencing each step, be sure to check how far the work of preceding step
has been completed and how well the preparations for the work of subsequent
step have been made.





































PREPARATION OF MATERIALS, TOOLS & EQUIPMENT
TEST DIGGING
TRENCHING
LAYING OF HDPE DUCT
SIEVED EARTH FILLING
BACKFILLING & PROTECTIVE COVERS (IF ANY)
BLOWING OF CABLE
COMPLETION
13.8.2 CABLE INSTALLATION AND TRENCHES GENERAL

14.8.2.1 Armored fibre optic cable shall be blown into duct laid and suitably aligned
in the trench. The trenching and laying method is dependent on both
ground configuration and nature of the soil at site. The duct shall conform
to the latest Specification of TEC/RDSO.

14.8.2.2 From specifications and drawings, ascertain the route of the cable,
requirement of the materials, labour and work period, etc.

13.8.3 PREPARATION OF MATERIALS , TOOLS AND EQUIPMENTS

(a) Check that all tools and equipments for installation detailed in Section
XI are ready at site.
(b) Check that the required quantity and type of material for laying of cable
in trenches are ready at site.
(c) Take care to keep the tools metal fittings equipments in a warehouse to
prevent being stolen lost.
(d) In case, materials have to be kept on the road care must be taken to
ensure that traffic is not hampered and no inconvenience is caused to
the public.
(e) Special attention must be paid to avoid keeping material on or around
the fire plug or hydrants sewage duct. In case, it becomes
unavoidable, use across such locations.

13.8.4 TEST DIGGING

14.8.4.1 Before cable installation, inspect the route with reference to the approved
plans and the specification and ensure that there are no obstacles in the
route.

14.8.4.2 Conduct test, digging to ascertain the existing facilities and record the
position and depth of cable to be installed as well as any existing
underground cable or water pipes etc.

13.8.5 INSPECTION

(a) Check the cable installation position shown in the cable route plan vis-
-vis the actual condition site.
(b) Determine the cable jointing points and curving points from the offset
shown on the cable route plan and measure the distance between them
and the surplus lengths.

13.8.6 TRENCHING

13.8.6.1 Traffic Safety :

At the site of cable installation, take the under mentioned measures for traffic
safety:

(a) Provide WORK IN PROGRESS plate wherever necessary at both
ends of the site and provide lighting devices.
(b) Wherever necessary, provide suitable fences at the end and side of the
trenches to keep vehicle and pedestrians away. At night, use warning
lamps or equivalent at adequate distances.

13.8.6.2 Burying depth of duct

(a) The depth of the duct shall be enough to prevent natural, artificial
obstacles and damage. The standard depth must not be less than the
specified.
(b) In case, it is a rocky area, the depth may be reduced by using the
concrete protection.

13.8.6.3 The standard trench :

(a) The standard trenches are as follows for different conditions :

- Trench for laying duct for optic fibre cable (typical
RDSO/TCDO/COP-6).
- Trench for laying duct for optic fibre cable with 4 quad cable and
PIJF cable in the same trench (typical RDSO/TCDO/COP-7&8).
- Trench on embankment for duct for optic fibre cable
(RDSO/TCDO/COP-9).
- The trenching in the rocky area for duct for optic fibre cable
(typically RDSO/TCDO/COP-10).

13.8.6.4 Excavation :

The excavation for trenching may be made wither manually or by mechanical
means.

(a) Manual excavation :

- The depth of the trench may be measured by a rule made of
pipes as per RDSO/TCDO/COP-11
- When the surface of the ground where the trench is dug is
slanting or uneven, the depth is measured with respect to lower
edge.


(b) Mechanical excavation :

Excavation of trench can also be done mechanically by:-

- Loading backhoe (Escorts 710x or similar) equipped with
excavating bucket of 0.8 meter, cleaning bucket, back filling
blade and lifting tackle. This backhoe may be suitably used for
lifting cable drum equipped suitably.
- Other mechanical excavation with mechanical fittings to trench
and excavate.
- CATERPILLAR TRACTOR can be used for laying cable along
cable route using adjustable ripper having typical preparation of
1.20 meter depth to install cable 1.2 meter depth.

13.8.6.5 After digging is done to specified depth, the bottom of trench should be
levelled by removing the exposed stones or obstacles, etc.

13.8.6.6 A days trenching is to be such a length that cable laying and back filling
can be finished during the day. This however, would not apply to cases
where operation does not hamper the traffic and where cable trenches are
not exposed to likely interference/damages.


13.8.7 HANDLING AND LAYING OF DUCT :

13.8.7.1 The coil of duct shall be unloaded by the side of the Railway track from
either a crane or by any other suitable means very carefully so as not to
cause any damage to the duct. The coils at site shall be protected until
they are laid. The duct shall be given the same care in handling as that
given to the cable. The coils shall be kept as per the guidelines issued by
the manufacturer. The coil shall not be set by jerks but shall be handled
slowly and care. The walls of the ducts shall not be damaged while
moving the coils, if required for unloading.

13.8.7.2 The coil shall normally be unrolled at the same place and the duct carried
by workmen near the trench. The coils shall not be dragged in any case.
But where the drums/coils of duct have to be moved should always be
rolled in the direction of the arrow, otherwise the coils tend to unwind and
the same may get battered. In case no such direction of arrow is given see
the direction of winding of the coil and the coil should be rolled pointing in
the opposite direction in which the upper end is coiled.

13.8.7.3 All care should be taken in handling the coils with a view to ensure safety
of the coils but also of the working party handling them. The coil should
not be broken by standing in front of the coil but only from side.


13.8.7.4 DUCT LAYING :

It is advisable to employ the same people at the same place or job while
duct is being laid.

Before commencement of the laying, inspection of the trench and
inspection of protection works should be carried out so as to ensure their
conformity with the specification. The trench bottom should be clean,
smooth and free of small stone. When the soil contains stone or pieces or
rock and therefore cannot be raddled, sieved earth about 10 cm. thick
should be used both for the bedding on which the duct is being laid.

The duct coil should be brought as close to the trench as possible. It
should be lifted carefully with the aid of jacks

13.8.7.5 (i) It is customary for the mate to stand in a commanding position
where he can view the entire road and shout evenly and call his men to
pull. If there is proper synchronization between the mates call in the
pulling by the men the duct will leave the coil without difficulty. It is
important that the duct shall be pulled with steady and even pulls and there
should not be unnecessary twists. Care should be taken to avoid twist as
this is likely to damage the duct. When pulling around bends one or two
men should be stationed to give the duct the correct bent when it passes.

(ii) While laying the duct employ adequate number of men so that
the duct can be conveniently carried by them in both hands without
stretched arms. The distance between any two persons carrying the duct
shall be two to ten meters depending upon the weight such that the
maximum sag of the duct between any two persons is not more than 0.5
meters.

(iii) While laying work is in progress one man has to continuously
observe the duct along its line in order to determine indentations poles or
other damaged parts are apparent. Such damaged parts have to be
protected immediately.

(iv) The conditions of the duct shall be visually inspected throughout
its line and in case damage or defect is noticed, the trench shall be filled up
only after ensuring that the damage is not likely to affect the cable.

(v) The end of the duct should be sealed with flex to prevent entry of
soil before filling back. Adjoining ducts shall be joined by couplers. Duct
integrity testing shall be carried out when laying is completed in a block
section (8-10 kms). In case the continuity is not achieved the fault shall be
localized and rectified by providing HDPE couplers/Compression couplers.


13.8.7.6 Tools necessary for laying Duct is detailed in Section XI to be checked as
physically available before starting the Duct laying.

For efficient and safe Duct laying, communication may be provided
between following points using portable VHF Walkie talkie sets :

a. Duct Coil end
b. Any intermediate manhole/diversion/track crossing through which
the Duct will be pass.
c. The Supervisor Incharge of the Duct laying.

During duct laying care must be taken not to twist duct in any direction.
For this purpose, the survival (rotating hook) shall be attached between
pulling line and pulling eye at the end of duct so as to avoid any
possible twist during pulling and laying of the cable.

Whenever duct is to be laid in the duct (GI pipe or RCC pipe), suitable
lubricant on duct may be used to reduce friction and consequently the
tension on the cable.

During duct laying care must be taken not to twist duct in any direction.
For this purpose, the survival (rotating hook) shall be attached between
pulling line and pulling eye at the end of duct so as to avoid any
possible twist during pulling and laying of the cable.

In case it is planned to lay the cable in duct by pulling the cable by
using a winch; the duct should be provided with a nylon rope for pulling
the cable.

13.8.8 PREPARATION FOR PAYING OUT CABLE

(a) Check the drum number and length of the cable, etc.
(b) Entrust cable drum to the contractor after testing the fibres with OTDR
for attenuation and to ensure that no mechanical damage of the fibre
exists while handing over the cable to the contractor.
(c) Place the cable jack (to support cable drum) on a flat surface.
(d) Put cable spindle through drum and adjust cable jacks so that the drum
may be clear 3-5 cm from the ground and that the spindle may become
horizontal. Remove carefully lags of drum with bar or other means by
taking care that no damage to the cable takes place.
(e) Pull out nails from lags or bend them so that operation can be done
safely.
(f) Normally both end of the cable is provided with cable grip and pulling
eye. In case, it is not already provided, fit the cable grip/pulling eye to
the survival and pull the wires by means of shackle.


13.8.9 LAYING OF CABLE BY WINCH

(a) Stretch pulling rope on rollers and fix its end on winch.
(b) Use 2-3 tonnes winch and put it near the dug trench. The winch shall
be fastened at the back wire to a pile driven into the ground to prevent
from moving out of place due to pulling tension may arise during
operation.
(c) After all is ready, post workman at winch, cable and using
communication, pull slowly into the duct by means of winch.
(d) Cable shall be laid under a specified pulling tension bending radius
and pulling speed as shown below :
(e)
ITEM VALUE
PULLING TENSION 1.1* w Kg.
BENDING RADIUS 30* D
DURING
INSTALLATION
PULLING SPEED Max.15 m/min
D Cable outer dia
W Weight of Cable per Km. in Kg

13.8.10 BLOWING OF OFC CABLE

Optical fibre cable will be blown into pre-lubricated HDPE duct laid with the
help of a compressor and blowing equipment. (With minimum pressure of 8
bar and maximum pressure of 12 bar with flow rate of minimum 10m
3
/minute).

The blowing method involves feeding of optical fibre cable into the duct with
the help of consistent high pressure airflow, equally distributed along the entire
cable throughout the duct.


The following steps may be adopted for safe blowing of OFC :

i) Position the compressor and blowing machine at blowing pit C for
location A & E shown below.
4 Km




Pit A Pit B Pit C Pit D Pit E


(Location of Compressor and blowing M/C)

ii) Put the cable drum on cable wheel and blow the OFC towards pit A. A
pusher equipment may be placed at B if required.
iii) When the cable reaches pit A and coil of 10 15m of OFC should be
kept in pit A. Then seal the duct end at A with the sealing plug.
iv) Uncoil the cable on the drum in a figure of eight configuration and blow
towards blowing pit E and coil of 10 15m of OFC should be kept in pit
E.
v) Since the cable will be available in length of 3 km and above, so the
contractor has to plan the location of blowing pits before laying of
HDPE duct. The contractor has to ensure that excess OFC is not
coiled in the blowing pit and also optical fibre cable does not fall short of
the location of blowing pit. The contractor has to match the cable drum
length with the location of blowing pits, to ensure minimum cut length
and wastage of OFC. To achieve the blowing of above shown strength,
blowing can be carried out downhill, wherever possible.
vi) HDPE ducts will be sealed with the help of cable sealing plugs after
blowing of OFC into the duct at jointing pit locations.

13.8.11 TREATMENT OF CABLE AFTER IT IS LAID

a. After completion of cable laying check the following items :

Confirm extra jointing length as required at end.
In case cable is damaged, take necessary prevention and
remedial steps for removal of defects.
If there is any snaking or rise in cable put right.
Examine interior of the trench and remove any pebbles, etc.
Take protective step for such objects projecting the trench
such as sewer pipe etc.

b. While laying one piece of cable, when part of the work is to be put
off till the following day, keep the remaining portion of cable wound
on the drum, reduce as much as possible the distance of the drum
from already laid cable considering cable bending radius and
general traffic safety and also ensure that drum is prevented from
tumbling down or rolling away. Already laid cable shall be fully
covered to avoid outside interface.


********
SECTION IX

PROTECTION OF OPTIC FIBRE CABLE ROUTE AND
BACK FILLING OF TRENCHES

13.9.1 GENERAL :

13.9.2 This chapter covers the various protection arrangements, which are required
to be provided along the cable route for the purpose of preventing damage to
the cable and protection to staff.

13.9.3 The chapter also covers the arrangement for back filling of cable trenches to
provide protection to the cable.

13.9.4 PROTECTION OF CABLE ROUTE :

13.9.5 PROTECTION OF CABLE CROSSING BRIDGES/CULVERTS. (The typical
arrangements for protection for the following types of bridges/culverts are as
under.)

i) Arrangement of cable troughs and channel for girder bridges and major
culverts (Typical Drawing RDSO/TCDO/COP-12) and
RDSO/TCDO/COP-13). Separate troughs should be provided for laying
6 quad cable & OFC.
ii) Drawing of crossing major culverts (high flood level and normally
blocked by water) and major bridges by steel troughs at rail level
(Typical drawing RDSO/TCDO/COP-14).
iii) Drawing of crossing of Railway bridges by perforated GI pipe (Typical
drawing RDSO/TCDO/COP-17).
iv) Drawing for crossing culverts pipe/box with high flood level (Typical
Drawing RDSO/TCDO/COP-16).

13.9.6 MEASURE AGAINST THEFT OF STEEL TROUGHS :

(a) In the drawing for major culverts and bridges steel troughs are to be
provided on the channels as indicated in the drawing
RDSO/TCDO/COP-12 and RDSO/TCDO/COP-13.
(b) In order to prevent theft of optic fibre cable steel troughs with optic fibre
cable should be filled up by bitumen compound conforming to IS
specification. The cover of the trough to be effectively secured as per
the drawing.
(c) Bitumen filling job should be supervised at responsible level not below
the rank of Sr. Supervisor.
(d) In order that the temperature of the cable does not increase beyond
55
0
C, bitumen compound should be poured in the early hours/late
hours of day when ambient temperature is around 18
0
C or less.


(e) While pouring the heated bitumen compound, steel trough covers
should be removed all through the bridges in order to permit fast
cooling.
(f) Before pouring bitumen compound, its temperature should be
accurately measured to ensure that the pouring temperature is not
more than 140
0
C.
(g) The bitumen compound should be filled upto a height of approximate
60mm.

13.9.7 ARRANGEMENT ACROSS CULVERTS :

(a) Most of the culverts are generally dry and as such the arrangement as
indicated in RDSO/TCDO/COP-17 can be adopted.
(b) For culverts which are normally filled with water or which are having
high flood level, the protection arrangement can be done as per the
arrangement shown in drawing RDSO/PCDO/COP-16.

13.9.8 ARRANGEMENT FOR LAYING OF FIBRE OPTIC CABLE ACROSS
GIRDER BRIDGES :

(a) Girder bridges up to span length of 12 meter :

i) Girder bridges of up to 6 meter span can be crossed with
perforated GI pipe as per the arrangement shown in drawing
No.RDSO/TCDO/COP-17.
ii) The same arrangement can be followed for girder bridges of
span length between 6 and 12 meter where an intermediate
support to GI pipe can be provided.

(b) Girder bridges of span length more than 12 meters.

i) The crossing of girder bridges of more than12 length can be
done as per the drawing No.RDSO/TCDO/COP-14. The
arrangement for fixing of steel trough indicated in drawing
RDSO/TCDO/COP-12 and RDSO/TCDO/COP-13.
ii) The procedure for filling bitumen compound is indicated in
Clause 13.9.6 above.
iii) Separate trough for laying 6 quad cable should be used.

13.9.9 PROTECTION ARRANGEMENT ON THE CABLE ROUTE :

The typical drawings of cable trenches under various situations are given in
Section-VIII. These drawings include the protection arrangement of brick
provided along the cable route. These protection arrangements are
summarized below:
(a) The cable laid in the station yard (Home Signal to Home signal) and on
the embankment, after covering the duct with riddled earth, B-class
brick to be placed transversely through out to over the cable laid in
station yard/embankment.
(b) The cable marker shall normally be provided at distance of every 50
meters on the cable route and at places wherever the route changes. A
joint indicator shall be provided at all types joints. The cable marker
and joint marker provision shall be as per Drawing
No.RDSO/TCDO/COP-18 for normal and rocky area.

(c) The cable marker and joint markers provided shall be of standard stone
RCC type.

13.9.10 CABLE CROSSING TRACKS AND LEVEL CROSSING GATE :

(a) In such cases, the cable shall be laid in RCC pipes keeping the depth
same as in normal routes.
(b) In case of cable crossing the LC gates, HDPE pipe to be laid on the
road and for a distance of at least two meters from either side of the
road.
(c) Minimum depth at any track crossing shall not be less than 1.2 meters
with RCC/GI pipe. In case cable crossing the track, it may be ensured
that it should not be bent less than 600mm radius. Suitable fixture with
HDPE pipe should be provided to ensure proper bending radius to be
used at each end.
(d) The drawing for track crossing, road crossing platform shall be as per
Drawing No.RDSO/TCDO/COP-19.
(e) Arrangement of RCC pipe under metalled road shall be as per
RDSO/TCDO/COP-20.
(f) In case of difficult terrain along road/platforms/Railway track, etc. where
trenching is difficult, trench less horizontal directional drilling may be
adopted. A minimum depth of 1.2 meters to be ensured.
(g) Cable should not be buried directly, it should be laid in permanently
lubricated HDPE/DWC pipes (conforming to latest RDSO/TEC
specification with latest amendments) at one meter depth from surface
in plains.

Cable should be taken in GI pipe in rocky areas, culverts, girder bridges
and PSC girder bridges (without duct). At the end of these structures
where the pipe enters the trench the pipe should extend right into the
trench and then should be protected with a concrete/brick masonry
work, 5 meter cable should be kept at the ends.

(h) Wherever new PSC girders are being constructed, provision of ducts
should be catered, OFC cable shall be taken through class B GI pipes
of 80 mm diameter.

(i) In tunnel area the cable should be laid by excavating a suitable depth in
the drainage area levelling the bottom surface in B class GI pipe of 80
mm diameter, the entire length of GI pipe will be concreted and
substantially protected.

(j) Wherever ballast less track is constructed as in the case of long tunnels
provision for HDPE pipe should be catered, which can be embedded in
the concrete base. In such cases, tapping holes may be made at every
200 meters so that emergency control circuits can be tapped at
convenient locations.

13.9.11 BACK FILLING OF TRENCHES :

13.9.12 For back filling of cable trenches following precautions shall be taken :

(a) At least 120mm from the surface of the last cable, cable should be
covered with riddles earth. This portion of the earth is not loose. This
will also prevent entry of rodents and other insects.
(b) At 500mm depth a PVC warning tape shall be provided continuously
running in the trench.
(c) For the remaining portion of the trench, the released earth may be
used. However, after filling up the trench, the earth shall be
consolidated by ramming.
(d) Re-filling of trench and ramming shall be supervised by a responsible
Supervisor and also at officers level for the specified percentage of the
section.
(e) It shall be ensured that before the start of monsoon session, all open
trenches are properly back filled to avoid water logging of the trench.

13.9.13 In case of any unforeseen situation/controversy final decision will be
taken by the Engineer at site.



***********
SECTION X

JOINTING AND TERMINATION OF OPTIC FIBRE CABLE

13.10.1 Techniques for jointing of optic fibre cable.

13.10.2 Following types of techniques shall be used for splicing of fibres :-

(a) Mechanical Splice
This align the axis of the two fibres to be joined and physically hold
them together.

(b) Fusion Splicing
This is done by applying localized heating (i.e. by electric arc or flame)
at the interface between the butted, pre-aligned fibre end, causing them
to soften and fuse together.

13.10.3 Mechanical splicing shall be used for temporary splicing of fibres or
where fusion splicing is impractical or undesirable.

13.10.4 At all other location and during initial installation of optic fibre cable,
fusion splicing shall be adopted.

13.10.5 STRAIGHT JOINT FOR OPTIC FIBRE CABLE

13.10.6 There are various types of joint enclosures available in the market. The
procedure for assembly of joint closure is described in the installation
manual supplied with straight joint closure. This includes the following :

(a) Material inside joint closure kit.
(b) Installation tools required.
(c) Detailed procedure for cable jointing
(d) Procedure for reopening the closure.

13.10.7 Generally, the following steps are involved for jointing of the cable :

- Preparation of cable for jointing
- Stripping/cutting the cable
- Preparation of cable and joint closure for splicing
- Stripping and cleaving of fibres
- Organising fibres and finishing joints
- Sealing of joint closure and
- Placing joint in pit









13.10.8 PREPARATION OF CABLE FOR JOINTING

(a) During the installation, a minimum of 10 meter of cable at each end is
coiled in the jointing pit to provide for jointing to be carried out at
convenient location as well as spare length to be available for future
use in case of failures.
(b) The pit size shall be so as to ensure the length of the wall on which joint
is mounted is greater than closure length plus twice the minimum
bending radius of the cable. A pit length of 1 meter is sufficient for most
of the cable and joint closures. Bracket to support eh cable coil are
also fixed on the wall of the pit. Details of cable pit are given in Drawing
No.RDSO/TCDO/COP-21.
(c) The cable is then coiled on to the pit wall in the same position as
required after the joint is complete. The marking is done on all the
loops so that it will be easier to install it later.
(d) The distance from the last centre to the end of the cable must be at
least 1.8 meters. This is the minimum length to be stripped for
preparation of joint.
(e) Sufficient cable length at both ends up to the jointing vehicle/enclosure
is then uncoiled from the pit for jointing.

13.10.9 STRIPPING/CUTTING OF THE CABLE

(a) The cable is stripped of outer and inner sheath with each sheath
staggered approximately 10mm from the one above it.
(b) Proper care must be taken when removing the inner sheath to ensure
that the fibres are not scratched or cut with the stripping knife or tool.
To prevent this, it is better to score the inner sheath twice on opposite
sides of the cable, rather than cutting completely through it. The two
scores marking on either side of the cable can be easily stripped of the
inner sheath by hand.
(c) The fibres shall be then removed from cable one by one and each fibre
is cleaned individually using kerosene to remove the jelly.
(d) Armouring shall remain outside the gland and will not be connected
through.

13.10.10 PREPARATION OF CABLE JOINT CLOSURE FOR SPLICING

The type of preparation work performed on the cable prior to splicing differs on
the type of joint closure and fibre organizer used. However, the following
steps shall be usually common for different types of joint closure.

(a) The strength member of each cable shall be joined to each other and/or
the central frame of the joint closure.
(b) The joint closure shall be assembled around the cable.
(c) The sealing compound or heat shrink sleeve shall be applied to the
cables and closure, or prepared for application after splicing is
complete.
(d) Tags which identify the fibres number .shall be attached at suitable
location on the fibres.
(e) Splice protectors shall be slipped over each fibre in readiness for
placing over the bare fibre after splicing.

13.10.11 STRIPPING AND CLEAVING OF FIBRE

(a) Prior to splicing, primary protective coating of each fibre shall be
stripped off up to length of 50 mm. by using fibre stripper. Fibre
strippers shall be manufactured to fine tolerances and only score the
coating without contacting the glass fibre.
(b) The bare fibre shall be then wiped with a lint tissue paper rinsed with
ethyl alcohol.
(c) Cleaving of the fibre shall then be performed to obtain as close as
possible to a perfect 90 degree face on the fibre.

13.10.12 SPLICING OF THE FIBRE

As discussed above there are two types of methods which shall be used for
fibre splicing.

13.10.12.1 FUSION SPLICING OF FIBRE

Some of the general steps with full automatic micro processor control splicing
machines shall be as under:

(a) Hands shall be thoroughly washed prior to commencing this procedure.
(b) The clean bare fibre shall be dipped in the beaker of ethyl alcohol of the
ultrasonic cleaver and ultrasonic clever switched on for 5-10 seconds.
(c) The bare fibre shall then be placed inside V groove of the splicing
machine by opening clamp handle, in such a way so that 1 mm gap is
available between the electrodes and the end of fibre being spliced and
heat shrink protector inserted.
(d) The same procedure shall be repeated for other fibre.
(e) The start button on the splice controller shall be pressed.
(f) The machine shall pre-fuse set align both in X and Y direction and
then finally fuse the fibre.
(g) The splice shall be inspected on monitor provide on the fusion splicing
machine, there shall be no nicking, bulging and cores are adequately
aligned. The above procedure shall be repeated if the splice is not
visually good looking.
(h) The heat shrink protector shall be slid over the splice and tube shall be
placed in tube heater. Heating shall be considered complete when soft
inner layer is seen to be oozing out of the outer layer of the protector.
(i) The steps 9a) to (h) above shall be repeated for other fibres.



13.10.12.2 MECHANICAL SPLICING OF THE FIBRE

There are two types of mechanical splicing system. In case, one with
precision alignment of fibre in V groove and fibre ends are sealed with some
index matching fluid and adhesive. The other system uses ultrasonic light
source for curing optical adhesive in addition to alignment etc.

The general steps involved above are as under:

(a) Stripping and cleaving of fibres shall be done as per Clause 13.10.11.
(b) Protective end cap shall be removed from mechanical splice and vent
tube pulled up.
(c) Adhesive shall be injected into splice as specified by supplier into
splice.
(d) Fibre shall be inserted till it butts against fibre end already bonded in
place.
(e) Adhesive shall be cured with UV light following exposure times as
specified by supplier.
(f) The steps (a) to (e) above shall be repeated for all fibres.

13.10.13 ORGANISING FIBRE AND FINISHING JOINTS

(a) After each fibre has been spliced, the heat shrink protection sleeve
shall be slipped over the bare fibre before any handling of fibre takes
place as uncoated fibres are very brittle and cannot withstand small
radius bends without breaking.
(b) The fibre shall then be organized into its tray by coiling the fibres on
east side of the protection sleeve using the full tray side to ensure the
maximum radius possible for fibre coils.
(c) The tray then shall be placed in the position.
(d) OTDR reading shall be taken for all splices in this organized state and
recorded on the test sheet to confirm that of all fibres attenuation is
within specified limits. The OTDR test confirms that fibres were not
subjected to excessive stress during the organizing process. Care
should be taken that the fibres are not interchanged while jointing.
(e) The joint shall then be closed with necessary sealing etc. and
considered ready for placement in the pit.

13.10.14 PLACING OF COMPLETED JOINT IN PIT

(a) Joint shall be taken out from the vehicle and placed on the tarpaulin
provided near the pit.
(b) The cable is laid on the ground and looped according to the marking
done in the beginning. These loops shall then be tied together with the
tape.
(c) The joint shall be permanently closed and sealed by heating heat
shrinkable sleeve, etc.
(d) The joint closure shall be fixed to the bracket on the pit wall and pit
closed.

13.10.15 REOPENING OF THE JOINT

For attending faults, etc. special kits shall be used for opening of the joint and
the instructions shall be followed. The general steps are as under :-

(a) Suitable knife shall be used to cut heat shrink sleeve longitudinally
along its entire length.
(b) It shall be ensured that there is no damage the smaller heat shrink
sleeve on the ends of the joint.
(c) Heat shall then be applied to the cut sleeve until it begins to separate.
(d) The cut sleeve shall be removed gently from the joint so that joint can
be opened.
(e) Protective sleeve/cover shall be removed for attending to faults, etc.

13.10.16 TERMINATION JOINT FOR OPTIC FIBRE CABLE

13.1.0.16.1 This joint is provided in the cable hut for terminating the outdoor optic
fibre cable of both the sides, splicing through fibres, connecting fibres to
pigtails for connection to optical line terminal equipment, etc.

13.1.0.16.2 The procedure for installation of termination joint box shall depend on
the type of joint enclosure. The installation manual shall contain the step
by step procedure for installation. The general steps shall be as under :-

- Marking the cable
- Stripping/cutting the cable
- Gripping cable in sheath/clamp
- Treatment of tension member
- Fibre splicing
- Enclosing fibre
- Fixing strength member
- Closing the cover
- Fixing termination box
- Fixing the cable

13.10.17 MARKING THE CABLE

(a) The cable length shall be determined up to the proposed location of
termination box. It shall also be ensured that at least 10 meters of
cable is coiled in the cable pit.
(b) The cutting point shall be determined and the cable marked.
(c) The length sheath peeling point shall be determined and cable marked.


13.10.18 CUTTING/STRIPPING THE CABLE

(a) The cable shall be cut as per the marking.
(b) The sheath shall be removed from cable end. During sheath stripping
care shall be taken that the fibres are not damaged.
(c) The length and the steps for various sheath cutting shall be as per the
instructions given in the manual.

13.10.19 GRIPPING THE CABLE

(a) PVC tape shall be wound around the cable core just beside edge of the
sheath.
(b) The bushing inside sheath shall be inserted by cutting the cable sheath
for about 25mm.
(c) The sheath grip (lower half and upper half) shall be placed and
tightened it with the help of torque wrench.

13.10.20 FIXING OF TENSION MEMBER

(a) The tension member shall be marked for the specified length and cut.
(b) The tension member shall be thoroughly cleaned by alcohol and cotton
cloth.
(c) Tension member holder shall be fixed at the end of tension member
with the help of instant adhesive.

13.10.21 FIBRE SPLICING

The procedure for fibre splicing shall be same as described for straight joint
closure in Clause 13.10.12.

13.10.22 ENCLOSING FIBRES

(a) The fibre cassette shall be set on the base of the joint closure.
(b) Excess length of fibre shall be arranged to make double figure of eight.
(c) The spliced fibre and its excess length shall be enclosed carefully.
(d) The steps (a) to (c) above shall be repeated for other fibres.

13.10.23 MOUNTING OF TERMINATION BOX

Termination box shall be fixed either on wall or on equipment rack.

(a) The fixing holes shall be marked on the walls/bracket/frame.
(b) The termination box shall be placed and the nuts inside the base box
shall be tightened.
(c) Sufficient silica gel in bags shall be kept inside and the covers shall
then be put on termination box and closed.
(d) Fibre Distribution Management System (FDMS).
At major termination stations OFC cable should be installed in suitable
Fibre Distribution and Management System (FDMS). The system could
be compatible with 19 rack. The FDMS shall conform to TEC
specification for generic requirement No.GR/FDM/0101 with latest
amendments and RDSO specification.
(e) Patch Cords/Pigtails.
Patch cords and pigtails shall be procured as per RDSO/TECs latest
specification.
(f) Jointing/Splicing: The optic fibre placed in the joint should be safely
protected in a brick masonry chamber or concrete chamber of
approximate dimension 1 meter x 1 meter (50 cm depth). The chamber
should be filled with fine sieved sand. The upper surface of the
chamber should be kept 50 cm below the surface; a suitable joint
marker should be placed on all joint locations. 10 meters of extra cable
should be coiled in the pit for future use. Armoring must not be put
through. The armoring should be earthed.

13.10.24 FIXING THE CABLE

The cable on wall/frame shall be secured at two places within one
meter from termination box keeping in view straight entry of cable into
termination box.

13.10.24.1 After the cable is laid and splicing has been completed, measurements
in the enclosed proforma has to be prepared.

Section Distance Cable
length
Fibre
No
Loss in dB Remarks
From To 1310nm 1550nm


The end to end loss should not exceed 0.25db/Km at 1550 nm and 0.40
db/Km at 1310 nm.


********
SECTION XI

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENTS FOR INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF
OPTIC FIBRE CABLE


GROUP I TOOLS REQUIRED FOR TRENCHING, CABLE LAYING AND BACK
FILLING.

SNo. Tools Name
1. Cable Jack
2. Cable Grip
3. Reopening device
4. Free Hood Hook
5. Shackle free head hook
6. Growling hook
7. Pulling bolt
8. Tension meter
9. Pulley
10. Anti twist device (swivel)
11. Roller
12. Flexible cable
13. Pulling rope
14. Brush
15. Mandrel
16. Chain
17. Measuring cord for strain gauge
18. Slip winch
19. Wire rope
20. Portable VHF set
21. Measuring tape
22. Phawarah
23. Iron Plate
24. Loader Backhoe for drilling
25. Warning Tape
26. Caterpillar tractor
27. Fork lifter
28. Vehicle Van type
29. Tachometer
30. Portable K oil Generator
31. Umbrella
32. Blank dark coloured cloth for splicing machine











GROUP II TOOLS AND EQUIPMENTS REQUIRED FOR JOINTING AND
TERMINATION OF OPTIC FIBRE CABLE.

SNo. Tools Name
1. Branch Joint Closure
2. Termination Box
3. Rubber and Block
4. Sheath Clamp
5. Bushing
6. Strength Member holder
7. Heat Shrinkage tube
8. Arc fusion splicer machine
9. Power cord AC/DC
10. Walkie-Talkie 12V DC source
11. Tube heater
12. Precision cleaver
13. Cable sheath stripper
14. Fibre stripper
15. Knife for HDPE cutting
16. Hacksaw for strength membrane
17. Isopropyl alcohol or methanol of high specific gravity
18. Johnson Buds
19. Tweezers
20. Gun heater blower type
21. Sleeve for splice protection
22. OTDR
23. Stabilized optical power source and power meter
24. Optical Talk set
25. Stickers for numbering of splicers

********


SECTION XII

13.12.1 List of items to be handed over to Maintenance Organization
before handing over the section for maintenance.

The following items should be handed over to the maintenance in
charge before handing over the section for maintenance.

1. The Cable Route Plan in electronic form (CD) preferably using
AUTOCAD. Distances from fixed reference structures like
centre of track, OHE mast, bridges, culverts, etc. should be
indicated in the route plan for easy reference in future.
2. The Fibre Distribution Plan
3. Measurements of Optical Parameters which includes sectional
losses, splice wise losses, records of dispersion measurements
(in case of long haul systems) for set of measuring equipments
and tools as per the yardstick should be handed over to the
maintenance organization.

13.12.2 Staff Requirement.

There should be a full-fledged cable gang for a section length of about
300 Kms. The staff strength should be as per yardstick laid down in
Boards Letter No.2000/Tele/MW/7/RCIL/A/Pt. dated 6/9/2004.

Without AMC total No.of staff = 26

SNo Gang Description Category of staff Number
per
Gang
Number of
Gangs
Total
1 General
Supervision
SSE
TA/Clerical
Artisan
Group D
1
1
1
4
1 7
2 Cable Gang JE-I/II
TCM-III/WTM-III
Cable Jointer
Group D
1
1
1
2
2
(one gang
for every
150 Kms)
10
3 Equipment Gang SE/JE-I
TCM-I/II/WTM-I/II
Group D
1
4
2
1 7
4 EMC Patrol Gang TCM-III/WTM-III 2 1 2
Grand Total 26





With AMC total No.of Staff (for cable maintenance) = 20

SNo Gang Description Category of staff Number
per
Gang
Number of
Gangs
Total
1 General
Supervision
SSE
TA/Clerical
Artisan
Group D
1
1
1
4
1 7
2 Cable Gang JE-I/II
TCM-III/WTM-III
Cable Jointer
Group D
1
1
1
1
1

4
3 Equipment Gang SE/JE-I
TCM-I/II/WTM-I/II
Group D
1
4
2
1 7
4 EMC Patrol Gang TCM-III/WTM-III 2 1 2
Grand Total 20

The maintenance gang should have provision for a vehicle where the
men and material (as enlisted) in Annexure II can be loaded and
comfortably reach the site.


----------------------
APPENDIX I

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FOR FIBRE OPTIC SYSTEM

EQUIPME
NT
ITEM MAINTAIN
ER
SECTIONAL
SUPERVISOR
SUPERVISOR
INCHARGE
Maintenance of Batteries weekly monthly Quarterly
Meas. of Battery voltages weekly monthly Quarterly
Main. of Charger and
In/Out voltages and
currents
weekly monthly Quarterly
Checking of fuses and
terminations
weekly monthly Quarterly
POWER
SUPPLY
EQUIPME
NT
Check of Earthing weekly monthly Quarterly
GENERAL Cleaning of the flooring weekly
Removal of dust from the
equipment and cards
weekly


Measurement of room
temperature
weekly


Earthing of the racks,
power equipment etc.
weekly

monthly

Quarterly

Measurement of earth
resistance
Quarterly

Quarterly

Check of electrical
devices.
weekly monthly Quarterly
Maintenance of pigtails,
fibre distribution frame
etc.
weekly monthly


Quarterly

OPTICAL
FIBRE
CABLE
OTDR Measurement of
spare fibres
Quarterly

CABLE
ROUTE
Integrity of cable route Fortnightly Quarterly

Yearly

Protective works on
bridges & culverts
Fortnightly Quarterly

Yearly

Cable route markers Fortnightly Quarterly Yearly
Earthing of sheath of
cable
Fortnightly

Quarterly Yearly

Periodical
line up
OTDR meas. on all
Fibres
Yearly

Tx/Rx optical power Yearly
Pulse mask for all digital
interfaces
Quarterly

Yearly

Channel meas. as per
CCITT

Quarterly
Yearly
G821/G823 tests on
64KBPS/2MBPS for
10 days
Quarterly

Yearly

Loss measurement
with optical source &
power meter.

Quarterly
Yearly

Measurement of
orderwire
performance circuits.
Quarterly

Yearly



Note :
1. Items related to cable gang shall be done by cable maintenance Gang.
2. Items related to equipment shall be done by equipment maintenance gang.











APPENDIX II

T&P ITEMS AND MEASURING EQUIPMENTS FOR MAINTENANCE STAFF


S.No. GANG RECOMMENDED T&P ITEMS &
EQUIPMENTS
1. Equipment
Maintenance
Soldering Iron
Vacuum Cleaner
Standard Tool Kit containing Screw
Drivers, etc.
Digital Multi-meter
Optical Fibre connector Cleaning kit
2. Sectional Supervisor
Equipment
All equipments as prescribed for
equipment maintenance gang.
Portable BER & PCM Test Set
Meager
Optical Attenuation Measurement
set consisting of optical power
meter, optical source and optical
attenuator
3. Supervisory Incharge
for equipments
Test and Repair Van
PCM Transmission Analyzer
PCM Channel Analyzer along
Digital Storage Oscilloscope
Frequency Counter
Fibre Optic tool kit
Mini portable Generator
SDH analyzer
4. Sectional Engineer
Cable Maintenance
Digital Multi-meter\
Mini ODTR
Mechanical splicing kit
Ruggedised Optical Fibre cable 200 Mts
Splicing machine with battery
Fibre Optic Tool Kit
All types of Adopters & Connectors
Fibre Optic Talk set
Insulation Tester
TMS kit

5. HQ gang for cable 200 Mtr of OFC cable
Test & Repair van
Portable generator
Automatic Fusion Splicing machine
OTDR
Fibre Optic Tool Kit
Mechanical Splicing kit
Optical Talk set
All types of Adopters & Connectors.
Lighting arrangements and emergency
lamps (2 Nos)
Emergency phones (4 Nos)
Walkie-Talkie sets (4 Nos)
Torches with batteries (6 sets)
Spare batteries for splicing machines (1
No)
Puncha (to remove ballast) (2 Nos)
Pickaxe (4 Nos)
Motar pan & showel (4 Nos)
Spade (4 Nos)
Portable tent (1 No)
Crow bar (2 Nos)
OFC spare cables (cables of adequate
length)
HDPE pipe pieces (10 Nos)
Drinking water can (20 litres) (1 No)
Glasses (2 Nos)
Folding table and chair (1 each)
Stool light weight (2 Nos)
First aid box (1 No)






























































































CHAPTER XIV

DIGITAL MULTIPLEXING EQUIPMENT


14.1 PRINCIPLE OF DIGITAL MULTIPLEXER

14.1.1 All digital multiplexing equipment shall be based on 2048 Kbps; PDH
8.448/34.368Mbps, SDH (STM -1, STM -4 , STM 16 or higher) 10
Mbps, 100 Mbps, 1 Gbps (Ethernet) based hierarchy.

14.2 MEDIA OF TRANSMISSION

- Digital UHF/MICROWAVE relay system
- Symmetric cable pairs / HDSL modems
- Star quad cable in 25 KV AC electrified areas
- Optical fibre

14.3.0 Primary multiplexing equipment

(a) This equipment shall multiplex 30 analogue and/or data channel to
2048 kbps ITU compatible digital stream on transmit side and on
receive side, it shall demultiplex ITU compatible 2048 kbps digital
stream to 30 analogue voice /data channels.

(b) Following type of primary multiplexers are in use

(i) TERMINAL MUX

It shall have one 2048 kbps port each for trans and receive side
and shall be used as end multiplexer.

(ii) PRIMARY DROP/INSERT MUX

This shall have at least two 2048 kbps ports (P1 and P2 port)
each for send and receive side. It shall be possible in drop/insert
any channel to P1/P2 port or make a time slot through P1 port to
P2 port and vice versa.

(iii) DROP/INSERT MUX WITH CONFERENCE FACILITY

Its function is similar to drop insert MUX described above with
additional facility of at least 3 party conference between any
combination of time slots of either P1 port or P2 port and voice
interface.





(c) TYPE OF INTERFACE CARDS FOR THE PRIMARY
MULTIPLEXER

Following types of interface cards are provided in primary digital
multiplexer

- 2W speech card with E&M Signalling
- 4W speech card with E&M signalling
- Exchange end interface cards
- Subscriber side interface cards
- Hotline interface cards
- Magneto telephone interface cards
- Conference circuits, omnibus voice circuits
- Data interface cards of various types like
(i) G703 codirectional/contradirectional
(ii) V.24/RS232C interface
(iii) V.35 interface
(iv) NX64 Kbps data interface cards etc


14.3.1 Second Order Multiplexing Equipment

This equipment shall convert four 2048 kbps tributary signal into a 8448
kbps digital signal and vice versa with positive justification.

14.3.2 Third Order Multiplexing Equipment

This equipment shall convert four 8448 kbps tributary signal into a
34368 kbps signal and vice versa with positive justification.

14.3.3 Third Order Skip Multiplexer

This equipment shall convert sixteen 2048 kbps tributaries signal into a
34368 kbps signal and vice versa with positive justification.

14.3.4 Third Order Drop Insert Multiplexer

This equipment shall be used for dropping inserting either 8448 kbps
tributary or 2048 kbps tributary from/to 34368 kbps main tributary signal
and vice versa with positive justification.

14.3.5 All digital multiplexing equipment shall be as per approved specification
of RDSO.








14.3.6 CHARACTERISTICS OF INTERFACE

Bit rate, Code, Characteristics of output and input ports for various
interfaces are as under :

ITEM 2048 Kbit/s 8448 Kbit/s 34368 Kbit/s
PORT PORT PORT

(a) BIT RATE 2048 Kbit/s 8448 Kbit/s 34368 Kbit/s
+ 50 PPM + 30 PPM + 20 PPM

(b) Code HDB3 HDB3 HDB3

OUTPUT PORT :

(a) Pulse shape Rectangular Rectangular Rectangular
as per ITU-T as per ITU-T as per ITU-T
G.703 G.703 G.703

(b) Pulse peak 2.37V/75 2.37V/75 2.37V/75
voltage/ ohm ohm ohm
impedance or
3.0v/120 ohm

(c) Normal pulse 244 ns 59 ns 14.55 ns
width

INPUT PORT :

(a) Permissible F law F law F law
attenuation 0-6 db 0-6 db 0-12 db
at 1024 Khz at 4224 Khz at 17184 Khz

(b) RETURN LOSS

Frequency
Corresponding
to normal bit rate

2.5% to 5% 12 12 12
5% to 100% 18 18 18
100% to 150% 14 14 14

14.3.7 REQUIREMENT OF SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

(i) The overall system performance with the proposed transmission
media shall be so designed and ensured that it meets ITU-T
parameters. The system availability shall be at least 99.5%.
(ii) The characteristic of complete circuit shall be measured on the
basis of audio frequency 4W/2W interface in respect of
characteristic and parameters defined in ITU-T G.712.
(iii) The measurement of performance parameters made during the
life cycle of the equipment shall be within acceptable limits.

14.3.8 SYNCHRONIZATION

The equipment shall have provision of deriving timing signal on internal,
external and incoming digital signal tributaries. The equipment shall
have automatically switching over from one timing signal source to
another in case of failure of primary source. Synchronization as per
approved scheme shall be ensured.

14.3.9 FRAME STRUCTURE

(i) 2048 KBPS TRIBUTARY
The frame structure shall conform to ITU-T Rec.G.704/G.732.
The frame shall consist of 32 time slots numbering from time slot
0 to time slot 31. Time slot 0 shall be used for transmission of
frame synchronization word and alarms, etc. Times slot 16 shall
be used for transmission of signalling of channels 1 to 15 and 16
to 31. Remaining slots shall be used for speech data/channels.

The allocation of bits 1 to 8 of time slot 0 of the frame 0 shall be
as under : c0011011

A multi frame shall comprise of 16 consecutive frames and shall
be numbered from 0 to 15. A multi frame alignment signal 0000
shall occupy bit 1 to 4 of channel time slot 16 in frame 0.

(ii) 8448 KBPS TRIBUTARY
Frame structure shall be as per Table 1 of ITU-T G.742 Bit No.12
for set I shall be fixed to 1.

(iii) 34368 KBPS TRIBUTARY

The frame structure shall be as per Table 1 of ITU-T G.751 Bit No.12
for set I shall be fixed to 1.



14.3.10 FAULT CONDITION AND CONSEQUENT ACTION

(i) Primary PCM Multiplexer Equipment

It shall be as per Clause 4 of ITU-T Recommendation G.732 and Table
I/G.732. Generally, following minimum alarms are provided :

(a) Power supply failed.
(b) Loss of incoming signal at 64 kbps input port
(c) Loss of incoming signals at 2048 kbps
(d) Loss of frame alignment
(e) Loss of multiframe alignment
(f) Excessive error ratio alarm in framing pattern for 1 in 10E-3
(g) Remote failure
(h) AIS alarm
(i) Loss of transmit clock

(ii) HIGHER ORDER MULTIPLEXER

It shall be as per Clause 10 of ITU-T Rec.G.742 Table II/G.742 for
second order multiplexer and as per Clause 2.5 of ITU-T Rec.G.751
and Table III/G.751 for third order multiplexer. However, following
minimum alarms shall be available: -

(a) Power supply failure
(b) Absence of incoming signal on a tributary of multiplexer input
and also loss of 0 incoming signal at demultiplexer input
(c) Loss of frame alignment signal
(d) Alarm indication received from remote multiplex equipment

14.3.11 Digital Cross Connect

Provision of Digital Cross Connect should be made as per ITU-T G.796
at all junctions, to facilitate channel level cross connect features for
better operational flexibility. The capacity of the cross connect may be
chosen depending on the traffic requirement generally a cross connect
of 4 ports to 32 ports capacity may be used.

14.3.12 INSTALLATION

(i) SIZES OF ROOM

The layout requirement of equipment room shall apart from housing
equipment, should cater for enough movement space for doors and
routine measurement of equipments.


(ii) SPACING

(a) The spacing between ceiling and cable carrier from the rack may
be (min) 30 CM. The cable carrier itself may be mounted 30 CM
minimum above the rack.
(b) There must be a space of 2 meters (min) between two rows of
double sided rack.
(c) The space between equipment rack and wall/other racks should
be minimum 2 meters.

(iii) It should be ensured that the room where the equipment is
installed is well ventilated and illuminated and is at least 3 meters away
from major sources of electromagnetic radiation such as photocopier
and facsimile machines.

(iv) The rack on which the equipment is to be mounted shall be
either slim rack (2750 mm height, 120 mm width and 220 mm depth) or
on standards 19 rack or CP 7 bay. The racks shall be provided with
suitable covers on all sides to protect entry of rodent, etc.

(v) All connections from the equipment to be terminated on the
suitable MDF mounted on the rack. All cables may be carried above
the wayside on cable carriers separated from the ceiling. The cable
carrier may be of 15 CM to 30 CM in width.

(vi) EARTHING

All equipment, sheath of underground cable and the screen indoor
cable etc. should be connected to the main station earth as per
approved standards. The earth resistance shall be maintained less than
2 ohms.

(vii) POWER SUPPLY

The equipment shall operate on 48 Volt DC with positive earth.
Preferably power supply shall be installed in a separate room adjacent
to the equipment room.

The common power supply source for all digital equipments can be
provided if:-

- All equipment work on 48 Volt DC with positive earth.
- Capacity of power supply equipment is adequate for all digital
communication equipments.






14.3.13 MAINTENANCE

(i) General Precaution and Instructions
Each equipment is supplied with the detailed precaution to be
followed for maintenance and testing. These should be strictly
followed.

(ii) Electronics circuits on the multiplexer is easily damaged by
electro static discharge. As such following precautions are to be
followed: -
Always wear a proper anti static strap/ wristband.
Before handling any electronic components, touch the
grounded metal surface to discharge static from your
body. It is recommended to use antistatic flooring
along the equipments on all the sides.
Avoid touching the components on the PCB.
Follow any other safety instructions provided by the
manufacturer.

(iii) Some of the cards cannot be inserted with power supply ON.
Proper precaution may be followed for removing or inserting
such cards.

(iv) The PCBs should be transported to the repair center after electro
statically sealing the card and as per the procedure specified by
the supplier.

(v) Maintenance schedule for multiplexing equipment. The
measurements may be carried out in line with relevant ITU-T
standards being updated from time to time (for eg. ITU-T G.823,
824, 825, etc.)

Following schedule shall be followed for maintenance of multiplexing
system.
- Alarm check . 3 monthly
- Voltage check . 3 monthly
- Audio level check at 1020 Hz on . 6 monthly
all 2W/4W channels of primary MUX
- Idle channel noise on all channels on . 6 monthly
2W/4W circuits of primary MUX
- Signalling operation for E&M and . 6 monthly
Exch.ckt.of primary MUX
- Total distortion for 2W/4W . Yearly
circuits of primary MUX
- Variation of gain with input . Yearly
level for 2W/4W circuits of
primary MUX
- Clock frequency . Yearly
- Bit error test on spare time slot/ . Yearly
tributary for a period of at least
one week

(vi) FAILURES
The alarm system will help to localize the faults to a particular
card or sub-system. The step by step procedure for the
localization of fault is given in trouble shooting manual supplied
along with the equipment.

A systematic record of faults must be maintained indicating the
detail of card, time of failure, duration of failure, action taken to
rectify the faults.

(vii) TEST INSTRUMENT
The testing instruments are to be provided at a centralized place
or with the maintenance gang and need not to be provided
separately at each of the station.

(a) Equipment to be provided at centralized location
PCM test set with facility for A to A and A to D, D to A,
D to D testing.
BER test set with jitter measurement
100 MHz oscilloscope
Frequency counter up to 200 MHz
Data tester
The insulation resistance measuring set
Cable fault locator
Earth resistance measuring set
SDH Analyzer

(b) Equipment to be provided with each of the maintenance
gang
PCM MUX tester with facility to test at least up to 8
Mbit/Sec with framed and unframed signal
Digital multi-meter
Portable PCM test set
Signalling test set

(viii) INSPECTION, RECORD AND REPORT
(a) Three monthly and six monthly test shall be carried out by
the JE/SE of the section and he shall maintain all the
records.
(b) Yearly schedule of maintenance shall be carried out by
the JE/SE In charge. The critical yearly
schedule/tests/adjustments shall be carried out under the
supervision of ASTE/DSTE. The records of the tests and
maintenance schedule shall be maintained in the relevant
pro-forma.
(c) ASTE/DSTE/Sr.DSTE during their annual inspection shall
check the record of tests and failures and availability of
proper instruments and details of testing.



14.4.0 SDH EQUIPMENTS

The synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) has evolved as a result of
standardization by ITU. The format allows different types of signal
formats to be transmitted over OFC. The STM-N signals are generated
using a standard multiplexing pattern. Generally, STM-1 & STM-4 are
used in Indian Railways STM-1 can accommodate 63 E1
streams/10/100 Ethernet.

In Railways, SDH only upto level 16 are used. The various SDH signal
levels along with the bit rates are shown below.


SDH LEVEL BIT RATE Mbits/sec
STM-1 155.520
STM-4 622.080
STM-16 2488.320


Standards

The relevant standards to be followed in the SDH architecture are as
below.

(a) ITU-T G.691 Optical Interfaces for single channel SDH
systems with Optical Amplifiers and STM-64 systems.
(b) ITU-T G.707 Network Node Interface for the Synchronous
Digital Hierarchy (SDH).
(c) ITU-T G.781 Structure of Recommendations on Equipment for
the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
(d) ITU-T G.782 Types and characteristics of Synchronous
Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Equipment.
(e) ITU-T G.783 - Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
(SDH) Equipment Functional blocks.
(f) ITU-T G.803 Architecture of Transport Networks based on the
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).
(g) ITU-T G.813 Timing Characteristics of SDH Equipment Slave
Clocks (SEC).
(h) ITU-T G.825 The Control of Jitter and Wander Within Digital
Networks which are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
(SDH).
(i) ITU-T G.826 Error Performance Parameters and Objectives
for International, Constant Bit rate Digital paths at or above the
primary rate.
(j) ITU-T G.831 Management Capabilities of Transport Networks
based on Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).

(k) ITU-T G.957 Optical Interfaces for Equipment and Systems
relating to the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).
(l) ITU-T G.958 Digital Line Systems based on the Synchronous
Digital Hierarchy (SDH) for use on Optical Fiber Cables.
(m) ITU-T 1.432 B-ISDN User Network Interface Physical Layer
Specification criteria.

14.4.1 SYSTEMS CHARACTERISTICS & PERFORMANCE

(a) The specification laid down by RDSO RDSO/SPN/TC/053-2005
with amendments, if any and TEC Generic requirement
No.GR/SDH-04/02 with amendments will be adopted. The
system shall be capable of interfacing with optic fibre cable as
per RDSO specification IRS.TC.55-2000 with latest
amendments. The system should support long haul as well as
short haul applications and should be capable of working at 1310
nms and 1550 nms windows of operation.

(b) Configuration

The system should support various application configurations
required by Indian Railways like

Point to point topology
Bus topology
Mesh topology
Ring topology
(c) Multiplexing
The system should be compatible with MUX as per RDSO
specifications IRS/TC: 68/04 with latest amendments, if any.

(d) Tributaries

The SDH system should facilitate transport of the various
tributaries like

PDH system (2Mb/sec, 34 Mb/sec, 140 Mb/sec)
Tributary STMs
DS3 (44.736) signals
10/100 Mb/sec Ethernet systems


(e) Alarms & Indications
The SDH system should have adequate failure alarms indication
for easy maintenance. This should be brought out on the
Network Management Systems (NMS). The system in general
should have the management capabilities as per ITU-T G.831.
Wherever STM-4 or higher are used the equipment room
must be air-conditioned.


(f) Installations
The guidelines described as per para 14.3.13 shall be adopted
for the installations of SDH equipments also. The system shall
be commissioned after carrying out all pre-commissioning
checks specified by the manufacturer or the laid down policies.

(g) Protection switching
The communication systems provided should preferably have
Automatic protection switching. Generally, the switching should
take place within 60 m sec. Revertive (systems reverts
automatically to the original circuits after restoration of defect)
systems shall be adopted, normally.

(i) SYNCHRONIZATION
The equipment shall have provision of deriving timing signal on
internal, external and incoming digital signal tributaries. The
equipment shall have automatically switching over from one
timing signal source to another in case of failure of primary
source. The system should also have facility for manual selection
of clock. Synchronization as per approved scheme shall be
ensured.

14.4.2 MAINTENANCE
(i) The SE/JE of the section should maintain close liaison with the
Engineers/Managers of RailTel Corporation of India (RCIL) in
ensuring proper maintenance of the SDH equipment wherever
the maintenance is being carried out by RCIL.
- A proper log/record of incidences of interruptions
occurring in the sections.
- Maintain the history of all the equipment failures and keep
track of defective and working spare modules.

(ii) PROCEDURE FOR FAULT RECTIFICATION :
(a) When the fault is conveyed by NCC/Control Office,
sectional SE/JE must consult NCC/Control Office to ascertain
the exact nature of fault and plan the rectification in coordination
with the NCC. He/She shall mobilize the maintenance team and
proceed to the site of interruption by fastest means.

(b) After reaching the site, OTDR testing may be done on
short haul fibers from either side of the cable hut on both sides
from the nearest OFC POP for localization of the fault as close
as possible.

(c) Fault rectification shall be taken up in such a manner that
working fibers are made through from both ends and link
restored first and then proceed ahead to restore the remaining
fibers. Splicing of fibers should be done in the prescribed order.
It should not happen that only a few fibers are restored while
others are not attended. Testing shall be got done and SE/JE
should personally satisfy himself that the work has been done
properly.

(d) During an OFC outage, prime goal of the sectional SE/JE
shall be to restore the link. In case fault localization becomes
difficult due to site conditions, the link should be made through
by temporary patching the OFC/mechanical splice or by laying
OFC on the ground or by use of aerial OFC, so as to minimize
the outage.

14.4.3 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(i) Inspection of each equipment will have to be done thoroughly
keeping time for it. A normal or casual visit for any other reason will not
be treated as inspection. An inspection register will be kept at each
location wherein inventory shall also be recorded with date of
inspection. The brief inspection note shall be recorded by visiting
officers. Compliance of the inspection notes should also be recorded
by sectional SE/JE. Indoor equipment for long haul and short haul links
shall be inspected and recorded. Following minimum schedule shall be
followed.

(ii) Every indoor location (ASTE/DSTE/Sr.DSTE)

- Electronics : half yearly
- Power supply equipment : half yearly
- Checking of proper functioning
Of external alarms : half yearly
- DG sets (if provided) : half yearly
- Air conditioning : half yearly
- Earth : yearly
- Fire alarm system : yearly

Centralised checking

- Link budget : yearly
- Testing of AC-DC alarms
and its appearance on NMS : half yearly


(iii) Section Incharge (JE/SE)
- Electronics : monthly
- Power supply equipment : monthly
- DG set : quarterly
- Air-conditioning : quarterly
- Earth : half yearly
- Fire alarm system : quarterly
- General upkeep of co-located
Equipment : quarterly
- Checking of proper functioning
of external alarms : quarterly

The officer in-charge should verify the above details during his/her
annual inspections in details.

(iv) Periodical Checks And Preventive Maintenance

Preventive maintenance of all indoor and outdoor equipment is to be
done for their proper upkeep and availability of network. The same will
cover the following, however, additional items may have to be done
based on manufacturers guidelines or the condition of the equipment.
The various checks (measurements performed should be suitably
recorded (ref. Annexure A D).

(a) Electronics

As prescribed by the manufacturer.

(b) Battery charger
- Testing of auto changeover of SMRs
- Current setting as per load
- Checking of input and output voltages
- Reporting of alarms to NMS
- Proper connection of input and load cables
- Other checks as prescribed in the manual

(c) Battery set
- Checking of electrolyte level/gravities in case of low
maintenance battery sets.
- Checking of cell voltages and battery voltage at
equipment end.
- Cell whose voltage is found to be below prescribed value
by the manufacturer should be noted and immediate
corrective action taken for their replacement.
- Checking of sulfation/physical damage
- Testing of AH capacity (During installation and periodically
as decided by the Railway)
- Proper connection of load cables.


(d) Diesel Generator Set, wherever provided

- Testing on load
- Testing of auto-start in case of AC failure
- Checking of hour meter readings
- Checking of diesel oil/engine oil level
- Checking of oil/air filters
- Battery voltage (self start)
- Cleanliness
- Water level (in radiator) if applicable
- Any other check prescribed in the manual

(e) Air-conditioning

- Working of the air conditioners
- Cleaning of filters
- Working of changeover arrangement, if provided

Any defect noticed may be reported to the Electrical
staff/Maintaintenance in charge.

(f) Earthing

- Watering of the pits
- Checking of the physical connections including at
equipment ends.
- Tightening of nuts/bolts
- Checking of earth resistance (value should be less than 1
ohm preferably)

(g) Fire Alarm System

- Cleaning of fire sensors
- Simulate the fire situation by applying smoke near to
sensors.
- See the fire panels for reports and analysis

(h) General Upkeep of co-located equipment

- Ensure cleanliness
- Ensure the tower maintenance is done as per schedule by
the nominated agency.


ANNEXURE A


POWER SUPPLY CHECK DATA LIST


SN Item Frequency Unit D1 D2 D3
A.Battery Charger
1 Current Monthly Amp
2 Voltage Monthly V
3 Alarms Monthly
4 Fuse/Grip Monthly
5 Connections Monthly
6 Checking of protection (X,Y & Z) Half yearly
7 Proper working of AC/DC alarms
from NMS
Quarterly

B. Battery Set
1 Electrolyte Level Monthly
2 Total Voltage at Battery Monthly V
3 Total Voltage at equipment Monthly V
4 Sulfation/Physical condition Monthly
5 Cell voltage Monthly V
6 AH capacity Half yearly AH
7 Connections Monthly
8 Room temperature Monthly
O
C

C. Diesel Generator Set
1 Diesel oil level Monthly Litre
2 Engine oil level Monthly
3 Water level Monthly
4 Testing on load Monthly
5 Output voltage Monthly V
6 Output current Monthly A
7 Battery voltage (self start) Monthly V
8 Hour meter reading Monthly Hrs
9 Checking of AMF panel Monthly
10 Condition of oil filter Monthly
11 Condition of air filter Monthly
12 Overhauling As per
schedule






ANNEXURE B

AIR CONDITIONER CHECK DATA LIST


SN Item Frequency Unit D1 D2 D3
1 Cleaning air filter Monthly
2 Cooling Monthly
3 Load current Quarterly
4 Cable connections Quarterly
5 Auto changeover Monthly
6 Overhauling As per
schedule



ANNEXURE C

FIRE ALARM CHECK DATA LIST


SN Item Frequency Unit D1 D2 D3
1 Cleaning of sensors Quarterly
2 Simulation of fire by applying
smoke
Quarterly
3 Checking of alarm system Quarterly


ANNEXURE D

EARTHING CHECK DATA LIST


SN Item Frequency Unit D1 D2 D3
1 Watering of pits Monthly
2 Verification of corrections Monthly
3 Measurement of resistance
3.1 Earth pit Half yearly Ohm
3.2 Overall value outside Half yearly Ohm
3.3 Overall at equipment end Half yearly Ohm









ANNEXURE E


MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FOR FIBRE OPTIC SYSTEM


EQUIPMENT ITEM MAINTAINER SECTIONAL
SUPERVISOR
SUPERVISOR
INCHARGE
Daily routine monitoring
of system.
Daily
Analysis & Recording of
statistics of Optical and
Digital equipments.
Weekly

Quarterly

Monitoring of alarms. Weekly Quarterly
Periodical check and
verification of
configuration.
Quarterly

Yearly

Network
Management
System
Checking and verification
of control functions.

Quarterly Yearly
TX/RX optical power Quarterly Half yearly
Laser bias current Quarterly Half yearly
Meas. of voltages Quarterly Half yearly
Cleaning of connectors Quarterly Half yearly
Earthing Quarterly Half yearly
Cleaning of dust Weekly Quarterly Half yearly
Pulse mask Quarterly Half yearly
Alarms Weekly
Orderwire circuit Weekly
OPTICAL
LINE
TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT
Recording of statistics Quarterly



CHAPTER XV

D A T A- N E T W O R K

15.1 The interconnection of a large number of data processing devices through
suitable communication links enabling data transfer between the data processing
devices constitutes a DATA NETWORK. Several data networks are functional
over Indian Railways and year by year, rapid expansion of the networks takes
place to cover more and more activity centres . The architecture of the networks
is also upgraded in a phased manner to keep in tune with the technological
developments. Several applications are already operating over the networks and
many new applications are contemplated .The various applications are as under:
i. Passenger Reservation System (PRS)
ii. National Train Enquiry System (NTES)
iii. Unreserved Ticketing System (UTS)
iv. Freight Operations Information System ( FOIS)
v. Coaching operations Information System (COIS)
vi. Control Office Automation (COA)
vii. Crew Management System (CMS)
viii. Material Management Information System (MMIS)
ix. Management Information System (MIS) which is made up of a large
No. of applications for various departments like AFRES
(accounting), PRIME (Personnel) etc.
The data networks can also be used for other applications like video
conferencing, data conferencing, VOIP, IVRS, disaster management, office
automation etc.

15.2 Private and Public Networks:
15.2.1 Railway applications primarily run over Railways Private Network, i.e. only
Railway applications are transported by the network. In contrast, in the Public
Networks, like INTERNET, various applications used by the public are carried by
the data networks. In special cases, Railway may make use of public networks
using Virtual Private Network (VPN) solutions.
15.2.2 Railways Private Network is built up by utilising bandwidth from Railways own
Railtel Corporation of India (RCIL) or leasing bandwidth from BSNL or other
service providers.
15.3 Communication Media:
The communication links making up the data network may be over a combination
of any of the following media :
OFC, Digital MW, IP Radio links, VSAT, Analog MW, Twisted pair copper for last
mile connectivity. For Local Area Network (LAN) in the same building Optic Fibre
Cable/Cat 6 cables are used. Wherever feasible wireless LAN (WiFi, WiMax) as
per latest international standards may also be adopted.

15.4 Classification of Networks :
Networks can be classified into 2 main categories:
(i) IP Networks: Networks which adopt packet data transmission and use IP
protocol are called IP networks. In Railways all packet data transmission is
done on IP protocol. In these networks, virtual connection is established
between the client and server and data transmission takes place in
packets. For delay to be within limits , maximum of 3 router hops is
permitted in the primary path between the client and the server. In the
alternate routed paths, the router hops should be limited to a maximum of
5. All new networks should preferably be IP based.
(ii) Non-IP networks: In these networks, direct connection exists
between the client and server. Non-IP networks adopt either
synchronous or asynchronous transmission. Synchronous transmission is
followed for transmission of large blocks of data .

15.5 Network Speeds :
15.5.1 The earlier networks were non-IP based and worked at speeds of 9.6 Kbps.
Gradually some of the non-IP based network speeds were upgraded to 64 Kbps.
Generally higher speeds are not adopted in non-IP networks.
15.5.2 Presently networks are mostly IP based and operate at speeds of 2 Mbps at
the core and distribution levels and 64 kbps at the access level. Speeds of n x
64 Kbps may be used at important access points depending on the network
traffic. Similarly at the core level n x 2 Mbps may also be adopted. In a
centralized system as in FOIS, the core level comprises the communication links
between CRIS (Centre for Railway Information System)/ Rly.Board and zonal
Hqrs. Distribution level comprises the communication links between zonal Hqrs.
and divisions and access level is made up of links connecting the division to the
activity centres In a distributed system as in PRS, the computers at the 5 metro
cities are connected in a mesh topology and form the core network. The network
connecting the 5 locations to other zonal headquarters and divisional
headquarters forms the distribution layer and the connections from the
zonal/divisional headquarters to the other locations forms the access network.
15.5.3 Bandwidth Requirement for Applications:

The Bandwidth requirement will depend on
1. Network Architecture: Access layer, Distribution and Core layer- lowest for
access layer and highest in the core in that order
2. Type of Application design: Text/Character based-PRS,GUI-
FOIS/CAD/Graphics/Video- lowest for character based and highest for
Video in that order. Ex: for a town like Nellore in AP- a 64Kbps bandwidth
is sufficient for UTS and PRS combined.
3. Number of concurrent users at that location.
4. Type of Process: transactional process/ Batch process
5. Database design: Distributed-PRS/Centralised-FOIS

15.6 Network Topology :
15.6.1 Local Area Network (LAN) is an interconnection of data devices using speeds
of 10 Mbps/ 100 Mbps/ 1Gbps.
The network topologies commonly used for LAN are:
i. Bus : Data devices are connected to a common bus which is linear.
ii. Ring: Data devices are connected in a ring from which gives an
alternative path during failure of any one link. Generally not followed.
iii. Star / Hub: Number of data devices connected to a data device at a
central location.
iv. Combination of the above depending on geographical lay out.
LAN is adopted at the lowest level of the network.

15.6.2 CERTIFICATION OF LAN CABLES:
The LAN cables after drawing through the casing are to be certified by the firm
executing the work through suitable measurements that the characteristics of
the cables are within the standards.

15.6.3 Wide Area Network (WAN) is formed when data devices are located far away
and cannot be connected together to form a LAN. In other words, WAN is an
interconnection of LANs with communication links of required speed. The
network topologies in WAN are:
i. Point-to-point : In this configuration, two locations are connected
together by a communication link.
ii. Point to multipoint. In this configuration, central location is connected
to many locations by communication links.
iii. Mesh: Interconnection of every data device to every other data
device in the network.
iv. Combination of the above.

15.6.4 The network topology is to be decided according to the type, size and
requirement of the application. Mesh architecture is recommended at the core
and distribution levels. At the access level, point-to-point or point-to-multipoint
architecture is followed.

15.7 Network path protection: Data networks are mission critical applications for
Railway operation and the data devices at various locations are required to
remain connected to the network all the time. At the core and distribution
levels, the availability of 100% is required and this is achieved by adopting
mesh architecture. Besides, it should be ensured that disruption of physical
media will not cause interruption of all alternative paths. At the access level,
availability of better than 99.9% is required for each location. This can be
achieved only through provision of an alternative path to the main path.
Wherever feasible channels utilized from RCIL shall be protected by provision
of alternative path either by automatic protection switching or manual
protection switching. In the case of locations not connected on Railtel
channels, the locations should be connected on two channels leased from
different service providers. In the event of any of the communication links
being provided by the operators through public networks, adequate protection
in the form of VPN and using encryption is to be taken.

15.8 Network Devices : The various devices used in the data network other than
the nodes on which the applications reside, along with their interface
specifications are given below:

15.8.1 Non-IP Networks
Modems : V.24, RS 232.
Statistical Multiplexers
Line drivers

15.8.2 IP Networks
Modems : ( 64 Kbps/2 Mbps) V.35, G.703.
Hub: Ethernet ( 10/100/1000 Mbps) IEEE 802.
Switches ( level 2) : Ethernet ( 10/100/1000 Mbps)
Managed switches (level 3) : Ethernet ( 10/100/1000 Mbps)
LAN extenders.

Routers : a) Ethernet ( 10/100/1000 Mbps)
b) WAN ports ( 64 Kbps, 2 Mbps), ISDN, Voice etc.
Firewalls
Soft switch ( for VOIP applications): H323,SIP
Gateways
Link balancers
The complexity of the data devices will depend on their capabilities to handle
various functionalities like support for VPN, data encryption, data handling
capacity, compression, Memory, data logging, remote monitoring and
configuration, Number of ports, expandability, security etc.
IEEE standards of some of the Datacom equipment and Ethernet cable
standards used are given in the table. The standards are to be updated when
ever changed.
Network Hardware IEEE STANDARD Network Hardware IEEE STANDARD
Ethernet 100BaseT IEEE 802.3/95 Wireless access point IEEE 802.11f
Ethernet 1000BaseT IEEE 802.3/99 IEEE 802.16
Ethernet 10GBaseT IEEE 802.3/06 Link/Load Balancer IEEE 802.1d
WireLess Router IEEE 802.16 Network Interface Card IEEE P 802.11
Router IEEE 802.16 Multiplexer
IEEE P
802.3ah
Switch IEEE 802.3ae Line Drivers IEEE 802.3
HUB IEEE 802.1 LAN Extenders
IEEE P
802.3ae
MODEMS IEEE 802.16
Communication
Analyser IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-R 215 Ethernet Analyser IEEE 802.3
Firewall IEEE P 1363 Protocol Analyser IEEE 802.11lb
VOIP Gateway IEEE 802.3af LAN Cable Meter IEEE 802.11/5
UPS IEEE 802.3af BER Meter IEEE 802/99
Personal Computer IEEE 802 P600 Printer IEEE 802/
Server IEEE P802 IEEE P1394

Ethernet Cable Standards
Class / Category Cable Standard Connector Standard
Class D, Category 5e IEC 61156-5 CAT 5e IEC 60603-7-2 (UDP)
IEC 60603-7-3 (Screened)
Class E, Category 6 IEC 61156-5 CAT 6 IEC 60603-7-4 (UDP)
IEC 60603-7-5 (Screened)
Class F, Category 7 IEC 61156-5 CAT 7 IEC 60603-7-7 (Screened)


15.9 Network scalability: It should be possible to add new network devices
either at existing locations or at new locations by extending the WAN. The
network components should be so selected to permit scalability without having to
replace existing network components. At least 25% spare equipment shall be
planned for equipment like modems, Hubs, UPSs, unmanageable switches, LAN
Extenders, PCs etc., 1:1 ratio spares are recommendable for core level and
distribution level network equipment like High end routers, manageable switches,
Servers, Firewall etc., for efficient maintenance of the Networks.
15.10 Access to public : It is necessary to allow access to Railway Data networks
for the public to access information from applications such as PRS, NTES, FOIS,
claims Information System etc. It is necessary such access through Internet is
permitted at a single point in the network and the gateway is adequately protected
through provision of firewalls etc.
15.11 Network Security : The main aspects of security is :
Data sent by the sender should be received only by the intended receiver. This is
achieved through encryption at various levels. Encryption can be built in at
application level as well as network level. The various data encryption standards are
IP sec. DES, 3 DES, AES, private/public key etc.
15.11.1 Access Control: The access control protocols perform three functions:
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting.
(a) Authentication. : Authentication is the process of identifying and verifying a
user. Only authorized personnel should be permitted access to use the network
resources. This is import for dial-in and also wireless access. This is achieved
through password protection. The standards are radius etc.
(b) Authorization: It determines what a user can do after being authenticated.
(c) Accounting: Accounting is recording what a user is doing or has done.

15.11.2 Another important aspect of security is to prevent outsiders from monitoring
the network or disrupting the network. Intrusion Detecting and Intrusion Prevention
are very important in network security. This is achieved through deployment of :
(a) Firewall: First level of defence at the network perimeter. State full inspection of
packets based on protocols.
(b) Intrusion detection and Protection system: Signature identification, Protocol
identification etc. Detects and Drop the suspected packets.
15.12 Network Protection: All computers on the network should be protected
against viruses by installing suitable antivirus software. This is necessary as virus can
also slow down the network speeds apart from affecting the computers. Enterprise level
anti-virus software with control of the network administrator should be installed. All the
servers should be protected by firewalls, intrusion detection and intrusion protection
systems as well as by anti-virus programs.
15.13 Network convergence: A single data network can support many
applications through selection of proper network devices like routers etc. and
by providing communication links of adequate speeds. The early tendency to
develop an independent network for each application should be given up and all the
applications should be brought on to a common data network. It is however better to
have separate networks for management information systems and for critical
applications like PRS, FOIS, UTS and all other applications having financial data-
basis and transactions. However, with very critical money value applications like
PRS, FOIS, UTS already in operation this is required to be carried out very carefully
and in a very coordinated manner.

15.14 Network Management system and Traffic Monitoring :
Network Management System (NMS) is an essential part of any data network to
monitor the health of the network. It is vital tool for creating and operating a reliable,
redundant and efficient data networks using SNMP protocol based on open
standards. The Network Management System can do various tasks like
configuration, diagnostic, provisioning, security and originating various MIS reports to
be utilized by the Network Manager.
Traffic monitoring software is required to monitor the traffic in the communication
links and the link capacity should be increased wherever necessary. Packet Sniffer is
a tool for monitoring the traffic in the network and generating various MIS reports
which helps in planning and augmenting the network resources. Packet Sniffer can
also be a part of NMS.
Multi Router Traffic Grapher: MRTG is a tool for monitoring the traffic loads on
the network links and generates graphical images which provides live representation
of the network traffic
Network administrator will exercise total control over the network through the
NMS. Indian Railway Data Network being very large in size there will be several NMS
at different locations controlling different segments of the network.
Traffic log: These are required for analyzing the network traffic as well as the
actions of the users on the network whenever required.
15.15 List of the Test and Measuring Equipments:
Communication Analyzer
Ethernet Analyzer
Protocol Analyzer
The measuring instruments generally used are
BER meter
LAN cable meter
Other latest measuring instruments if any.
15.16 Measurements:
The various measurements which are required to be done on Data network for
trouble- shooting and for performance monitoring of the network are listed below:
BERT: Simple bit error ratio test.
G. 821,G.826 and M.2100 performance analysis : The G.821 is an out of
service measurement whereas G.826 and M.2100 are in-service measurements. The
tests are normally conducted for 48hrs. These tests are required for the WAN
segment for different bandwidth. For the LAN segment Ethernet analyzer is used for
testing and monitoring the performance.
Jitter and Wander:
Intrinsic Jitter
Maximum Tolerable Jitter
Jitter Transfer Function
Wander.
LAN cable: By using LAN cable meters.
Any other measurements or tests suggested by manufacturers.
15.17 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
The fault diagnosis is categorized into three
Hardware
Software
Media/Channel
The datacom equipment is provided with visual indications by which the status
of the equipment can be known. The next option is by login into the equipment and
test the equipment with standard commands given by the manufacturer.
The software part like IOS of Routers and other intelligent/managed
equipment can be checked or upgraded to higher versions depending on the type of
the fault encountered.
The media which actually connects two locations through interface device can
be checked with testing facility given on the interface device or through measuring
instruments. The BER of the media/channel is generally measured to know the
percentage of errors and other related information.

15.18 Environment, Rack and Flooring:
The Datacom equipments should be housed in dust free environment,
preferable air-conditioned. The equipment should be housed in a standard 19 rack
with front and back openings to facilitate ease of maintenance. The Datacom
equipment rack should be provided with power supply distribution panel for AC/DC
distribution. Good quality earth less than one Ohm should be provided. The rack
should be placed in such a way that sufficient space is available in the rear and sides
of the rack from the walls, typically 1.2 mtrs to ease of maintenance and proper air
circulation. DC cooling fans should be provided especially for the routers. False
flooring is recommended for the Data Centre so that various cabling systems can be
accommodated within the flooring. The flooring should be anti-static. Data Centre
floor strength shall be designed to carry loads up to 600 Kg/sq.meter. Illuminated &
usable clear space of at least 7.5 feet to 8.5 feet shall be provided between the false
floor & false ceiling for housing the Data Centre equipment. The raised floor height
should be 24 and in any case not less than 18. On-line UPS should be provided
preferable with two UPS systems, one for main system and the other for backup
supply.
The datacom equipment shall be installed in n x U size racks of required size.
The equipment room shall be free from dust and temperature, within the room shall
be maintained as per the equipment manufacturer data sheet. In addition to
equipment room, maintenance supervisor room cum store room shall be provided to
store spares and other important equipment. At Zonal Headquarters where Network
management System is proposed, the room size can be decided as required.

15.19 Earthing:
Good quality earth is extremely important for reliable working of Datacom
equipments and for protection from lightening and surges. The specified value of
earth resistance for Datacom equipments is less than 1 Ohm. With RDSO type of ring
earth it is possible to achieve less than 1 Ohm, however, in the long run it is difficult
to sustain the earth value below 1 Ohm; a ground enhancement material(Specified
by RDSO) is recommended to maintain constant earth resistance for life of the earth.
It does not depend on the continuous present of moisture to maintain high
conductivity and therefore helps to maintain integrity of the earthing system. The
availability of the electrical earth having value within the limits is as per standards is
to be ensured.
15.20 POWER SUPPLY
The power supply whether it is AC or DC is the heart of any equipment.
Standard values at the input to be made available to the equipment. The type as
well as capacity of power supply required for the equipment to be decided at the
time of designing of new networks and for existing networks enhancement of power
supply has to be done whenever necessary. Un-interrupted Power supply has to be
provided to increase the life of the equipment as well as to keep up the availability
of the location/node. The capacity of the UPS is to be decided taking in to
consideration availability of local power supply, standby supply and importance of
the location. Wherever feasible 48V DC supply shall be used for Data
Communication Equipments.

15.21 MAINTENANCE SCHECULE:
i The datacom equipment shall be kept clean and tidy without dust and shall
be cleaned daily.
ii The diversity channels shall be checked by switching of main channels and
ensure that automatic switch over/routing is taking place.
iii In case ISDN link is provided as backup to the main link, the connectivity of
ISDN shall be checked by switching off main link. The voltage of ISDN
channels to be measured at datacom equipment input termination and to be
maintained with the standards.
iv Condition of underground cables to be checked by carrying out routine
checks done for U/G cables.
v OFC cables and connectors to be checked as per routine checks done on
OFC.
vi The Antivirus patches to be updated in NMS system time to time.
vii In addition to the above, any other checks suggested by manufacturers

15.22 Do's and Don'ts
Do's
i. Do write the configurations changes if any done in a register so that proper
documentation is done for performance analysis and recode purpose.
ii. Take the print outs of the configuration of the routers and document them.
iii. Store the configuration files of the routers in softcopy so that they will be
useful at emergency whereby with one command entire configuration can
be copied thereby reducing the down time.
iv. Do proper lacing of the internal wiring,
v. Protect the cables form rodents where cabling is done through false
flooring.
vi. Train the staff and update the knowledge to maintain the network more
efficiently.
vii. Use ESD wrist bands while handling datacom equipments
viii. Use a good quality earth and maintain the earth resistance below 1 Ohms
ix. Change the password of router/servers once in a month
x. Take backup of the router configuration every time the configuration is changed.
This will help in faster restoration in the event of software error/Flash failure.
xi. Follow the housekeeping procedure of clearing the event and performance logs
of the NMS at specified intervals.
xii. Plan replacement of UPS batteries as per the specified lifecycle.
xiii. Keep the operation and maintenance manual handy.
xiv. Check the backup links at least once a week.

Dont's
i. Do not change the hardware of the routers like data cards when the
router power supply is ON unless it is clearly mentioned that it supports
hot swapping.
ii. Do not change the V.35 Data cable when the router and modems are
ON.
iii. Do not change the IP addressing scheme and IP address of the working
network without the written permission of the Network Administrator.
iv. Do not change the configuration of the router without the permission of
the Network administrator.
v. Do not run down the batteries of the UPS below specified level.
vi. Never switch off the datacom equipment without following the proper shut down
procedure
vii. Do not share the passwords of routers and servers with your colleagues.
viii. Never use water to clean the equipment room.
ix. Dont use water based fire extinguishers for datacom installations.


CHAPTER XVI


POWER PLANT SYSTEMS FOR TELECOM. INSTALLATIONS.


16.1. GENERAL

16.1.1 This chapter discusses the power supply requirements for following
Telecommunication Equipments:

Train Radio System.

Public Address System
Microwave/UHF Equipments.

Passenger Information Display System
Optic Fibre Equipments.

Close Circuit Television
Multiplexing Equipments. Centralised Clock System
Telephone Exchanges. Networking Equipments
RE Cable Repeater

PRS, FOIS, UTS etc.
Train Traffic Control Equipments Voice Logging Equipments

16.1.2 All Telecom Equipments shall be provided with a reliable Power Supply.

16.1.3 Telecom System/Equipments like Public Address System , Passenger Information
Display System, Close Circuit Television System, Centralised Clock System, Voice
Logging Equipments, Networking Equipments, PRS, FOIS, UTS etc. operates on 230
V AC Power Supply.

16.1.4 Telecom System/Equipments like Train Radio System, Microwave/UHF Equipments,
Optic Fibre Equipments, Multiplexing Equipments, Telephone Exchanges etc operates
on 48 V DC Power Supply.

16.1.5 Tran Traffic Control Equipments and RE cable repeater operates on 12 V DC and 24
V DC Power Supply respectively.

16.1.6 If more than one type of system such as Radio Equipment, Cable Repeater, OFC
Repeater and Train Radio are housed in the same room or adjacent rooms of the same
building, only a common power plant shall be used for all such systems.


16.2. SOURCE OF AC POWER SUPPLY:


(a) In RE area, traction supply from both up and down catenary will be provided
through AT Transformer with auto change over arrangement.


(b) Local supply shall be single phase or 3 phase depending upon the load
requirement.

(c) Diesel generator shall be installed wherever local supply is unreliable and AT
supply is not provided.

(d) PROVISION OF SOLAR BASED POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS: Solar based
power supply system can be planned in non RE area where reliable power supply
is not available and;

(i) Clear and sunny weather is generally available throughout the year.

(ii) Sufficient space free from shadow and any other obstruction is available
for installation of the solar panels.

(iii) Proper cleaning of dust particles, tree leaves or any other foreign material
from the surface of solar panel is ensured.

(iv) Adequate provision is made for storage of power for at least five
continuous sunless days.


16.3. DIESEL GENERATOR SUPPLY

16.3.1. Diesel Generator Capacity : The capacity of the generators shall be calculated
based on the present load requirements plus the anticipated increase of load, if any, in
the next five years period. Load requirement for all the equipments including aviation
lights & emergency lighting of equipment room shall be included. Operation of the
air conditioners from the diesel generators shall not be permitted.

16.3.2 Installation of Diesel Generator Set :

(a) Diesel Generators: The diesel generators shall be installed as per the
manufacturers instructions. All mountings shall be rugged, durable and sufficiently
strong to withstand vibrations occuring in the area of the site. Anti-vibration cushion
should be provided between the floor of the DG Room and the DG set. Diesel
Generator should be earthed as per manufacturers specifications.


(b) Automatic Changeover: The generator shall be provided with automatic
changeover arrangements from mains to standby and vice-versa.

(c) Exhaust Gas: Exhaust gas shall be thrown outside the building through
suitable exhaust pipes properly fitted & mounted. All flexible pipe connections shall
be screwed or flanged. A suitable silencer shall be fixed at the end of exhaust pipe.

(d) Type of cooling: All diesel generators shall be air cooled type.


(e) Fuel Tanks: For remotely monitored and controlled stations the fuel tanks
shall be mounted on the top of the engine permitting fuel supply by gravity. The
capacity of the tank shall be adequate to store fuels for at least 24 hours of operation at
full load.

(f) Wiring and Cabling: The cables and wires from the generators shall be drawn
through rigid conduits or enclosed in proper channels.

(g) Starting System: The diesel engine generator shall start electrically by a separate
engine battery. In the event of failure of the electrical start it shall be possible to start
the engine by manual hand cranking.

16.3.3 Control System of Diesel Generator Sets:

(a) The control system of the diesel generator sets shall broadly have following
capabilities:

(i) Detection of AC mains failure.
(ii) Detection of deviation of the mains supply voltage and frequency
beyond prescribed limits (50Hz2Hz).
(iii) Detection of overheating of engines.
(iv) Detection of high/low output voltage and frequency from the generator.
(v) Detection of restoration of AC mains supply.
(vi) Detection of low lubricant oil pressure
(vii) Detection of V belt failure.
(viii) Hour meter: To monitor the total operative time of DG Set.

(b) The control system shall generate alarm condition in case of fault conditions
such as :
- High engine temperature
- Low oil pressure
- Generator overload
- Generator output beyond limits.

(c) In case of fault condition the control system shall shut down the diesel
generator and lock it out of service until the same is manually reset by the
maintenance personnel.

(d) The control system shall incorporate manual controls to permit:

Testing of generator sets.
Bypass the automatic control systems and connect the generator output
to the load.

16.4 AC POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION ARRANGEMENTS

16.4.1 Notwithstanding this Clause 16.4, all existing installations shall continue with existing
arrangement of AC Power Supply Distribution for Telecom Equipments. However
new installation shall follow the guidelines stipulated herein.


16.4.2 Incoming AC Power Supply from AT Transformer (through Automatic Changeover),
Local Power Supply, Diesel Generator Power Supply, Solar Panel Power Supply shall
be terminated in an AC Distribution Board.

16.4.3 This AC Distribution Board shall have facility of changeover from one incoming
source to other.

16.4.4 Incoming AC Power Supply on AC Distribution Board shall be terminated through
MCCBs & MCBs of adequate capacity.

16.4.5 Outgoing Single Phase AC Power Supply for individual Telecom Equipment from AC
Distribution Board shall be through MCBs of adequate capacity.

16.4.6 Integrated Surge & Transient Protection Devices shall be provided in AC Distribution
Rack for sensitive Telecom Equipments. Surge & Transient Protection shall be as per
guidelines/specifications issued by RDSO.

16.4.7 AC Distribution Board shall have sufficient spare capacity to accommodate
anticipated future expansion. AC Distribution Board can be wall mounted metallic
enclosure or floor mounted cubicle.


16.5 DC POWER PLANT SYSTEM

16.5.1 Battery Chargers and Voltage Stabilizers: All Telecom installations shall be
provided with float cum boost charger of adequate capacity as per latest RDSO
specification. Wherever input voltage is often found to be having large variation
beyond 160 V to 270 V, stabilizer of suitable capacity, conforming to RDSO
specifications, shall be provided.

16.5.2 Number of Battery Banks & Mode of Operation: One set of battery on float mode
working should normally be planned. At all manned stations and prone to lightning,
two sets of battery banks shall be planned in charge-discharge mode of operation.

16.5.3 Type and Capacity of Battery: In a controlled environment where temperature
variation is not very large, VRLA batteries can be used. Where temperature variation
is large, low maintenance secondary cells should be provided. The batteries shall be
of adequate capacities to deliver the full load for a period of at least 12 hours duration
throughout its useful life, considering future requirement.

16.5.4 Load requirement: The load requirement shall be calculated based on the present
load plus the anticipated increase of the load, if any, in the next five years period.


16.6 DC POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION ARRANGEMENT

16.6.1 Notwithstanding this Clause 16.6, all existing installations shall continue with existing
arrangement of DC Power Supply Distribution for Telecom Equipments. However
new installation shall follow the guidelines stipulated herein.


16.6.2 Incoming DC Power Supply shall be terminated in a DC Distribution Board. DC
Distribution Board can be wall mounted metallic enclosure or floor mounted
cubicle.

16.6.3 Incoming DC Power Supply on DC Distribution Board shall be terminated through
MCB of adequate capacity.

16.6.4 Outgoing DC Power Supply for individual Telecom Equipment from DC Distribution
Board shall be through MCBs of adequate capacity.

16.6.5 DC Distribution Board shall have sufficient spare capacity to accommodate
anticipated future expansion.

16.7 REQUIREMENT OF POWER SUPPLY ROOM(S):

16.7.1 Wherever secondary batteries are used, the stabilisers, chargers, distribution boards
and the changeover switches shall be installed in a separate room adjacent to the
battery room.

16.7.2 Wherever VRLA batteries are used, the stabilizers, chargers, distribution boards and
the changeover switches may be kept in same room as VRLA Batteries.

16.7.3 Power Supply Room(s) shall be dry, cool, well lighted and well ventilated. Exhaust
fans shall be provided to remove fumes in all Power Supply Rooms where secondary
batteries are installed.

16.7.4 It is desirable that the window glasses shall be frosted or painted wherever necessary
to prevent direct sun rays falling on the cells.

16.7.5 The Power Supply Room(s) shall have a water sink and universal (5A & 15A) electric
power plug for connection to the hand lamp.

16.7.6 The Power Supply Room(s) where secondary batteries are installed shall be provided
with acid resistant tiles on floor and the walls up to 1.5 M.

16.7.7 A thermometer to measure the room temperature should also be kept in the battery
room.

16.7.8 All cable entry points should be rodent proof.


16.8 REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM:

16.8.1 The arrangement shall be approved by CSTE of the Railway. It shall have the
following features.

(a) All digital microwave, UHF links and OFC Communication System shall have
the facility of remote monitoring and control of the power plant systems.


(b) The control system of the power plant shall provide following vital alarms to
the remote monitoring system

- Mains failure
- Diesel Generator failure
- Battery set failure
- Charger failure
- Low level of fuel tank

(c) The control system shall be capable of accepting and reacting to following
vital commands from the remote monitoring centre.

- Start diesel generator
- Switch off the diesel generator set
- Changeover from charger no. 1 to charger no. 2 or vice versa.
- Changeover from battery set 1 to battery set 2 or vice versa


16.9 MAINTENANCE

16.9.1 Maintenance of Diesel Generator Set:

(a) Fuel tank shall be cleaned periodically. Fuel shall be filled through a
removable wire gauze filter which shall form part of fuel tank. Before filling
up, unused fuel shall be decanted/replaced if the DG set has been idle for a
considerable time.

(b) Level of lubricating oil shall be checked (before every engine start by
using a suitable dip stick, provided with the engine, wherever manual start is in
vogue) and proper care shall be taken to maintain desired / recommended level.
Lubricating oil shall be changed periodically as per manufacturers data for
engine hour run.

(c) Diesel generator sets shall be overhauled in accordance with
manufacturers recommendation. It is preferable to have
them overhauled by the manufacturer or his authorised representative.

(d) Alternators shall be cleaned periodically by using high-speed air
suction / blowing machine. Carbon blocks shall be checked for their sizes and
rectangular shapes with square edges at the contact-surfaces and armature slots
shall be cleaned by using painting brush with hard bristles. Checking and
cleaning of alternators shall be done once in every three months or as the
situation warrants.

(e) Automatic Starting Device, where provided, shall be tested periodically
for effective starting during power failures and low voltage condition.

(f) Flexible coupling between the engine and the alternator shall be
checked for elongated holes and replaced in time.


(e) The no load and on load voltages of the alternator shall be maintained
within limits and the Governor adjusted during periodic maintenance to the
RPM specified and a steady output of 50Hz. The DG set shall run for 5-10
minutes on load to verify its proper working during periodic maintenance
check.

(f) A log book shall be maintained at every location which shall bear the
history of performance and maintenance of Diesel Generator Set together with
the signatures of the maintainers and SE(Telecom).

(g) Wherever auto start is not reliable, the same shall be disconnected and
steps taken for manual start /hand cranking of generator during power failure
and also to stop the engine as soon as power supply resumes. Steps should be
taken to rectify the auto start as early as possible.

(h) The log book shall be maintained as per proforma given in
APPENDIX-I.


16.9.2 Maintenance Of Power Supply Equipment

(a) The working of battery charger shall be checked of proper working of
switches, fuses etc.

(b) The power equipments shall be cleaned by a blower or any other device
to remove dust.

(c) Wiring shall be checked to ensure that they are in good condition and
connections are properly tightened up.

(d) Record of voltage and load current of all power equipments shall be
maintained.

16.9.3 Maintenance Of Secondary Cells:

(a) Cable to connect battery terminals and load should use proper colour
code of wires. Red and blue wire should be used to connect positive and
negative terminals.

(b) The battery room shall be kept well ventilated, free from water, oil and
dust. Surroundings of batteries shall be kept clean.

(c) Connecting cables shall be flexible and sufficiently long to prevent
strain on the battery terminals. Connecting lugs shall be fitted to battery posts /
terminals by using suitable nuts/bolts & tightened by using flat and spring /
serrated washers. Lugs at the end of conductors, utilized for making
connections, shall be crimped and brazed.

(d) The electrical connections shall always be kept tight. Check nuts
should also be used to maintain firm connections.


(e) The terminals and connections shall be coated with pure vaseline or
petroleum jelly to prevent corrosion. Grease shall not be used.

(f) The electrolyte shall be maintained at the correct level by topping up
with only distilled water as and when necessary.

(g) Electrolyte loss due to spillage shall be replenished with proper amount
of electrolyte of the same specific gravity as that of remaining electrolyte in the
cell. Electrolyte of proper specific gravity prepared by using industrial grade
acid and distilled water shall only be added with cells in fully charged
condition and after sufficient time has been allowed to cool down the cells to
room temperature. Electrolyte to a cell shall be added gradually in minimum
quantity so as to attain the same specific gravity as that of other cells in the
battery bank after a few cycles of charge/ discharge. Electrolyte shall not be
added under any other circumstances.

(h) Each cell shall be tested as per maintenance schedule so that its voltage
and specific gravity are within specified limits. Test results shall be recorded
in the battery history card as per APPENDIX-II.

16.9.4 Periodic maintenance schedule of Power Supply Equipments is given in
Appendix-III.

16.9.5 Records And Reports:

The inspector in-charge of Telecom Installation and remote control centre shall
arrange to maintain;

a) The record of interruptions of main power supply and utilisation of the
DG set with details of each duration.

b) Record of supply and utilisation of diesel fuel.

c) Prepare monthly interruption reports of mains supply/upkeep/utilisation
of DG set and send to Sr.DSTE/Dy.CSTE(MW)/Dy.CSTE(Tele).


16.9.6 Records And Reports By Sr.DSTE/Dy.CSTE(MW)/Dy.CSTE(Tele):

Sr.DSTE/Dy.CSTE(MW)/Dy.CSTE(Tele)shall analyse the monthly report and
take follow up action with concerned divisional officers as to minimise the
interruption of the main power supply. Consistent long duration interruptions
of the main supply and the follow up action taken should be brought to the
notice of Chief Communication Engineer through special reports. He will also
take follow up action to over come the other problems in order to improve the
performance of telecom system to the required level of efficiency.


*****

APPENDIX I



_____________Railway ___________Division


FUEL CONSUMPTION LOG BOOK

1. Name of Station

2. Date of Commissioning

3. Location

4. Description of Generator
(Make, Capacity in KVA, Voltage,
Power Factor, Speed in RPM, Frequency,
No. of Phases, Type of Excitation etc.)

5. Description of Engine
(Make, BHP, Speed in RPM, No. of Cylinders,
Capacity of Fuel Tank, Fuel, Standard Rate
of Consumption, Type of start)





Date Time of
Start
Time of Close Hours
worked
Fuel filled in
litres
Signature











APPENDIX II


SECONDARY BATTERY HISTORY CARD


________Railway __________ Division

Section _________



No. of cells Installation date
Capacity (AH) Circuit reference
Battery set No. Charging current
Battery set voltage Charger make
Battery make Charger capacity



Cell Number Work
done &
remarks
Signatur
e
Date Parameter 1 2 3 4 5
22
23
24





Specific Gravity
1210





Cell
Volts
2.1V






Specific Gravity
1210






Cell
Volts
2.1V



APPENDIX III

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FOR POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

EQUIPMENT ITEM MAINTAINER SECTIONAL
ENGINEER
SR.SECTIONAL
ENGINEER
Battery
Chargers
Cleaning &
tightening of all
connections

Checking of
working

Measurement of
voltages & load
current
Weekly




Weekly


Weekly
-




-


Monthly
(Every
installation)
-




-


Quarterly (Every
installation)
Batteries Cleaning &
tightening of all
connections

Measurement of
voltages and
gravity
Weekly




Weekly
-




Monthly
(Every
installation)
-




Quarterly (Every
installation)

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE OF THE DG SET

QUIPMENT ITEM MAINTAINER SECTIONAL
ENGINEER
SR.SECTIONAL
ENGINEER
Measurement of
voltage on
load/OFF load
Weekly Monthly Quarterly
Load current -do- -do- -do-
Checking of
lubricant
-do- -do- -do-
Generator

Cleaning of DG
Set
-do- -do- -do-

MAINTENANCE OF SOLAR PANEL

EQUIPMENT ITEM MAINTAINER SECTIONAL
ENGINEER
SR.SECTIONAL
ENGINEER
Cleaning of
Solar panel
Weekly - - Solar cell
Measurement of
terminal voltage
of solar panel
Weekly Monthly Quarterly

Measurement of
current of solar
panel
-do- -do- -do-




*******



















CHAPTER XVII

ACCIDENT COMMUNICATION


SECTION A: COMMUNICATION AT ACCIDENT SITE

17.1 Communication from the site of accident is to be established as soon as an accident takes
place. For this purpose, drivers of all trains shall be provided with portable control
telephones. Portable control telephones shall be 2 wire type in overhead communication
territory, 4 wire type in underground cable territory, and shall be of 2 wire / 4 wire type
wherever a train passes through both overhead communication and underground cable
territories or 2 wire / 4 wire type may be used over both type of territories. As soon as an
accident occurs, driver/asst. driver shall establish communication with the portable
control telephone by hooking on to the overhead lines / plugging into the emergency
sockets, so as to establish communication with control office.

17.2 In addition to drivers being provided with portable control telephones, guards of all
passenger carrying trains are also provided with portable control phones of the types
mentioned above. Guard of the passenger carrying train shall also establish
communication with control office as soon as an accident occurs.

17.3 In addition to portable control telephones, drivers and guards of all trains shall be
provided with 5 watt walkie-talkie sets, and as soon as an accident occurs, information
shall be given in the 5 watt walkie-talkie set to the adjacent station wherever possible.
Apart from giving information through the walkie-talkie to the adjacent station, it is
necessary that communication is established to the control office using portable control
phones. In some sections arrangements are available to communicate with control office
on walkie- talkie/ duplex VHF sets and this may be used where such arrangement exist.

17.4 As and when, advanced means of communication like GSM-R are deployed on the
Railways, the same shall also be used to establish communication with the control office.

17.5 Additional means of communication shall be provided progressively within the shortest
possible time as under:

Provision of Railway telephone / telephones.
Provision of BSNL telephone / telephones.
Mobile phones wherever network coverage exists.

17.6 Accident Relief Trains (ART) are located at strategic locations of each division and are
provided with telecommunication equipment for providing additional facilities as
under:

PA system shall be established for making important announcements.
Megaphones shall be given as per need at site.
Walkie-talkie sets shall be distributed as per need.
Magneto communication as required at site.
Communication through satellite phone shall be established.
FAX, E-mail shall be established wherever communication media is available. It shall be
possible to provide the communication using satellite technology / through Railways own
OFC links, by extending bandwidth from the accident site to the adjacent station / using
BSNL connections. Mobile telephone exchange (WLL) may be established , if available.

Wherever cell phone coverage exists, cell phones available with officers and with ART
shall be used.

It is desirable to send pictures of accident spot to Railway Board / Zonal / Divisional
Headquarters using e-mail for which extension of internet/railnet to site is required. It is
desirable to send video coverage to Railway Board / Zonal / Divisional Headquarters, as
and when the necessary equipment are provided in the ARTs.



SECTION B: ACCIDENT INFORMATION FOR PUBLIC

17.7 As soon as information regarding an accident is received, accident information number
shall be activated and manned. This number shall normally be at the zonal/divisional
headquarters. Adequate personnel shall be posted by commercial branch to meet the
demand depending on the seriousness of the accident. Number of lines for this number
shall be suitably augmented depending on the demand.

17.8 Close liaison shall be maintained with BSNL officials for monitoring the call rates and
increasing the lines as necessary.

17.9 The accident information number should be made wide publicity through audio, video
and print media.




SECTION C: GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR MAINTENANCE OF ARTs

17.10 ARTs are provided with equipment as detailed in section D. The equipments are to be
periodically tested to ensure their satisfactory working at all times. Testing / Inspections
shall be carried out as under

Complete testing by ART nominated staff : once in 15 days.
Inspection by ASTE/DSTE: once in 3 months.
Inspection by Sr.DSTE/DSTE: once every year.

17.11 A register is to be maintained in the ART for making entries for testing of equipment
(Section - D )

17.12 Whenever the ART returns from accident spot, equipments are to be immediately
checked for their proper working.

17.13 Any short fall / missing equipment should be replaced with good working equipment at
the earliest.

17.14 All equipments having shelf life, viz. jointing kits, torch cells etc., shall be replaced in
due time.



SECTION D: ART EQUIPMENT

17.15 The list of minimum essential equipments to be provided in ART shall be as under:

A. GENERAL (Common for RE as well as non-RE areas)

S.No. ITEM Quantity
1. Inspection Book 1 no.
2(a) Magneto Telephone 4 nos.
2(b) Dry cells large 6-I, 1.5 volts each for magneto phones 12 Nos.
3. PVC insulated, PVC sheathed twin core cable 500 mts.
4. Microphone for cordless PA system 2 Nos.
5. Loud speaker horn type 5/10 watts 2nos.
6(a) Amplifier of minimum 20 watts power output (having interface for
cordless microphones) and operating voltage of 12 V DC
2 nos.
6(b) 12V storage battery for 6(a) along with appropriate battery charger 2 sets
7. Megaphones Transistorised (minimum 10 watts each) 3 nos.
8. Portable stand for loud speaker with adjustable height from 1.5M
to 3M.
2 nos.
9. Field service telephone cable PVC insulated (D-8) 4 drums of
500 meters
each
10. Push button auto telephone with tone/pulse switching facility 4 nos
11(a) Walkie-talkie sets (2/5watts-VHF) with 100% spare batteries 30 nos
11(b) Battery chargers for 12(a) (two position charger with rapid
charging)
100%
12. Multimeter 1 no.
13. Extension Boards for power supply (Mains) 4 nos.
14. Hand held torch of 3 cells complete with dry cells 4 nos.
15. Jointing kit & material for cables and overhead wires this is
required to be decided by the Railways themselves according to
their local needs for different ARTs.

16. Tool Box containing:
a) soldering iron 10W/12volts, 10 W/220V & 65 W/220V 1 no.each
b) Long nose plier 200mm 1 no.
c) Cutter diagonal 200mm 1 no.
d) Box spanner 6, 5.5 & 5mm 1 no. each
e) Hammer Steel 750 grams 1 no.
f) Hammer wooden 1 no.
g) Adjustable spanner 300 mm 1 no.
h) Screw Driver 200mm 1 no.
i) Screw Driver 250 mm 1 no.
j) Mains tester (230 volts) 1 no.
k) Electrical insulation tape 12mm x 15 meters 1 no.
l) Resin core 500 gms
17 Tape recorder (cassette type) 2 nos.
18. Control way station equipment DTMF type 2 wire & 4 wire with
amplispeaker telephone and suitable Ni-Cd cells
2 nos.
19. Cellular Phones/Fixed communication terminals 5 Nos.
20. Satellite phone (SAT phone miniature type) 2 nos.
21. FAX Machine (Plain paper) 1 no.
22. Auto dialing system from emergency socket (only way station
emergency control telephone)
1 no.
23. Map showing sections of track where communication through
cellular phone is possible
1 set.
24. WLL mobile exchange with 30 handsets 1 set.

B. Specific Equipments required for ARTs having beats in non-RE area
S.No. ITEM Quantity
1. 2 wire portable control phone in a suitable box with dry cells 2 sets
2. Telescopic pole of minimum 6 meters height with its bracket
opening space at least 350mm
2 nos.
3. Overhead control alignment charts 1 set

C. Specific Equipments required for ARTs having beats in RE Area:
S.No. ITEM Quantity
1. 4 wire Emergency portable control telephone in a suitable box
with dry cells
2 sets
2. Tapping transformers (1120 : 1120) 2 nos each
3. Terminating transformers (1120:470) 2 nos.


17.16 Adequate space shall be provided in the ART for housing all the equipments.

17.17 The telecom equipment shall be properly housed to avoid the equipment rolling off
during the movement of ART.

17.18 Adequate packing shall be provided for sophisticated equipments like satellite phones,
walkie-talkie sets, FAX machines, PA equipment etc.

17.19 Sophisticated equipments shall not be stacked one above the other, unless packed in
proper protective boxes and arrangements are provided to secure them properly.

17.20 Arrangements shall be made for extending power supply for charging batteries for PA
system, VHF batteries etc. For satisfactory charging of batteries, regular power supply
shall be made available near to the Art location, where it is normally stationed.



SECTION E: STAFF FOR ART

17.21 Every ART shall have nominated telecom staff. The incharge shall generally be SE/JE
and shall be assisted by 2 Telecom Maintainers and 3 Khalasi Helpers / Khalasis.

17.22 The nominated staff shall test the ART equipment as per schedule and ensure satisfactory
working of all equipments.

17.23 The nominated staff shall respond immediately whenever an accident takes place and
proceed by ART to the site of accident.

17.24 The nominated staff shall be responsible for establishing communication as detailed in
para 17.5 & 17.6, immediately on reaching the site of accident.



SECTION F: INSTRUCTIONS FOR TESTING OF ART EQUIPMENT

17.25 All active devices shall be tested for their satisfactory operation.

17.26 Charging of batteries shall be carried out as per requirement. The requirement may vary
depending on the battery and the self-discharge characteristics of the battery.

17.27 Wherever feasible, batteries shall be separated from the equipment and protected properly
to minimize the self-discharge.

17.28 Primary cells viz., torch cells shall be replaced as soon as deterioration in performance is
observed. In any case, the cells shall be replaced at interval not exceeding one year.
Leak proof cells only shall be used.

17.29 Detailed guidelines are given below:
While inspecting the telecom equipments in ART, the following guidelines related to
the equipments shown against them may be observed

1. Portable Telephone Set:
a) Check for any physical damage to the phone, wires, cords and
the plug. (Pole and connecting bracket in the case of 2W PT
set).
b) Condition of dry cells; change if due.
c) Quality of speech both way.
2. Magneto Phones:
a) Check for any physical damage to the phones & wires.
b) Condition of dry cells; change if due.
c) Quality of speech both way.
d) Ring Test.
e) Check FS cables continuity & insulation.

3. Megaphones:
a) Condition of dry cells; change if due.
b) Quality of speech and condition of volume control.
c) Working of the Siren.

4. P.A. System:
a) Functional Test.
b) Quality of reproduction of the amplifier.
c) Condition of mike cords.
d) Condition of Loud Speaker wires.
e) Functional test in the case of cordless mike.
f) Condition of standby battery 12V.

5. Walkie Talkie sets:
a) Functional test.
b) Quality of speech.
c) Condition of battery.
d) Battery swapping after charge.

6. 25W VHF set:
a) Physical check of set, antenna, feeder, mike and battery cord
b) Functional test.
c) Condition of 12V storage battery.

7. Way Station Control Equipment:
a) Functional test (Ring & Speech).

8. Auto Dialler:
a) Functional test.

9. Fax Machine:
a) Physical check.
b) Functional test.


10. Cassette Tape Recorder:
a) Functional test.
b) Condition of dry cells; change if due.

11. Checking of Records:
a) Availability of all material as per check list.
b) Inspection book for record of inspections.
c) Record of charging of storage batteries & walkie-talkie
batteries.
d) Record of replacement of dry cells.



SECTION G: ARRANGEMENTS AT DISASTER MANAGEMENT CONTROL
ROOMS AT HEADQUARTERS / DIVISIONS

17.30 The following facilities shall be available in the disaster management control rooms at
headquarters and divisions:

a) BSNL Phones 2 Nos with ISD facility.
b) Railway Telephones 3 Nos with STD facility.
c) Fax Machines 1 No. connected to BSNL line and 1 No. connected to railway line.
d) Facility to extend section control to the disaster management control. The concerned
section control in whose jurisdiction the accident takes place, shall be connected..
e) Hot line between Headquarters and divisional disaster management control rooms shall
be provided.
f) Important telephone numbers of hospitals / doctors /officials of state and district
administration and other important functionaries be kept ready.



CHAPTER XVIII

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS GSM-R

18.0 GSM-R :

18.1 Introduction:

Mobile Train Radio communication is a digital wireless network based on GSM-R (Global
System for Mobile Communication-Railway) designed on EIRENE (European Integrated
Railway Radio Enhanced Network) Functional requirement specification (FRS) and System
Requirement specification ( SRS)

The Basic features of GSM-R are

Point to Point call Allows user to make a distinct call.
Voice Broad cast call Allows groups of user to receive common
information.
Voice Group call Allows groups of user to make calls within
/among the groups.
Emergency call Allows user to call controller by short code or
button during emergency.
Functional addressing Allows a user or an application to be reached by
means of a number, which identifies the relevant
function and not the physical terminal.
Location dependent addressing Provides the routing of mobile originated calls to
the correct controller e.g. relative to the
geographic area.
eMLPP (enhanced Multi-Level
Precedence and Preemption)
Allows resource preemption for priority calls

Fig.1 illustrates the system architecture. In this architecture a mobile station (MS)
communicate with a base station subsystem (BSS) through the radio interface. The BSS is
connected to the network switching subsystem (NSS) using the A interface.


Fig.-1

Interface Interfaces Description
U
m
Radio link between MS and BTS- Air interface
A
bis
Between BTS and BSC, PCM 2 Mb ps
A
ter
Between BSC and TCU, PCM 2 Mb ps
A Between TCU and MSC, PCM 2 Mb ps
B Between MSC and VLR,
C Between MSC and HLR
D Between HLR and VLR
E Between two MSCs


18.1.1 The system consists of following sub systems :

a) Mobile Station (MS)
b) Base Station Sub system (BSS)
c) Network and switching sub system (NSS)
d) Operating sub system (OSS)
e) Dispatcher
f) Cab Radio
g) Power Supply Arrangement




18.2 Radio interface and frequency used in GSM-R :


The Radio link uses both FDMA (Frequency Division Multiple Access) and TDMA (Time
Division multiple Access) . The 900 MHz frequency bands for down link and up link signal
are 935-960 MHz and 890-915 MHz respectively.

Frequency Used for GSM-R in Eastern Railway

Spot Frequencie are
Uplink Dnlink
( MS To BTS) (BTS to MS)

907.8 MHz 952.8 MHz
908.0 MHz 953.0 MHz
908.2 MHz 953.2 MHz
908.4 MHz 953.4 MHz
908.8 MHz 953.8 MHz
909.0 MHz 954.2 MHz
909.2 MHz 954.2 MHz
909.4 MHz 954.4 MHz

18.3 Numbering Scheme for MS and Cab Radio :

18.3.1 International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) It is used to identify the called
MS. It is not known to the user and is used by network only. IMSI is stored in SIM, the HLR
and the serving VLR. The IMSI consists of three parts : A three digit Mobile country Code
(MCC), a two digit Mobile Network Code (MNC) and a Mobile Station Identification
Number (MSIN).

The directory number dialed to reach a mobile subscriber is called the mobile
subscriber ISDN (MSISDN) which is defined by the Numbering Plan. This number includes a
country code and a national destination code which identifies the subscribers operator. It is
stored in the HLR.

International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) for Railway Network.

MSIN Railway MCC MNC
HLR Identification Code
Eastern Railway 405 48 250 0000000-
9999999


18.3.2 Mobile Subscriber ISDN number :

Mobile Subscriber ISDN Number (MSISDN) for Railway Network.

MSC Code (3D) CC
(2D)
AC
(2D) CT8(1D) Zone(2D) Divn.(1D) Dept.(1D) Subscriber
Number (4D)
XXXX +91 99 8 25 0-9 0-9



18.3.3 National EIRENE Numbers :

National EIRENE Numbers are used specifically for Railway purposes and consist of
three parts.
i) Call type (CT)
ii) User ID No
iii) Function code (FC)
The call type prefix identifies the user number dialed. The call type distinguishes between
the different types of user numbers that are allowed within the national EIRENE
numbering plan. The call type prefix tells the network how to interpret the number dialed.
It is one digit long.

The user identification Number can be one of the following:
Train Running Number for TFN (Train Functional Number)
Engine Number for EFN (Engine Functional Number)
Coach Number for CFN (Coach Functional Number)
Shunting team location number
Maintenance team location number
Train controller location number

National EIRENE Calls
Functional Numbers [ handled by Functional Addressing(FA) service ] CT=2-3-4-6

Dialed digits Description
2+TRN+FC Train Functional Number
3+EN+FC Engine Functional Number
4+CN+FC Coach Functional Number
6+LN+TT+Y+XX Shunting & maintenance Functional Number


Where: TRN: Train Running Number (5-8 digits)
EN: Engine Number (8 digits)
CN: Coach Number (9 digits)
FC Function Code (2 digits)
LN: Location Number (5 digits)
TT: Team Type (1 digit)
Y: Team Member (1 digit)
XX: Team Number ( 2 digits)

Train Functional Number is used for calling the driver by its train number. The
following numbering scheme is used in the Railway.


Functional Number of driver in Rajdhani Express for Thursday is as follows.

2 4 2301 0 01


Call Type Thursday Train Number Schedule Train Driver

for link train - 1 for Guard - 80
for special train - 2

User can register itself as a driver / guard of any train from their handset by dialing
091 i.e. Railway access code following the above digits for a specific train .

For details, uniform numbering plan circulated by RDSO may be referred.

18.4 Brief description of sub system :

18.4.1 Mobile Sub system (MS) :

The MS consists of two parts
i) Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)
ii) Mobile Equipment (ME)

The SIM is removable and can be moved from one terminal to another. It is authenticated
via a personal Identity Number (PIN) between four to eight digit. This PIN can be deactivated
or changed by the user. If PIN is entered incorrectly in three consecutive attempts, the phone
is locked for all but emergency calls, until a PIN unblocking key (PUK) is entered.
The SIM contains subscriber information and International Mobile Subscriber Identity
(IMSI).

18.4.2 ME is a Mobile hand set equipped with a soft touch key pad and display screen. Some
additional key (button) is provided to meet the special features of GSM-R (emergency call
etc.). Though ME having a robust structure, it should be kept in safe position to prevent
mechanical damage.


18.5 Power Supply :

18.5.1 The ME is equipped with power supply arrangement (Li-ion battery). It is a
maintenance free battery having detachable independent charger to recharge the battery after
discharge. Charging indication on ME screen shows the status of charging.

18.5.2 The ME can be dynamically registered and deregistered in the network for different
functional numbers as per requirement of the subscriber (ME) by keying from the key pad in a
programmed manner and monitoring the action in the display unit of ME.

18.6 Base Station Sub system (BSS) :

The BSS connects the MS and the NSS.
The BSS contains of three parts.
i) Base transceiver Station (BTS).
ii) Base Station Controller
iii) Trans Coder Unit.

18.6.1 Base Transreceiver Station (BTS) :


The BTS performs channel coding/decryption. It contains transmitter and receivers, antennas,
the interface to the PCM facility and signaling equipment specific to the radio interface in
order to contact the MEs. It processes the signaling and speech required for Mes in air
interface at one side (via antenna) and with BSC in Abis interface (through PCM 2Mb/s in
OFC network) at the other side.

The general architecture of the Base station is based on the following modules:

The Compact Base Common Function (CBCF) performs all common functions such
as concentration, transmission, supervision and synchronization. A CBCF can be
dimensioned according to traffic.

The Power Amplifiers (PA) amplify the RF signal delivered to antenna through the
TX combiner. Each PA is physically independent unit, characterized by its frequency
band, output power can be controlled independently.

The Driver receiver units (DRX) amplify the RF signals (two, for diversity), process
the TDMA frames and drive the power amplifier. Each DRX is associated with one
RF channel, connected to the Frequency Hopping bus (FH bus) in order to allow base
band hopping and packed as a physically independent unit. One TRX is then made up
of one PA and one DRX. Depending on frequency band , a specific DRX is available
to support EDGE (e-DRX).

The Transmission Combiners (TX combiners) combine the RF signals delivered by
several power Amplifiers and duplex them with the received signals. A variety of
coupling modules can be selected, depending on the type of combining (duplexer,
hybrid), the frequency band and the configuration (number of TRXs and antennas).

The reception multicouplers ( LNAs + RX splitters) pre-amplify and split the
received signal towards the DRX receivers. A variety of RX-splitters can be selected,
depending on the frequency band.

The Alarm module (RECAL) collects internal and external alarms. The number of
external alarms is up to 8.

Fan tray is kept at the bottom of the cabinet for keeping the module inside cabinet
cool by air circulation inside cabinet.

Power supply card to receive 48V DC supply from external source and to cater
required supplies to different active modules inside BTS cabinet.

CPCMI board on front panel inside BTS cabinets equipped with different LEDs to
indicate different status of the equipment.
18.6.1.3 System Specification :

Power Supply = - 48 V DC.
PA Tx Power = 30 W.
Rx Sensitivity = -110 dBm.



18.6.1.4 Power Supply :

48V/16 Amp. DC supply is provided for the BTS cabinet. Low Maintenance lead-
acid battery with capacity 300AH with a Battery Charger (230V AC/48V 50 Amp.
DC) shall be kept in float condition with load for this purpose.

18.6.1.5 Cooling Arrangement :

Cooling arrangement is necessary for keeping the ambient temperature below a certain
level to prevent system shut down due to high temperature.

For this purpose minimum two window type air conditioning machines are to be
installed and run alternatively for 12 hrs. each.

The BTS is a very temperature sensitive equipment. Normally the BTS stations are
unmanned. Hence for monitoring the health of the unmanned station some parameters
are required to be monitored from a centralized location of the network. For this
purpose following parameters are to be monitored from the central maintenance
location through OSS.

a) High temperature
b) Battery voltage low
c) Fire alarm
d) AC Machine failed
e) Charger failed
f) AC mains failed.

18.6.2 Base Station Controller (BSC) :

In the BSS network, the BSC performs the tasks related to the BSS equipment management
& supervision and to the GSM call processing, mainly:

BTS supervision
Radio channel allocation
Radio channel Monitoring
Traffic management
TCU management
OMC-R link management
Handover procedures
Operation and maintenance request from the OMC-R processing
BSS configuration data and software storage
BSS performance counters management
Failure detection and processing



18.6.3 Trans coder unit (TCU)

The TCU carries out speech encoding/ decoding and rate adoption in data transmission. It is
designed to reduce the number of PCM links needed to convey radio speech & Data channels

between BTS,BSC & MSC. It enables code conversion of 16 Kbps channel from the BSC into
64 Kbps channels for MSC in both directions.

18.6.3.1 Functional Overview :

It performs the following main tasks related to communication switching and transcoding:
Switching: the TCU manages a time division multiplexer connecting the BSC and
MSC.
PCM link management: Using the configuration data provided by the BSC, the TCU
configures and monitors the PCM links on the A and Ater interfaces.
Transcoding and rate adaptation: Coding/decoding of the speech frames and rate
adaptation of data frames.
TCU equipment management: OA&M functions: initialization , startup, clock
synchronization from A-interface links, supervision , fault management, software and
configuration management.


18.7 Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS):

The NSS supports the switching functions, subscriber profiles and mobility management. The
basis switching function in the NSS is performed by the MSC. This interface follows a
signaling protocol used in the telephone network. The MSC also communicates with other
network elements external to GSM utilizing the same signaling protocol. The current location
of an MS is usually maintained by the HLR ( Home Location Register) and VLR (Visitor
Location Register). When an MS moves to the Home System to Visited system, its location is
registered at the VLR of the visited system. The VLR then informs the MSs HLR of its
current location. The authentication center (AuC) is used in the Security data management for
the authentication of subscribers.
NSS &BSS installed in some sections of Indian Railways are of M/s Nortel or M/s Siemens
make.

18.7.1 GSM MSC Configurations and Functions ( Typical for M/S Nortel)

The GSM DMS-MSC is supported in different configurations that allow combining
functionalities on a single node. The following configurations are supported;

An integrated Visitor location Register (VLR) to hold the temporary subscriber data
while the subscriber is in the MSCs area as well as authentication and ciphering
provided by the AuC.

An optional integrated Service Switching Point (SSP) functionality to support
intelligent Network based services in the most efficient and effective manner.

18.7.2 The MSC is responsible for:
Call Processing, switching & routing of traffic, supplementary services.
Connections to external services e.g. PSTN.
Visitor Location Register (VLR) for subscriber location management.
Service Switching Point (SSP) functionality for the IN network.
Billing facilities to feed the billing system (billing system could be proposed if
required).

Switching and Network Management activities.

18.7.3 Data Bases

Home Location Register
(HLR)
Data base for management of mobile subscribers,
stores the IMSI, Mobile station ISDN number
(MSISDN) and current visitor location register
(VLR) address.
Keep track of the services associated with each MS
and HLR may be used by Multiple MSCs.
Visitor location Register
(VLR)
Catches some information from the HLR as
necessary for call control and service providing for
each mobile currently located in the geographical
area controlled by VLR connected to one MSC and is
often integrated into the MSC.
Authentication center (AuC) A protected data base which has a copy of the secret
key stored in each subscribers SIM card.
This Secret is used for authentication and encryption
over the radio channel. Normally it is locate close to
HLR.
Equipment Identity ( EIR)
Register
Contains a list of all valid mobile station equipment
within the network, where each mobile station is
identified by its International Mobile Equipment
Identity (IMEI)


18.7.4 Signalling support

This provides support for the basic signaling functionality as defined by GSM Phase 2+
standards.


The major protocols supported are:

DTAP via the Direct Transfer Message. This is the interface between the MSC and
Mobile Station.
RANAP- This is the signaling protocol used between the MSC and BSC
MAP- This is the interface between the NSS functions ( MSC, VLR, HLR, EIR).
A Interface- is an open interface defined between the BSS network and the MSC.
ISUP- The MSC conform to the ITU and ETSI standards (Blue Book and White
Book) for ISUP interconnects supporting both ETSI v1 and ETSI v2. In addition some
National PSTN interconnects are implemented.

18.7.5 Hardware Description ( Nortel Specific):

The DMS-MSC is member of the DMS (Digital Multiplex Switch) family of switching
products, capable of providing the switching functionality and advanced services required in a
GSM and UMTS wireless network.
The major functional components of the DMS architecture are given below.



XA-Core VLR Billing Server SDM_FT




DMS -BUS

ENET

ISM DTC LPP

Traffic Trunk SS7 Ethernet

18.7.6 MS functional architecture
XA-Core The XA-Core (extended Architecture) is the control component of the
system and performs call, services, and mobility related processing
and maintenance functions.
XA-Core is implemented as a multiprocessor system built up of
identical processing element (PEs) each running the same software
load and with the same software and hardware configuration. These
identical but independent PEs access a single shared memory system.
DMS-BUS The DMS-Bus provides a high capacity communication mechanism
between all the DMS components by operating at 128 Mbit/s through
put. The DMS-Bus also provides the central system clock for
synchronization of the DMS ( MSC or HLR ) system.
The DMS0 Bus consists of duplicated message Switches (MS),
which, under normal conditions, operate, in load sharing mode. In the
event of a bus failure, the full traffic load is routed via the duplicate
bus.
ENET The Enhanced Network(ENET) and Digital Trunk Controllers (DTC)
handle all of the traffic switching and connectivity functionality for
the DMS.
The ENET is the switching matrix that provides interconnection
between peripheral modules using time division multiplexing. It is a
single-stage, fully non-blocking n*64 kbits/s switch with constant low
delay (128 s). The ENET is duplicated for reliability and is flexible
for provision of a wide range of port connections through modular
growth (4K increments)
DTC The DTC ( Digital Trunk Controller) peripheral provides the physical
interface to E1 or T1 digital carriers allowing termination of PSTN or
BSC trunk connection.
The DTC02 generation provides the operator with increased density
of E1s (doubled) over the existing DTCOs whilst supporting all the
capabilities of the previous system.
The DTCOi peripheral provides the physical interface to E1 PRI,
allowing termination of PABX and ISDN connection.
LINK
PERIPHERAL
PROCESOR
The Link Peripheral Processor (LPP) provides support for CCS7
messaging support interface to other UMTS network nodes and to
PSTN/ISDN and BSC. Each SS7 connection is terminated by high

capacity processing units called Link Interface Units(LIU). The LPP
also provides LAN connectivity through the use of Ethernet Interface
units (EIU).
The LPP distributed processing architecture provides support for the
MTP and SCCP layers of SS7 allowing the DMS-Core to concentrate
on providing call processing and application support.
SDM-FT The SDM-FT (Super Node Data Manager-Fault Tolerant) is high
performance computing platform that provides the operational,
administration, maintenance and provides support functions for NSS
network. The SDM0FT acts as a data collection, data processing, and
local mediation entity between the network element ( MSC,HLR) and
the management systems.
ISM
(Integrated
Services
Module)
The Integrated Services Module (ISM) provides auxiliary and support
functionality such as Recorded Announcement machines, Conference
Circuits , plus the Input/Output modules for access and storage.
MSC IWF
HOST
MSC connects to the Mobile-side interworking function over a
Mobile-side IWF trunk (MIT). MSC connects to the network-side
interworking function over a Network-side IWF trunk (NIT). These
are Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Administrators
(CEPT) 30 channel Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) known as PCM30
trunks that are used for bearer channel connectivity. For signaling
connections to the IWF host, MSC connects to the IWF unit through a
user Datagram Protocol/Internet Protocol (UDP/IP) application over
Ethernet.
The IWF is necessary for GSM-R deployment of the ERTMS
(European Train Management System)
























18.8 GSM-R FLOW CHART


18.9 Function of Intelligent Network :
i) Mapping the functional number with corresponding
MSISDN.
ii) Location Dependent Addressing.
iii) Registration
iv) Deregistration
v) Interrogation
vi) Force deregistration
vii) Virtual Private Network

18.10 Operating Sub system (OSS) :


Operating sub system consists of

a) Operation and Maintenance Center for Radio (OMC-R).
b) Operation & Maintenance Center for NSS (OMC-S).

18.10.1 OMC-R Functions :

The OMC-R is made up of servers and work stations. Each WorkStation or X-terminal
provides the operating staff with a Graphical User Interface, called Human Machine Interface.

The server centralizes the O&M functions dedicated to the BSS network elements and thus
allow consistent management of the BSS network elements.


The following O&M functions are provided:

Security Management: to manage user profiles in order to control the users. access
to functions provided by the OMC-R.
Configuration management : To manage the resources to be supervised. Examples
of resources that can be managed: PCM links, SS7 and traffic channel on A interface,
cells, list of frequencies allocated in each cell, list of adjacent cells of a given cell,
frequency hopping laws implemented in the cells, TDMA frame.
Performance management: Values of counters are collected from the BSS network
element and reports are generated and displayed to the users. Thresholds can be
defined and associated with the counters to generate alarms for maintenance purpose.
Fault management: the OMC-R handles even reports received from the network
elements and related to the anomalies. Alarm messages can be generated with a
severity from these reports by using criteria defined by the user.

The following internal functions are provided:

Server administration: Supervision, switch over and backup of the servers and
stations.
Common functions: inter-user mail (running within an SMS-C server), management
and execution of commands file, calendar for the deferred or periodic execution of a
command or a command file, on-line help.
File transfer management: downloading and activation of the software released
dedicated to TCU, BSC, BCF and TRX is centralized via the OMC-R.




18.10.2 OMC-S Functions :

The Operation and maintenance center of the NSS part (OMC-S) is able to achieve different
kind of functions.

NSS configuration management:
BSCs, Location areas, Cells.
Terrestrial links, etc..

Software configuration (downloading, file transfer).
MSRN and handover number management.

Fault management:
Detection.
Presentation.
Re-configuration.

Performance management:
Traffic control.
Service quality monitoring.

Security management:
User Profiles.
Session monitoring.

OMC-S operation:
System Management.
OMN management.
File transfer operations.

OMC-R windows shows the physical and logical views.
Physical views means how they are located
Logical view means how they are connected.


18.10.3 Alarm Display

Alarm can appear on any object. The current alarm classification, colors and letters are:

Minor (Yellow,m)
Major (Orange, M)
Critical (Red,C)

To see the alarm select the object/ hardware then click the right hand mouse button
pointing to the menu and select show alarm and click. The window describes time of alarm
occured, type and fault number, identity and location of object / hardware from where the
alarm is originated.

18.11 Dispatcher :

The D1CORA P (Dispatcher) fulfill a series of functional requirements :-

(i) Five registers on the display with 55 DA Keys each.
(ii) Outgoing calls also possible via key pad and telephone book.
(iii) Touch sensitive display.
(iv) Monitoring, Conference, Call Transfer and Call Forwarding.
(v) System status display, error management.
(vi) User specific settings (Volume, Microphone ON/OFF, clearing mode).

(vii) Accept, Send emergency call.
(viii) Functions Management.

It consists of an audio module and a touch panel module.

(a) Audio Module :

(i) Hand set.
(ii) Loud Speaker.
(iii) Interlock Key.
(iv) Two Emergency Keys (N1, N2) and an interlock key.
(v) Hands free key.
(vi) Microphone Key (for muting the microphone).
(vii) Key for monitoring Loud Speaker ON/OFF.
(viii) Gooseneck Microphone.
(ix) Head Set.
(x) Interface to the main module.

(b) Touch Panel Module.

(i) Screen Unit.
(ii) Industrial PC.
(iii) ISDNBRI Interface.
(iv) Audio Module Interface.
(v) Voltage Supply.
18.11.1 Block Diagram of dispatcher connection. Dispatcher is connected with MSC
through the ground switch (GSC) equipment.


MSC

Router DMC
GSC
ISDN PRI ISDN BRI


Voice Recorder
ISDN PRI


DICORAP
ISDNBRI (Dispatcher)

18.11.2 Voice Recorder stores voice that is established through dispatcher. At present
120 voice channels can be directly connected.


18.11.3 GSC consists of the following shelves.

(i) BGT DATA Connects DMC.

(ii) BGT PSU.
(iii) BGT UIF ISDN BRI/PRI.
(iv) BGT PRI Connect Dispatcher.

GSC requires uninterrupted AC Power Supply.

18.12 Cab Radio :

Cab Radio - It is suitable for voice and Data Communication. It can be used with ETCS for
train control. It consists of three units.

(i) Radio
(ii) Operating Units MMI
(iii) Antenna


18.12.1 Cab Radio consists of the following components :

(i) MT2 :: Mobile Termination. 2
nd
Generation.

(ii) SCOI :: System controller with dual serial data port and parallel
I/O.

(iii) GPI :: General purpose interface: for serial data transmission and
control of MMI.

(iv) PAI :: Public Address Intercom.

(v) SV2 :: Power supply, DC/DC converter for internal supply.

(vi) FCM :: Filter and connector module.

Key features of MT.
(i) Operation in the R-GSM,E-GSM and P-GSM bands.
(ii) Mobile Station Class 2 (8 watt transmission output).
(iii) All ASCI features.
(iv) All GSM phase supplementary services.
(v) Robust design : electrical and mechanical design for use in Rail road
environment.
(vi) Full duplex data communication.
(vii) SIM commands for editing and using EIRENE and ASCI specific fields of the
SIM card.
(viii) SIM tool kit.
(ix) Testing and diagnosis are possible both on line during operation and off line.

18.12.2 S.C. (System Controller)
The most important functions of the SC are :
(i) Initialization of the entire Cab Radio.
(ii) Self test and status monitoring.
(iii) Fault and protocol logging.

(iv) Administration of the service interface for diagnosis, configuration and
software down load.
(v) Administration of the configuration data.
(vi) Registration and De-registration of the functional numbers.
(vii) Call control functionality for all connected terminal devices i. e. operating
components, train loud speaker, train telephone and remote data transmission
terminal devices.
(viii) Handling of priority and pre-emption within the scope of eMLPP.
(ix) Automatic acceptance of emergency calls.
(x) Configuration of high priority calls.


18.12.3 General Purpose Interface

The general purpose interface component is used for simultaneous control of up to two
operating units MMI with voice and control circuits or a single MMI with one remote data
transmission application.

18.12.4 Public Address Intercom

The Public Address & Intercom PAI component services to connect the trains loud speaker
and the train telephone to the Cab Radio. It has the following interfaces.

(i) A symmetrical audio output to the train loud speaker.
(ii) A symmetrical input/output to the train telephone including optical coupler
for evaluation of the conditions for the connection to the locomotive driver
or the central control station.
(iii) 4 optical coupler inputs for UIC control of the train loud speaker.
(iv) 4 optical coupler outputs for UIC control of the train loud speaker.

18.12.5 SV2 : DC DC converter.

The DC-DC converter SV2 serves for generation of operating voltages (13V and 5V) that are
required for internal supply of power to the components of the Cab Radio. The DC on board
supply of locomotive with nominal voltage between 24V and 110V DC serves as the Power
source.

The DC-DC converter SV2 offers potential separation and protection against transient
voltages. Voltage fluctuations and EM influences according to the requirements of
locomotive.

The DC-DC converter has a status LED on the front side of the housing. It lights constantly
when both voltage outputs and the internal temperature lie with in the permitted range.

A signal corresponding to the LED is provided as a power fail signal with TTL level at the
back panel bus and can be processed by the SC.

Two SV2s can be connected in parallel without external circuitry, where by the tolerances of
the output voltages are still met. This increases the redundancy of the system.


18.12.6 Filter and Connector Module FCM.

FCM takes on the following tasks in the Cab Radio voice section :-

(i) Connector panel the solid connectors for power supply, MMIs, Data
Interfaces and UIC interface are connected mechanically and electrically to
the panel.
(ii) Power distribution The on board 24-110V DC power supply is distributed
among the two DC converters SV2 and optional SV3.
(iii) The consumer voltage 24V of the battery circuit or optional module SV3 is
run to the connectors of MMI and via the coupler relay to the control circuit
of the UIC 568 interface.
(iv) Filter function The input and output voltages are protected by course
protection elements and filters against transients from the locomotive power
supply.

18.12.7 Operating Unit MMI (Man Machine Interface)

The operating unit is an important components of the Cab Radio. It serves for input of
commands via the keyboard and provides the user with comprehensive information on a
display. The inputs are entered via function keys (hard keys) with fixed functions as well as
soft keys with functions that can be dynamically adapted.

Components of the MMI.
. Monochrome Display.
. Key Board.
. PC Board.
. LED indicators.
. Audio Amplifier.
. Charging Unit for the driver mobile telephone.
. Housing.

The following hard keys are present :

(i) RESET
(ii) Selection Key Up x DM
(iii) Enter Key
(iv) Emergency Call button
(v) Call to train conductor.
(vi) Call loc-loc
(vii) Call in the train (train announcement)
(viii) Button for calling the Station Master.

18.12.8 Soft Keys
No permanent functions are assigned to the soft keys. The function of the key depends on the
currently activated train radio application (GSM-R or analog) and the configured operating
level.

18.12.9 LED Indicators :
A total of 7 LEDs are available which are only activated as required.


. Emergency call indicator next to emergency call button.
. One LED next to each of the hard key for SM, train controller.
. Two status LEDs.
. All LEDs can be controlled from the SC via the RS422 interface.

18.12.10 Power Consumption :

The average power consumption is 18W. If the device in the idle made, the maximum power
consumption is 3W i. e. dark display.

18.13 Power supply arrangement of GSM-R system :

18.13.1 Power supply arrangement at NSS site. It is a centralized site consists of

a) MSC ( D.C. supply)
b) IN (A.C. supply)
c) OSS (OMC-R and OMC-S) (A.C. supply)
d) Dispatcher (A.C. supply)

(N.B. : Dispatcher may be located at some other place also as per the requirement of
Railways).

All the equipments are run by a uninterrupted (-)48V DC supply and 230V AC supply.

The network capable to cater up to 500 erlang need 48V supply capable to cater up to 233
Amp. (Typical for a system by M/s.Nortel).

The 230V AC UPS (15KVA) supply for an installation to cater up to 500 erlang (Typical for
a system by M/s.Nortel).


18.14.0 Installation of the system :

Installation of the system should be done as per firms guide line and under supervision
of Firms Engineer.


18.14.1 Site selection for NSS equipment Room :

The NSS equipment room should be specious and the floor should be robust and
strong enough to carry the equipment loads. The equipment loads are mentioned in the
equipment catalog. Site selection should also cater for future expansion, if any.


18.14.2 Cooling Arrangement :

The system is very sensitive to high temperature. So, it is necessary to provide
necessary cooling arrangement round the clock for the NSS equipment room.

As the battery & charger require to supply 233 Amp. DC current (-48V DC), the
Battery capacity is very high. It should be at least 3000 AH in duplicate and the charger
should be selected as SMPS based charger with hardware redundancy.

230V AC UPS supply with 15KVA capacity is also required for running different servers and
OMS-S, OMC-R terminals. These servers should not shut down suddenly due to power
failure. Hence, UPS supply, 15KVA should have redundancy in hardware also. Load sharing
of the UPSs is the preferred mode of operation

18.15 Commissioning of GSM-R
Commissioning of GSM-R requires following steps.
Uninterrupted DC & AC Power supply should be ensured first
Software loading should be done for each and every equipment. Proper
license of software and operating system used should be handed over to
Railways by the firm
Stand Alone Test (SAT-I)- The test needs to cheek all the NSS & BSS
equipments in room separately. The test is to be carried jointly by Railway as
well as firms representative. Firms representative through the OMC-S &
OMC-R terminal will exercise and show the stand alone system capability as
the equipment should perform. The test procedure should be decided jointly
beforehand. Checking of hardware and its redundancy, energisation of any
hardware and deenergisation, dumping of data in the MMS devices and
rebooting of system etc through OMC-S, OMC-R terminals are some of the
tests which are carried out.
System Acceptance Test ( SAT-II) - The system has its own features. All these
features and applications are to be simulated and tested jointly by the Railway
and firms representative. These tests are also for compliance of the system to
EIRENE FRS& SRS.
Radio Acceptance Test (RAT)- Radio level testing i.e. signal strength. Outside
interference, coverage, QPS, handover rate etc through out the geographical
area along the Railway track covered by the GSM-R is to be tested with
running trains by the firms representative and Railway jointly.
As and when satisfactory result appear in the above tests in SATI, SAT-II &
RAT, the system will be commissioned.
Installation of fire alarm system & smoke detector.
The equipment room, Battery room and OSS room at NSS center and
equipment room, Battery rooms at other wayside installation should be
provided with fire alarm system and smoke detectors.
Fire fighting system should be also be installed in sufficient quantity at the
NSS and other way side installations.



18.16 Maintenance

18.16.1 Network and switching subsystem

18.16.1.1 The system requires stable power supply and controlled temperature. Due to
variation of the above two parameters, the system may shut down. Any shut down event may

cause loss of data . Hence reliable power supply AC (UPS) and DC should be ensured by
periodical checking of redundancy of hardware as well as its capability.

18.16.1.2 Daily maintenance of NSS site
a. All the racks should be physically viewed for any abnormal, alarm or other
indication.
b. The OSS terminals should be monitored for viewing any physical alarm
and abnormalities. If any abnormality is observed immediate action will be
taken to restore.
c. To exchange signaling information, speech & data from BTS to BSC and
vice versa, OFC link or any standard link is to be used. There should be
two paths of OFC link (2Mb/s E1), one in forward direction and other in
reverse direction to improve system reliability. As and when normal path
gets disconnected, the reverse path will take care of the system. To ensure
the health of both the paths of 2 Mb/s E1s a daily check sheet should be
maintained as below.

Date E1
number
Normal
path
disconne
cted at (
Hrs)
Normal path
reconnected
at ( Hrs)
Perform
ance at
reverse
path
Reverse
path
disconnect
ed at (Hrs)
Reverse
path
reconnected
at (Hrs)
Perform
ance at
normal
path
Remarks





d) Recording of daily data regarding equipments, Air-conditioning machine, Chargers,
Battery, UPS etc.

e) Management & recording of data of A/C machine performance.

AC machine Numbers Date
Time 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Remarks Name & Sig. of
Technician
Supervisors
remarks
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On

Off

f) Equipments (Typical for M/S Nortel installation)

Alarm on physical verifications of different Racks Date
CPDC CISM CSDM SNXA CDTO IWF IN BTS TCU BSC




Alarm on different terminals
RTIF MAPCI WNMS OMC-R HUB IN




Alarm on verifications of different Power Supply Unit
Room Temperature SMPS
Charger
Isolation
Tx
UPS
Bty
Room
Eqpt
Room
O&M
Room
Remarks Name of Sig.
of Tech.
Name of Sig. of
Supervisor



18.16.1.3 Any defect noticed during daily checking of remote alarms like health of BTS,
physical parameters of BTS equipment room (Temperature, Battery voltage, A/C Machine fail
etc), health of E1 s etc should be attended immediately by maintenance team and a record
should be maintained at NSS center.

Date Time Fault Informed to
whom (Time &
Date)
Date &
Time of
rectification
Remarks Name & Sig
of staff
Name &
Sig of
Supervisor




18.16.1.4 If the MSC is connected to any Railway exchange, the link between MSC & Rly
exchange should be monitored daily and the same should be recorded in the following
table.If there is backup E1 path for exchange connectivity, same should also be tested
periodically.

Date Call initiated from
any exchange
phone to mobile
Performance Call initiated from
any mobile to
exchange phone
Performance Name & Sig of
Tech/Supervisor
tested
Exchange
Tel.No.
Mobile
No.
Exchange
Tel.No.
Mobile
No.





18.16.1.5 Daily testing of dispatcher
Date Call initiated from
dispatcher to
mobile no
Performance Call initiated from
any mobile to
dispatcher Normal
call & emergency
call
Performance Name & Sig of
Tech/Supervisor
tested


18.16.1.6 Daily Testing of Group call , Broadcast call.

Date Group call initiated
from Mobile No. to
other Mobile Nos.
(Record Mobile nos.)
Performance Broadcast
call
initiated
from
Mobile No.
Performance Name & Sig of
Tech/Supervisor


18.17.0 Other periodical checking of GSM-R

18.17.1 Biweekly
i)Taking of back up of MSC & BSC

18.17.2 Monthly
i) Proper health cheek-up of smoke detector (heat detector, control panel.)
ii) Checking of ground connections of all the equipments and earth bars.

18.17.3 Quarterly
i) Checking of antenna coupling point at tower top.
ii) Cleaning of earthing points of tower top.
iii) Testing of VSWR of antenna & cable (should be less than 1.3,
If VSWR is greater than 1.3 then cleaning of power splitter is required).
iv) Signal strength testing at site.

18.17.4 Half yearly
i) Measuring of earth.
ii) Cleaning of filter Pads of fan trays.


For more details refer maintenance manual of a system.

CHAPTER XIX


YARD COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS


SECTION A-GENERAL


19.01. Types - Yard communication systems may be of the following types:-

(a) Paging and talk back

(b) Wireless communication

(c) Line intercommunication

19.02 Paging and talk-back systems

Paging and talk-back systems are generally required for large marshalling yards. It
provides a means for the yard master to make announcements and for communication
between yard master and his staff at selected points.

19.03 Wireless communication

The wireless communication shall be in the VHF region with a fixed set at any
suitable location and a number of mobile sets in the yard. The range of such wireless sets
used for communication in the marshalling yards is limited normally to the area of the yard.
Handheld walkie-talkie VHF sets of 1-2 watts are also suitable for point to point yard
communication.

19.04 Line intercommunication:-

The line intercommunication can be through omnibus limited capacity systems or with
small capacity auto exchanges. The omnibus systems may be worked on coding scheme with
magneto CB telephones. When the maximum number of telephones involved is upto four,
magneto telephones may be employed. When the subscribers exceed four, magneto code
ringing will be inconvenient and a code ringing systems or a small capacity auto exchanges of
10 lines or 25 lines capacity may be employed.





SECTION B

PAGING AND TALK-BACK SYSTEMS-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

19.05 Requirements of paging system:- The paging system shall comprise a
paging amplifier with associated loudspeakers and a microphone with provision on the control
panel for the yard master to select any particular group of loudspeakers for making
announcements by the operation of a key. Paging loudspeakers will be combined into
suitable groups in as many numbers as possible in parallel, consistent with the rated capacity
of the paging amplifier, each group being served by a pair of aerial line wire/cable conductors.



19.06. Requirements of talk-back system

(a) Each talk-back point shall be provided with a loudspeaker capable of being used as a
microphone as well, with the necessary line matching transformer.

(b) Each talk-back point shall be provided with a push-button of non-locking type to call
attention of the master.

(c) The talk-back system shall be designed so as to require not more than two conductors
between each talk-back unit and the master unit. In areas provided with either ac or dc electric
traction, three conductors between each talk-back unit and the master unit are admissible, one
conductor out of the three being used for signalling.

(d) Operation of the push-button associated with talk-back units should give a visual and
audible indication to the master operating the control panel, the visual indication giving the
identity of the talk-back units. The indicators shall form part of the control panel and
indication shall continue until acknowledged by the operator by the operation of a key
relevant to the talk-back unit, which shall connect the talk-back unit to the master unit to
enable communication.

(e) Amplifier(s) shall be provided exclusively for the talk-back system for both way
intercommunication between the talk-back unit and the master.

(f) For talk-back units located very far away from the master unit, transistorised pre-
amplifiers shall be provided at each talk-back unit controlled by a relay actuated by the
talk/listen key on the control panel.

(g) A volume control shall be provided on the control panel to adjust the level of incoming
speech.

19.07 Standby requirements

Hundred percent standby shall be provided for the paging and talk - back amplifiers
and the power supply unit for the operation of the signaling relays, with facility for easy
change over to the standby units.

19.08 Control Panel

A common control panel shall be provided to control announcements on the paging
system and communication on the talk-back system.

19.09 Monitoring

(a) A visual indication to monitor the level of speech on the paging or talk-back system shall
be provided on the control panel in the form of a meter or LED indicator.

(b) The monitoring speakers, if utilised, should be provided with their own volume controls
and with provision for being switched into different paging zones.

19.10 Cables

Cables may be used in all busy yards. Underground screened cable must be
used in cases where AC electrification is introduced or envisaged and the cable screen, and
armoring, if provided, shall be connected to earth, the resistance of which shall not exceed 5
ohms.


19.11 Information from users - The initial and ultimate requirements of the installation
should be ascertained as accurately as possible by prior consultation with the traffic
department.

19.12 Acoustic survey:- An acoustic survey to decide the location and facing of the
loudspeakers is desirable.

19.13 Installation:- The installation of wiring, cabling, earthing and other safety
precautions shall be as mentioned in chapter XX on "SOUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS".

19.14 Frequency range:- The frequency range of 175 to 4000 Hz with negligible distortion
shall be ensured. However, in very noisy and reverberent yards, this range can further be
limited to 3,000 Hz.

19.15 Quality:- All materials of equipment and other components of the installation shall
conform to the relevant IS specification wherever they are applicable.

19.16 Continuous duty:- All components of the system shall be rated for continuous
operation.




SECTION C

CHOICE OF EQUIPMENT - MICROPHONE, AMPLIFIERS
AND CONTROL PANEL

19.18. Principal items:- Normally the installations comprise of the following principal
items of equipment:

(a) Source of input signals - microphones.
(b) Amplifying equipment/system - amplifiers.
(c) Control panel or console for the announcer.
(d) Loudspeakers - (i) Talk-back (ii) Paging.
(e) Mounting poles.
(f) Cables or overhead wires.


19.19. Location:- The installation of the amplifier equipments and the control panel will be
done in the announcer's (Yard Master's) office.

19.20. Microphone

(a) The microphones for paging and talk-back systems shall be very heavy duty, directional
moving coil type, and they should be mounted on adjustable stands so that the microphone is
within 15 to 20 cm from the announcer.

(b) A common microphone may also be used for both paging and talk-back systems through
a suitable switch.





19.21 Amplifier


(a) The amplifier shall be so designed and constructed as to present no danger either in
normal use or in the event of developing a fault, which might occur during normal use,
specially from electrical shocks, fire and excessive temperatures.

(b) The circuit values of the amplifiers should be suitably chosen to make the amplifiers safe
from shock under normal conditions and the electrical installations shall be sufficiently
reliable to maintain this degree of safety, in spite of an accumulation of dust and condensation
of moisture. It is essential that the amplifiers are provided with earth terminals.

(c) In the internal wiring of an amplifier, failure of insulation at certain points, may cause
overheating with risk of fire. Therefore, the resistors, inductances and other components shall
be positioned that they are inherently protected to a higher degree by the design itself.

(d) These amplifiers shall be robustly made and designed for continuous operation.

(e) All controls shall be mechanically and electrically noiseless.

(f) The hum and noise level of the amplifiers shall not be worse than(-) 40 dB with
reference to rated output.

(g) The racks and decks must satisfy the following requirements:

(i) It is desirable to mount these amplifiers on the racks consisting of decks of suitable
dimensions.

(ii) The height of the rack will depend on the number of equipments to be mounted and
accommodation available, ensuring that all manual controls are within easy reach.

(iii) The connecting wires used shall be tested and neatly arranged to avoid obstruction
and should be easily identifiable, being provided with labels or markers.

(iv) Decks of the racks should be capable of being removed by sliding the same from the
front.

(v) Each deck therefore should have chromium-plated handles in the front.

(vi) Necessary catches shall be provided to prevent the decks from falling down when the
decks are to be pulled out.

(vii) Necessary ventilation, preferably by a small cooling fan suitably placed, should be
provided.

(viii) If the fan is not used, wire meshing shall be provided at two sides and at the top of the
rack.

(ix) The whole rack should be capable of being mounted on bolts mounted on a concrete
platform and held down by bolts.





19.22 Control panel

(a) The control panel should be made of dura-aluminium or similar light metal and should be
finely finished with grey enamel paint.

(b) The panel shall be so designed that the wiring portion is easily accessible.


(c) All the switches including spares to be operated for the paging loudspeakers are to be
mounted in neat rows.

(d) For paging, the group selection switches shall be 'fly-back' type.

(e) Change-over switches may be provided on the control panel to changeover from normal
to the standby equipment in case of failure.

(f) The loudspeaker, preferably of a small cone type design for the talk-back system, shall be
mounted flush with the panel.

(g) The loudspeaker shall be protected by a good quality metal grill.

(h) Indication lamps shall be provided to indicate the calling talk-back unit or the selected
paging group.

(i) The description of the various switches, lamps, etc., shall be engraved in red in chromium
plated strips and screwed to the panel neatly.

(j) The wiring shall be neatly done so as to facilitate easy servicing.

(k) Terminals shall be provided for taking out and bringing in the wires for the control panel.




SECTION D

CHOICE OF EQUIPMENT - PAGING LOUDSPEAKERS

19.23 Type and quantity

The number, type and location of loudspeakers required to be installed to cover
the entire area of the yard, at the required volume level, have to be decided with reference to
the following points:

(a) The area to be covered

(b) Direction and velocity of the wind

(c) Echoes from nearby structures and

(d) Ambient noise level at different places at the location and at the adjacent areas.




19.24 Size of area

The size of the area to be served will give a basic idea of the acoustic power
requirements of the installation. The loudspeakers shall be capable of handling the required
output. Because of their directional properties and higher acoustical efficiency, the reflex
horn type of speakers will be more suitable in big yards.

19.25 Wind


The speed and direction of the wind over the area during the duration of the
announcements influence the distribution of the sound over the area. A cross wind of 15-
20km/h speed is sufficient to deflect the sound up to 10-15 degree from the normal. This
point shall be kept in view during planning and installation.

19.26 Echoes
The echoes from large structures, nearby at the periphery of the area cannot be
avoided altogether. The intensity of echoes shall be reduced by directing speakers away from
the reflecting surfaces and towards the ground as far as possible.

19.27 Noise level

It is a matter of general experience that noise level increases fairly in
proportion to the distance from the announcement place under normal conditions. More often
than not, engines ply in the yards, crossing the rear or sides of the area giving rise to
considerable noise. The number of paging speakers, their location, height, direction and the
power input to the speakers installed will have to be decided with the object of maintaining
the intensity of reproduced sound at least 10 dB, above the ambient noise level, so that the
masking effect of noise over the signal could be reduced considerably.

19.28 Height and inclination of paging speakers

This shall be so adjusted as to give maximum satisfactory coverage.

19.29 Grouping

The paging speakers installed should be grouped depending on the area of the
yard to be served, such as left wing, right wing, etc. All the speakers in each group shall be
connected in parallel, and in proper phase across the output line, by a pair of twisted
conductors of a cable. This means that each group of speakers will have a separate cable pair
allotted in the main cable.

19.30 Matching

(a) In the case of matched systems, when a number of speakers are connected to
the same output circuit, matching transformers shall be used with each speaker so that it
consumes its rated power only.

(b) In case of constant voltage systems, the total load connected should be such
that the rated power of the amplifier is not exceeded.

(c) The line matching transformers shall be provided with tappings suitable for
70V or 100V on the line.

(d) The line matching transformers shall be mounted in weather-proof junction
boxes when used along with the projector or horn type of speakers. In this case, a board with
screw type terminals may be provided for the changing of the transformer tap quickly.




SECTION E

CHOICE OF EQUIPMENT - TALK-BACK LOUDSPEAKERS

19.31 Location


Talk-back units shall be provided at important points in the marshalling yard to
facilitate two-way communication between the yard staff and the Yard Master, whenever
necessary.

19.32 Type
(a) The talk-back unit should consist of a 15 cm dia cone type or re-entrant type speaker
with an output of 3-5 Watts with the associated matching transformers. This speaker should
also serve as a microphone for the yard staff.

(b) A plug-in type transistorised pre-amplifier with the associated power supply (6V dry
battery) should be provided in the talk-back units located very far away. This pre-amplifier
should be brought into the circuit only when the talk-back speaker is used as a microphone.

19.33 Cabinet

(a) The complete talk-back units should be housed in all-weather proof cabinets of
suitable size.

(b) The cabinets should be impervious to dust, dirt, fumes, smoke and salt water sprays.

(c) It should be lacquer finished with a protective undercoat to withstand long service
under severe conditions of humidity, temperature and heavy smoke, preferably a fly-back type
lid should be used for additional protection.




SECTION F

MOUNTING OF LOUDSPEAKERS-CABLES,MARKING,STANDBY POWER
SUPPLY

19.34 Mounting of paging loudspeakers

Weather-proof paging speakers with the associated units and transformers shall be mounted
rigidly for the correct direction at a height of about 5-6 metres from the ground level.

19.35 Mounting of talk-back loudspeakers

(a) The talk-back speakers with the associated units and transformers shall be mounted
rigidly at about 2-3 metres from the ground.

(b) The plug-in type pre-amplifier unit with the associated power supply, switches, etc.,
wherever used should be mounted just below the speaker, if the assembly is used separately.

19.36 Cables

(a) In all busy yards, sheathed cables should preferably be used for the paging and talk-
back systems. In yards where AC electrification has been introduced, only lead/aluminium
sheathed cables shall be used. Where an omnibus talk-back circuit is used, the whole length
of the yard to be covered by the system can be run by a main cable with suitable junction
boxes at intervals with tail cables to feed each unit.

(b) PVC insulated 0.9 mm dia copper conductors Al. screened and armoured cable having
adequate number of twisted pairs can be utilised for the main cable.


(c) PVC cables can be used as tail cables for connecting the paging and talk-back speaker
unit from the junction box points. This PVC cable should be inserted into alkathene pipe to
prevent any possible damage.

(d) The same cable can be used for both paging and talk-back systems with separate pairs
of conductors.

19.37 Marking

The amplifiers, racks, control panels, paging and talk-back speakers including
the pre-amplifier units, etc., shall have the following information clearly marked on it.

(a) Model, serial number and manufacturer's name:

(b) Rating and/ or operating power capacity:

(c) Description of keys, lamps, controls, etc.

19.38 Standby power supply

Independent standby power supply unit, for example petrol or diesel oil engine
coupled to 230V, 50 Hz, alternator of the required capacity can be provided, if necessary.




SECTION G
MAINTENANCE- TALK-BACK SYSTEMS


19.39 Protection from water

The outdoor equipment, viz., loudspeakers, must be adequately protected from
water getting into the voice coils. The protection provided shall be periodically checked and
more frequently during rainy season.

19.40 Response of amplifier

The amplifier response must be checked at least once in a year.

19.41 Cable insulation and earthing of screens

The cables used must be tested for insulation at an interval of not less than 12
months and record maintained. The good condition of cable sheath earthing and the
equipment earthing shall be checked up by the maintenance staff.




SECTION H

INSPECTION,TESTING AND MONITORING

19.42 The complete installation should be inspected and tested by the DSTE/ADSTE to
ensure that the work has been carried out in a satisfactory manner and that the materials and
components used conform with the recommendations and that the plan and operating
instructions called for have been furnished.


19.43 DSTE/ADSTE shall ensure that the installation is in perfect working order. It must
also be ensured that the maintenance as called for in Section G is regularly done by the staff.

19.44 In his periodical inspection, DSTE/ADSTE shall carry out a sample inspection of the
outdoor equipment and the standard of maintenance.



CHAPTER XX


SOUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM


20.1 SYSTEM

20.1.1 Sound distribution system on the railways include transmission of:

(a) Announcement to passengers and other railway users at Railway station areas,
information regarding arrival, departure and late running of trains and also important
information pertaining to railway traffic.

(b) Speeches and musical programmes for railwaymen and guests in closed auditoriums or
open grounds.

(c) Announcements and musical programmes for workshop staff in shop, halls and hospitals.

(d) Announcements to railway men working in marshalling and sorting yards. (This is dealt
separately in Chapter XIX under yard communication systems).


20.2 SPECIFICATION & PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS

21.2.1 Types of services - There are two types of services:

(a) "A" Category - desirable where high quality sound reproduction (both intelligibility and
fidelity) is aimed at.

(b) "B" Category - employed where prime consideration is intelligibility.

21.2.2 USES : The uses of two types of services are as follows:

(a) `A' category service may be used where the acoustic conditions are fairly good for the
listeners and it is possible to provide adequate acoustic treatment.

(b) `B' Category service may be used where the acoustic conditions are not favourable. High
reverberation or high noise level conditions will require this type of service.


20.2.3 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR QUALITY
OF REPRODUCTION FOR A CATEGORY


i) Frequency response - The frequency response of the entire system excluding the voice coils
of the loudspeakers shall be within 3 dB from 100 to 10000 Hz.

ii) Harmonic distortion - The total harmonic distortion of the entire system excluding the
voice coils of the loudspeakers shall not exceed 5% at the rated output of the amplifier.

iii) Signal-to-noise ratio - The signal-to-noise ratio under normal operating conditions of the
amplifying system as a whole with flat operation of the tone control shall not be worse than
50 dB.


NOTE : The normal operating conditions are those where sound pressure level of 70 to 80 dB
is maintained.

iv) SENSITIVITY - System should be capable of direct operation from input voltage ranging
0.5mV to 1.5 V.

v) Reverberation time ( for indoor installation only) - The reverberation time should be as per
Annexure B and clause 20.2.8.


20.2.4 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY OF REPRODUCTION FOR
`B' CATEGORY:

i) Frequency response - The frequency response of the entire system excluding the voice coils
of the loudspeakers shall be within 3 dB from 100 to 7500 Hz. The frequency range can be
further limited up to 4000 Hz to improve speech intelligibility in noisy and reverberant
locations.

ii) Harmonic distortion - The total harmonic distortion of the entire system excluding the
voice coils of the loudspeakers shall not exceed 5% at the rated output of the amplifier.

iii) Signal to noise ratio - The signal-to-noise ratio under normal operating conditions of the
amplifying system as a whole with flat operation of the tone control shall not be worse than
40 dB.

NOTE - The normal operating conditions are those where sound pressure level of 70 to 80 dB
is maintained.

iv) Sensitivity - System should be capable of direct operation from input voltage ranging 0.5
mV to 1.5 V.

v) The test procedure for measurement of above parameters are given in Annexure-A.

20.2.5 ACOUSTIC SURVEY

a) Objective - The objective of an acoustic survey is to determine the acoustic defects in
relation to the location of the sound sources so that the necessary acoustic correction can be
done to ensure an optimum, acceptable sound distribution.

b) Acoustic defects - The acoustic defects are:

(i) Echo
(ii) Flutter
(iii)Reverberation
(iv) Multiple decay rates.

20.2.6 ECHO

(a) The sound reflection reaching a listeners ear at least 1/15th of a second after the original
sound is termed as echo.

(b) The effect of echo is aggravated by any focussing provided by any part of the same
building or nearby building. This is mainly confined to the frequency range above 1000 Hz
and this is because of the highly directional nature of higher frequencies.

21.2.7 Flutter


(a) Where parallel surfaces like side walls exist, there is a tendency for the sound energy to
decay in a series of steps, rather like a series of echoes of diminishing intensity, where the
interval between successive steps is the time for sounds to be reflected from one surface to the
opposite surface. The effect is flutter.

(b) Flutter is predominant for frequencies above 1000 Hz and the aural effect is a hardness or
harshness, particularly noticeable in speech.

20.2.8 Reverberation

(a) Reverberation is an accumulation of echoes, one interfering with and masking the
other, so that the individual echoes cannot be distinguished. It is the persistence of sound by
reflection from surrounding surfaces after the source sound has ceased.

(b) The effect of reverberation is the garbling of speech and distortion of music.

(c) A certain optimum reverberation is required for enhancing the effect of music or speech;
too short a reverberation time produces a `dead' effect and in smaller rooms, this will affect
the speech delivery of a speaker.

(d) The reverberation time, a measure of reverberation, is defined as the time taken for a
sound to decay in its intensity through a range of 60 decibels.

(e) The reverberation time is calculated as follows:

0.01524 V
T = ----------------
2.3 S log
10
(1-a)

where,

T - is the reverberation time in seconds.
V - is the volume in cubic metres.
S - is the total surface area in sq. metres.
a - is the average absorption coefficient of the surface.


20.2.9 Multiple decay

(a) Even when the reverberation time approaches the optimum, there may be something
lacking in the quality of the sound, if more than one rate of decay is present.

(b) Large areas of flat unbroken surfaces or acoustically coupled unequal volumes, as in the
case of an auditorium wherein the portion under balcony and the rest of the portion are having
different reverberation times cause such an effect.


20.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

20.3.1 Composition of sound distribution system - Sound distribution system consists
essentially of a microphone, an amplifier, a number of loudspeakers, connecting cables and
sectionalising transformers, preamplifiers, power supply units, voltage regulating devices.
Standby equipments are also provided as necessary.


20.3.2 Sound power and ambient noise level - Taking into account such factors as audience
absorption and maximum ambient noise level, the mean level of sound power shall be 5 to 15
dB above the ambient noise level. In quiet places like waiting rooms and refreshment rooms,

sound level should be higher by 5 dB; in closed auditoriums 5-10 dB; in railway platforms 10
dB; in station concourses, loco sheds, outdoor stadiums and similar noisy places 12 to 15 dB.

20.3.3 Electrical Power Requirement : A nomogram connecting the various design quantities;
such as volume to be covered, required sound pressure level, reverberation time of the hall
and the loudspeaker efficiency to determine the required electrical power output of the
amplifying system, and the method of use of the nomogram are given in Appendix B.
However, care should be exercised in using the nomogram as this is applicable only to hall
having good acoustics and negligible feed back effect from the loudspeaker-microphone
installation.


20.3.4 Circuit Plans and Operating Instructions

a) Complete block diagrams and schematic diagrams for the equipment installed should
be prepared and made available alongwith the circuit diagrams for each of the equipment, at
the place where the central equipment is located. The layout and sizes of the wiring and
cabling should also be indicated. The loudspeaker load connected to each output line and the
particulars of the line transformer should be indicated. The operating instructions should also
be made available alongwith rating of fuses to the operating staff.

b) Approval of plans for the proposed installation should be obtained from the competent
authority.

c) The location of the central equipment, loudspeakers, microphones etc. should be fixed
by the engineer and the accommodation reserved at an early stage.

20.3.5 Requirements for a playback - When music or announcements are recorded on tapes
and later fed through sound distribution systems, care should be taken to see that the
reverberation characteristics of the place in which the original recordings are made do not
downgrade the quality of playback through the sound distribution system. Because the
reverberation characteristics of the place of original recording and of the place in which the
recording is played back are additive.

20.3.6 Conformity of Specifications - All materials equipment and other components of the
installation should conform to RDSO specification of Public Address System and the relevant
Indian Standard Specifications wherever they are applicable. Some relevant IS specs. are
given in Annexure `D'.

20.3.7 Acoustic corrections:

(a) Requisites for acoustic correction - The type and extent of acoustic defects are to be
known, so that the acoustic corrections can be applied.

(b) Effect of parallel walls - Parallel wall surfaces must be avoided as far as possible.

(c) Effect in smaller rooms - The smaller rooms require greater attention since they develop
spatial sound patterns due to resonances at different frequencies as decided by the dimensions
of the room.

(d) Effects of side walls - Random reflections from the side walls will reduce the flutter and
high efficiency absorbing material may be used on the side walls to reduce the flutter.

(e) Areas opposite to sound source - Curvilinear surfaces and large area of reflection opposite
to the sound normally give rise to echo and they must be avoided.

(f) Method of acoustic correction:


(i) After calculating the reverberation time, the surface area requiring acoustic treatment may
be calculated depending on the optimum reverberation time chosen.

(ii) While calculating the reverberation time, adequate allowance for the absorption by
audience is to be given. Normally 50% to 65% occupation of the seats can be considered.
One occupied seat will amount to 33 absorption units which can be defined as the product of
area in square metres and absorption coefficient.

(iii)The calculations in para above must be repeated for six different frequencies, e.g., 128
Hz,256 Hz 512 Hz, 1024 Hz, 2048 Hz 4096 Hz and the type of acoustic material must then
be properly chosen. Absorption coefficients for common materials are given in Annexure - A.


20.3.8 MICROPHONES

20.3.8.1 Use of microphones:

(a) Moving Coil Microphone - These are commonly used and have robust construction.
Normally low impedance microphones are used as these permit the use of long microphone
lines. These should have uni-directional characteristics which help in reducing acoustic
feedback/howling specially in indoor sound system.

(b) Condenser Microphone - Due to smaller size condenser microphones are commonly used
for lavallier application either as Tie Pin Type or as Neck Type. These microphones require
1.5 V battery to power electret condenser cartridge. These microphones have higher
sensitivity compared to moving coil microphones.

20.3.8.2 Sensitivity - Sensitivity of the microphone shall be of the order of -55dB relative to
0.0002 dyne/cm for an impedance of 50 ohms.

20.3.8.3 Frequency response - the microphone chosen should have uniform frequency
response within 3.0 dB from 100 to 10000 Hz.

20.3.8.4 Connecting microphones -

(a) Use of more than one microphone may be essential in large stages. In such cases, output
from several microphones should be mixed in a mixing system and the common output fed to
the amplifier, where the amplifier itself is capable of mixing individual microphone inputs,
separate mixing system is not required.

(b) The microphone plugs and sockets should be of multi-contact (three or more) type and
freely interchangeable.

20.3.8.5 Siting of microphone and loudspeaker

(a) Sound distribution system, especially in a closed hall, has the risk of acoustic feed-back
from the loudspeaker to the microphone causing singing. Siting of microphones and
loudspeakers should be such that there is good pick-up of speaker's voice without abnormal
rise in bass and good distribution with uniform coverage without acoustic feed back. The
microphone should be sited normally in an acoustic shadow.

(b) It is also desirable to create the illusion that sound is being heard directly. There should
not be cases of sound from the loudspeaker, or reflected sound from the walls, reaching the
audience after the sound from the speaker has reached directly.

(c) Microphone should be, as far as possible, behind the loudspeaker in order to minimize the
acoustic feed back. The correct distance between microphone and source should be pre-
determined and arranged to be constant as far as possible. It is important to see that if the

level of reverberant sound or the surrounding noise near the microphone is high, the distance
between microphone and source shall be reduced. The sound source should be directly
towards the microphone, as otherwise the high notes, which are highly directional, would not
be satisfactorily picked up by the microphone and thereby the clarity of the speech sound
reproduced by the system will be poor.

(d) In 25 KV AC electrified area, the microphone siting should aim at avoiding the
electrostatic or electromagnetic induction either in the equipment or in the lead from the
microphone to the amplifier.


20.3.8.6 WIND SHIELDS: Microphones, when used outdoors, may have to be fitted with
some means of protection against wind. However, it is desirable that performance of
microphones should not be adversely affected by such wind shield.


20.3.9 LOUDSPEAKERS

20.3.9.1 Criteria for determining the loudspeakers required - The number of loudspeakers,
their location, height, direction and the power input to the loudspeakers installed will have to
be decided with the object of maintaining the intensity of reproduced sound above the local
noise level as prescribed in Para 20.3.2 so that the masking effect of noise over the signal
could be reduced considerably.

20.3.9.2 The loudspeakers used should have adequate power handling capacity and should
normally be of high efficiency type.

20.3.9.3 Loudspeakers used for "A" Category reproduction should have effective frequency
range of 100 to 10,000 Hz. (The response of the speaker system within the environment after
installation should be considered as the effective frequency response). For this reproduction,
directional type of loudspeakers (column) should be used.

The vertical directivity pattern of the system should be such as to feed the audience at
uniform level, avoid harmful level, reverberant sound or echo, and feedback of energy to the
microphones. In the horizontal plane, the directivity should be uniform across the width of
the hall.

20.3.9.4 Column type loudspeakers:

(a) Column loudspeakers are ideal for obtaining the vertical directivity pattern. The height of
column and number of speakers in it determine the directivity. A wide range of high quality
reproduction may be obtained by employing multiunit type, wherein the whole frequency
range will be covered by two or three groups of speakers arranged in separate columns, but
mounted close to each other and connected through a properly designed dividing network.

(b) The directivity pattern of such speakers should be such as to provide sufficient
intelligibility at all points of the seated area and avoid feed back to microphone, dead spot and
echo.

(c) For best results, the column loudspeakers shall be installed vertically at a height of 1.5 m
above the platform level and inclined at an angle of 8 degree to 10 degree towards the ground.

20.3.9.5 For "B" Category reproduction, the loudspeaker should have useful response from
100 to 7,500 Hz. Cabinet/horn type loudspeaker should be adequate for such purposes.

20.3.9.6 Cone type loudspeakers with wooden/metal cabinets - Cone type loudspeakers of
appropriate power output may be used in comparatively quiet covered areas like waiting
rooms, retiring rooms, etc.


20.3.9.7 Horn type loudspeakers - Horn type loudspeakers are suited to open platform and
large halls with high roofs. They shall be so placed and their size so chosen that their
radiation may not be in opposition and also the reflections from the roof and walls are
avoided. An electrical filter to cut off low frequencies may be used with the line matching
transformer to avoid damage to the voice coil at low frequencies.

20.3.9.8 Connecting loudspeakers -

(a) All the loudspeakers in each group should be connected in parallel and in phase across the
output line.

(b) The pair of wires from each group should be terminated on the announcers panel at the
amplifiers end, so that the line could be isolated from the output of the amplifier in case of
any line fault or changed over to a standby amplifier, if provided.

(c) When a number of loudspeakers are connected to the same output circuit, matching
transformers shall be used with each loudspeaker so that it consumes the rated power.

(d) These transformers should have at least the minimum frequency characteristic required of
the public address system. The power handling capacity of the transformer used with a
loudspeaker should not be less than the power to be absorbed by the speaker. These should
have several taps on primary and or secondary to give multiple turns ratio.

(e) These transformers enable the loudspeakers, through the selection of proper turns ratio, to
take an input of predetermined value of audio load from the amplifier, at the same time, care
being taken not to overload the loudspeaker. Where the constant voltage output line from the
amplifier is used, the total wattage of loudspeaker load should not exceed the rated power of
the amplifier.

(f) When a single loudspeaker unit is connected to the amplifying system, it's impedance
should be matched to the source impedance so as to consume the rated power.


20.3.10 AMPLIFYING SYSTEMS

20.3.10.1 CAPACITY OF AMPLIFIERS -

The output power of the amplifying system should be so chosen as to be capable of
establishing at any point amongst the audience, a sound level of 80 dB during operation, the
gain controls of the amplifying system should be so set that the signal reach each member of
audience at comfortable listening level, that is during weak passage the signals are distinctly
audible at each point, while during loud passage these do not cause annoyance. The
amplifying system should have a gain sufficient to deliver the required output power.

The amplifiers should preferably be in multiples of 60 W. rates capacity, one for each
group instead of using high power sets for the entire installation.

20.3.10.2 Input - In addition to the required number of microphone input channels, the
amplifier must have a tape recorder/ CD player input channel. It shall be possible to control
the proportion of the levels of the signals mixed.


20.3.10.3 Sensitivity - As the input voltages required to be amplified may range from 0.5 mili
volt to 1.5 V, the amplifying system should have a sensitivity sufficient to operate directly
from the lowest and highest input voltages to be met with.



20.3.10.4 Frequency response - The frequency response of the amplifiers should be within +
3.0 dB from 100 to 10000 Hz for "A" Category reproduction and from 100 to 7500 Hz for "B"
Category reproduction.

20.3.10.5 Matched impedance working - For matched impedance working, the output
impedance of the amplifier should be such as to operate into the range of impedances
presented by the load.

20.3.10.6 The output transformer of the amplifier should have impedance tapping of 4,8 & 16
ohms to enable operation with loudspeakers of these standard impedances. For constant
voltage working, the transformer should be provided with 70 to 100 volts constant voltage
tappings.


20.3.10.7 High power amplifiers should incorporate safeguard against excessive voltage or
current rise in case of open circuit condition or short circuit conditions respectively, in output
circuit.

20.3.10..8 Standby amplifiers -

(a) Standby amplifiers shall be provided so that announcement is not held up due to defects
in the working of amplifiers.

(b) Easy changeover arrangement for switching from the defective amplifiers to the standby
amplifiers by the announcer without the aid of any technical staff is preferable.

(c) Provision should be available for easy localisation and rectification of faults in any part
of the installation.

20.3.10.9 Installation :

(a) All equipment should be robustly made and designed for continuous operation.
Equipment should be securely installed in such a manner as to have convenient access to all
sides of it. Access by unauthorised persons should be guarded against. Precautions should be
taken to keep away dust from the equipment, especially if earth moving machines, concrete
mixers etc. are working in the immediate vicinity of the accommodation provided.

(b) When the number of equipment is not large, they may be placed on a table and wired.
The positioning of the equipment should be such that the lengths of the inter-connecting
cables are kept minimum for convenience.

(c) In case the number of equipment is large, it is desirable to mount them in racks of suitable
dimensions. The racks may be of metal or wood and either in one piece having compartments
or different sections of uniform width assembled together. Each compartment of section shall
contain one item of equipment. The height of the rack will depend on the number of
equipment to be mounted and accommodation available, ensuring that all manual controls are
within easy reach.

(d) Switches should be provided for isolating any faulty section of the equipment thereby
facilitating operation and avoiding danger to the operating personnel. The arrangement
made should enable the remaining part of the equipment to be available for use.

(e) The patch cords if used should be tested and neatly arranged to avoid obstruction and
should be easily identifiable. Necessary safety measure should be adopted to avoid accidental
contacts with high voltage points in the rack.


f) Insulation required in 25 kV ac electrified area - The amplifier along with the cable and
loudspeakers shall be such as to withstand a dielectric strength test voltage of 1000 AC rms
for two seconds, when applied between the terminals of the speaker and the body.

20.3.11 POWER SUPPLY

20.3.11.1 Power supply

(a) It shall be ensured that reliable mains power supply is available near the proposed
location of the announcing equipment.

(b) The installation should be normally operated from 230 V single phase 50 Hz AC mains
supply.

(c) A voltage regulating device will have to be provided, if the regulation of the power supply
is poorer than 5%.

(d) When only DC supply is available, if necessary, an inverter of required capacity should
be provided to convert DC supply into AC supply.

(e) If no mains supply is available, petrol or oil engine driven generating set of required
capacity giving 230 volts single phase 50 Hz, AC should be used. Such a generating set
should be located away from central equipment and microphones and preferably in another
building at some distance from the hall having sound distribution installation to avoid noise
(Electrical & Mechanical) produced by the generating system.

(f) All amplifiers should preferably be capable to operate on 12 V/24 VDC Car Battery
besides on 230 V, 50 Hz AC supply.

20.3.12.WIRING AND CABLING

20.3.12.1 Microphone Cables -

(a) These cables carry low level signal currents and are, therefore, susceptible for electrical
interference. Twisted pairs of conductors with sufficient insulation, screened continuously
with close mesh of tinned copper braid shall be used. The copper braiding should be sheathed
with an insulated covering. The microphone cables shall be isolated from power, loudspeaker
and telephone cables.

(b) Joints in the cables should be avoided as far as possible.

(c) The plugs and sockets used for microphones cables should have strong self-cleaning
contacts so as to eliminate noise and they shall be non-reversible and have sufficient number
of pins to connect not only the main conductors but also the cable shields.

(d) Microphone cables should be laid without sharp bends as far as possible. Inside
buildings, they may be laid on the floor along the walls or under the carpet to avoid damage
due to any heavy object falling on them and cutting them.

(e) In 25 kV ac electrified areas, cables with their shields earthed must be used, if
electromagnetic induction is anticipated.

(f) The plugs and sockets for loudspeaker connections should be of a type that cannot be
easily or accidentally inserted in electric or power circuits.

(g) The speaker cable should be twin core rubber or PVC insulated lead-covered cables.
These should be rated for 250 volts insulation and should be isolated from microphone cable
and power cable.


20.3.12.2 Distribution and connecting cables - The cables chosen for distribution and
connections should be such that the line losses do not exceed the values specified in Annexure
C.


20.3.12.3 Additional requirements in 25 kV ac electrified area The additional requirements
are:

a) In the electrified areas, the length of parallelism between the loudspeaker circuit and
catenary system should be limited to 1.2 Km. Where this length is exceeded, suitable
sectionalising transformers shall be provided.

b) A minimum separation of 5 metres between the nearest wiring of the loudspeaker and
the catenary system shall be kept.

c) Screened cables & wires or cables & wires in metallic conduit should be used in
electrified areas, so as to eliminate the effects of induction both electromagnetic and
electrostatic. The cable screening conduit shall be effectively earthed at both the ends. If
sectionalising transformers are provided, earthing of the cable screen should be done on
the two sides of the transformers. The value of this earthing resistance should be as low
as possible and shall not exceed 5 ohms.

d) The screened cables used for working the loudspeakers shall have a screening factor of
0.5 within the field intensity of 50V/Km to 450 V/Km at 50 Hz.

e) It is desirable to run a main cable for the loudspeaker circuits as far away as possible
from the catenary system and connect the loudspeaker at different points by distribution
cables run at right angles to the catenary system.

(f) Wiring for equipment should also be screened (sheathed).


20.3.13 EARTHING AND OTHER SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

20.3.13.1 General - The layout and wiring of cables for loudspeakers shall, as far as possible,
be so done as to ensure safety and avoidance of the obstructions in the normal functioning of
the installation. The Indian Electricity Rules 1956 and the Indian Standard Code of Practice
for Electrical Wiring and Fittings in Buildings (IS:732-1958) shall be followed, as far as they
are applicable for wiring loudspeaker installations.

20.3.13.2 Earthing -

(a) Proper earthing of the entire installation (with appropriate earthing of the individual
equipment also) is absolutely essential to avoid danger from any possible shocks to the users
of the equipments, the operating personnel or the audience.


(b) Earthing connections to the nearby water mains are of usually lower resistance than any
form of buried earth electrode system. An equipment of installation may be satisfactorily
earthed by means of connection to the nearest water supply mains by a good soldered joints.
In the absence of a suitable water main, the earthing may be done by connection to other
efficiently earthed object.

(c) The use of two or more separate earthing connections at different points on the system is
inadvisable due to risk of trouble from circulating currents. The earth connection from water
supply mains or other earthed electrode should be brought to an earth-busbar in the equipment

room. The earthing connection to the installation equipments should be drawn from this
earth-bus bar.

The screening leads of a microphone should have a separate insulated lead run direct
to the earth connection. It shall not be connected to the electrical earthing of the installation
which gives rise to hum.

21.3.13.3 Earthing leads - A fairly heavy cable (such as 7/0.75 mm VIR in conduit) or bare
copper wire (4.0 mm dia) is normally satisfactory as the earthing connection lead. If bare
copper wire is used, care should be taken to run it insulated from other metallic objects all
along its length.


20.3.13.4 Earthing in 25 kV AC electrified area -

(a) All the sheaths/screens of wires/cables and metallic conduits must be earthed at both ends.

(b) In electrified areas, the metal mounting of the cone type loudspeakers and the body of the
horn type loudspeakers shall be earthed. The resistance of this earthing shall not exceed 10
ohms.

20.3.13.5 Safety requirements for amplifiers operated from electric mains - The amplifier or
amplifiers operating from mains supply shall conform to the requirement specified in IS:9302
- Mains operated audio amplifiers.

20.3.13.6 Fire and Explosion risk The installation of the system in a situation, where there
may be a possibility of an explosion, or in an inflammable atmosphere, should as far as
possible, be avoided. However, if it becomes necessary to have the installation in such a
situation, it should not be vulnerable to fire explosion risks.


20.4 MAINTENANCE

20.4.1 General conditions of wiring and components of the entire system to be checked once
every year.

20.4.2 The frequency response and the noise level of the amplifier shall be checked annually
and relevant parameters are to be recorded in Table I, II, III, IV& V. Wiring arrangements has
been shown in figures 1, 2 & 3.

20.4.3 The earthing arrangement shall be maintained properly and inspected once in a quarter.
Alternating current induction hum at 50 Hz and its harmonics also should be checked.

20.4.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING

20.4.4.1 The completed permanent installation should be inspected and tested by the
ADSTE/DSTE to ensure that the work is being carried out in a satisfactory manner and that
the materials and components used conform with the standard practice. Temporary
installation may be similarly tested and inspected by a senior inspector.

20.4.4.2 Routine inspection of the installation shall be carried out at intervals in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions or as specified from time to time.

20.3.15.3 A log book shall be kept in which details of all routine attention, faults and tests
should be carefully recorded for scrutiny.


20.4.5 SELECTION OF ANNOUNCERS


20.4.5.1 Choice of announcers - When DSTE/ADSTE assists in the choice of announcers, the
following essential characteristics should be sought for in the prospective announcers.

(a) They should be possess a pleasing voice so as to reflect their helpful, polite and friendly
attitude.

(b) They should be free of any defect or impediment in speech, including marked accents.

(c) They should be able to speak habitually with smoothness of diction and clarity of
pronunciation.

20.4.5.2 Quality of announcements - The following precautions will enhance the quality of
announcements :

(a) Keeping a distance of 4" to 6" from the microphone and maintaining it.

(b) Checking up the correct volume range required.

(c) Speaking slowly and deliberately and preferably with a slight pause between words.

(d) Being particularly careful in the pronunciation of names. Names which can not be readily
understood or which are inherently difficult to pronounce, may be spelt.
(e) Avoiding undue raising of voice. A relatively quiet, natural conversational tone is best.

(f) Modulate the voice according to the meaning - avoid monotones.

(g) Avoiding a sing-song style of delivery (usually characterised by a nasal tone of voice).

(h) Being careful about the use of words containing sibilants, especially if the announcer's
voice is of such a type as to emphasise unduly hissing or lisping tendencies.

(i) Avoid coughing, sneezing or clearing of throat while the sound distribution system is kept
energised.

(j) Avoid the habit of blowing into the microphone.

(k) Avoid chewing of "pan" or tobacco while making announcements.

(l) Lay emphasis on key/important words and operating part of sentences.


20.4.6 ROOM FOR ANNOUNCER

20.4.6.1 Requirements for the announcer's room -

(a) The announcer should be seated in an enclosure having good acoustic characteristics, i.e.
acceptable reverberation time without any specific acoustic defects.

(b) The ambient noise level in the enclosure should not be more than 40 dB referred to
0,0002 dyne per cm2.

(c) Air-conditioning may be extended to this enclosure, if any nearby room is air-
conditioned, otherwise a noiseless exhaust fan shall be provided.

(d) The window panes should preferably be of double glass.

(e) Minimum size of the room shall be 2.5 m X 3.5 m.


(f) As far as possible, the room should be made dustproof, else, the dust should be absorbed
and not sweeped.

(g) The announcer shall be suitably connected by telephone with the section controllers at big
junction stations. Such telephones shall have only visual indicators for calling the announcer's
attention.

(g) Where train describing system exists, it may be extended to the announcer also, if
necessary.






ANNEXURE - A

Para 20.3.7 f(iii)


Absorption co-efficient at 512 Hz


Brick Wall-lime plaster ... 0.03

Brick wall opening ... 0.02

Wood work ... 0.05

Concrete glasses tile ... 0.015

Carpet ... 0.15 to 0.21

Heavy curtain ... 0.35 to 0.5

Cellotex 1" thick ... 0.8

Acoustic plaster ... 0.3

Hair felt ... 0.4

Glazed windows ... 0.027

Gypsum plaster ... 0.028

Plywood chair ... 0.03

























































ANNEXURE - C

Para 20.3.12.2

LOUDSPEAKER CABLE SIZES AND LENGTHS FOR SPECIFIED LINE
LOSSES

(i) Low Impedance Lines = 15% Power loss.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wire Size Maximum length of loudspeaker cables in
Meters for load impedance in ohms
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
mm 2 4 8 16 32
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.06 30 60 120 240 480
1.60 20 40 80 160 320
1.32 12.5 25 50 100 200
1.00 7.5 15 30 60 120
0.80 4.5 9 18 36 72
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


(ii) High Impedance Lines = 5% power loss.
--------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------
Wire Size Maximum length of loudspeaker cables in
Meters for load impedance in ohms
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
mm 100 250 500
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.60 300 750 1500
1.32 200 500 1000
1.00 120 300 600
0.80 75 187.5 375
0.63 50 125 250
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



(iii) Maximum length to transmit upper frequency.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Wire size Max.length of loudspeaker cables
in mtrs for load impedance in ohms.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
mm 300 5000 7000 10000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.65 1150 1150 900 820
2.06 1200 950 750 600
1.60 900 730 600 520
1.32 750 580 460 410
1.00 600 460 380 320
0.80 ... 380 300 260
0.63 ... ... ... 200
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


ANNEXURE - D

(Para 20.3.6 )


IS 1881 Code of practice for indoor installation of PA system.

IS 1882 Code of practice for outdoor installation of PA system.


IS 1302 Methods of measurement on audio amplifier.

IS 7741 Specification for loudspeakers.

IS 9302 Mains operated audio amplifier.

IS 9551 Specification for high fidelity audio equipment and system.

IS 2748 Methods of measurements on microphones.

IS 12420 Circular audio connectors.

IS 5608 LF wires and cables with PVC insulation and PVC sheath.

IS 1596 Polythylene insulated cables for working voltages upto and
including 1100 V

IS 732 Code of practice for electrical wiring and fitting in buildings.



ANNEXURE - E

Para 20.2.4 (v)


TEST PROCEDURE FOR SOUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

TEST-1 FREQUENCY RESPONSE Para 20.2.3 (i)/20.2.4 (i)

1.1 The test set up shall be as per figure-1.

1.2 A tone of 0.5 mV at different frequencies shall be fed from signal generator to the
amplifying equipment.

1.3 For each frequency, input level and corresponding output power at loudspeaker point
shall be noted.

1.4 Repeat 1.2 & 1.3 with tone of 1.5 V.

TEST-II SENSITIVITY TEST (Para 20.2.3 (iv)/20.2.4 (iv)

2.1 The test set up as per Figure - 2.

2.2 Tone of 1 KHz shall be fed from the oscillator at different input voltages starting from 0.5
mV and in steps of 100 mV, 500 mV, 1 V and 1.5 V and record corresponding sound
pressure level. It should be 70 to 80 dB.


TEST-III RELATIVE SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL

3.1 The test set up shall be as per Figure-2.

3.2 A tone of 1 Khz at 0.5 mV shall be fed through power amplifier to the loudspeaker
system.

3.3 The level of received tone shall be measured at different spot with the sound level meter
(measures directly in dB).

TEST-IV SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO (Para 20.2.3 (iii)/20.2.4 (iii)

4.1 The test set up shall be same as Figure-2.

4.2 In the vacant situation of the auditorium, the environmental noise shall be measured by
sound level meter with signal Generator disconnected and power amplifier ON.

4.3 The above measurement should be done at the same spots where relative sound pressure
levels were measured.

4.4 The noise level should be then compared with signal levels recorded in Test-III.


TEST-V REVERBERATION TIME (Para 20.2.3(v)

5.1 The test set up shall be as per Figure-3.

5.2 Amplifier is adjusted to give highest practical sound level.


5.3 Gain of recorder is adjusted to give maximum deflection of the tracer styles.

5.4 Level recorder is started and audio tone to the speaker is then cut off allowing the
recorder to produce continuous record during the whole of the decay period.

5.5 Time taken for the sound level to decay by 60 dB after the source is abruptly switched off
is to be noted from the level recorder. This is reverberation time.

5.6 The above mentioned reverberation time to be found out for different locations.




TABLE OF TEST - I




Sr.No
.
In put Signal
Level
Frequency(H
z)
Output
Voltage
Load
Resistan
ce
Power of
Sound Pressure Level
0.5 mV &
1.5 mV

100 Hz.
500 Hz
1000 Hz
1500 Hz
2000 Hz
3000 Hz
4000 Hz
5000 Hz
6000 Hz
7000 Hz
8000 Hz
9000 Hz
10,000 Hz







TABLE OF TEST -- II

Sr.No
.
Frequency ( Hz ) In put Signal Level Sound Pressure Level in dB.
1 KHz 0.5 mV
100 mV
500 mV
1 V
1.5 V






TABLE OF TEST -- III


SR.N
O.
LOCATION NO. SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL
IN dB.





TABLE OF TEST -- IV


Sr.
No.
LOCATION
No.
( Same As Test
III )
Sound Pressure Level
in dB.
NOISE LEVEL IN
dB
S/ N
RATIO






TABLE OF TEST -- V


Sr.
No.
POSITION OF MEASUREMENT
Sound Pressure
Level With Tone
ON
Time Taken to
decay the level by
60 dB
















LOUD SPEAKER

FIG.1


SIGNAL
GENERATE
R
AMPLIFY
NG
SYSTEM
POWER

METER



O
L.S. MIC.







FIG.2





O
MIC
L.S.
L.S. MIC.





FIG.3


SIGNAL
GENERAT
OR
AMPLIFIN
G
SYSTEM
SOUND

LEVEL

METER
SIGNAL
GENERAT
OR
AMPLIFIN
G
SYSTEM
SOUND

LEVEL

METER
RECORDE
R



CHAPTER - XXI

PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM:

21.1 SECTION A - D E F I N I T I O N S

A method or technological gadget to give information to public about status of Train
running / rescheduling / accident etc. to the passenger in Person or remotely. Status of
Reservation either on Public Telephone lines or on Internet

21.1.1 Interactive Voice Response System (IVRS):

Interactive Voice Response System, the technical system giving the information of
Train Running, Passenger PNR etc. on a PSTN / Mobile Network through a
centralized data base, which is at present maintained at Divisions / HQ./ CRIS or
through NTES servers.

21.1.2 Prerecorded Announcement and Auto Announcement System:
It is an IVRS System, generally provided as stand alone system, to give the
information to public on PSTN Telephone either for Train Running Information or to
work as Announcement System in Platform with suitable interface to PA System.

21.1.3 Train Indicator:

It is a display device which gives the information regarding running of Train Arrival /
Departure timing and Platform No. etc. The system is either operated locally at a
particular station or can be fed from Central location. They are mainly provided at
Platform and Public utility location.

21.1.4. Coach Guidance System:

It is a display device, which indicates the position of each coach from engine with
description of train number and Coach position.

21.1.5. Master Slave Clock:

(a). Master Clock is a Controlling Clock in Railway premises, which drives the other
Slave Clocks in the same or remote premises to keep uniform timing.

(b). Slave Clocks are the clocks in the Railway premises driven by the Master Clock.

(c). Global Positioning System (GPS) can be followed in Railway to have GPS Clock in
control office to work as Master Clock. This can drive all slave clocks either in same
premises or through separate networking to distant location. Slave clocks can also
have independent GPS module, in that case no master clock is required.






21.2 SECTION B - STATUS OF PASSENGER AMENITIES
(TELECOM)

21.2.1. The initial and ultimate requirement of Passenger Amenities System at Stations should
be ascertained in keeping with the guidelines issued by the Commercial Directorate
from time to time. The provision of Passenger Amenities at various categories of
Railway Stations shall be provided in lines with recommendations laid down by
commercial directorate/consultative committee and shall be ascertained accordingly.
As per Railway Boards letter No. 2004/Tele/TCM/2 dt. 21.12.2005 Passenger
Amenities to be provided shall be as given below:

Sr.
No.
Telecom
Items
Station categories on which these Amenities to be provided as
per norms
Minimum
Essential
Recommended Desirable
1. PA System A, B, C
2 IVRS A = 48 lines (Calls 72000)
B = 24 lines (Calls 5000 20000)
Others
A central IVRS with adequate lines
should be provided to cover all
suburban stations Minimum 6
lines of IVRS is other wise justified.

3. Clocks A, B, C, D,
E, F

4. Coach
Guidance
System
At Model
Stations
5. Train Display
Board
At Model
Stations
6. Enquiry &
Computer
Announcement
System
At Model
Stations.

SECTION - C - I V R S


21.3. ON LINE TRAIN RUNNING INFORMATION SYSTEM

21.3.1. I N T R O D U C T I O N:

Passenger / Public can access this system through PSTN network or through Web Site



www.indianrail.gov.in & http://www.trainenquiry.com.

Through PSTN network, Passenger / Public can get On Line Train Running
Information in three languages i.e. Hindi, English & Local Language, through voice
guidance to select languages and train No.

All over Indian Railways the system has been provided through NTES (National Train
Enquiry System) for getting running position of Trains.

On Line Train Information System : The status of the train data, for giving the On
Line Information System can be fed through any of the ways:

i. Manual Input data by taking the position from the Control office and feeding to
NTES terminal.
ii. Manual feeding of the data on the respective location at the Control office where
the input terminals are provided for periodically up dating the Train information
by obtaining the data from the Control office.
iii. By taking the input automatically from the "Control Charting System".

On Line Train Information System can be located at the following locations:

i. On Line Train Information System at Station.
At the individual station, where the system input is fed by the Stationmaster/
Supervisory Staff at stations "as stand alone system. The information is up dated
periodically. When any predefined number is dialed the caller get the information of
the train for fixed duration.

ii. On Line Train information System at the Divisional HQs.:

The On Line Train Information System can be at the Divisional level only where the
data is fed from Control charting server. The data is up dated at predefined interval.


iii. Zonal level On Line Train Information System:

On Line Train Information System can be at the Zonal level, where the data input is
fed from the various control locations periodically after the predefined interval. On
Line Train Information is available either on the web or by dialing predefined number
within the Zonal Railway.

iv. On Line Train Information System and other Information BSNL Circle wise.
For giving the information to the public total integrated system like Call Centre can be
provided. By dialing pre-specified number, the information is available from one
source only for the complete BSNL circle for various queries related to Railways.

v. On Line Train Information System through WEB:

By logging on the Internet on the site http://www.trainenquiry.com, the running of the
status of the Train can be known. In the same link the following additional
information can also be obtained.

a. Train Time Table.
b. PNR Enquiry etc,
From the site http://www.indianrail.gov.in the following information are made
available.
a. PNR Status.



b. Trains between important Stations.
c. Train / Fare accommodation.
d. Train enquiry
e. Other information related to Railway i.e. All India Railway Network Map,
Zonal Railway Map, Booking locations, Layout of the berth, Internet
Reservation etc.

21.3.2. IVRS System Functionality:

The IVRS shall function as under:
a. On dialing IVRS number (which may be of 3 digit or 4 to 7 digits), the System shall
play back a WELCOME Message. The user has to select the language in which he
desires to have information as guided by IVRS. Welcome message shall be in English
only. The welcome message shall be as under:
Namaskar, Welcome to _________ Railways On-line train Running Information
System.

b. IVRS shall then ask the User to enter the Train number by playing the following
Voice Message.:

For information in English dial 1, <similar script in Hindi and local language with
dial 2 and 3>.

c. IVRS shall then ask the User to enter the Train Number by playing the following
Voice Message:

Please dial the Train Number for which you need the information.

d. After the User has dialed the Train No., the IVRS shall respond in prescribed format.
The script shall be in English and the Railways will give scripts in other languages.

21.3.3. Other Requirements:

(i) The IVRS shall respond to an incoming call within one ring. However, this can be
varied by Railways if so required.

(ii) The system should work with all types of Exchanges in use on the PSTN and Railway
Communication Network.
(iii) If after the Welcome Message, the USER does not dial the Train no., the system
should automatically disconnect the call after 10 seconds.

(iv) In case, the user dials the wrong train number, it will repeat the digit and announce
the information for this train is not available on the system, please dial the correct
train number and will give one more chance to enter train number. If still he dials
wrong train number, it will repeat the dialed digits and announce Please find the
correct train number from the time table or dial train enquiry at 131, Thank you for
using the system.

(v) The system should be capable of generating hourly and daily reports for various
individual ports indicating total no. of calls received, calls successful, etc..

(vi) The IVRS system shall be capable of playing back Messages in case of unforeseen
circumstances such as :




1. Train is running indefinitely late.

2. All Train Traffic has been suspended due to flooding of tracks, accident etc.

3. The train has met with an accident. This is a train specific message and played
back only when information of train no. is sought. All such messages shall be pre-
recorded and can be played back by giving appropriate STATUS field. It shall
also be possible to record any message directly onto the IVRS from a Telephone
Line in case of any Emergency. This shall be permitted at supervisor level with
password protection.

(vii) In case of any break down of Communication Channel or break down of data terminal,
the IVRS position shall not get updated. In such cases, it shall be possible to prefix all
messages being played back by IVRS to the public by the following pre-recorded
message:

Due to technical reasons, the Train Running Position could not be updated since
HH.MM. The last status available for the train is as follows.

This shall be followed by the normal message regarding train status
Train No. Train Name e.g. 2904 Golden Temple Express ..

It should be possible to select playing or barring of the above message by the Control
Office operator from a user friendly menu on IVRS system.

(viii) Due to any unforeseen circumstances, trains may be running abnormally late. It is
possible that two trains having same Train no. may be running on a given day. In such
a case, the IVRS shall give information for both the trains as indicated below:

2904 Golden Temple Mail which departed on <date> has passed Virar Station at
HH.MM and is running HH.MM hours late and is expected to arrive at Mumbai
Central at HH.MM. Please note that 2904 Golden Temple Mail which departed on
<date> is running Right time and has passed Kota at HH.MM hours.

For achieving the above, for every Train a unique file shall be required to be
maintained in the IVRS systems.

(ix) On arrival of the Train at its final destination IVRS shall play the arrival status of the
trains up to 2 hours after the actual arrival of the train. Thereafter, it shall provide the
information of the scheduled arrival of the train at the destination as per the time table
until the actual status of next train is obtained from the control offices.

(x) Certain Trains run on specific days of the week only. For such trains, if a User
enquires on IVRS about a train that does not run on that day, IVRS shall provide the
user following voice message :

The train XXXX (name) runs only on (days of the week). After this, it shall provide
running position of train if any. Thanks for making use of this service.

(xi) It should be possible to record by the operator train specific messages for train running
late / diverted / met with accident.


21.3.4. Technical Specifications of IVRS Systems:




1. The system should have TEC approval and should comply with all Generic
Requirements as per TEC Specification No. G.R. No: Q/CTI-01/01 DEC 96 or later
for computer telephonic integration and for IVRS Specn. No: GR No. G/VRS 01/03.

2. The IVRS should make use of proven Hardware preferably from reputed IVRS
Manufacturers. These should be PCI or EISA bus compatible.

3. The system shall allow user interaction in pulse and tone signalling.

a. The IVRS must have a Graphical User Interface for ease of operation such that
graphical icons or modules be placed and interconnected to form the required
application instead of coding or programming of the system. No knowledge of any
Software Languages shall be required for modification in IVRS Application.

b. The IVR System is expected to be placed at various sites and should preferably
execute on Windows or suitable operating system.

c. The system should allow recording/re-recording of voice prompts at site via a
telephone or via a remote site. The voice files should be stored on the hard drive and
should be editable using appropriate software so as to allow mixing with background
music, editing silence patterns etc.

d. The IVRS system should have fax-on-demand and fax transmission facilities.

e. It should be possible to make changes to the IVR system at a remote site. This facility
is to be utilized in upgrading special train information during holidays and in special
circumstances.

f. The IVRS should have a real time `Line Activity report allowing the systems
operator to monitor the `STATE of each telephone line, usage of the system, call
handled, etc and should be equipped with alarm, in the event of failure..

g. The system should be flexible enough to customize the application at site.

h. The system should support multiple languages on the same system. It should be
possible to reconfigure the ports for any language at site so as to allow the user to
allocate the limited telephone line resources for specific languages, functionality
depending on the traffic for that particular language / function.

i. It should be possible to set the number of rings after which the system will answer the
calls.

j. During the period IVRS data is updated by the Control Office Computer, there shall
be no mismatch/clash in the Voice Message played by the IVRS on to the Telephone
lines.

k. Voice shall be recorded in studio environment by a professional. The sample of voice
shall be approved by the Railways before recording is done.

21.3.5. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

(a) Daily maintenance:
1. Checking of activeness of all the ports of IVRS cards.
2. Checking of all the telephone lines.
3. Checking of link between data entry terminals to IVRS console units.
4. Reading of number of calls landed and number of calls replied by each channel.




(b) Monthly maintenance:
Thorough cleaning of all the associated equipments like PC based console unit,
Modem etc.
(c) Requirement of man power.
One TCM Gr. III per location for looking after the IVRS terminals.




21.4. PNR ENQUIRY AND ACCOMODATION AVAILABILITY SYSTEM
(AT INDIVIDUAL STATIONS)

21.4.1. General:
IVRS based PNR enquiry system and accommodation availability enquiry systems are
widely used passenger information system provided through out the Indian Railways.
Passenger/Public can access the system through PSTN network and they can get
current status of reservation as well as availability of accommodation in various
classes of a specific train in three languages i.e. Hindi, English & Local Language.
The system prompts through voice guidance to select languages, train No., PNR No.
and date. The same facility is extended through CRIS Server on Internet site
www.indianrail.gov.in & http://www.trainenquiry.com.

21.4.2. Technical:
The IVRS based PNR enquiry system and train accommodation availability enquiry
system consists of the PC based console unit equipped with dialogic card / one E-1
Interface card and software for IVRS based PNR enquiry system and train
accommodation availability system. This console unit is connected with the one port
of Mux of the nearest PRS centre. The dialogic cards are available in various
configurations like 4 port, 8 port, 16 port or 2 MB interface card. The PSTN lines are
directly terminated on the dialogic card. Depending on the number of calls per day in
peak season, the system should be capable of up gradation just by inserting additional
dialogic cards or 2 MB interface card.

22.4.3. Requirement Of Material For Installation Of IVRS Based PNR
Enquiry System.

The minimum requirements of equipment / modules for installation of IVRS based
PNR enquiry is given below:

(1) Industrial PC Pentium-IV or higher version However Railway can decide
based on availability and latest specifications.
(2) Dialogic card 4 port / 8 port / 16 port or 2 MB interface card (As per requirement
of the calls traffic of a particular location).
(3) Software for the functioning of IVRS based PNR enquiry system and train
accommodation availability system.
(4) One pair of HDSL modem if system is required to be commissioned on 2 MB
stream leased from MTNL / BSNL.



(Now a days MPLS system is available, depending on location, Railway can
provide the same through BSNL/MTNL.)
(5) Rack for installation of entire system.
(6) One port of PRS MUX earmarked for commissioning of IVRS based PNR
enquiry system. This port is required to be activated from main PRS. This
facilitates for retrieving information of PNR enquiry and train accommodation
availability enquiry from the main server of the PRS.

21.4.4. Report Generation:
The software of the system shall be so designed that continuous monitory of the all
channels can be observed on the screen of the console unit. At any time it can be seen
that how many channels are busy, which channel is hanged and how many calls have
been received and answered on a particular channel / time slot. This enable
monitoring of individual channels / time slot. If any abnormality is noticed on any
particular channel, it can be set right by resetting the system. A printed report can also
be obtained indicating the number of calls received and number of calls answered by a
particular channel / time slot in a specific period or within 24 hours.

21.4.5. Maintenance Schedule
(a) Daily maintenance:
i. Checking of activeness of all the ports of IVRS cards.
ii. Checking of all the telephone lines.
iii. Checking of link between PRS MUX to IVRS console units.
iv. Reading of number of calls landed and number of calls replied by each
channel.
(b) Monthly maintenance:
Thorough cleaning of all the associated equipments like PC based console unit,
MUX, Modem etc.





SECTION - D

21.5. Prerecorded Announcement System
In order to give the information to the public for the status of Train running condition
and other information through the public network, this system is provided at major
stations / wayside stations. By providing this system, Public can access through
public telephone network with predefined number. When this number is dialled, the
system will give the running status of the Train based on the information fed to the
system. The system is available in integrated way in which the announcement at the
Platform with the suitable interface with the existing PA System can be made
available which is known as Auto Announcing System. Coach Guidance
Announcement System can also be integrated with this.

21.5.1 Procedure



i. On dialing the assigned number the system will initiate Welcome message, and
system prompts for selecting the language (i.e. 1 for English , 2 for Hindi & 3 for
Local language).
ii. The system then checks that whether the number dialled is valid or not.
iii. If the number is valid the system fetches data from the database available.
iv. Recorded massages are then heard by the Passenger/Public on Telephone.
v. System application supports E1 or required number of Channels. Each channel
can be viewed on the main screen individually. According to the channel number
we can get data like number of calls landed in the system, Language type of that
particular channel, the voice files being used and the status of the calls.

vi. The supervisor / Station Master can record any type of message that can be
played.

vii. Recording can be done by
a. Manual recording: Messages are recorded through particular channel.
b. Scratch Pad: Messages are recorded from the scratch pad.




SECTION - E

21.6 AUTO ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM (PC Based Announcement
System)
1. It is an integrated system to work as Auto Announcement PA System, Display
system & Coach Guidance announcing system. The system shall be capable of
automatic announcement with pre-recorded voice prompt, which shall be stored
in the hard disk of the system.
2. The Data is entered by the data entry operator / Station Master by entering Train
number, arrival / departure time and status of the train in the screen format.
3. The selected massage is scrolled on the monitor so that the operator can know
the announcement / Display being made on platform PA system and display
boards.
4. PA Systems are to be provided at the Stations covering Concourse, Platform area
and different locations. The type of Speakers, Mikes, Acoustical environment,
Type of Loudspeaker, Wiring and Cabling, Earthing and other Safety precaution
should of standard make and be as per RDSO specification.

21.6.1. Features
1. It shall be possible to choose any of the system to keep on or any of the system
remaining idle.
2. Messages announced on the Platform PA system shall synchronize with the
information shown on the display board.
3. It shall be possible to add, modify and delete timings of the trains in the master
database, which is password, protected.
4. Hot key shall be used for transferring data from PC to various systems.

21.6.2 System Configuration



System mainly consists of Standard PC in which the Operational software is loaded to
run the systems i.e. PA System on platforms, Display system, Coach Guidance
Announcing System.



SECTION - F

21.7 TRAIN INDICATION BOARD

21.7.1 General
It is a display device which gives the information regarding running of Train Arrival /
Departure timing and Platform No. etc. The system is either operated locally at a
particular station or can be fed from Central location. They are mainly provided at
Platform and Public utility location.
1.1 Train Indicator system for trains should comprise of
a) Multiple line, Multiple row Single/Double face train indicators at the entrance
of platforms as per the need of the stations and number of platforms at
concourse / lobby.

b) Single line Double face train indicators at platforms at various locations along
with platform length with clear visibility.

1.2 All Display Boards should be given unique identification code/address and their status
is to be reflected and made available on screen of the operating console as a health
monitoring system.

1.3 The software should be suitable for operation of Train indicators and should be
capable to display approximately 200 Trains departing /arriving from the Railway
Station with the capability for further up gradation to 500 Trains.

1.4 The Display Board should be capable to display fixed slogans/ messages at the time of
accidents/derailments in rolling, flashing & steady mode.
1.5 The Indicator system should be designed in such a way that operator has to do
minimum number of operations for initiating and completing the entire process of a
data entry.
1.6 The display boards should contain microprocessor based control unit, peripheral
interface adopter, asynchronous serial communication port, efficient address decoding
and memory mapping technique using resident program for multiplexed display to
driver up to 256 unique addresses.
1.7 Surge and lightening protection arrangement should be provided at 230V AC mains
end and output of power supply, so as to protect the electronic modules from damage.
The arrangement may include GD tubes, MOVs and fuses etc.
1.8 The system should be designed to suit the 25 KV AC traction areas. Proper earthing
arrangement should be provided for grounding the shield of the data cable to prevent



the EMI & RFI interference. However earthing for 230 volt AC power supply should
be made separate.
1.9 Electrical power supply for all advance indicators of one location will be provided
from a centralized place, similarly for all platform indicators electrical power supply
will be provided from a centralized place. Separate wiring of power cable from a
centralized power point to individual display boards should be planned in separate
conduits.
1.10 Ease of maintenance and immunity to failures should be the primary consideration in
the designing of the system.
21.7.2. Configuration Of Indicator System For Trains:
The Train Indicator System comprise of operating console unit (PC Based) along with
Single line single /Double face LED display boards at the platform and multiple line
single or double face indicators on Concourse.
21.7.3. Operating Console (Control Console Unit):
The operating console should be installed in the announcers cabin or at remote
locations at Station. It should have required software and provision of data entry for
train no. time table of Trains, PF. No. & Expected Arrival / Departure time etc. The
software should be menu driven and users friendly.
It should be possible to change the Time Table of Trains and introduce new Trains.
21.7.4. Indicator Boards:
21.7.4.1.Multiple Line Single or Double Face Train Indicator for Trains at the entrance
of the Platforms / lobby etc.
Train indicators should be made up of LED modules having total display area as per
need, capable of displaying Train Number, Train Name, expected Departure / Arrival
time etc.
21.7.4.2 Single Line Double Face Train Indicator Display Board Trains at
Platforms:
The single line Double Face Train Indicator Board at platforms should be made up of
suitable size LED matrix of 5mm LEDs having total display area according to need
capable of displaying Train Number, Train Name, expected Departure / Arrival time
etc. and colour of display as per choice of Railways.
21.7.4.3 Multiple Lines Single or Double Face Train Indicator Display Board
for Trains at Platforms:
Multiple lines Single or Double Face Train Indicator Board on Concourse should be
made up of suitable size LED matrix of 5mm LEDs having total display area
according to need. The display board should be capable of displaying Train Number,
Train Name, expected Departure / Arrival time and Platform No. for five trains in
Hindi & English (One at a time).
Suitable Software for giving scrolling information for Coach Guidance.

21.7.5 Details of different Hardware for Train Indicator System. This shall be as per
RDSO specification of Integrated Passenger Information System.
21.7.6. Software for operation of Train Indicator System:



i. The software should be developed in windows platform and should be menu driven
type. The Front end can be any standard higher-level language like visual basic, C++,
JAVA etc.
ii. The software should support bilingual characters (English & Devnagari) and enable
displaying of information in English & Hindi both and regional language.
iii. The software for operation of train indicator system should be developed for
displaying Train number, Train name, and expected departure/arrival time of Trains,
platform no. etc.. The Software should be upgradable to give Coach Guidance facility.
iv. Provision should be made in software for alteration in Time Table of Train. It should
be possible for Railway to change/ add the details of trains to be displayed by the
system at the time of change of timetable.
v. Licensed copy of software on CD, Norton antivirus of latest version or superior &
software for operation of the train indicator system should be available, minimum of
two sets.
21.7.7 Single Face & Double Face LED Based Train Indication Boards should as per RDSO
specification of Integrated Passenger Information System. Similarly multiple Line
Single or Double Face Train Arrival / Departure Display Boards on Concourse or
lobby or suitable location shall be as per RDSO specification.
21.7.8. Details of Four Pair PVC Insulated Twin Twisted Screened Copper
Cable.
i. The four pair PVC insulated multi-strand-screened data cable should conform the
following specification.
a Core structure : Each core should be made up of seven
strands of tinned copper conductor of 0.2mm
diameter each.
b Nominal thickness of
insulation
: 0.6mm
c Nominal thickness of
sheath
: 0.9mm
d Screening %age : 90% of the inner surface area of the sheath

ii. The 4 pair PVC insulated twin tested screened copper cable to be supplied should be
of reputed make.

21.7.9 Details of three Core PVC insulated flexible Power Cable.
i. The three-core PVC insulated flexible power cable should confirm IS specification
No. IS 694: 1990 (Reaffirmed 1995) or latest and should comply the following
specifications.
a. Nominal cross section area of : 2.5 Sq. mm copper conductor



conductor
b. Nominal thickness of insulation : 0.7mm
c. Nominal thickness of sheet : 1 mm
d. Overall dimensions : 11.0 mm
ii. Power Cable should be of reputed make.
21.7.10. Laying of Data and Power Cable over Steel Bridges / Platform
Roofs:
i. The laying of data and power cable over metallic structure of the roofs of platform and
FOBs should be carried out in separate DWC or PVC pipe suitably fixing the same
along the route.
ii. The data cable should be laid along with the metallic structure of the roof of the
platforms and FOB's. Suitable metallic clamps should be fixed at regular intervals
(not more than 5 mtrs) to hold the cable along with the metallic structures/ girders to
avoid any sagging of the Data & power cable.
21.7.11 The Standard Personal Computer, keyboard, monitor, UPS & other accessories should
be preferably housed in standard 19 cabinet.
21.7.12 General Requirement of Installation / Mounting and Wiring of
the Display Boards:
a The display board should generally be hanged from the metallic structure of the roof
of the platform & FOBs.
b The metallic hanging arrangement should be capable enough to bear the full
mechanical load of the display boards and should be able to prevent any accidental
dislocation of the display board which may be hazardous for the safety of the
passengers and should be designed to prevent swinging of the display boards due to
strong wind or movement of the trains or vibration.
c In general the display boards should be hanged from the platform/FOBs roof by using
G.I. pipes. One end of this G.I. pipe should be fixed with the metallic structure of the
platform by using suitable metallic clamps, other end of the G.I. pipes should be
rigidially fixed with the inner side walls of the display boards. The length of the down
rod (G.I. pipe of 25mm dia) for individual display boards may vary as per site
requirement.
d Wiring of the data cable and power cable should be done through the PVC or DWC
pipe separately. The PVC or DWC pipe should be properly fitted with the wall / roof
/ floor of the platform. Standard fixing material like clamps, elbows, T. joints,
Straight joints, four way & three way junction boxes.
e Termination of the data cable should be done by using proper terminal strips or by
using proper connector of standard size of branded/reputed make.
f The data cable & power cable from roof to the display unit should be taken inside the
hanging GI pipe to improve the aesthetics. No loose wire/exposed terminations, wires
etc. should be visible outside of the display board.




SECTION - G
21.8. COACH GUIDANCE SYSTEM
21.8.1 General

The Coach Guidance System enables the passengers to locate their coach for the Train
on which they wish to travel.
It is essential that at entry or at lobby a display board is provided to guide the passenger
the Train No., Platform No., to which Train is arriving / standing, the position of coach
with respect to engine. On the platform at various locations suitable indicator with
respective coach location board may be provided giving the details of Trains No. and
Coach No.

a. The system consists of coach guidance boards at Station and platform operated
through PC workstation at remote location / control offices or at Stations.
b. The workstation and associated equipment should be installed in a secure manner so
that only required equipments are accessible to the operator.
c. Adequate arrangement for housing the wires e.g. cable duct etc. should be made in
the 19 housing cabinet. (All the wires, termination arrangement etc. required for
interfacing should be provided. Any casing, capping, conduit, guide ladder etc. if
required should be provided as per site requirement).
d. The display system shall comprise coach guidance display board at lobby or entry
and at platform.
e. All the display boards should be given unique identification code/address & their
status is to be reflected and made available on screen of the operating console as a
health monitoring indication.
f. Surge and lightening protection arrangement should be provided at 230V AC mains
end and output of power supply, so as to protect the electronic modules from
damage. The arrangement may include GD tubes, MOVs and fuses etc.
g. The system should be designed to suit the 25 KV AC traction areas. Proper earthing
arrangement should be provided for grounding the shield of the data cable to prevent
the EMI & RFI interference.
h. Ease of maintenance and immunity to failures should be the primary consideration in
the design of the system. The system should employ tin-electroplated glass epoxy
printed circuit boards and the PCBs should be secured firmly to ensure that the no
loose connection results from vibration. As this display should work round the clock,
it is desirable that component used should be of industrial grade & standard.
i. All the ICs should be fitted preferably on proper base so that replacement of faulty
ICs can be done at site immediately without using soldering iron.
j. Protection Arrangement: The equipment should be mounted in metallic housing of
industrial grade to avoid entry of dust and rise of temperature with necessary
earthing etc. to provide complete EMI & RFI protection.

21.8.2 Configuration of Coach Guidance System.



Coach guidance display boards for individual coaches should be hanged from the
metallic structure of the platform roof or by suitable arrangement. The display board
should be double face & shall be as per RDSO specification.
21.8.3. Operating Console shall be as per RDSO specification of Integrated Passenger
Information System.

21.8.4. Specification of Coach Guidance Display Board.
(a). At a Glance Coach Guidance Display Board at Entry to station lobby.

1. A suitable Display board indicating the Train No. Platform No. arrival / departure time
along with position of the coach with respect to engine should be provided as per
RDSO specification.

2. Coach Guidance Display Board should conform to the typical layout and should be
approved by Railways depending on location and need.

3. The double face coach guidance display board should be provided on platforms and
shall be as per RDSO specification.

4. The power supply should have short circuit, overload, over & under voltage protection
also with out put and input power indication (LED).
5. The CPU should have data available indication and power ON indication.
6. There should be provision for blanking the complete display board to ensure that no
stray dots lights up and should offer total contrast when there is no data signal
from the operating console.

7. The informations displayed on the display boards should be clearly visible from 70 to
75 mtrs. under normal ambient conditions. Proper weather protection and glare
protection (hood) as per site requirement should be provided to achieve the optimum
visibility of the display boards.
8. Three/Four electrical power points (230volts/15Amp.) for energisation of coach
guidance display board should be provided along the length of each platform.
Distribution of power and wiring of power cable from nearest power point to display
boards should be properly protected.

9. All boards should have input power ON indication outside the board.

21.8.5. Four Pair PVC Insulated Twin Twisted Screened Copper Cable, three Core PVC
Insulated Flexible Power Cable for wiring shall be as per specification mentioned in
clauses 21.7.8 & 21.7.9 of Section -G.

21.8.6. Laying of Data and Power Cable Over Steel Bridges / Platform
Roofs:
1 The laying of data cable with metallic structure of the roofs of platform and FOBs
should be carried out with proper Protection either in PVC pipes separately or any
any other suitable means.



2 Separate DWC / PVC conduit pipe shall be used for laying of data cable and power
cable.
3 The data cable should be laid along with the metallic structure of the roof of the
platforms and FOB's with suitable metallic clamps shall be fixed at regular
intervals (not more than 5 mtrs) to hold the cable along with the metallic structures/
girders to avoid any sagging of the Data & power cable.
4 The metallic clamp shall be made up of MS flat of preferably of size 48mm x 6mm
or as per need.

21.8.7. Installation Arrangements of Coach Guidance System:

1. The coach guidance LED display boards for individual coaches should be hanged
from the metallic structure of the platform roof or by suitable fixing arrangement.
The Display Board should be hanged through metallic G.I. pipe of minimum
25mm dia, One end of this GI pipe should be fixed with the metallic structure of
the platform by using suitable metallic clamps, other end of the GI pipe should be
fitted with the coach guidance display board. Length of the down rod (GI pipe of
25mm dia) for individual display units should vary as per site requirements.
2. Mechanical fixing arrangement for installation of double face LED display board
should be either designed to prevent swinging of LED display boards due to strong
wind / vibration due to movement of the trains or on separate pole with protection
against rain.
2 Wherever platform rooftop is not available the coach guidance display board
should be fitted in staggering form at end of the platform shade to the extent
possible to display coach position of such coaches.
3 The Console (PC based) should be installed at the control tower / station master
room or Enquiry Room. It should have required software and provision of data
entry for coach positions of trains from remote site also like control office, RRI
etc.


SECTION - H

21.9 MASTER SLAVE CLOCKS

21.9.1 G E N E R A L

Master Slave Clocks are utilized in Control Office / Stations to maintain uniform
timing for Train operation. The present system is of either mechanical clock or Quartz
Clock. Digital Clocks are used in lieu of old Clocks.
21.9.2. Requirements of Master Clock:

i. The Master Clock shall be capable to drive number of Slave Clocks as per
requirement either in one location or distributed in various other locations.




ii. The Master Clock shall be based on microprocessor based technology and the
clock shall have modular design concept.

iii. It should be controlled either by crystal oscillator or digital circuits or GPS base as
per present technology as time base. The accuracy of the Clock should be better
than + 5 Sec. per week over the expected temperature range, which can generally
be achieved only through a GPS based system.

iv. The design construction and reliability of equipment should be based on modern
technology and standards using commercially available solid-state components.
The modules and components should be plug in type.

v. The Master Clock should work on main power supply of 230 V AC 20% single
phase 50 Hz., with D. C. standby in build supply per Master as well as Slave.

vi. The Master Clock shall have a battery back-up arrangement with in built
chargeable Ni-Cd battery along with battery charger to ensure that the Master
Clock always reflects the real time.

vii. The Master Clock should be equipped with LED based or 7 segment numeric
display in 12 Hrs. mode to show the real time of the Master Clock even in case of
mains power supply failure in Hours, Minutes & Seconds.

viii. Adjustment switches shall be provided on the Master Clock to set the time. These
switches should be located at the rear of the unit so that any accidental operation of
the switches does not change the Master Clock time.

ix. The Master Clock should be immune to EMI noise / Power transients, spikes etc.
It should display time in both sides.

x. The Master Clock should transmit data through a pair of conductor to the Slave
Clocks.

xi. Railways can have GPS Clock in control office to work as Master Clock. This can
drive all slave clocks either in same premises or through separate networking to
distant location. To avoid wiring, each slave clock can also have independent GPS
module.

xii. The Master Clock shall meet the Technical Specification RDSO.

21.9.3. Requirement of Digital Slave Clock:

i. Digital Slave Clock operated by Master Clock should be capable to receive continuous
serial data through a pair of conductors.

ii. Digital slave clock can have its independent GPS module. In such cases, there is no
need of master clock.



iii. In case of AC main power supply failure the display of Slave Clock shall be
automatically synchronized with the Master Clock whenever main power supply
restores.

iv. The Slave Clock shall be capable to work on 230 V AC 20% 50 Hz.

v. Suitable mechanical fixing arrangement as per site requirement shall be provided for
hanging at adequate level for better visibility on both the sides.

vi. Technical requirement of Digital Slave clock should be as per RDSO specification.
Chapter-XXII
Satellite Communication System


22.1 Very Small Aperture Terminal (VSAT) Network

22.1.1 Introduction

VSAT provides Point to Point or Point to Multi Point data connectivity using
Geostationary Satellite as repeater location. As satellite is being used as repeating
stations, the data originating and terminating point can be any where on the earth.
VSAT networks are typically used for Video Surveillance, Video Conferencing,
Consumer Internet, Point of Sale, Distance Education, Industrial ERP, Internet Kiosk
etc. Railway is using them to provide data connectivity between various goods
terminals and CRIS as well as for video conferencing applications. It shall also be
used for Accident Site Communication for voice, data and video transmission.

22.1.2 VSAT Network Components

a) The network works in Star as well as Mesh architecture and consists of

i) Hub Earth Station
ii) Remote Earth Station
iii) Satellite Transponder & Space Link
iv) Network Control Centre
v) Interface Equipment

Each of above equipments has been described in detail later.

b) At Data level, the Network uses TCP/IP for Data transmission. The
Architecture of VSAT Network under development for Railways is given in
Annexure-1. As can be seen all external Data Devices interact with interface
units only both at Remote as well as Hub End thus making the VSAT Network
system transparent to external systems. i.e. PC, Telephone through IP interface
interacts with the interface unit i.e. DW 7700 at remote end. Similarly on Hub
end, all external data devices interacts with Enterprise LAN level only thus
making the VSAT Network transparent to external systems.

c) At RF level, the Networks operate in 3 bands i.e. C Band, XC Band and
Ku Band. Railway is using Ku band System. Ku Band system operates on up
link frequency of 14.25 to 14.5 GHz and Down Link Frequency of 11.45 to
12.75 GHz. Up link frequency is the carrier frequency on which Hub or
remote earth station transmits the Signal to Satellite. Down Link Frequency is
the Carrier frequency on which Satellite transmits the Signal to Hub or remote
earth station.

22.2 Hub Earth Station

22.2.1 This station is Heart of the entire Network. The communication between
remotes or remote to external networks is established through Hub Earth Station
only. It is responsible for collecting the data from enterprise LANs, Address
Translation, converting data into IF and RF Signals and transmitting them to Satellite
and further to remote earth stations, maintaining the integrity checks for all remote
earth stations, time synchronization for all remote earth stations, tracking of Satellite,
converting the RF received from Remote to Data Signals in appropriate format to be
delivered at Enterprise level etc.

22.2.2 The Hub Earth Station consists of following

22.2.3 Antenna Sub Systems: It consists of 9 meter (or above) Cassegrain feed,
parabolic reflector, Sub Reflector, Low Noise Amplifiers and its integration modules
like Cables, Wave Guides, Connectors, Dehydrators, Tracking Mechanisms etc. This
system should have clear line of sight availability towards the satellite. The Antenna
Control system can position the Antenna any where in vertical and horizontal plane
thus taking care of Satellite drifts as well as change of Satellite.

22.2.4 RF Sub System: It converts the IF Signals of 70 MHz typically to RF frequency
signals suitable for Satellite transmission. It also amplifies the Signal for transmission
to Satellite.

22.2.5 IF Sub System: The Modulated base band signals are first converted to IF
Signals and also amplified here before they are fed to RF Sub Systems.

22.2.6 Base band Equipment: This sub system consists of elements for interacting
with interface devices, time synchronization, modulating the data signals for
transmission, demodulating the signals received, address translation, interacting
with Network Monitoring Systems. All sub systems here work on proprietary
software. Few Sub systems work on proprietary hardware also. Therefore, these
equipments are highly Vendor specific.

22.2.7 Network Monitoring Systems: It is a high end Server. This equipment also
works on proprietary software. The network is managed as well as configured using
this system only. All history and configuration data is kept in Open End RDBMS. In
Railway Network, they are kept in Oracle Enterprise. The system also provides
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocols) traps for all the devices working on
IP. These traps can be used by Open End Software like HPOV etc which can generate
many configurable reports for management purposes.

22.2.8 A typical Network Components for the Railway Hub under Construction is
given in Annexure-2.

22.3 Space Link i.e. Satellite

22.3.1 The VSAT communication depends entirely on Satellite. A satellite is a
nothing but a microwave repeater in Geo synchronous orbit above the earth. All Hub
and Remote Earth Equipment communicates via Satellite.

22.3.2 A typical Block Diagram of Satellite is shown in Annexure-3.

22.3.3 Satellites are of different types namely

i) Communications Satellites (Used for VSAT Network)
ii) Weather Satellites
iii) Remote Sensing Satellites
iv) Science Research Satellites
v) GPS Satellites

22.3.4 Two elements which are common to all the four types of satellites are

PAYLOAD - Equipment a satellite needs to do its job. Include antennas,
cameras, radar and electronics. Payload is different for every satellite. For
Example, payload for a weather satellite includes cameras, while payload for a
communication satellite includes antennas.

BUS - Part of the satellite that carries the payload and its equipment into
space. It holds all the satellite parts together and provides electrical power,
computers, and propulsion to the spacecraft.
It also contains equipment that allows the satellite to communicate with earth.

22.3.5 Satellites rotate around earth in orbits. The different types of orbits are
Equatorial Orbit, Polar Orbit, Inclined Orbit and Elliptical Orbit. The time of travel
around earth is dependent on the distance of Satellite from earth. At altitude of 22300
miles, the Satellite takes exactly 24 hours to circle around earth. All orbits at this
altitude are called Geosynchronous Orbits. If the Satellite is in Equatorial Orbit at the
altitude of 22300 miles and is rotating in the same direction as of earth, it will be
stationary with respect to earth. All communication Satellite use geosynchronous
orbits only to avoid the need for realigning the Antenna.

22.3.6 Three geo synchronous satellites can be used for full earth coverage. The
transmission of a signal up to the satellite and back down is called a hop.
Transmission delay for one hop is between 240msec. and 270msec.

22.3.7 One geo synchronous satellite can transmit to approximately 42% of the
earths surface. North and South poles cannot receive signals from a geo
synchronous satellite. The area covered by a single satellite antenna is called a
footprint. Annexure-4 indicates the footprint of one of the Satellites.

22.3.8 The Satellite position changes due to solar and lunar gravitational pull. The
Satellite owner needs to monitor the position of satellite at all times and correct for
satellite drift. The tracking mechanisms are therefore provided in the Hub equipment
Antenna Sub Systems to take care of this drift.

22.3.9 The Satellite uses different types of beams for communicating with Earth
Stations. The beams used are - GLOBAL BEAM: covering 42% of earth surface. Beam
width 18degree, DUAL SPOT BEAMS,- MULTIPLE SPOT BEAMS,- DUAL
POLARIZED SPOT BEAMS

22.3.10 Polarization of Electro Magnetic waves is used by Satellites to increase the
channel capacity as multiple signals can be transmitted at same frequency. The
Polarization used by Satellites is linear or Circular. Every Earth Station has to be
configured to work on the Polarization being used by Satellites.

22.3.11 The Up link and Dn Link Frequencies which are in use in different bands are
as under



22.3.12 Railways is using Ku Band for their VSAT Network which will work on
INSAT 4C-R

22.3.13 The transponders provide the frequency space on Satellite. Each transponder
is of 36 MHz. Different Satellites carry different number of transponders. A fraction
of transponder can be used. Railway is hiring 9 Mhz frequency space on INSAT 4C-R
for their VSAT Network.

22.3.14 VSAT Network operator has to divide the hired transponder space into
Transmit and Receive Segment. As the transmission power of remote earth station is
limited, their requirement of frequency spectrum is limited but higher number of
smaller bands are required to cater for large number of remote stations. While one
bigger band is required at transponder for signal transmitted from Hub as it is high
power signal and contains data for all remotes.

22.3.15 To adjudge the availability of Satellite communication, a link budget
calculation is done taking the least available Satellite Power, Antenna Size,
transponder sizing for receive and transmit segments etc.

22.3.16 All transponder space is allocated by Department of Space.

UPLINK
FREQUENCIES
DOWNLINK
FREQUENCIES
BAND
5.925-6.425 GHz
6.725-7.025 GHz
14.25-14.50 GHz
3.700-4.200 GHz
4.5-4.8 Ghz
11.45-11.7GHz
C
Ext. C
Ku (IN INSAT-3B)
22.4 Remote Earth Station

22.4.1 Remote Earth Station consists of

i) A Parabolic Antenna 1.2 or 1.8 Meters of Size for Ku band system and 3.2
to 3.8 meter size for C and XC band system with Feed for transmit Signals.
ii) An outdoor unit called ODU and Low Noise Amplifier for received signal.
iii) Indoor Unit
iv) Power Supply Arrangements
v) Protection and Earthing Arrangements

22.4.2 Indoor Unit interact with the Antenna System as well as external data devices
through Ethernet LAN ports. A typical remote earth installation over Railway has
been shown in Annexure-5.

22.4.3 All remote installations require feeding of latitude and longitude information
which determines its location with respect to Satellite as well as Hub Earth Station.

22.4.4 The supported rates for data transmission in up-to 1 MBPS as per the
guidelines of DOT.

22.4.5 The protocol and encryption used for transmission of Data between Hub and
Remote station is usually proprietary items and therefore, the Hub and Remote
devices have to be of same Vendor. As these are proprietary devices, the features
supported by them differ from make to make. The features supported by the remote
installed on Railway System are given in Annexure-6.

22.4.6 As these devices use proprietary protocol as well as encryption, the
communication is highly secure.

22.5 Interface Equipment

22.5.1 The VSAT Network is interfaced with the external data devices by using
Router or Router Switch combinations at Hub Earth Stations. At Remote Station,
Ethernet LAN output is provided as standard interface. This can directly be
connected to any device having Ethernet interface.

22.5.2 The applications Servers like FOIS Server of Railway, IP Exchange for Voice
Networks and MPEG Server for Video Streaming applications and Web Servers for
providing Internet application have to be interfaced with VSAT network through a
router switch combination only.


22.6 Network Control Center

22.6.1 Network Control Center is responsible for administering and managing the
whole of the VSAT Network as well as each of the application working on the
Network. This is carried out through Network Management System specific to
Network as well as using other tools mostly SNMP based.

22.6.2 This Center also generates various analysis reports not only for Network part
but for day to day operation of each of application running on the Network.

22.6.3 One of the most important parameters is analyzing the traffic flow and taking
corrective actions for optimum working of all applications. This has been described
in detail in Bandwidth Management para.

22.6.4 This Center also tracks the performance of all the remote sites connected and
get them attended in case of any fault.

22.7 Bandwidth Management

22.7.1 Management of Bandwidth is a very important parameter on VSAT networks
as the cost of Bandwidth on Satellite is very high.

22.7.2 C and XC Band VSAT Networks worked on principles of dedicated bandwidth
allotment for each application. The utilization of bandwidth in such systems was
poor as most of the data devices remain dormant for considerable period.

22.7 .3 Ku Band VSAT Networks work on Shared bandwidth principles. Here
only priorities and grouping of traffic can be defined. Priorities can be defined for a
group consisting of Data Transmitting device, Data Receiving Device etc. With in the
group each member will have an equal right for the bandwidth. Therefore as more
and more member of the group become active, each one will get lesser bandwidth.
As more and more member become dormant, the available bandwidth for the
remaining members will be higher. Priorities can be set for different groups based on
sensitivity of applications. Therefore a high priority group will get precedence for
bandwidth allocation than a lower priority group. This results in a very effective
utilization of Bandwidth.

22.7.4 Packet Shaper Software is used for management of bandwidth in transmit
path. While it can be managed using Network Management System tool in receive
path.

22.8 Miscellaneous

22.8.1 The performance of VSAT equipment both at Hub Earth Station and Remote
Earth Station is affected by ambient conditions.

22.8.2 Hub Equipment generates a very high amount of heat. Continuous heat
dissipation and marinating Normal temperature is an extremely important
consideration for proper functioning of VSAT Hub Equipment.

22.8.3 Some of the important items which are considered necessary for proper
functioning of Remote Earth Station are as given below

i) Maintain the Room Temperature.
ii) Use On line UPS.
iii) Good Quality Earthing to be maintained.
iv) Dust free environment to be maintained
v) Sufficient air circulation & access to Indoor Unit be there
vi) Switch on the VSAT first and then switch on other accessories
vii) Follow the Switch on Sequence strictly
viii) Report any Problem related to any equipments to Hub
ix) While doing so report full Problems and complete observations to Hub
x) Use the Computer only for Intended applications
xi) Make Sure your Computers are Virus FREE
xii) Log all activities related to equipment failures & Engineer visits in a Log
Book
xiii) Allow authorized and Trained People only to operate the system.
xiv) Do not switch on the VSAT immediately after switch off.
xv) Do not Move the Indoor Unit after installation.
xvi) Do not keep any article on Indoor Unit.
xvii) Do not obstruct the air vents in front of the Indoor Unit.
xviii) Do not Use air cooler (water) for cooling.
xix) Do not Bend IFL cable
xx) Do not use the PC for any other application
xxi) Do not do any local servicing of the equipments
xxii) Do not shift the equipments from one place to another in absence of
trained persons
xxiii) Do not load any software programs on the PC except the application














Annexure 1



Annexure 2



Network Component Details
HUB Configurations of Railway
HUB LAN would consists of Following
1.DNCC : BA Allocation
2.IPGW : Packet Switching
3.Packet shaper : Monitor and Control
4.Gatekeeper : Call Setup
5.Audio Codec With phone : Test Call
6.Cisco L3 : Route Traffic towards Central Site

Annexure 3
























Satellite Block Diagram
ANTENNA
SUBSYSTEM
TRANSPONDERS
POWER
CONDITIONER
STORAGE
BATTERIES
COMMAND AND
TELEMETRY
SUBSYSTEM
POSITION
CONTROL
SUBSYSTEM
SOLAR PANELS
-

SOLAR PANELS
Thrusters
ANTENNA
Annexure 4

















Satellite Footprint
Annexure 5








Network Component Details
Remote Configuration
IRCOT Remote LAN consists of following:

1. Remote 1.2M Antenna
2. DW7700 IDU Unit
3. Remote Computers running Applications
4. Audio Codec Box
5. Telephone for Voice Connectivity



Annexure 6





Remote Indoor Unit HN7700 Platform
Inbound HIS 512Kbps /
1Mbps
MPLS QoS
DHCP server and relay
support
IGMPv2 for multicast to
LAN
VLAN Tagging
ICMP support (pings, etc.)
Embedded web server for
remote status query and
configuration
NAT/PAT
RIP V2
DNS caching and preload
Inroute IP header
compression
RTP header compression
PEP and inroute
prioritization
PEP and TCP payload
compression
Secondary satellite
frequency support
CBR support for real-time
applications
VADB


CHAPTER XXIII


PROTECTION OF TELECOM EQUIPMENTS
AGAINST LIGHTNING


SECTION A

INTRODUCTION

23.1 GENERAL

Suitable protection arrangements shall be provided in telecom installations to
protect the equipments from lightning and ensure safety of operational &
maintenance staff.

23.2 PRINCIPLES OF PROTECTION :

The protection system shall provide a very low impedance parallel path to the
ground in such a manner that discharge current due to lightning is transmitted
to the earth through this path, instead of passing through the equipment.



SECTION B

COMPONENTS OF PROTECTION SYSTEM & INSTALLATION

23.3

23.3.1
LIGHTNING ARRESTER :

The lightning arrester shall consist of lightning spike to the earth electrode.
The material and the size of the conductor shall be as given below:

MATERIAL SIZE
G.I. WIRE 8mm dia
G.I. STRIP 20mm x 3mm

23.3.2 The lightning conductors shall be drawn in most direct possible path avoiding
bends, upturn or kinks.

23.4 EARTH TERMINATION:

These are parts of the lightning protection system intended to distribute the
discharge current into the general mass of the earth. The earth termination
shall consists of suitable earth electrodes and underground conductors.

23.5 EARTH ELECTRODE :

23.5.1 Electrode Material & Size : Galvanised iron pipes or angles shall be used. In
protected installations solid copper rod may also be used.


23.5.2 The size of the different types of electrodes shall be as under;

TYPE SIZE
G.I.Pipe Length >=2.5M
Internal
Diameter >= 38mm

G.I.ANGLE Length > = 2.5M
Cross section: :
50 mm x 50mmx5mm

Copper Rod Length >= 2.5 M
Diameter= 16mm

23.6 INSTALLATION OF THE ELECTRODE:

The electrodes shall have a spike at one end and a clamp at the other end for
connecting earth lead. The electrodes shall be directly driven in the earth up
to a depth of atleast 2.5 M. Where rock is encountered at a depth less than
2.5M, the electrode shall be driven inclined by about 30 degrees to the
vertical. In hard soil, hole for the electrode may be drilled by earth auger or
by manual trenching . The top of the electrode shall be about 30 cm above
the ground . After inserting the electrodes, the hole shall be filled with earth
properly and water should be spread to ensure good contact between electrode
and filling.

23.7 USE OF MULTIPLE ELECTRODES:

In cases where a single electrode is not sufficient to provide the desired earth
resistance, more than one electrode shall be used. The separation of the
electrodes shall be about 4 M.

23.8 CALCULATION OF THE NUMBER OF ELECTRODES:

Approximate calculation of the number of electrodes required to get desired
value of earth resistance, can be made using the guidelines given in
Annexure-A

23.9 ARTIFICIAL TREATMENT OF SOIL:

In soils of high resistivity, even multiple earth electrode may not provide
desired earth resistance. In such cases the soil should be artificially treated
with salt and charcoal in appropriate proportion. Earth pits of 600 mm dia
and 2.5 M depth shall be formed by excavation and the electrode shall be
placed at the centre of the pit. The pit shall be filled alternatively with layers
of common salt & charcoal, each layer of about 2.5cm thick, up to a depth of
about 20 cm from the ground level. The pit shall be filled several times with
water, which shall be allowed to be soaked in the ground. After this
treatment, the pit shall be covered with excavated earth and water shall be

sprayed to ensure good electrical contact. This earth electrode should be
cleaned at least once in two years or whenever it is found that the resistance is
above required value by excavating the earth and the process of filling with
layers of salt and charcoal to keep the earth resistance to the required level.

23.10 BONDS:

Bonds made of mild steel clamps with galvanised nuts & bolts shall be used
to connect the lightning protection system with other metallic structures like
metallic poles, water pipes etc. The bonds shall have more cross sectional area
than the main lightning conductor and it shall be protected against corrosion.

23.11 JOINTS:

23.11.1 As far as possible joints shall be avoided in lightning conductors and
underground earth conductors.

23.11.2 The joints shall be crimped, riveted, welded or soldered so as to ensure
minimum electrical impedance for the surge current.

23.11.3 All joints of bimetallic elements shall be protected from corrosion by
covering the joint with loaded grease or M-seal compounds.

23.12 TESTING POINT :

A clamp between earth termination at the electrodes and the down conductors
shall be provided to facilitate isolation of the two sections & measurement of
earth resistance. This joint, known as testing point, shall be made of mild
steel with galvanised nuts & bolts.

23.13 TOWER GROUND RING:

This is the earthing system to be provided at the foot of towers used for
telecom applications.
This shall consist of earth electrodes and under ground tinned bare copper
conductor forming the ground ring as shown in FIG-1 & 2.

Earth electrodes shall be installed at an interval of about 4 Meter surrounding
the tower foundation. Bare tinned copper conductor of 38 sq. mm shall be
burried at least 2.5M below the ground level and at a distance of 0.5M from
the tower foundation. The conductor shall be soldered /clamped /welded to
the electrodes to provide good electrical connection. Each leg or two
diagonal legs of the tower shall be connected to the tower ground ring with 2
nos. of 6mm dia copper wire.

23.14 EXTERNAL GROUND RING :

The external ground ring is the earthing system surrounding the plinth of the
building, housing telecom equipment. This shall be constructed in the same
manner as tower ground ring . The layout is shown in Fig 1.


23.15 INTERNAL GROUND RING

This is the earthing arrangement to be provided inside the equipment room.
This shall consist of earth bus bar(25 mm x 5mm copper flat or 38mm sq.
bare tinned copper conductor) installed surrounding the equipment room 0.5m
below the ceiling or 0.5 M above the floor level. The layout is shown in Fig.
2.


23.16 SINGLE EARTH SYSTEM:

The telecom installations shall use single earth system in which the different
earth connections from equipments, towers, DC power supply, metallic
structures etc. shall be interconnected to each other through low resistance
earthing conductors. This method is recommended to keep all the points to be
earthed at approximately same potential level in order to reduce the
possibility of side flash & subsequent damages.



SECTION C

PROTECTION ARRANGEMENT AT AC MAINS SUPPLY


23.17 AC MAINS EARTHING SYSTEM :
The A.C. mains earthing system shall be as per the rules and regulation
issued by local power supply agency.


23.18 TERMINATION OF OVERHEAD POWER LINES:

If mains supply is provided through overhead lines, the over head lines shall
be terminated about 100M away from the building of sensitive telecom
installation such as telephone exchange, radio relay or optical fibre
installations.

23.19 CONNECTION FROM LOW VOLTAGE MAINS :

Connection for low voltage mains shall be drawn through underground
cable. The power cable sheath must be fully insulated from the earthing
network of the telecom equipments.

23.20 SEPARATION BETWEEN MAINS EARTH & TELECOM EARTH

The protective earth of telecom system shall not be connected to the earth of
mains power supply system. A minimum distance of 10 M is desirable.

23.21 PROTECTION ARRANGEMENT ACROSS AC MAINS SUPPLY TO
TELECOM INSTALLATIONS:


Low voltage lightning discharger of nominal rating of 650V shall be
provided across the 230 V mains power supply as shown in Fig 1 & 2. In
case of high tension supply ( 11KV or above) are terminated near the telecom
installation, suitable pole mounted high voltage arrester shall be provided.




SECTION D

PROTECTION ARRANGEMENT ACROSS DC POWER SUPPLY

23.22 PROTECTION AT DC POWER SUPPLY :

Suitable protection arrangement consisting of avalanche diode and L-C
network shall be provided at the DC power supply point at the power
distribution board and in heavy lightning prone areas, at the input terminals of
the equipment. The rating of the diode shall be at least 20% above the
nominal supply voltage.




SECTION E

PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND CABLE

23.23 PROTECTION AT SUBSCRIBER PREMISES:

In heavy lightning prone areas, the under ground cable shall be terminated
with line protector arrangement consisting of gas discharge (GD) tubes &
MOVR. The specification of the protection arrangement is given in
Annexure-B.

23.24 PROTECTION AT CABLE JUNCTION /TERMINATION BOXES:

The metallic sheath or armour of the cable shall be earthed. In the cable
termination/junction box, the sheath should be connected to the metallic body
of the box which shall be earthed. In non metallic boxes a separate provision
shall be made to earth the cable sheath.

23.25 PROTECTION AT TRANSMISSION/SWITCHING END:

The metallic sheath shall be earthed and protective device as mentioned in
Para 23.23 above shall be provided for each pair including unused pairs.

23.26 PROTECTION AT TRANSITION POINT BETWEEN OVERHEAD
LINES & UNDERGROUND CABLE

If the distance of the overhead lines drawn from the cable termination box

exceeds 500 meters, protection arrangement consisting of GD tube &
MOVR shall be provided for each pair of the conductor including unused
pairs & the common earth point shall be connected to earth electrodes.




SECTION F

PROTECTION FOR CIRCUITS ON OVERHEAD WIRES

23.27 The protection arrangements similar to those of underground cable shall be
provided. Every tenth pole of the overhead alignment shall be provided
with earthed lightning arrestor to reduce the intensity of discharge current
along the overhead line.




SECTION G

PROTECTION ARRANGEMENTS IN MICROWAVE, UHF &
TRAIN RADIO STATIONS

23.28 PROTECTION ARRANGEMENTS FOR RADIO STATIONS
The lightning surges in microwave, UHF & train radio stations may get
entry into the equipment through any of the following paths-
- Tower, waveguide or radio frequency coaxial cable
- AC mains power supply
-Over head telephones wires or underground telecommunications cables.

Adequate protection arrangement shall be provided in each case to protect
the equipment from damages.

23.29 RISK INDEX :

The degree of protection required and the protection devices necessary to
be installed shall be based on the RISK INDEX of the particular location. A
method for calculation of the risk index is given in Annexure-C.

23.30 PROTECTION ARRANGEMENT OF RADIO TOWERS:

23.30.1 PROVISION OF TOWER GROUND RING:
Tower ground ring as mentioned in para 23.13 shall be provided for all
towers.

23.30.2 PROVISION OF LIGHTNING SPIKE :
Lightning spike as mentioned in para 23.3 shall be provided for all towers,
on the top of the tower.

23.30.3 PROTECTION FOR TOWERS SITUATED ON GROUND :


In case of towers erected directly on ground the lower legs act as down
conductors & no separate lightning conductor from lightning spike to earth
is necessary. Each tower leg shall be connected to the tower ground ring by
2 no. of 14mm dia copper wire.

23.30.4 PROTECTION FOR TOWERS ON THE TOP OF BUILDING:

The tower legs shall be connected to lightning conductors which shall be
drawn along the building wall and connected to the earth termination at
ground. At least two number of such conductors shall be drawn. The earth
termination shall be constructed in the same manner as the tower ground
ring.

23.31 PROTECTION ARRANGEMENTS OF RADIO RELAY STATIONS
WITH HIGH RISK INDEX ;

The protection arrangement as given in Fig-1 shall be taken for stations with
risk index 80 or more. The arrangement shall consist of the following:

(a) TOWER GROUND RING;
(b) EXTERNAL GROUND RING;
(c) INTERNAL GROUND RING;


23.31.
1
The tower ground ring shall be connected at two places to the external
ground ring with 6mm dia bare tinned copper conductor laid in underground
trenches.

23.31.
2
The waveguide run shall be connected to the tower metal structure at the top
and the bottom. The waveguide portion inside the building shall be connected
to the tower ground by 6mm dia copper wire.

23.31.3 The external metallic sheath of RE coaxial cable shall be earthed in the
same manner as in case of waveguide.

23.31.4 Following shall be connected to the internal ground ring:

(a) The battery charger positive terminal, earth terminals of
microwave/UHF/train radio/Optical fibre equipments, Multiplexing
equipments.

(b) The earth terminal of lightning ARRESTER & MOVRs provided in the
DC circuits.

(c) All conduits , battery trays, battery chargers, cable trays, jumper wire
cable trays.
(d) All incidental metal objects such as ducts, distribution frame, metal
door frames etc.
For all these connections 4mm dia copper or 6mm dia copper clad steel

wire shall be used.

23.31.5 Each rack /equipment shall have separate earth connection to the internal
ground ring.

23.31.6 The internal ground ring is to be bonded to the external ground at 4 corners
of the building with 6 mm copper wire.

23.32 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR RADIO STATIONS WITH LOW
RISK INDEX:

Protection arrangement as per Fig 2 shall be provided.

23.32.1 The protection arrangement shall consist of :
(a) TOWER GROUND RING
(b) INTERNAL GROUND RING

The internal ground ring shall be connected to the tower ground ring by
6MM dia copper at minimum two places.

23.32.2 Following shall be connected to the internal ground ring

(a) Battery charger positive.
(b) Ground terminal of the microwave radio & multiplexing equipment.
(c) Ground terminal of lighting arrestors across the charger.
(d) Ground terminal of GD tube & MOVR.

23.32.3 The waveguide portion inside the building near the branching filter shall be
connected to the tower ground ring with 6mm copper wire. The waveguide
support ladder shall be connected to tower ring.

23.32.4 The waveguide shall be connected to tower structure at the top and the
bottom.




SECTION H

PROTECTION ARRANGEMENT FOR TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

23.33 The protection system of telephone exchanges shall be similar to the radio
relay station excepting that no tower earth is required. Suitable protection
arrangement with fuse, GD tube and MOVR shall be provided.

23.33.1 EARTHING REQUIREMENT:

External ground ring similar to the radio relay stations shall be provided
for telephone exchanges.

23.33.2 Three stage system consisting of fuse, GD tube and MOVR shall be

provided in the line side of the electronic telephone exchanges. However,
for exchanges where above protections are inbuilt in the design of MFG and
line cards, no separate protection is required.

23.33.3 Lighting protection arrangement as described in para 23.22 shall be
provided across DC supply voltage at the power distribution board.

23.33.4 Metallic structures, chassis, racks etc. shall be connected to the external
earth in the same manner as in radio relay stations.




SECTION I

INSPECTION & TESTING

23.34 The complete protection arrangement should be inspected and tested by
ASTE/DSTE/Sr.DSTE to ensure that the work has been completed in a
satisfactory manner and the material and components used conform to the
standard.

23.35 Routine inspection of the installation, particularly the earth resistance shall
be taken twice a year by the SE/SSE incharge of the station and Earth
connections of all installation should be checked thoroughly two months in
advance of every monsoon season and remedial measures should be taken
well in advance of monsoon.

23.36 A log book shall be kept in which details of the measurement and
inspection should be recorded for scrutiny by higher officials.










ANNEXURE-A
Para 23.8

CALCULATION OF EARTH RESISTANCE & NUMBER OF
ELECTRODES

The approximate earth resistance of the rod/pipe electrodes can be
calculated by the following formulae.

R= 0.75 X o/L if 25< L/d < 100

= o/L if 100 < L/d < 600

= 1.2 o/L if 600 < L/d < 300

where o = Resistivity of earth in Ohm.M
L= Length of the electrode in M.
d= Diameter of the electrode in M.

Assuming a value of 'o'=40, L=2.5M , d = 38 mm
the value of R comes out to be = 12 ohms.

Thus with one electrode the earth resistance is 12 ohms.

If the desired earth resistance is equal to R(d), the no. of electrodes required
to achieve the above resistance can be approximately calculated by R(d) =
(1.5/N) x R where,

R= Resistance of single electrode
N= No. of electrodes installed in parallel at a distance of 3 to 4
M interval.

Thus to get earth resistance of 1 ohm the total no. of electrodes required
N= 1.5 x 12= 18

The representative values of soil resistivity in various parts of India are
given for ready reference.

Representative values of soil resistivity in various parts of
India
S.
No
.
Locality Type of soil Order of
resistivit
y in ohm
meter
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5
1 Kakarepar, Surat
Distt. Gujarat
Clayay black soil 6-23 Underlying bedrock Deccan
trap
2 Taptee Valley Alluviium 6-24 -do-
3 Narmada Valley Alluvium 4-11 Underlying bedrock-sand
stones, shale and limestones,

Deccan trap, and geneises.
4 Purna
Valley(Deogaon)
Agricultural 3-6 Underlying bedrock Deccan
trap.
5 Dhond, Bombay Alluvium 6-40 -do
6 Bijapur Distt.
Mysore State
(a) black cotton
soil
(b) Moorm
2-10
10-50
-do-
7 Carimenapenta,
Nellore Distt.,
Andhra Pradesh.
Alluvium(Highly
clayey)
2 Underlying bedrock
geniuses.
8 Kartee (a) Alluvium
(b) Alluvium
3-5
9-21
Underlying bedrock sand-
stone, trap or geniuses.
9 Delhi
(a)Najafgarh




(b)Chhatarpur
(a) Alluvium(dry,
sandy soil)
(b) Loamy to
Clayey soil)
alluvium(Saline)

Dry Soil
75-170

38-50

1.5-9

36-109
-do-

-do-

-do-

Underlying bedrock
quartzites
10 Korba, M.P. (a) Moist Clay
(b) Alluvium soil
2-3
10-20
Underlying bedrock sand-
stones or shale.
11 Cossipur, Calcutta. Alluvium 25(Appro
x)
--------------
12 Bhagalpur
Bihar
(a) Alluvium
(b) Top Soil
9-14
24-46
Underlying bedrock traps,
sand -stones or gneisses.
13 Kerala(Trivendru
m Distt)
Leteritic Clay 2-5 Underlying bedrock leterite
charnockite or ghanites.
14 Bharatpur Sandy,
loam(saline)
6-14 ------
15 Kalyadi, Mysore. Alluvium 60-150 Underlying bedrock
gneisses.
16 Kolar Gold fields Sandy surface 45-185 -do-
17 Wajrakarur,
Andhra Pradesh
Alluvium 50-150 -do-
18 Koyna, Satara
Distt.
Lateritic 800-
1200(dry
)
Underlying bed-rock sand-
laterite or trap.
19 Kutch-kandla (a)
Alluvium(clayey)
(b)
Alluvium(Sandy)

4-50


60-200
Underlying bedrock sand-
stone, shale or trap.
-do-
20 Villupuram
Madras
Clayey sands 11 Underlying bedrock-granite.
21 Ambaji,
Banaskantha,
Gujarat.
Alluvium 170 Underlying bedrock-sand-
stones and gneisses.
22 (a) Alluvium

2-5

Underlying bedrock sand-
stones and gneisses.




(b) Lateritic soil



300
(approx)

-do-
Note: The soil resistivities are subject to wide seasonal variation as they depend very
much on the moisture content.



ANNEXURE B
Para23.23

PROTECTION ARRANGEMENT FOR SUBSCRIBERS LINES

General Specification :

i) Response Time - < 1 micro sec.

ii) Protection level - ~ 22 V

iii) Discharge current -- > 10 KA

iv) Insulation resistance -- > 10
8
Ohms

v) Capacitance -- ~ 3 pf

vi) Series resistance --- 20 Ohms

Specification of Gas Arrestor : ( Discharge Tube )

i) DC spark over voltage - 300 - 500 V.

ii) Impulse spark over voltage ( 1 KV/micro sec.) 800V

(iii) Nominal impulse discharge current - 10 KA
(8/20 micro Sec. wave)

(iv) Insulation resistance at (100 VDC) - 10
10
Ohms

(v) Capacitance -- 2.5 pf


Specification of MOVR :

i) Protection level voltage - 22 V
ii) Surge current at (8/20 micro sec. wave ) -- upto 50 amps.
iii) Average power dissipation -- 0.02 W
iv) Insulation resistance -- > 100 M.Ohms.
v) Capacitance -- ~ 2 pf





ANNEXURE - C

CALCULATION OF RISK INDEX BASED ON VARIOUS FACTORS
AFFECTING RISK OF LIGHTNING AND CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGE


1 Usage of Structure:

If the structure is generally occupied by a large number of people , the
consequential damage could be quite high. In case of radio relay
installations, since they can be treated as places occupied by a limited
number of people and having a tall outdoor metallic structure, the value of
the index is 4.
2 Type of construction:

A steel framed building is self-protecting against lightning while brick
buildings require greater degree of protection. In case of Radio Relay
installations:-

((i)) For reinforced concrete building with any roof other than metal- index
is 2.
(ii) For Brick , plain concrete or masonary with any roof other than metal or
thatch- the index is 4.
(iii) Reinforced concrete with metal roof - 7
(iv) Brick, plain concrete, masonary with metal roofing the index is - 8.


3 Contents or consequential effects:

If the installation contains equipment, damage to which will seriously
disrupt normal working, then such an installation requires a higher level of
protection. In case of radio relay installations, the value of the index is 6.
4 Degree of Isolation:

In closely built-up towns and cities, the lightning hazard is not as great as in
the open country. For radio relay installations, the index value is
(i)).. for structures located in a large area of structures of trees of the same
or greater height, for example in a large town or forest-2.

ii) for structures located in an area with few other structures or trees of
similar height-5.

iii) for structures completely isolated or exceeding at least twice the height
of surrounding structures or trees- 10.

iv) For radio relay stations with no motorable approach roads to the top and
attendant difficulties in transporting equipment and reaching the station after

sun-set, an index value of 10 is to be added to the values at (i) to (iii) above,

(v) For radio relay stations situated on rocky soil where it is difficult to get
a good earth connection an index value of 10 is to be added to the values of
(i) to (iv) above.

5 Type of Terrain:

An installation in a hilly or mountainous area is more susceptible to damage
than a building in plains and flat terrain. In case of radio-relay installations;

I) situated on flat terrain at any level - index value is 2.
ii) Hill terrain - index value is 6.
iii) Mountainous terrain between 500 m to 1000 m- index value is 8.

iv) Mountainous terrain above 1000m - index value is 10.


6 Height of Structures


Taller structures are subject to greater hazards, than smaller structures and
therefore lightning protection is more desirable in tall structures. In case of
Radio Relay installations, since the height of the tower is the deciding factor,
the following index values are to be adopted:-

Height of Structures( Height of tower, or height of building + tower in
metres where tower is mounted on the building)

Exceeding Not exceeding Value of Index

- 10 metres 2
10 metres 15 " 4
15 " 20 " 5
20 " 25 " 8
25 " 30 " 11
30 " 35 " 16
35 " 40 " 19
40 " 45 " 22
45 " 55 " 30
55 " 60 " 32
60 " 70 " 35
70 " 80 " 37
80 " 90 " 39
90 " 100 " 40


Structures higher than 55m require protection in all cases.


7 Lightning Prevalence:

Isokaraunic level (IKL) refers to the number of thunders storm days in a
year at a particular place: the map at Appendix B shows the Average IKL in
different parts of the country. The risk of lightning strike increases with the
IKL but the severity of lightning storms , as distinguished from their
frequency of occurrence is much greater in some locations than in others.
Hence the need for protection at certain places may not be in direct
proportion to IKL. The value of the index as a function of IKL is as under:-

Number of thunderstorms days per year

Exceeding Not exceeding Value of index.

------- 5 4
5 10 8
11 15 13
16 20 18
21 ----- 21

Examples of Index Figure Calculations:

a) Secunderabad Station S.C.Rly(situated in crowded areas)

Factor Category Risk Index
1 Usage of structure Occupied by limited number of 4
people

2 Types of construction RCC with tower on top 7
3 Contents of conse- Communication network of 6
quential effects. Indian Railways
4 Degree of Isolation Height exceeds twice the height 10
of surrounding structures.
5 Type of terrain Flat terrain 2
6 Height of structure 60m(Tower and Building) 32
7 IKL 28 21
Index Figure= 4+7+6+10+2+32+21-= 82

b) Peddagutta (situated on an isolated hill) S.C.Rly

1 Usage of structure Same as above (in a) 4
2 Type of construction RCC Building with tower on top 7
3 Contents Same as above (in a) 6
4 Degree of isolation On an isolated hill 10+10+10
5 Type of Terrain Mountainous terrain 8
between 500 to 1000m.

6 Height of structure 10-15m(Building tower) 4
7 IKL 43(Approx.) 21
Index figure =80

c) Ongole - SC Rly ( along the East Coast)
1 Usage of Structure Same as above (in a) 4
2 Type of construction RCC building with other 2
than metallic roof
3 Contents Same as above (in a ) 6
4 Degree of Isolation Height exceeding twice the 10
surround structure
5 Type of Terrain Hill terrain 6
6 Height of structure Height of tower is 90m 39
7 IKL 25 21
Index figure: 88

d) New Delhi- N.Rly(situated in crowded area)

1 `Usage of structure Same as above (in a) 4
2 Type of construction RCC building with other 2
than metallic roof.
3 Contents Same as above (in a ) 6
4 Degree of Isolation Located in the midst of 2
structure of comparable
height
5 Type of Terrain Flat terrain 2
6 Height of structure Height of tower(50m) 30

7 IKL 38 21
Index Figure: 67

e) Bilaspur- S.E.Railway
1 Usage of structure Same as above (in a ) 4
2 Type of construction RCC building without
metal roofing 2
3 Contents Same as above (in a ) 6
4 Degree of Isolation Exceeds double the height 10
of structures surrounding
5 Type of terrain Flat terrain 2
6 Height of structure Ht. of tower 90m 39
7 IKL 34(approx) 21
Risk Index= 84

f) Surat- W.Rly(along the West coast)
1 Usage of structure Same as above (in a ) 4
2 Type of construction RCC building without metal roofs 2
3 Contents Same as above(in a ) 6
4 Degree of isolation Exceeds double the height of the 10
surrounding structures

5 Type of Terrain Flat 2
6 Height of structure Height of tower (50m) 30
7 IKL 4
Risk Index: 58

g) Uruli (Central Railway)
1 Usage of structure Same as above (in a ) 4
2 Type of construction: RCC building without metal proof 2
3 Contents Same as above (in a ) 6
4 Degree of Isolation exceeds double the height of 10+10
surrounding structures.
5 Type of Terrain Hill terrain 6
6 Height of structure 50m tower 30
7 IKL 21
Risk Index : 89


ISO XERAUNIC DATA
(Reproduced from IS 2309-1969)
S.No. Name of Place Annual
Thunderstrom
days
1 Gilgit 7
2 Skardu 5
3 Gulmarg 53
4 Srinagar 54
5 Dras 3
6 Kargil 2
7 Leh 3
8 Jammu 26
9 Dharamshala 13
10 Amritsar 49
11. Pathankot 4
12. Mandi 46
13 Ludhiana 12
14 Simla 40
15 Patiala 26
16 Ambala 9
17 Hissar 27
18 Delhi 39
19 Bikaner 10
20 Phalodi 14
21 Sikar 17
22 Barmer 12
23 Jodhpur 23
24 Ajmer 26
25 Jaipur 39
26 Kankroli 36
27 Mount Abu 5

28 Udaipur 38
29 Neemuch 28
30 Kota 27
31 Jallawar 40
32 Mussorie 61
33 Roorkee 74
34 Najibabad 36
35 Mukteshwar 53
36 Meerut -
37 Bareilly 34
38 Aligarh 30
39 Agra 25
40 Mainpuri 23
41 Baharaich 31`
42 Gonda 22
43 Lucknow 18
44 Kanpur 26
45 Fatehpur 24
46 Jhansi 20
47 Allahabad 51
48 Varanasi 51
49 Azamgarh 1
50 Gorakhpur 11
51 Kathmandu 74
52 Motihari 38
53 Darbhanga 10
54 Patna 33
55 Gaya 38
56 Daltonganj 73
57 Hazaribagh 73
58 Ranchi 34
59 Chaibasa 70
60 Jamshedpur 66
61 Purnea 52
62 Sabour 76
63 Dumka 63
64 Darjeeling 28
65 Jalpaiguri 68
66 Malda 59
67 Asansol 71
68 Burdwan 39
69 Khargpur 76
70 Calcutta 70
71 Sagar Island 41
72 Dhubri 8
73 Tejpur 27
74 Dibrugarh 98
75 Sibsagar 103
76 Shillong 75

77 Cherrapunji 49
78 Silchar 33
79 Kohima 34
80 Imphal 49
81 Deesa 7
82 Dwarka 5
83 Jamna Nagar 8
84 Rajkot 12
85 Ahmedabad 11
86 Dohad 17
87 Porbundar 3
88 Varaval 3
89 Bhavnagar 11
90 Baroda 8
91 Surat 4
92 Gwalior 53
93 Guna 33
94 Nowgong 59
95 Satna 41
96 Sagar 36
97 Bhopal 44
98 Jabalpur 50
99 Umaria 37
100 Ambikapur 29
101 Indore 34
102 Hoshangabad 37
103 Pachmarhi 30
104 Seoni 51
105 Pendaiah 56
106 Raipur 34
107 Chindawara 27
108 Kanker 37
109 Jagdalpur 35
110 Balasore 81
111 Chandbali 75
112 Angul 81
113 Bhubaneshwar 46
114 Puri 33
115 Gopalpur 34
116 Jharsuguda 85
117 Sambalpur 67
118 Titlagarh 24
119 Rajgangpur 1
120 Dhahanu 1
121 Nasik 17
122 Maligaon 13
123 Akola 20
124 Amraoti 32
125 Nagpur 45

126 Gonda 10
127 Aurangabad 34
128 Bombay 16
129 Aligarh 12
130 Ahmadnagar 10
131 Parbhani 32
132 Pune 22
133 Mahabaleshwar 14
134 Ratnagiri 6
135 Sholapur 23
136 Miraj 25
137 Vengurla 39
138 Najibabad 36
139 Hanamkonda 43
140 Hyderabad 28
141 Khammam 26
142 Kalingapatnam 20
143 Vishakhapatnam 46
144 Rentichintala 42
145 Masulipatnam 20
146 Ongole 25
147 Kurnool 29
148 Anantapur 22
149 Nellore 18
150 Bidar 15
151 Gulbarga 34
152 Bijapur 9
153 Belgaum 31
154 Raichur 17
155 Gadag 21
156 Bellary 22
157 Karwar 27
158 Honawar 5
159 Chikalthana 24
160 Mangalore 36
161 Hassan 26
162 Bangalore 46
163 Mysore 44
164 Kozhikode 39
165
166 Cochin 69
167 Allopey 51
168 Trivandrum 68
169 Vellore 25
170 Madras 47
171 Cotacamud 24
`172 Salem 69
173 Cuddalore 37
174 Coimbatore 40

175 Tiruchirapalli 41
176 Nagapattinam 15
177 Kodikanal 82
178 Madurai 39
179 Pambam 5
180 Tuticorin 14
181 Cape Comorin 68
182 Port Blair 62
183 Car Nicobar 18
184 Minicoy 20

FIG - 1
38 MM TINNED


38 MM COPPER
38 MM COPPER
FIG - 2



CHAPTER XXIV

INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROTECTION TO STAFF

SECTION A - GENERAL
24.1 Scope of instructions-

The instructions in this chapter are not exhaustive. Any carelessness on the part of the
staff will not be absolved by the absence of instructions detailed in this chapter.

24.2 Handling by authorised personnel-

All equipments shall be handled only by duly authorised staff particularly in case of
wireless transmitters. All connections and alterations, other than the usual
manipulations or operation, are to be carried only by staff specially appointed for this
work.

SECTION B - PROTECTIVE AND SAFETY DEVICES

24.3 Periodical checking- The condition of the equipment and correct functioning of
protective and safety devices shall be checked once in a month by the authorised
personnel.

24.4 Checking under fault conditions-When the protective and safety devices have
operated under fault conditions, check shall be carried out on the devices for their
correct functioning before resetting them for use.

24.5 Altering and disconnecting safety devices-

The safety devices shall not be altered or disconnected, except for replacements
without specific approval of the competent authority.


SECTION C- FIRST AID

24.6 First aid-

Since electrical shock may result in the interruption of natural breathing, all staff shall
be familiar with the methods of artificial respiration. It is essential that staff are
equipped with the knowledge of first aid. Charts explaining such methods should be
exhibited in a prominent place where high voltages are incident. Names of staff
trained in first aid shall also be displayed.

24.7 First Aid Box-

First aid box shall be kept in wireless stations, first aid rooms in workshops, etc.






SECTION D - ACID

24.8 Battery rooms

a. Battery rooms shall be provided with good ventilation.
b. Acid-proof tiles shall be provided on the flooring where acid is handled. It shall be
ensured that the floor is kept dry and free from fallen acid.

24.9 Storage of acid-
Acid shall be kept in a cool dry place.

24.10 Diluting the acid

a. Acid should always be added to water, when dilution is needed.
b. Where acid is handled, board containing the legend DO NOT ADD WATER
TO ACID with a pictorial representation shall be hung at a suitable place.
c. While handling acid containers rubber gloves shall be used.


SECTION E FIRE

24.11 Ammonia and battery room-

A bottle of strong ammonia should be kept in the battery room at all times.

24.12 Safe working in battery room-

Breaking of the connection in a circuit in which current is being carried or the lighting
of naked light in the battery room must be avoided.

24.13 Training in fire fighting-

The personnel should be given training in fire fighting with the basic equipments
provided.

24.14 Preventive measures-

a. Waste material used in cleaning the equipments should not be allowed to
accumulate in a corner.
b. Dangerous growth of vegetation near the equipments or feeder lines or masts must
not be allowed.
c. The roofs of buildings must be kept clear of leaves or combustible materials.
d. Smoking should be prohibited in petrol storage rooms and battery rooms. No
Smoking sign with a Cigarette and red cross shall be displayed.
e. Oil, paints, etc. should not be stored near the equipments.
f. Petrol storage rooms should not have sparking equipments emitting sparks like
buzzers, relays, fuses, etc.
g. Handling of petrol such as filling in engine tanks, etc. should not be done while the
medium and high power transmitters are radiating in close proximity.


h. Lighting of fire for cooking etc. within compound walls shall be strictly prohibited.
i. Buckets filled with sand, water shall be hung at a convenient place.


24.15 Fire Extinguishers

1 TYPES OF FIRE :
(i) A Class :
Wood, charcoal, jute, cloth, etc. only water is used to extinguish the
fire.
(ii) B Class: Oil, petrol, grease, paints etc. only foam is used to extinguish
the fire.
(iii) C Class: electrical fire water is not used only CO2 is used.
2 (a) Basic fire fighting equipments should be kept in places with fire risk and
it shall be ensured that they are in good condition. Expiry date should be
clearly mentioned on them. Notices of instructions for using the fire
fighting equipments shall also be provided.
(b) All electrical installations shall be provided with gas type fire
extinguishers. Water should not be used to extinguish electrical fires..
(c) In confined places where even the minimum ventilation is not available,
vaporising liquid extinguishers should not be used since they may be
poisonous and cause harmful physiological effects.

24.16 Precautions during the time of fire.
(a) Alarm must be given in accordance with local regulations.
(b) All forced air-cooling devices must be stopped.
(c) Equipments involved must be disconnected immediately at the supply
source.
(d) Spreading of the fire should be avoided.


SECTION F- ELECTRICITY

24.17 Removal of fuses- Fuses shall be removed or replaced only after the
circuit has been completely de-energised. A non-conductive fuse
extractor shall be used to remove knife or cartridge type of fuses from
their holders.
24.18 Handing circuit breakers
(a) In the case of manually operated circuit breakers, the face shall be kept
turned away from the circuit breaker, while closing.
(b) While working on non-closed type of circuit breakers, the use of safety
goggles is recommended.
24.19 Provision of labels
(a) All switches and cut-outs from which power may possibly feed shall be
secured in open position and suitable label shall be provided. After
completion of the work, the label shall be removed only by the person
who originally put on the label..
(b) Sign boards warning danger with legends in appropriate languages may
be hung at suitable places where radio frequency voltage or high dc or ac
voltages are encountered.


(c) When more than one repair party is engaged, each party shall provide the
label which will be removed after completion of the work by the
respective party. If switch locking facilities are available; it shall be
locked in the open position and the key retained by the person incharge of
the work.


24.20 Working on live circuit:

(a) Wherever possible work on live circuits with voltages over 350V peak may be avoided.

(b) The following protective measures shall be taken while working on live parts:

(i) Provision of ample light for illumination.

(ii) Removal of loose clothes and metallic personal accessories.

(iii) Provision of insulation from earth such as provision of rubber floor mats near electrical
distribution boards used in battery rooms.

(iv) Use of only one hand where practicable, keeping the other hand free.

24.21 Safety guards and covers.

(a) Suitable protective guards and wire nets shall be provided to prevent staff from making
accidental contact at the dangerous voltage and radio frequency high power radiation.

(b) All covers used for protection against accidental contact with high voltages shall normally
be kept closed and opened for maintenance or repair only by authorised staff.

24.22 Safety design and installation practices

(a) Insulated current carrying parts in the equipment shall be located in such a manner that
they are not subjected to abrasion or mechanical damage.

(b) Where cables pass through metallic parts, insulating bushings shall be provided.

(c) External conductors connected to the equipment at points within the case shall be so
arranged that their terminals are not subject to strain when any outer covering is protected
from abrasion and that they are prevented from getting twisted.

(d) Guard interlocking switches shall be so arranged mechanically, that inadvertent operation
is impossible.

(e) The accessibility in equipments and guards shall be so designed that the operator shall
not have access to live parts other than those at extra low voltages.

(f) If the operator is required to have access to parts of equipment which are dangerous
while the equipment is in operation, the covers provided to guard such parts shall not be


removable with the equipment switched on or shall themselves switch the current off when
the covers are removed.

24.23 Earthing

(a) Accessible metallic parts including hinged components which might become live in the
event of a fault, shall be earthed on all equipments and shall be so constructed that these parts
are permanently and reliably connected to an earth terminal or contact.

(b) If the body of the earthing terminal is part of the metal frame or enclosure, a screw or
nut of brass or other metal less resistant to corrosion should be provided.

(c) It should not be possible to loosen the earth terminal screw without the aid of a tool.
(d) If the equipment or any components are connected by a plug and a socket device; while
inserting the plug in the socket, the earth contact shall make its circuit before the current
carrying contacts engage and when the plug is withdrawn from socket, it shall break its circuit
after the live contacts break their contacts.

(e) All tall metallic structures shall be suitably earthed strictly.

24.24 Handling electrical equipment:

(a) While isolating the equipment from the mains supply the disconnection shall be
done with the operation of the switches as well as by removal of the fuses.

(b) The disconnection shall be checked once again before commencing the work on
the equipment.

(c) Since the electrical charge retained by the electrical machinery, when switched
off, may cause a severe shock in some cases, the out put terminals shall be earthed, before the
mains are handled.

(d) To ensure that the capacitors are discharged rapidly, after their source of potential
has been switched off, or disconnected, their live terminations, shall, wherever practicable,
have a discharge path which is either permanent or is applied so that the capacitors are
discharged to a safe potential. Capacitors wired permanently across the mains supply shall be
shunted by a resistance so that the discharge time of the capacitor shall not be greater than 100
mili second.

24.25 Handling radio equipment:

(a) Breaking of energised radio frequency output circuits shall be avoided as far as
possible.

(b) While energising a radio transmitter, it shall be ensured that no one is at work on
the equipment or aerial system, no tools or testing equipment are left in or on the equipment,
and all testing apparatuses are removed.



(c) Where other equipment is used close by, measures shall be taken to prevent shock
or injury to staff due to radio frequency energy picked up from an adjacent aerial or
equipment.

(d) The aerial should be disconnected from the transmission line to prevent
introduction of any dangerous voltages due to aerial pick up. If this is not possible, other
precautions such as earth at several places may be resorted to. These earth connections shall
be very short when compared with the wave lengths.

(e) Staff shall not be permitted to go near the aerial installations, unless it is definite
that no danger exists.

(f) Transmitting equipment with frequency range of 30 MHz and below, and aerial
output power of 500 W and above may cause dangerous voltages to be induced in other
structures specially those structures protruding in the same plane as the radiating source.

(g) All areas in which radio frequency power density in excess of 0.01 watt per sq cm
is known, or suspected to exist must be considered as hazardous areas, and personnel shall be
prohibited from doing any work, while the set is energised.

(h) Direct visual examination from the radiation path of any microwave radiator
reflector, wave guide, horn or any highly concentrated beam or radiating system during the
period of transmission must be avoided.

(i) Staff who must remain in the microwave beam for any length of time shall be
provided with and required to wear devices for eye protection with a wire mesh spring.

(j) If more than one transmitter is working on a site, care should be taken to avoid
burns from radio frequency pickup from the working transmitters.

(k) All external conductors or metal parts carrying current where radio frequency
power may exceed 5 W peak envelope shall be deemed to be live, and shall be protected
accordingly. All external circuits and accessories fed with radio frequency where the power
may exceed 5W shall be made inaccessible as far as practicable. Where such circuits can not
be made inaccessible, warning devices shall be displayed.

24.26 Protective measures for Telecommunication lines entering 25KV substation/switching
posts.
When telecommunication lines enter 25KV sub-stations and switching posts (Feeding posts,
section and sub-sectioning posts), the following protection measure shall be taken to protect
the staff and the Telephone equipment against any fault occurring on the Traction side.

a) Each Telecommunication line before its connection to Telephone equipment shall be
provided with heavy duty lightning arrestors and fuses. The heavy duty lightning arrestors
shall be of rare gas type with normal flashing voltage of 300 volts. The fuses shall be of 250
volts, 3 amps type.

(b) A common earthing shall be used for earthing of the heavy lightning arrestors and all
metallic bodies of sub-stations/switching posts so that no potential difference may arise
between these bodies in case of a fault occurring on the Traction Side.



24.27 Precautions in ac electrified area

(a) Instructions issued from time to time by administrations dealing with electrifications must
be strictly followed.

(b) Precautions are required to be taken on account of the following:

((i)) Proximity of a live conductor
(ii) Pressure of return current in rails.
(iii) Induction in all metallic bodies situated close to overhead equipments.


(c) Any contact, direct or indirect, with the 25KV line is dangerous and shall be strictly
avoided.

(d) Whenever staff has to work on installations which are in direct or indirect contact with
the rails, they shall:

(i) Use tools (insulated and non-insulated) in the manner approved by the CSTE of the
Railway.

(ii) Observe the provisions of Chapter XX of the Way and Works Manual, supplemented by
Instructions for Railway Staff Working on Tracks Equipped with 25KV, 50 Hz ac traction
(see Annexure A).

(iii) The metallic body and supporting frame of the equipment shall be earthed and the
resistance of this earthing shall not exceed 10 ohms. There should not be any possibility of
simultaneous human contact with metallic bodies connected to different earth.

(iv) Any equipment and portion thereof including the supporting structure falling within 2
meters of the 25KV live contact wire or any metal part electrically connected to this
conductor shall be protected by an iron screening, of approved design, solidly connected to
the structural work. The iron screen shall be connected to an earth not exceeding 10 ohms in
resistance.

(e) Each time staff has to work on telecommunication circuits along the 25 KV ac line. the
following protective measures must be observed:

(i) They should be as a general rule use rubber gloves and use tools with insulated handles.

(ii) When the work to be done is meticulous and rubber gloves cannot be used, special
precautions should be taken by splitting the circuit into sections by earthing them.

(iii) Before cutting the armour or the lead or the aluminium sheath of the cable or the wires in
the cable, establish as a general rule, an electrical connection of low ohmic resistance between
two parts of the armour and the sheathing and the wires that are to be separated by cutting.



(iv) Whenever the main telecommunication cable is tapped by derivation cables, the tapping
shall be through protective transformers to maintain physical separation between the main and
derivation cable conductors.

(v) When more than one repair party is engaged, each party shall provide the label which will
be removed after completion of the work by the respective party. If switch locking facilities
are available, it shall be locked in the open position and the key retained by the person
incharge of the work.

(v) While opening an underground telecommunication cable joint, the cable sheath and
armouring which may be at a higher potential than the earth should not be touched without
first connecting to a local earth installed temporarily for the purpose.

(vi) As the phantom circuit for block working is derived directly from the main cable,
through the plastic insulated conductors, the terminals in the derivation cable termination box
on which these plastic insulated conductors for block working are terminated, shall be painted
red. The maintenance staff should take necessary precautions while working on cable
termination boxes.

(vii) In VF repeater stations and cable huts, a caution board shall be displayed to indicate
that the maintenance staff must use rubber gloves and stand on rubber mats while working
on the cable termination and equipment. The issue of special instructions to the personnel
likely to have access to the cable conductors, sheath and terminations, of the cable sections
between sectionalising points, must be done. The marking of any accessible part of the
installations or apparatus connected to the line that may be raised to a dangerous potential
must be done.

(viii) While working on the telecommunication equipment installed on the overhead
equipment switching posts, maintenance staff should ensure that the lightning arresters and
the fuses connected in the line are in proper working condition before commencing the work.

24.28 Tools to be provided with insulating sleeves in 25 KV AC area.

(a) Tools which are used in signal and telecommunication circuits and on any current
carrying parts of signal and telecommunication equipment are required to be insulated to
protect the staff from ac induced voltages.

(b) The handles of these tools shall be provided with insulating sheath of rubber or
plastic materials of approved type sufficient to withstand 3000 V.

(c) The following tools shall invariably be insulated:

(i) Screw driver.
(ii) Pliers
(iii) Any other tools, whose handles are metallic and which are required for the
above purposes.


SECTION G - WORKSHOPS



24.29 Regulation of factories Act - All the safety regulations enjoined in Factories Act
shall be complied with.

SECTION H - HANDLING OF MATEIRALS, TOOLS AND METERS

24.30 Crane or hoist, handling materials - While materials are being handled by crane or
hoist or a winch, care shall be taken that the personnel are away from the danger zone.

24.31 Correct handling of tools - Wherever it is noticed that the tools are not properly
handled by the staff, the correct method should be taught so that the workmen do not injure
themselves by using wrong methods.

24.32 Voltage handling of tools - While making voltage tests on transmitters, the meter
must be insulated from the ground and the test leads shall be able to withstand the high
voltages.



SECTION I - TOOLS, GLOVES, BELTS AND HELMETS


24.33 Tools in wireless stations - The tools employed in a wireless station shall be as per
Para 24.28

24.34 Gloves

(a) Where high voltages are employed, suitable rubber gloves shall be provided, but
while working on radio frequency circuits, use of rubber gloves is prohibited.

(b) The gloves shall be designed such that they will not slip off during use, but shall
be easy to take off.

24.35 Belts - Safety belts of approved design may be provided for staff working on poles or
masts. The belts shall not be less than 7.5 cm wide and shall be made 5 mm thick, good
quality, non-fibrous leather.

24.36 Helmets - Helmets of approved design may be provided for staff liable to work in fire
fighting and in places of workshop where overhead cranes or hoists are working or where
small objects such as nuts, bolts, tools, stones, etc., are likely to fall from above.



ANNEXURE A

Para 24.27(d) (ii)

SUPPLEMENT TO CHAPTER XX OF THE WAY AND WORKS MANUAL

(Relevant Paras)

Instructions for Railway staff working on tracks equipped with 25KV single phase, 50
Hz ac traction overhead equipment and on or adjacent to such requirement.

1. The instructions lay down precautionary measures to be observed by railway personnel
working on the tracks equipped with 25 KV ac overhead equipment.

2. Precautions are required to be taken on account of the following:

2.1 Proximity of a live conductor - The risk of direct contact would occur while working
very close to a live conductor.

2.2 Pressure of return current in rails- The return current in the rails may cause a potential
difference :
- between rail and the surrounding mass of earth.
- between the two ends of a fractured rail.
- between the two rails at an insulated joint.
- between earth and any other metallic mass.

2.3 Induction in all metallic bodies situated close to overhead equipment- It is important to
note that induced voltage may appear at any instant in metallic masses in the vicinity of
traction conductors .

3. The precautions laid down must be followed under all circumstances in sections equipped
for 25KV single phase, 50Hz ac traction in addition to those in para 2003

3. (a) No work shall be done within a distance of 2 meters from the live parts
of the overhead equipment without a on permit to work (see para 2003)
3.3 No fallen wire or wires shall be touched unless power is switched off and
the wire or wires suitably earthed. In case the wires drop at a level
crossing, the gatekeeper shall immediately make arrangements to stop
all road traffic, power is switched off and the wires duly earthed.
4. During maintenance or renewal of track, continuity of the rails serving
electrified tracks shall be maintained by provision of temporary metallic
jumpers of approved design for bridging the gap which would be caused
during removal of fishplates or rails.
7 Use of rails as foot path, a seat or for such other purposes is strictly
prohibited.
8 In electrified tracks the use of steel measuring tape or long metallic wires
shall be avoided.
N.B. Para references given here refer to paras of the Way and Works
Manual


CHAPTER XXV

FAULT CONTROL PROCEDURES

25.1 INTRODUCTION:

This chapter discusses the Fault Control Procedures for Railways Telecommunication
Network both at Zonal Level as well as Divisional Level.

In a typical Railway Telecom Network scenario, following types of Telecom Network co-
exist :

Transmission

- Microwave/UHF Network
- Optical Fibre Cable Network
- RE Telecom Cable Control Network
- Railways Overhead Wire Control Network
- DOT owned Overhead Wire Control Network

Switching

- Electronic Telephone Exchanges
- Electro-Mechanical Telephone Exchanges

Others

- Single Channel Duplex UHF/VHF Radio System
- Multiple Access Radio Relay (MARR) Systems
- Pair Gain System
- VHF/UHF Simplex Trans-receivers
- Talk Back Systems for Major Yards

It is indeed very necessary to establish well defined Fault Control Procedures for
satisfactory maintenance of such diverse Railway Telecommunication Networks so as to meet
the demanding requirements of Indian Railways in the 21
st
Century.



FAULT CONTROL PROCEDURES

25.2 TYPICAL TELECOM FAULT CONTROL SET-UP ON A RAILWAY

Typical telecom fault control set-up on a Railway shall consist of the following:

1. ZONAL TELECOM FAULT CONTROL SET-UP
2. DIVISIONAL TELECOM FAULT CONTROL SET-UP

The Zonal Telecom Fault Control Set-up shall be one for the entire Zonal Railway.


The Divisional Telecom Fault Control Set-up shall be established in each Division of
the Zonal Railway.

25.3 ZONAL TELECOM FAULT CONTROL SET-UP

25.3.1 It shall be manned by Section Engineer (Telecom) in a general shift. Three Section
Engineers (Telecom) shall be earmarked and should man the Zonal Fault Control set-up
round-the-clock in case of emergencies. Following Telecom Network shall be monitored by
the Zonal Telecom Fault Control Room.

Microwave/UHF Network on the entire Zonal Railway

25.3.2 The Zonal Telecom Fault Control Room shall also function as an Emergency Telecom
Control Room in case of Emergencies requiring immediate telecom facilities/restoration. The
emergencies may consist of the following:

- Major Rail Accidents
- Cyclones
- Breaches

25.3.3 When the Zonal Telecom Fault Control Room functions as the Emergency Telecom
Control Room, the Divisional Telecom Fault Control Rooms of the affected Division(s) shall
report their positions to the Zonal Telecom Fault Control Room which in turn shall advise the
Telecom Officials at HQs of the latest developments.

25.3.4 The Zonal Telecom Fault Control Room shall function under the direct control of Dy.
Chief Signal & Telecom Engineer (Microwave) or any other officer designated by the Chief
Communication Engineer of the Railway.

25.4 DIVISIONAL TELECOM FAULT CONTROL SET-UP

25.4.1 The Divisional Telecom Fault Control Set-up shall have two components:

a) For monitoring all telecom networks other than Microwave/UHF called:
Divisional Telecom Fault Control Room.

b) For monitoring Microwave/UHF networks called: Divisional Microwave Fault
Control Room.

Each of these Control Rooms shall be headed by a Senior Section Engineer (Telecom)
in a general shift. Three Section Engineers (Telecom)/ Jr. Engineer (Telecom) shall man the
Fault Control Room round-the-clock.

25.4.2 Following Telecom Networks shall be monitored by the Divisional Telecom Fault
Control Room.

- Optical Fibre Cable Network
- RE Telecom Cable Control Network
- Railways Overhead Wire Control Network

- DOT owned Overhead Wire Control Network
- Electronic Telephone Exchanges
- Electro-Mechanical Telephone Exchanges
- Single Channel Duplex UHF/VHF Radio Systems
- Multiple Access Radio Relay (MARR) Systems
- Pair Gain Systems
- VHF/UHF Simplex Trans-receivers
- Talk Back Systems for Major Yards
- Any other new Telecom System

25.4.3 Following Telecom Networks shall be monitored by the Divisional Microwave Fault
Control Room.

- Microwave/UHF Network on the entire Division

25.5 OFFICE AIDS/TELECOM FACILITIES TO BE PROVIDED AT THE
ZONAL/DIVISIONAL TELECOM FAULT CONTROL ROOMS

Following Office Aids/Telecom Facilities shall be provided for satisfactory
functioning of the Telecom Fault Control Rooms

- Fax Machine on an exclusive Railway Telephone Line with STD Facility
- Fax Machine on an exclusive MTNL Telephone Line with STD Facility
- Computer System with Printer & Modem on an exclusive Railway Line with
STD facility
- E-Mail facility where-ever available
- Hotline Communication between various Telecom Fault Control Rooms

25.6 PROCEDURE FOR FAULT REPORTING TO ZONAL TELECOM FAULT
CONTROL ROOM & ITS FUNCTIONS

25.6.1 Each of the Divisional Microwave Fault Control Rooms shall report their daily
positions to the Zonal Telecom Fault Control Room by the following communication means:

- By Railway FAX
- By E-Mail where-ever available

25.6.2 Any unusual occurrences, any Microwave/UHF Radio link breakdowns or Channel
Interruptions of vital circuits e.g. PRS data circuits, Inter-Railway or Inter Division
Administrative Trunk Circuits, Control Hotlines from Zonal Hqs to Divisions, shall invariably
be reported to Zonal Telecom Fault Control Room immediately on their occurrence on
Telephone followed by FAX/E-Mail.


25.6.3 Monthly, Quarterly & Annual Communication System Performance Reports of the
Division shall be transmitted through Modems on Railway lines to the Zonal Telecom Fault
Control Room, as per specified proforma.


25.6.4 A uniform Application Program shall be loaded on the Computers in every Telecom
Fault Control Room at Zonal Levels. This shall ensure transparency of Data Transmission
between Fault Control Rooms of the Divisions.

25.6.5 The Zonal Fault Control Room shall compile Monthly, Quarterly & Annual
Communication System Performance Reports of the Railway as per specified proforma, for
transmission to Railway Board.

25.6.6 When during emergencies, the Zonal Telecom Fault Control Room functions as an
Emergency Telecom Control Room, following additional functions shall get automatically
assigned :

- Maintaining very close co-ordination with the Divisional Telecom Fault
Control Room.
- Liasioning with BSNL/MTNL Officials at Hqs, if required, for providing
additional telecom facilities e.g. Extra BSNL/MTNL Nos., STD Facility on way-side
Telephones with ASMs. For this, Telephone Nos. with Designations of concerned
BSNL/MTNL Officials shall be kept up-to-date in the Control Room.

- Mobilising additional telecom resources as per site requirements.


25.6.7 A Disaster Management Plan detailing out the action to be taken in Emergencies shall
be prominently displayed in the Control Room.

25.6.7 Fault Control should ensure that minimum telecom needs with divisions and zones are
provided at accident side in least time.

25.7 PROCEDURE FOR FAULT REPORTING TO DIVISIONAL TELECOM
FAULT CONTROL ROOM & ITS FUNCTIONS

25.7.1 Various Telecom Installations on the Division shall report their periodic , daily or
unusual occurrence report to the Divisional Control Room on Telephone.

25.7.2 The Divisional Telecom Fault Control Room shall compile the Monthly, Quarterly &
Annual Communication System Performance Reports of the Division as per specified
proforma for transmission to the Zonal Control Room.

25.7.3 Liasioning with BSNL/MTNL Officials at Divisional level, if required, for providing
additional telecom facilities e.g. Extra BSNL/MTNL Nos., STD Facility on wayside
Telephones with ASMs. For this Telephone Nos. with Designations of concerned BSNL
/MTNL Officials, shall be kept uptodate in the Control Room.

25.7.4 Mobilising additional telecom resources as per site requirements in case of
emergencies.

25.7.5 A uniform Application Program shall be loaded on the Computers in every Telecom
Fault Control Room at Divisional Level. This shall ensure transparency of Data
Transmission between Fault Control Rooms.


25.7.6 A disaster Management Plan detailing out the action to be taken in Emergencies shall
be prominently displayed in the Control Room.

25.7.7 Fault Control should ensure that minimum telecom needs with divisions and zones are
provided at accident side in least time.

25.8 PROCEDURE FOR FAULT REPORTING TO DIVISIONAL MICROWAVE
FAULT CONTROL ROOM & ITS FUNCTIONS

25.8.1 The Microwave/UHF Stations on the Division shall report their periodic daily or
unusual occurrence report to the Divisional Microwave Fault Control Room on Telephone.

25.8.2 The Divisional Microwave Fault Control Room shall compile the Monthly, Quarterly
& Annual Communication System Performance Reports of the Division as per specified
proforma for transmission to the Zonal Telecom Control Room.

25.8.3 Liasioning with BSNL Microwave Officials at Divisional level, if required, for
providing additional telecom Channels/restoration of Channels in case of failures. For this,
Telephone Nos. with Designations of concerned BSNL Officials, shall be kept uptodate in
the Control Room.

25.8.4 Mobilising required Spare Modules/Fixtures as per site requirements in case of
emergencies.

25.8.5 A uniform Application Program shall be loaded on the Computers in every Microwave
Fault Control Room at Divisional Level. This shall ensure transparency of Data Transmission
between Fault Control Rooms.

25.8.6 A Disaster Management Plan detailing out the action to be taken in Emergencies shall
be prominently displayed in the Control Room.



--------------------------------------

CHAPTER XXVI


INSPECTION

26.1 ANNUAL INSPECTION PROGRAMME

The divisional and extra divisional officers should compile the inspection programme of their
respective jurisdiction and send it to the Head Quarter for approval.

26.2 ADHEARENCE TO ANNUAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE

The annual inspection schedule should be strictly adhered to. Any deviation should be
reported to the higher authority explaining the circumstances which necessitated the
deviation.

26.3 INSPECTION REPORT

Each inspection conducted by the Officers shall be followed by an inspection report.
The report should indicate the state of working of the installation, efficiency of the services
rendered, any specific problems along with suggestions for the improvement of services.

26.4 SUBMISSION OF INSPECTION REPORT

The inspection report of the Officers should be submitted to the next higher authority.
The inspection report should be submitted within one months time.

26.5 MONITORING THE INSPECTION WORK

A watch should be kept on adherence to annual inspection schedule by the concerned
divisional and head quarter Officers. For this purpose an inspection register should be
maintained indicating the installation inspected, actual date of inspection, date of submission
of report.

26.6 COMPLIANCE REPORT

Strict action should be taken to ensure prompt compliance of the points noted in the
inspection reports. Such a compliance report should be submitted as a matter of course within
one month of inspection and ordinarily all action should be completed within three months
time.

26.7 REVIEW OF EARLIER INSPECTIONS

During surprise/scheduled inspections, the progress of compliance of earlier
inspection reports should be checked by the inspecting officer. The inspecting officer may
carry with him earlier inspection report on similar installation to serve as a guideline.

26.8 LOCATING WEAK POINTS

The inspection should be meaningful and the inspecting officers should cover all
points affecting the efficiency of the services and should particularly inspect to locate weak
points before they can rise to any failure or complaint.

26.9 ANNUAL SCHEDULE OF INSPECTION

The annual schedule of inspection which shall be conducted by officers are given in
Annexure-A.


26.10 QUALITY OF INSPECTION

The report of the inspections carried out by the Officers will be reviewed by the next
higher authorities. If it is felt by the reviewing officer that the report is inadequate or
inspection has not been carried out properly covering all the important aspects, the reviewing
officers will send his comments immediately to the inspecting officers concerned. In extreme
cases he may even ask the inspecting officer to carry out the supplementary inspection to
cover the remaining points .

26.11 INSPECTION REGISTER

Every installation shall maintain inspection register duly bind and page numbered.
This will be kept as important permanent document. All the report of inspections/formal
visits will be filed in the inspection book if possible by way of coloured charts. Remarks of
any surprise/casual visit will be recorded by the visiting officer on the space in the inspection
register. The compliance report of the points noted in the register shall be sent to the
inspecting officers for record.









ANNEXURE A

ANNUAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE OF OFFICERS


SN ITEM SR. DSTE(Tele)/DSTE
(Tele)/Incharge

DSTE/ASTE
1. MICROWAVE/UHF NETWORK 25% STNS/YEAR ALL STATIONS AT LEAST
ONCE IN A YEAR

2. TELEPHONE AND TRUNK
EXCHANGES
ALL EXCH. EXCEEDING
400 LINES ONCE IN A
YEAR

ALL EXCHANGES
ONCE IN A YEAR
3. CONTROL OFFICE & TEST ROOMS ALL CONTROL OFFICES
QUARTERLY
ALL CONTROL OFFICES
ONCE IN A MONTH

4. PA SYSTEMS AT RLY
STATIONS/TRAIN INDICATION
BOARDS & CLOCKS

ALL MAJOR STATIONS
IN A YEAR
ALL STATIONS ONCE IN
A YEAR
5. OFC/QUAD/RE CABLE SYSTEM
a)CABLE ROUTE
b)CABLE HUT/REPEATER
c)EMERGENCY SOCKETS
ONE INSPECTION IN
EACH CONTROL SECTION
YEARLY
a) INSPECTION OF
COMPLETE CABLE ROUTE
ONCE IN A YEAR
b) ALL HALF YEARLY
c) ALL BLOCK SECTIONS
IN A YEAR

6. REPAIR & MAINTENANCE
CENTRES

ONCE IN A YEAR ONCE IN A YEAR
7. ACCIDENT RELIEF TRAIN ONCE IN A YEAR ONCE IN A
QUARTER

8. OPTICAL FIBRE SYSTEM
a)OPTIC FIBRE STNS
b)CABLE ROUTE
a)10% OF STATIONS IN A
YEAR
b) ONE INSPECTION IN
EACH CONTROL SECTION

a)ALL STATIONS
IN A YEAR
b)INSPECTION OF COMPLETE
CABLE ROUTE ONCE IN
A YEAR

9. TRAIN RADIO SYSTEM 10% OF INSTALLATIONS
IN A YEAR
ALL INSTALLA-
TIONS IN A YEAR

10. FOOT PLATE INSPECTION OF O/H
ALIGNMENT
ONE SECTION
QUARTERLY
ALL SECTIONS IN
A YEAR

11. VIDEO SURVILLANCE SYSTEM ALL MAJOR STATIONS IN
A YEAR
ALL STATIONS HALF YEARLY

12. TELECOM EQUIPMENTS OF DATA
NETWORK FOR
UTS,PRS,FOIS,RAILNET ETC.
ALL MAJOR STATIONS IN
A YEAR
ALL STATIONS HALF YEARLY



CHAPTER XXVII

PAINTING


27.1 SECTION A- EQUIPMENT TO BE PAINTED

27.1.1 Items of equipment requiring painting

(a) The following are the main items of telecommunication equipment that need
regular painting :
(i) Antenna towers.
(ii) Emergency telephone socket posts and socket box.
(iii) Marking on OHE masts for the position of telecommunication cable joints.
(iv) Battery cupboards and shelves
(v) Selector cases
(vi) Telephone brackets
(vii) Train control telephone apparatus.
(viii) Trunk exchange and manual exchange boards.
(ix) Loudspeakers
(x) Electric clock casings.
(xi) CT box terminals on which the cable conductors are terminated.

(b) The following are the main items of telecommunication equipment that need
occasional painting.
(i) Line repeaters.
(ii) Control room equipment.
(iii) Way station control equipment.
(iv) VF equipment bays.
(v) Transformer bays.
(vi) 4 wire- 2 wire and 2 wire- 4 wire junction equipment.

27.1.2 Colouring scheme

(a) All wood work shall be finished with natural colour varnish.

(b) As far as possible the original colour scheme adopted by the manufacturers may
be followed in repainting. Where the same colours are not available, the repainting
must be done with paints having colours near about the original.

(c) Emergency telephone socket post shall be painted with alternatively black and
white paints for 15 cms length each.

(d) CT box terminals where cable conductors are terminated are to be painted red.

(e) Marking on OHE masts for position of telecommunication cable joints is to be of
red paint.

27.1.3 Interval of painting :

(a) The general principle for fixing intervals has been based on the following:

(i) All wood work polished once in year.
(ii) All outdoor equipment painted once in 3 years.
(iii) All indoor equipment painted once in 6 years.

(b) The above intervals may be suitably modified for any particular area after taking
into account the corrosive effect of atmosphere and weather conditions.

(c) The paintings on the emergency telephone socket posts and on OHE masts for
cable joints shall be done once in a year.

27.1.4 Painting programme

(a) Each SE/JE shall be responsible to see that the telecommunication equipment
under his charge is painted regularly.

(b) Each SE/JE shall draw out a schedule of painting for all the equipment under his
charge. The quantities required shall be worked out on the basis of scale of paints
to be fixed by the CSTE.

27.1.5 Requisitioning of paints Each SE/JE must requisition of paints in accordance with
the quantities worked out. To ensure timely supply, he must submit his requisition to
the DSTE sufficiently in advance.

27.1.6 Programme for painters Each SE/JE must draw out a programme of work for each
painter under his charge and give him definite instructions about the painting work to
be carried out. Each painter must be supplied with a diary for recording daily progress
of work. His programme must ordinarily be so arranged that he works on the line from
Monday to Friday and returns to the Headquarter on Saturday for instructions, to
receive supply for the next week and to carry out odd jobs at the headquarters station.

27.1.7 Painting register Each SE/JE must maintain a painting register, one page or more
being allotted to each equipment on his section. Record of the painting work done
with dates of commencing and completing the work must be regularly entered in this
register.

27.1.8 Inspection

(a) Each SE/JE must see that the painters are making satisfactory progress and that the
painting work is in accordance with the instructions.

(b) Each DSTE shall see that the painting programme is strictly adhered to and that it is
completed in due time. He shall, during the course of his inspection, also see that all
the equipment and apparatus is kept properly painted in accordance with the
instructions.


27.2 SECTION B- GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

27.2.1 Precautions

(a) Paints shall be stored in a cool dry place away from flame or naked light.

(b) All containers should be kept securely closed when not in use to avoid loss of
material due to skinning and contamination. Paints, especially quick drying paints,
shall not be left open to the atmosphere.

27.2.2 Mixing of paints

(a) Paints from pigments and pastes must be prepared in accordance with standard
specifications.

(b) Linseed oil turpentine shall not be added to ready mixed paints. Mixing of kerosene
with paints is forbidden.


27.2.3 Painting of steel works

(a) The surface of metal should be clean and free from dirt, scale, deteriorated old paint
and rust and should be preferably dry before application of paint. Painting should
be done preferably during dry weather.

(b) For a new steel work, 3 coats of paints shall be applied. After the first two coats of
an approved primer, the third paint of the specific colour and quality shall be
applied. When repainting a structure, if the old paint does not show any signs of
blistering, scaling or cracking, it need not be scraped off. It may be used as a
foundation for the new coat.

(c) When there are patches of blistering, scaling or cracking, these patches should be
cleaned down to the steel and treated in a manner as recommended for a new
structure.

(d) The surface of metal should be cleaned by scrapping, chipping or scrubbing with
brickbats. No chemical of any kind must be used. Old paint may be burnt, if
necessary, and then scrapped off.

(e) Paint should be applied with brushes and spread evenly, smoothly and as thin as
possible. Rags or waste cotton should not be used for the application of paint.

(f) Brushes should be thoroughly cleaned in proper driers after use.


27.3 SECTION -C PAINTING OF MICROWAVE TOWERS

(a) Microwave Towers are to be painted as per requirement of Civil Aviation
Regulations.
(b) Repainting of Towers should preferably be done every five years or earlier
depending on the conditions of the paints and climatic condition of the place.
Before repainting work is undertaken, previous paint are to be scrapped off taking
care that galvanization of the members does not get affected.




CHAPTER - XXVIII


DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS


SECTION A - STANDARD DRAWINGS

28.1 INDIAN RAILWAY STANDARD DRAWINGS

(a) Indian Railway Standard Drawings designated by the code word IRS have been
issued by Director General, Research Designs and Standards Organisation, Lucknow. The
telecommunication drawings are marked IRS (TC) - 'TC' stands for 'Telecommunication'.
The particulars of the drawings and their reference numbers are detailed in an Index of Indian
Railway Standard Signal and Telecommunication Drawings including advanced drawings
IRS (TC) issued by Research Designs and Standards Organisation. This index shows all the
IRS (TC) drawings arranged alphabetically as well as serially in the order of their numbers.
Each drawing number is either prefixed with the letters 'TCA' or letters 'TC'.

(Note - 'TCA' stands for a telecommunication equipment assembly and 'TC' stands for
a part of a telecommunication equipment assembly.)

(b) New designs and drawings which are accepted for adoption as standards have the
word 'Advance' suffixed to their number, e.g. TC.50 (Advance) pending their final adoption
as Indian Railway Standard Drawing. For such drawings the manufacturers shall have a
sample approved by the purchaser before undertaking the bulk manufacture.

28.2 Supply of drawings

(a) Standard drawings - A set of all IRS (TC) drawings must be supplied to each
Sr.DSTE, ASTE and to each Inspector as required. IRS drawings should not be traced by the
Railways. Copies should be obtained from the Director General (S&T), Research Designs
and Standards Organisation, Ministry of Railways, Lucknow.

(b) In addition to the standard drawings, each Sr.DSTE/DSTE office must have
copies of the following :

(i) Disposition charts of overhead lines for control telephones, block instruments,
administrative trunks, telegraph and other railway circuits.

(ii) Jurisdictions of overhead line maintenance staff, telecommunication equipment
maintenance staff and signal and interlocking supervisors.

(iii) Charts for maintenance staff of underground telecommunication cables and
repeater stations.

(iv) Charts showing distribution of section and deputy control telephones.

(v) Charts of overhead wires and underground cables for local telephone exchanges.

(vi) Telecommunication cable route plan on electrified sections.

(vii) A chart indicating the exact location of the emergency telephone socket post and
the jurisdiction of maintenance staff.

(viii) Route plan of microwave/UHF/VHF networks.


(ix) Route plan /locations of emergency VHF stations.

(x) Route plan of train radio or wireless emergency communication system, if any.

(xi) Optic fibre cable route plan, if any.



SECTION - B SPECIFICATIONS

28.3 INDIAN RAILWAY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: Specifications for material
and equipment used for telecommunication purposes have been drawn out by Director
General, Research Designs and Standard Organisation, Ministry of Railways, Lucknow and
are titled 'Indian Railway Standard Specifications'. These specifications are issued under
fixed serial number, e.g., TC.12-66 : the letter TC denoting 'Telecommunication', the number
'12' representing the serial number of the specification and the final number '66' indicating the
year of original adoption as standard, or in the case of revision, the year of last revision.

28.4 Other specifications - Specifications issued by the British Standards Institution and the
Indian Standards Institution have also been adopted for items of equipment used for
telecommunication purposes for which no IRS specification exists.

28.5 Supply of specifications - Each Sr. DSTE/DSTE office should have a copy of all Indian
Railway Standard (Telecommunication) specifications. Copies of such British Standard and
Indian Standard Specifications that are generally required may also be kept.




28.6 Availability

(a) Indian Railway Standard Specifications are obtainable from Director General,
Research Design and Standards Organisation, Manak Nagar, Lucknow-226011.

(b) British standard and Indian Standard Specification are obtainable from the
Director, Bureau of Indian Standard, Manak Bhavan, 9-Bahadur Shah Jafar Marg, New Delhi
- 110 002.



SECTION C - MAINTENANCE OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

28.7 Folders - Standard drawing and specifications should be maintained in a block form
separately bound in suitable folders. New drawings and specifications should on receipt be
promptly added to the respective folders. Obsolete or cancelled drawings and specifications
must be destroyed. Torn or defaced drawings should be replaced.

28.8 Responsibility.

(a) Each Sr. Section Engineer shall be responsible for :

(i) The standard drawings are properly maintained and kept upto date in respect of
new drawings issued and old ones cancelled.

(ii) The staff working under him understand and carry out work in accordance with
standard drawings. Any mistake in drawings that may come to his notice should be promptly
intimated to the Sr. DSTE/DSTE for arranging correction.


(b) Each Sr. DSTE/DSTE shall be responsible to see that:

(i) The standard drawings and specifications in his custody are kept upto date and that
the obsolete and cancelled ones are destroyed.

(ii) All SSEs /SEs /JEs keep their standard drawings upto date.

(iii) The staff properly understand and carry out work in accordance with standard
drawing.

(iv) Any mistake in the standard drawings and specification, which comes to his
notice, is promptly intimated to the CSTE for arranging correction.



SECTION D - ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA AND ACCOUNTAL

28.9 Addenda and Corrigenda

(a) British Standard Specifications - British Standard Year Book is published by the
British Standards Institution, Victoria Street, London SW1. It contains a list of upto date
British Standards in numerical order and also gives a brief description of each.

(b) Indian Standard Specifications - The ISI Hand Book of publications contains upto
date list of Indian Standards and is available from the Director, Bureau of Indian Standard,
Bahadur Shah Jafar Marg, New Delhi-110 002.

(c) Standard Drawings - Railway should publish list of standard drawings for the
information of the staff. Addenda and corrigenda slips should be issued to these lists
regularly once in six months incorporating particulars of drawings issued, modified or
cancelled.

28.10 Accountal of Standard Drawings and Specifications -

All Indian Railway Standard Drawings and specifications must be accounted for in
the same way as other books of reference.



SECTION E - INDIAN RAILWAY STANDARD EQUIPMENT

28.11 Indian Railway Standard Designs.

(a) Where Indian Railway Standard Designs exist, they should invariably be followed
for all new works and no modification of such designs should be introduced without the prior
approval of the Railway Board.

(b) Defects, if any, in standard designs noticed under service conditions or
modifications, which appear to be desirable should be brought to the notice of the Director
General, Research Designs and Standards Organisation, Ministry of Railway, Lucknow, for
examination in consultation with the telecommunication standard committee.

28.12 Requisitioning of materials.

(a) All materials and equipment must normally be indented in accordance with Indian
Railway Standard Drawings and Specifications. Indian Standard Specifications or British
Standard Specification should only be quoted for items for which an IRS Specification does
not exist.


(b) No alteration or modification to or divergence from IRS drawings shall be
permitted without the specific sanction in writing of the Director General, Research, Designs
and Standards Organisation, Ministry of Railways, Lucknow. In the case of deviations having
been decided upon before placing of an order whether direct or through the Director General,
Supplies & Disposals, the indenting authority concerned shall quote such sanction in the
order. When deviations are decided upon or desired after the placing of an order, the
necessary sanction shall be obtained in writing by the Inspectorate concerned in consultation
with the indenting authority.

(c) It shall be the responsibility of the DSTE, ASTE & SSE to see that reference of
correct drawings and specifications is given for all materials indented.



CHAPTER XXIX


BOOKS OF REFERENCE

29.1 BOOKS OF REFERENCE : Books of reference should be supplied to Officers,
Supervisors and Maintainers for their personal use, as well as for use in their offices.
A statement showing the various books and their distribution is at Annexure A. For
the officers, this list should be read in conjunction with Para 8.17 of Indian Railways
Signal Engineering Manual, Part 1 (1988 edition)

29.2 RESPONSIBILITY : All officials to whom books of reference have been
supplied shall be responsible for:

a. their safe custody and good order,
b. pasting all addenda and corrigenda slips promptly and seeing that these are up to
date to the last slip as notified from time to time, and
c. returning all books issued to them for personal use prior to retirement or
resignation or transfer from the railway service.

29.3 INSPECTION : Each Senior Divisional Signal & Telecommunication
Engineer/ Divisional Signal & Telecommunication Engineer shall make periodical checks to
see that Inspectors maintain their books of reference up to date and in good order. Each
Inspector shall, likewise, see that the staff under him maintain their books of reference up-to-
date and in good order.

29.4 ACCOUNTAL : All books of reference should be accounted for in the same way
as tools and plant items.
29.5 REPORTS OF TELECOMMUNICATION STANDARD COMMITTEE,
TECHNICAL PAPERS AND JOURNALS : Each Senior Divisional Signal &
Telecommunication Engineer / Divisional signal & Telecommunication Engineer
should arrange to have the under-mentioned technical literature in his office library :
a. Reports of Telecommunication Standards Committee Meetings.

b. Proceedings & Technical papers issued by Institution of Telecom Engineers,
India, Institute of Electronics & Telecommunication Engineers, Institution of
Railway Signal & Telecommunication Engineers.

c. All IRS Specifications pertaining to Telecommunication, relevant BSS, ISS &
DOT(TEC) specifications.

d. Quarterly Technical Bulletin and other technical papers on telecommunication
matters published by the Railway Board.

e. Technical books and journals of interest on telecommunications.

f. Copies of technical instructions and reports issued by RDSO on different items
of work relating to underground telecom cable installations, such as Technical
Instructions on balancing of VF cable, jointing of cables, installation of loading

coils, installation of VF repeater station equipment, cable laying practice for
optical fibre cables, testing of digital microwave equipments etc.,

29.6 RESPONSIBILITY OF DSTE : The Senior Divisional Signal & Telecommunication
Engineer / Divisional Signal & Telecommunication Engineer should encourage his
supervisors and other staff to study these reports, proceedings, papers and journals, so as to
enhance their knowledge and to keep themselves informed about the up-to-date
developments, methods and techniques in telecommunications. He should arrange to circulate
particulars of all new publications that are received from time to time for the information of
supervisors once every three months.



ANNEXURE -A
Para 29.1

STATEMENT SHWONG THE VARIOUS BOOKS OF REFERENCE AND
THEIR DISTRIBUTION AMONG STAFF

Item
No.
Publications Scale for

Office of Personal possession of

C
S
T
E

S
r
.
D
S
T
E
/
D
S
T
E

A
S
T
E

S
S
E
/
S
E
(
T
e
l
e
)

C
S
T
E

C
C
E

S
r
.
D
S
T
E
/
D
S
T
E

A
S
T
E

S
E
(
T
e
l
e
)

M
a
i
n
t
a
i
n
e
r

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1
0
11 12
1. Telecommunication Engineering
Manual
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2. General and Subsidiary Rules 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3. Stores Manual 1 - - 1 - - - - - -
4. Pass Manual 1 1 - 1 - - - - - -
5. Safety First Manual 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
6. Schedule of dimensions 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
7. Telegraph Code 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
8. Payment of wages act with
notifications as issued.
1 1 - 1 - - - - - -
9. The hours of employment
regulations with notifications as
issued.
1 1 - 1 - - - - - -
10. Working Time table & Appendix
thereto
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
11. Catalogue of Stores 1 1 1 1 - - - - - -
12. Accident Manual 1 1 - 1 - - - -
13. IRS Drawings(Telecom) 1 1 1 1 - - - - - -

14. IRS specifications (of telecom items) 1 1 1 - - - - - - -
15. Railway Standard Drawings 1 1 1 1 - - - - - -
16. Indian Telegraph Act 1 1 - 1 - - - - - -
17. Indian Government Railway Code
for Engineering Department
1 - - - - - - - - -
18. CCIR Documents of the plenary
assembly
1 - - - - - - - - -
19. CCITT documents of the plenary
assembly
1 - - - - - - - - -
20. Indian Electricity Act 1 - - - - - - - - -
21. Electric Supply Rules 1 - - - - - - - - -

********